recreation and wellness building addition &...

PROJECT MANUAL

Construction Specifications Project Number 60P775-15.5.10

Recreation and Wellness Building Addition & Renovation

For:

The Miller Center 120 Hardwood Drive

Lewisburg, PA 17837

Construction Documents Volume 2 of 2

26 September 2016

Prepared By:

Mid-Penn Engineering Corporation

2049 West Market Street Lewisburg, PA 17837

SECTION 21 05 00COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.2. Mechanical sleeve seals.3. Sleeves.4. Escutcheons.5. Grout.6. Fire-suppression demolition.7. Concrete bases.8. Supports and anchorages.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces,pipe chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavatedspaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.

B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupiedspaces and mechanical equipment rooms.

C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambienttemperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.

D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact bybuilding occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in chases.

E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions andphysical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examplesinclude installations within unheated shelters.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Welding certificates.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "StructuralWelding Code--Steel."

B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and PressureVessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved

and that certification is current.

Building Addition & Renovations for Common Work Results for Fire SuppressionThe Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 210500

1 of 5

C. Electrical Characteristics for Fire-Suppression Equipment: Equipment of higher electricalcharacteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing andconnecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. Ifminimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS

A. Refer to individual Division 21 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joiningmethods.

B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.

2.2 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Refer to individual Division 21 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.

B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximumthickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated.

C. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping systemmanufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B813.

E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series or BAg1, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12.

2.3 SLEEVES

A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with weldedlongitudinal joint.

B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.

C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends andintegral water-stop, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Includeclamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.

1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.

E. Molded PE: Reusable, PE, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth-outer surface with nailing flange forattaching to wooden forms.

2.4 ESCUTCHEONS

A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fitaround pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening.

Building Addition & Renovations for Common Work Results for Fire Suppression

The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 2105002 of 5

B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-platedfinish.

C. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw.

1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated and rough brass.

D. Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw.

1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated and rough brass.

2.5 GROUT

A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, non-shrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout.

1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, non-staining, noncorrosive, nongaseous,and recommended for interior and exterior applications.

2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 21 Sections specifying pipingsystems.

B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of pipingsystems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss,expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unlessdeviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms andservice areas.

D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at rightangles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicatedotherwise.

E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

G. Install piping at indicated slopes.

H. Install piping free of sags and bends.

I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

J. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operatingpressure.

L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.

Building Addition & Renovations for Common Work Results for Fire SuppressionThe Miller Center Recreation & Wellness 210500

3 of 5

and concrete floor and roof slabs.

N. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanicalsleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve forinstalling mechanical sleeve seals.

1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter.2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter.3. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for

pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve sealsand install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure platesthat cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

O. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors atpipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 07 Section"Penetration Firestopping" for materials.

P. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

Q. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-inrequirements.

3.2 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 21 Sections specifyingpiping systems.

B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end.Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-freesolder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.

E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter,using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.

F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threadsfull and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Joinpipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry sealthreading is specified.

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded ordamaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and weldingoperators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.

H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for serviceapplication. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.

Building Addition & Renovations for Common Work Results for Fire SuppressionThe Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 210500

4 of 5

3.3 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES

A. Refer to Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation tosupport and anchor fire-suppression materials and equipment.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.

END OF SECTION

Building Addition & Renovations for Common Work Results for Fire SuppressionThe Miller Center Renovations and Wellness 210500

5 of 5

Building Addition & Renovations for WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMSThe Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 211313 - 1

SECTION 21 13 13WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Pipes, fittings, and specialties.2. Fire-protection valves.3. Sprinklers.4. Alarm devices.5. Pressure gages.

1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS

A. Wet-Pipe Sprinkler System: Automatic sprinklers are attached to piping containing water and thatis connected to water supply through alarm valve. Water discharges immediately from sprinklerswhen they are opened. Sprinklers open when heat melts fusible link or destroys frangible device.Hose connections are included if indicated.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Standard-Pressure Piping System Component: Listed for 175-psig minimum working pressure.

B. Delegated Design: Design sprinkler system(s), including comprehensive engineering analysis by aqualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

1. Obtain most recent hydraulic data of the existing fire protection system. Contractor shallperform a flow test.

C. Sprinkler system design shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Margin of Safety for Available Water Flow and Pressure: 10 percent, including lossesthrough water-service piping, valves, and backflow preventers.

2. Sprinkler Occupancy Hazard Classifications:a. Building Service Areas: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.b. Electrical Equipment Rooms: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.c. General Storage Areas: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.d. Mechanical Equipment Rooms: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.e. Office and Public Areas: Light Hazard-Quick Response.

3. Minimum Density for Automatic-Sprinkler Piping Design:a. Light-Hazard Occupancy: 0.10 gpm over 1500-sq. ft. area.b. Ordinary-Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy: 0.15 gpm over 1500-sq. ft. area.

4. Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler: Per UL listing.5. Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler:

a. Office Spaces: 120 sq. ft., 225 sq. ft.b. Storage Areas: 130 sq. ft.c. Mechanical Equipment Rooms: 130 sq. ft.d. Electrical Equipment Rooms: 130 sq. ft.e. Other Areas: According to NFPA 13 recommendations unless otherwise indicated.

D. Seismic Performance: Sprinkler piping shall withstand the effects of earthquake motionsdetermined according to NFPA 13 and ASCE/SEI 7.


1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: For wet-pipe sprinkler systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, andattachments to other work.

1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For sprinkler systems indicated to comply with performancerequirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualifiedprofessional engineer responsible for their preparation.

D. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

E. Approved Sprinkler Piping Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 13, that havebeen approved by authorities having jurisdiction, including hydraulic calculations if applicable.

F. Welding certificates.

G. Field Test Reports and Certificates: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance withperformance requirements and as described in NFPA 13. Include "Contractor's Material and TestCertificate for Aboveground Piping."

H. Field quality-control reports.

I. Operation and maintenance data.


A. Installer Qualifications:

1. Installer's responsibilities include designing, fabricating, and installing sprinkler systems andproviding professional engineering services needed to assume engineering responsibility.Base calculations on results of fire-hydrant flow test.a. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of working plans, calculations, and field test

reports by a qualified professional engineer.

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and PressureVessel Code.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by aqualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

D. NFPA Standards: Sprinkler system equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and testingshall comply with the following:

1. NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, and fittingmaterials, and for joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.


2.2 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Standard Weight, Black-Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B. Pipe ends may befactory or field formed to match joining method.

B. Schedule 30, Black-Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135; ASTM A 795/A 795M, Type E; or ASME B36.10M,wrought steel; with wall thickness not less than Schedule 30 and not more than Schedule 40. Pipeends may be factory or field formed to match joining method.

C. Thinwall Black-Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135 or ASTM A 795/A 795M, threadable, with wall thicknessless than Schedule 30 and equal to or greater than Schedule 10. Pipe ends may be factory or fieldformed to match joining method.

D. Black-Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard-weight, seamlesssteel pipe with threaded ends.

E. Uncoated, Steel Couplings: ASTM A 865, threaded.

F. Uncoated, Gray-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125, standard pattern.

G. Malleable- or Ductile-Iron Unions: UL 860.

H. Cast-Iron Flanges: ASME 16.1, Class 125.

I. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, Class 150.

J. Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M and ASME B16.9.

K. Grooved-Joint, Steel-Pipe Appurtenances:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of thefollowing:a. Anvil International, Inc.b. Corcoran Piping System Co.c. National Fittings, Inc.d. Shurjoint Piping Products.e. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.f. Victaulic Company.

2. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum.3. Uncoated, Grooved-End Fittings for Steel Piping: ASTM A 47/A 47M, malleable-iron casting

or ASTM A 536, ductile-iron casting; with dimensions matching steel pipe.4. Grooved-End-Pipe Couplings for Steel Piping: AWWA C606 and UL 213, rigid pattern,

unless otherwise indicated, for steel-pipe dimensions. Include ferrous housing sections,EPDM-rubber gasket, and bolts and nuts.

L. Steel Pressure-Seal Fittings: UL 213, FM-approved, 175-psig pressure rating with steel housing,rubber O-rings, and pipe stop; for use with fitting manufacturers' pressure-seal tools.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of thefollowing:a. Victaulic Company.

2.3 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS

A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick or ASME B16.21,nonmetallic and asbestos free.


1. Class 125, Cast-Iron Flat-Face Flanges: Full-face gaskets.

B. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.

C. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12M/D10.12 for welding materials appropriate forwall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

2.4 SPRINKLER SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS

A. Branch Outlet Fittings:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of thefollowing:a. Anvil International, Inc.b. National Fittings, Inc.c. Shurjoint Piping Products.d. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.e. Victaulic Company.

2. Standard: UL 213.3. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum.4. Body Material: Ductile-iron housing with EPDM seals and bolts and nuts.5. Type: Mechanical-T and -cross fittings.6. Configurations: Snap-on and strapless, ductile-iron housing with branch outlets.7. Size: Of dimension to fit onto sprinkler main and with outlet connections as required to

match connected branch piping.8. Branch Outlets: Grooved, plain-end pipe, or threaded.

B. Adjustable Drop Nipples:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of thefollowing:a. CECA, LLC.b. Corcoran Piping System Co.c. Merit Manufacturing; a division of Anvil International, Inc.

2. Standard: UL 1474.3. Pressure Rating: 250 psig minimum.4. Body Material: Steel pipe with EPDM-rubber O-ring seals.5. Size: Same as connected piping.6. Length: Adjustable.7. Inlet and Outlet: Threaded.

2.5 SPRINKLERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. AFAC Inc.2. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation.3. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.4. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.5. Venus Fire Protection Ltd.6. Victaulic Company.7. Viking Corporation.

B. General Requirements:

1. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing or "Approval Guide," publishedby FM Global, listing.


2. Pressure Rating for Automatic Sprinklers: 175 psig minimum.

C. Automatic Sprinklers with Heat-Responsive Element:

1. Early-Suppression, Fast-Response Applications: UL 1767.2. Nonresidential Applications: UL 199.3. Characteristics: Nominal 1/2-inch orifice with Discharge Coefficient K of 5.6, and for

"Ordinary" temperature classification rating unless otherwise indicated or required byapplication.

4. All pendent sprinklers mounted in ceilings shall be fully concealed type.

D. Sprinkler Finishes:

1. Concealed plates: Painted.2. Exposed sprinklers: Chrome.

E. Sprinkler Escutcheons: Materials, types, and finishes for the following sprinkler mountingapplications. Escutcheons for concealed, flush, and recessed-type sprinklers are specified withsprinklers.

F. Sprinkler Guards:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of thefollowing:a. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.b. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.c. Victaulic Company.d. Viking Corporation.

2. Standard: UL 199.3. Type: Wire cage with fastening device for attaching to sprinkler.

2.6 ESCUTCHEONS

A. General: Manufactured ceiling, floor, and wall escutcheons and floor plates.

B. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Escutcheons: Polished chrome-plated or rough-brass finish with set-screws.

C. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Escutcheons: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with chrome-plated finish.

D. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Escutcheons: Chrome-plated finish with set-screw or spring clips.

E. Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Escutcheons: Polished chrome-plated or rough-brass finish withconcealed hinge and set-screw.

F. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Escutcheons: Chrome-plated finish with concealed, exposed-rivethinge, set-screw, or spring clips.

G. One-Piece Floor Plates: Cast-iron flange with holes for fasteners.

H. Split-Casting Floor Plates: Cast brass with concealed hinge.

2.7 SLEEVES

A. Cast-Iron Wall Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated of cast iron and equivalent to ductile-iron pressurepipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.


B. Galvanized-Steel-Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with weldedlongitudinal joint.

C. Molded-PE Sleeves: Reusable, PE, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth outer surface with nailingflange for attaching to wooden forms.

D. Molded-PVC Sleeves: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

E. PVC-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.

F. Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, standard weight, zinc coated, plainends.

G. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Includeclamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.

1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set-screws.

2.8 SLEEVE SEALS


1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.2. Calpico, Inc.3. Metraflex, Inc.4. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

B. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular spacebetween pipe and sleeve.

1. Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber or NBR interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe.Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

2. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel.3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to

sealing elements.

2.9 GROUT

A. Standard: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, posthardening and volume adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cementgrout.

B. Characteristics: Nonshrink, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.

C. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general locationand arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated, as far as practical.

1. Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval from authoritieshaving jurisdiction. File written approval with Architect before deviating from approvedworking plans.


B. Piping Standard: Comply with requirements for installation of sprinkler piping in NFPA 13.

C. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devicematerials and installation in NFPA 13.

D. Use listed fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions inpipe sizes.

E. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves, apparatus, andequipment having NPS 2-1/2 and larger end connections.

F. Install hangers and supports for sprinkler system piping according to NFPA 13. Comply withrequirements for hanger materials in NFPA 13.

G. Fill sprinkler system piping with water.

3.2 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Install couplings, flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and special fittings thathave finish and pressure ratings same as or higher than system's pressure rating for abovegroundapplications unless otherwise indicated.


C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings beforeassembly.

D. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable for waterservice. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9.

E. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threadsfull and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Joinpipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or

damaged.

F. Steel-Piping, Pressure-Sealed Joints: Join lightwall steel pipe and steel pressure-seal fittings withtools recommended by fitting manufacturer.

G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12M/D10.12, using qualified processesand welding operators according to "Quality Assurance" Article.1. Shop weld pipe joints where welded piping is indicated. Do not use welded joints for

galvanized-steel pipe.

H. Steel-Piping, Cut-Grooved Joints: Cut square-edge groove in end of pipe according to AWWAC606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipe and grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe joints.

I. Steel-Piping, Roll-Grooved Joints: Roll rounded-edge groove in end of pipe according to AWWAC606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipe and grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe grooved joints.

J. Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of bothpiping systems.


3.3 VALVE AND SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION

A. Install listed fire-protection valves, trim and drain valves, specialty valves and trim, controls, andspecialties according to NFPA 13 and authorities having jurisdiction.

3.4 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION

A. Install sprinklers in suspended ceilings in center of narrow dimension of acoustical ceiling panels.

3.5 ESCUTCHEON INSTALLATION

A. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.

B. Escutcheons for New Piping:

1. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One piece, deep pattern.2. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One piece, stamped steel

with set-screw or spring clips.3. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One piece or split plate, stamped

steel with set-screw.4. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One piece, stamped steel with set-screw or

spring clips.5. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One piece, stamped steel with set-screw or spring clips.6. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece floor plate.

3.6 SLEEVE INSTALLATION

A. General Requirements: Install sleeves for pipes and tubes passing through penetrations in floors,partitions, roofs, and walls.

B. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.

C. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves.

D. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

E. Install sleeves in new partitions, slabs, and walls as they are built.

F. For interior wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation usingjoint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements for jointsealants in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

G. For exterior wall penetrations above grade, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe usingjoint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements for jointsealants in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

H. For exterior wall penetrations below grade, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe usingsleeve seals.

I. Seal space outside of sleeves in concrete slabs and walls with grout.

J. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide [1/4-inch] <Insert dimension> annular clear spacebetween sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation unless otherwise indicated.

K. Install sleeve materials according to the following applications:


1. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Gypsum-Board Partitions:a. Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves for pipes smaller than NPS 6.b. Exception: Sleeves are not required for water-supply tubes and waste pipes for

individual plumbing fixtures if escutcheons will cover openings.2. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Interior Concrete Walls:

a. Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves for pipes smaller than NPS 6.

L. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors atpipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements forfirestop materials and installations in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

3.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements in NFPA 13.

3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Leak Test: After installation, charge systems and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest untilno leaks exist.

2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls andequipment.

3. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler systems according to NFPA 13, "Systems Acceptance"Chapter.

C. Sprinkler piping system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.9 CLEANING

A. Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers.

B. Remove and replace sprinklers with paint other than factory finish.

3.10 PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Wet-pipe sprinkler system, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be one of the following:

1. Standard-weight or Schedule 30, black-steel pipe with threaded ends; uncoated, gray-ironthreaded fittings; and threaded joints.

2. Standard-weight or Schedule 30, black-steel pipe with cut- or roll-grooved ends; uncoated,grooved-end fittings for steel piping; grooved-end-pipe couplings for steel piping; andgrooved joints.

3. Standard-weight or Schedule 30, black-steel pipe with plain ends; steel welding fittings; andwelded joints.

4. Thinwall black-steel pipe with roll-grooved ends; uncoated, grooved-end fittings for steelpiping; grooved-end-pipe couplings for steel piping; and grooved joints.

5. Thinwall black-steel pipe with plain ends; welding fittings; and welded joints.

3.11 SPRINKLER SCHEDULE

A. Use sprinkler types in subparagraphs below for the following applications:


1. Rooms without Ceilings: Upright sprinklers.2. Rooms with Suspended Ceilings: Concealed sprinklers.3. Wall Mounting: Sidewall sprinklers.

4. Special Applications: quick-response sprinklers where indicated.

B. Provide sprinkler types in subparagraphs below with finishes indicated.

1. Concealed Sprinklers: Rough brass, with factory-painted white cover plate.2. Upright Sprinklers: Chrome plated in finished spaces exposed to view; rough bronze in

unfinished spaces not exposed to view; wax coated where exposed to acids, chemicals, orother corrosive fumes.

END OF SECTION

Building Addition & Renovations for Common Work Results for PlumbingThe Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 220500 - 1

SECTION 22 05 00COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditionsand Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.2. Transition fittings.3. Dielectric fittings.4. Mechanical sleeve seals.5. Sleeves.6. Escutcheons.7. Grout.8. Plumbing demolition.9. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections.10. Painting and finishing.11. Concrete bases.12. Supports and anchorages.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces,pipe chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavatedspaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.

B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupiedspaces and mechanical equipment rooms.

C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambienttemperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.

D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact bybuilding occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in chases.

E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions andphysical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examplesinclude installations within unheated shelters.

F. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:

1. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.2. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic.3. PE: Polyethylene plastic.4. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

G. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials:

1. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.2. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.


1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Transition fittings.2. Dielectric fittings.3. Mechanical sleeve seals.4. Escutcheons.

B. Welding certificates.


A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "StructuralWelding Code--Steel."

B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and PressureVessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved

and that certification is current.

C. Electrical Characteristics for Plumbing Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristicsmay be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connectingelectrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimumenergy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping,storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, andmoisture.

B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress ofconstruction, to allow for plumbing installations.

B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concreteand other structural components as they are constructed.

C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for plumbing items requiring access that areconcealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 08 Section"Access Doors and Frames."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirementsapply for product selection:


1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offeringproducts that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, themanufacturers specified.

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by themanufacturers specified.

2.2 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS

A. Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joiningmethods.




B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping systemcontents.

1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unlessthickness or specific material is indicated.a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges.b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.

2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-face orring type, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTMB 813.

E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing,unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping, unlessotherwise indicated.

F. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wallthickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

2.4 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder-joint,plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.

B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.

C. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working pressure at180 deg F.

1. Manufacturers:a. Capitol Manufacturing Co.b. Central Plastics Company.c. Eclipse, Inc.d. Epco Sales, Inc.e. Hart Industries, International, Inc.f. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.g. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div.


D. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300-psig minimumworking pressure as required to suit system pressures.

1. Manufacturers:a. Capitol Manufacturing Co.b. Central Plastics Company.c. Epco Sales, Inc.d. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

E. Dielectric-Flange Kits: Companion-flange assembly for field assembly. Include flanges, full-face- orring-type neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic washers,and steel backing washers.

1. Manufacturers:a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.b. Calpico, Inc.c. Central Plastics Company.d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

2. Separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts shall have 150- or 300-psig minimumworking pressure where required to suit system pressures.

F. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining;threaded ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.

1. Manufacturers:a. Calpico, Inc.b. Lochinvar Corp.

G. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain,threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.

1. Manufacturers:a. Perfection Corp.b. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co., Inc.d. Victaulic Co. of America.

2.5 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS

A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular spacebetween pipe and sleeve.

1. Manufacturers:a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.b. Calpico, Inc.c. Metraflex Co.d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type andnumber required for pipe material and size of pipe.

3. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. Include two for each sealing element.4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length required

to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.

2.6 SLEEVES

A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded


longitudinal joint.

B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.

C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain endsand integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.


1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.

2.7 ESCUTCHEONS

A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fitaround pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening.

B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-plated finish.

C. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw.

1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated.

D. Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw.

1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated.

E. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With set screw or spring clips and chrome-plated finish.

F. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With concealed hinge, set screw or spring clips, and chrome-plated finish.

G. One-Piece, Floor-Plate Type: Cast-iron floor plate.

H. Split-Casting, Floor-Plate Type: Cast brass with concealed hinge and set screw.

2.8 GROUT

A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout.

1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous,and recommended for interior and exterior applications.

2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifying pipingsystems.

B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of pipingsystems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss,expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless


deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment roomsand service areas.

D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at rightangles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicatedotherwise.

E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

G. Install piping at indicated slopes.

H. Install piping free of sags and bends.

I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

J. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operatingpressure.

L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the following:

1. New Piping:a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type.b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.c. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type with spring clips.d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-

brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.f. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, stamped-

steel type.f. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece or split-casting,

cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.g. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel

type or split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge and set screw.h. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished

chrome-plated finish.i. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type with

concealed hinge and set screw or spring clips.j. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass type.k. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped-steel type with set screw or

spring clips.l. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, floor-plate type.

2. Existing Piping: Use the following:a. Chrome-Plated Piping: Split-casting, cast-brass type with chrome-plated finish.b. Insulated Piping: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge and spring clips.c. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-casting, cast-

brass type with chrome-plated finish.d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-plate, stamped-

steel type with concealed hinge and spring clips.e. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-casting, cast-brass type

with chrome-plated finish.f. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-plate, stamped-steel

type with concealed hinge and set screw.


g. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: Split-casting, cast-brass type with polishedchrome-plated finish.

h. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: Split-plate, stamped-steel type withconcealed hinge and set screw or spring clips.

i. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: Split-casting, cast-brass type.j. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with set screw or

spring clips.k. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: Split-casting, floor-plate type.

M. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.

N. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves.

O. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor and roofslabs.

P. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions,and concrete floor slabs.

1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other

wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings belowfloor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.

2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed.3. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve

and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials:a. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6.b. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 and larger, penetrating gypsum-board

partitions.c. Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing.

Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe toextend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor level. Refer to Division 07 Section"Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing.1) Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with grout.

4. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe orpipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Refer toDivision 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation.

Q. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors atpipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 07 Section"Penetration Firestopping" for materials.

R. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

S. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-inrequirements.


A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifyingpiping systems.


C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.


D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end.Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-freesolder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.

E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter,using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.

F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threadsfull and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Joinpipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry sealthreading is specified.

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded ordamaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and weldingoperators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.

H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for serviceapplication. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.

3.3 PIPING CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection toeach piece of equipment.

2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at finalconnection to each piece of equipment.

3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials ofdissimilar metals.

4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materialsof dissimilar metals.

3.4 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are notindicated.

B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems andcomponents in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install plumbing equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement ofcomponents. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to otherinstallations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.

D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.

3.5 PAINTING

A. Painting of plumbing systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 09 Sections"Interior Painting" and "Exterior Painting."

B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials andprocedures to match original factory finish.


3.6 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES

A. Refer to Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation tosupport and anchor plumbing materials and equipment.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.

END OF SECTION

Building Addition & Renovations for Expansion Fitting & Loops for PlumbingThe Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 220516 - 1

SECTION 22 05 16EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. The installing contractor for all piping systems shall be responsible to design, furnish andinstall expansion compensating devices, guides and anchors as required to maintainflexibility in piping systems in order to prevent undue stresses on piping and buildingstructure. This shall include domestic hot water piping.

B. This Section includes pipe expansion fittings and loops for mechanical piping systems, and

the following:1. Metal-bellows expansion joints.

2. Expansion compensators.3. Rubber expansion joints.

4. Flexible-hose expansion joints.5. Slip expansion joints.

6. Flexible ball joints.7. Pipe bends and loops.

8. Guides and anchors.


A. Compatibility: Products suitable for piping system fluids, materials, working pressures, and

temperatures.

B. Capability: Absorb 200 percent of maximum piping expansion between anchors.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of expansion fitting indicated.

B. Product Data for Credits IEQ 4.1 and IEQ 4.2: For piping touchup paints, and anyadhesives and sealants, certify each interior field-applied product meets the VOC limitsspecified in Section 01 81 13.

C. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.

1. Design Calculations: For thermal expansion of piping systems and selection and

design of expansion fittings and loops.2. Anchor Details: Detail fabrication of each indicated. Show dimensions and methods of

assembly.

3. Alignment Guide Details: Detail field assembly and anchorage.


D. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel.

E. Schedule: Indicate manufacturer's number, size, location, and features for each expansionfitting and loop.


A. Engineering Responsibility: Design and preparation of Shop Drawings and calculations for

expansion fittings and loops by a qualified professional engineer.

1. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified

to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing

engineering services of the kind indicated.

Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of expansion

fittings and loops that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design,

and extent.

B. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel

Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. Metal-Bellows Expansion Joints:

a. Adsco Manufacturing Corp.b. Anamet, Inc.c. Badger Industries, Inc.

d. Expansion Joint Systems, Inc.e. Flexicraft Industries.

f. Flex-Weld, Inc.

g. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.

h. Metraflex Co.

i. Pathway Bellows, Inc.

j. Piping Technology & Products, Inc.

k. Proco Products, Inc.l. Senior Flexonics, Inc.; Expansion Joint Div.

m. Wahlco Engineered Products, Inc.2. Expansion Compensators:

a. Adsco Manufacturing Corp.

b. Flexicraft Industries.c. Flex-Weld, Inc.

d. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.e. Metraflex Co.

f. Senior Flexonics, Inc.; Expansion Joint Div.3. Rubber Expansion Joints:

a. Flexicraft Industries.

b. Flex-Weld, Inc.


c. Garlock, Inc.

d. General Rubber Corp.e. Mercer Rubber Co.

f. Metraflex Co.

g. MG Piping Products Co.h. Proco Products, Inc.

i. Senior Flexonics, Inc.; Expansion Joint Div.j. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.

4. Slip Expansion Joints:

a. Adsco Manufacturing Corp.b. Advanced Thermal Systems, Inc.

c. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.5. Guides:

a. Adsco Manufacturing Corp.

b. Advanced Thermal Systems, Inc.c. B-Line Systems, Inc.

d. Flex-Weld, Inc.e. Grinnell Corp.

f. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.g. Metraflex Co.

2.2 PACKLESS EXPANSION JOINTS

A. Metal-Bellows Expansion Joints: 175-psig minimum pressure rating, with end fittings andexternal tie rods for limiting maximum travel, and flanged-end connections, unless otherwiseindicated.1. Configuration: Single- and double-bellows type, with base, unless otherwise indicated.2. Joints for Copper Piping: Two-ply, phosphor-bronze bellows and brass shrouds.

3. Joints for Steel Piping: Two-ply, stainless-steel bellows and carbon-steel shroud.

B. Expansion Compensators: 175-psig minimum pressure rating, with internal guides,

antitorque device, and removable end clip for positioning.

1. End Connections for NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded.

2. End Connections for NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged.

3. Joints for Copper Piping: Two-ply, phosphor-bronze bellows and brass shroud.4. Joints for Steel Piping: Two-ply, stainless-steel bellows and carbon-steel shroud.

C. Rubber Expansion Joints: ASTM F 1123, fabric-reinforced butyl rubber, and pressure rated

for 175 psig at 240 deg F minimum.

1. Configuration: Full-faced, integral, steel-flanged-end connections; external control

rods; and steel retaining rings drilled to match flange bolt holes.

2. Type: Double sphere.

D. Flexible-Hose Expansion Joints: Manufactured assembly with two flexible-metal- hose legsjoined by long-radius 180-degree return bend with inlet and outlet elbow fittings,corrugated-metal inner hoses, and braided outer sheaths.1. Joints for Copper Piping: Copper fittings with solder-joint end connections.

a. NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze hoses and single-braid bronze sheaths with 450 psig

at 70 deg F and 340 psig at 450 deg F minimum pressure ratings.

b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Stainless-steel hoses and single-braid, stainless-steel

sheaths with 300 psig at 70 deg F and 225 psig at 450 deg F minimum pressure


ratings.

2. Joints for Steel Piping: Carbon-steel fittings.

a. End Connections for NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded.

b. End Connections for NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged.

c. Joints for NPS 2 and Smaller: Stainless-steel hoses and single-braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 450 psig at 70 deg F and 325 psig at 600 deg F minimumpressure ratings.

d. Joints for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 6: Stainless-steel hoses and single-braid, stainless-

steel sheaths with 200 psig at 70 deg F and 145 psig at 600

deg F minimum pressure ratings.

e. Joints for NPS 8 to NPS 12: Stainless-steel hoses and single-braid, stainless-

steel sheaths with 125 psig at 70 deg F and 90 psig at 600 deg F minimum

pressure ratings.

2.3

A.

GUIDES

Steel, factory fabricated, with bolted two-section outer cylinder and base for

alignment of piping and two-section guiding spider for bolting to pipe.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

B. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.10 or ASTM A 183, steel, hex head.

C. Washers: ASTM F 844, steel, plain, flat washers.

D. Mechanical Fasteners: Insert-wedge-type stud with expansion plug anchor for use inhardened portland cement concrete, and tension and shear capacities appropriate forapplication.1. Stud: Threaded, zinc-coated carbon steel.2. Expansion Plug: Zinc-coated steel.

3. Washer and Nut: Zinc-coated steel.

E. Chemical Fasteners: Insert-type-stud bonding system anchor for use with hardenedportland cement concrete, and tension and shear capacities appropriate for application.1. Bonding Material: ASTM C 881, Type IV, Grade 3, two-component epoxy resin

suitable for surface temperature of hardened concrete where fastener is to be installed.

2. Stud: ASTM A 307, zinc-coated carbon steel with continuous thread on stud, unless

otherwise indicated.3. Washer and Nut: Zinc-coated steel.

F. Concrete: Portland cement mix, 3000 psi minimum. Refer to Division 03 Section "Cast-in-

Place Concrete" for formwork, reinforcement, and concrete.

G. Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, factory-mixed and -packaged nonshrink and nonmetallicgrout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.2. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.

3. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION

A. Expansion fittings, loops, anchors and guides shall be provided throughout entire domestichot water system to facilitate expansion and contraction. Shop drawings shall be providedindicating location, size and specification as required by pipe manufacturer.

3.2 EXPANSION FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install expansion fittings according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Install expansion fittings in sizes matching pipe size in which they are installed.

C. Align expansion fittings to avoid end-loading and torsional stress.

3.3

A.

PIPE BEND AND LOOP INSTALLATION

Install pipe bends and loops cold-sprung in tension or compression as required to

partly absorb tension or compression produced during anticipated change intemperature.

B. Attach pipe bends and loops to anchors.1. Steel Anchors: Attach by welding. Comply with ASME B31.9 and ASME Boiler

and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."2. Concrete Anchors: Attach by fasteners. Follow fastener manufacturer's written

instructions.

3.4 SWING CONNECTIONS

A. Connect risers and branch connections to mains with at least five pipe fittings, including

tee in main.

B. Connect risers and branch connections to terminal units with at least four pipe fittings,

including tee in riser.

3.5 GUIDE INSTALLATION

A. Install guides on piping adjoining expansion fittings and loops.

B. Attach guides to pipe and secure to building structure.

3.6 ANCHOR INSTALLATION

A. Install anchors at locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by ASMEB31.9 and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment.

B. Fabricate and install steel anchors by welding steel shapes, plates, and bars to piping andto structure. Comply with ASME B31.9 and AWS D1.1.

C. Construct concrete anchors of poured-in-place concrete of dimensions indicated and


include embedded fasteners.

D. Install pipe anchors according to expansion fitting manufacturer's written instructions if

expansion fittings are indicated.

E. Use grout to form flat bearing surfaces for expansion fittings, guides, and anchors installed

on or in concrete.

3.7 PAINTING

A. Touching Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, andabraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 09 Section"Painting."

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and applygalvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

END OF SECTION

Building Addition & Renovations for General-Duty Valves for Plumbing PipingThe Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 220523 - 1

SECTION 22 05 23GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Bronze ball valves.2. Bronze check valves.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 22 plumbing piping Sections for specialty valves applicable to those Sections only.2. Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for valve tags and

schedules.3. Division 33 water distribution piping Sections for general-duty and specialty valves for site

construction piping.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CWP: Cold working pressure.

B. EPDM: Ethylene propylene copolymer rubber.

C. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene, Buna-N, or nitrile rubber.

D. NRS: Nonrising stem.

E. OS&Y: Outside screw and yoke.

F. RS: Rising stem.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated.


A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from singlemanufacturer.

B. ASME Compliance:

1. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria.2. ASME B31.1 for power piping valves.3. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.


C. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable-water service.


A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:

1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends.3. Set ball open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.

B. Use the following precautions during storage:

1. Maintain valve end protection.2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew point temperature. If outdoor

storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.

C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not usehandwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES

A. Refer to drawings for applications of valves.

B. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than required for system pressures andtemperatures.

C. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.

D. Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2-inch stem extensions and the following features:

1. Ball Valves: With extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive material, andprotective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or disturbinginsulation.

E. Valve-End Connections:

1. Flanged: With flanges according to ASME B16.1 for iron valves.2. Grooved: With grooves according to AWWA C606.3. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18.4. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.

F. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.

2.2 BRONZE BALL VALVES

A. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of thefollowing:a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves.b. NIBCO INC.c. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Description:


a. Standard: MSS SP-110.b. SWP Rating: 150 psig.c. CWP Rating: 600 psig.d. Body Design: Two piece.e. Body Material: Bronze.f. Ends: Threaded.g. Seats: PTFE or TFE.h. Stem: Bronze.i. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.j. Port: Full.

2.3 BRONZE GATE VALVES

A. Class 125, NRS Bronze Gate Valves:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of thefollowing:a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division.b. Hammond Valve.c. NIBCO INC.d. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove specialpacking materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling.

B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats madeaccessible by such operations.

C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.

D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for propersize, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition issuitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.

E. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.

3.2 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service,maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.

B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.

C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.

D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service butbefore final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.


3.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following:

1. Shutoff Service: Ball valves.2. Pump-Discharge Check Valves:

a. NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze swing check valves with bronze or nonmetallic disc.

B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valveswith higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted.

C. Select valves, except wafer types, with the following end connections:

1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends except where solder-joint valve-endoption is indicated in valve schedules below.

2. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends except where threaded valve-endoption is indicated in valve schedules below.

3. For Copper Tubing, NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged ends.4. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends.5. For Steel Piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends except where threaded valve-end

option is indicated in valve schedules below.6. For Steel Piping, NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged ends.7. For Grooved-End Copper Tubing and Steel Piping: Valve ends may be grooved.

3.5 DOMESTIC, HOT- AND COLD-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller:

1. Bronze Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded ends.2. Ball Valves: One piece, full port, bronze with bronze trim.3. Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 125 bronze or nonmetallic disc.

END OF SECTION

Building Addition & Renovations for Hangers & Supports for Plumbing Piping & EquipmentThe Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 220529 - 1

SECTION 22 05 29

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and SupplementaryConditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes hangers and supports for mechanical system piping and equipment.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for materials for attaching hangers and supports

to building structure.

2. Division 21 Sections on fire-suppression piping for fire-suppression pipe hangers.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for the Valve and Fittings Industry.

B. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and

Supports."


A. Design channel support systems for piping to support multiple pipes capable of supporting

combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.

B. Design heavy-duty steel trapezes for piping to support multiple pipes capable of supporting


1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of pipe hanger, channel support system component, and thermal-

hanger shield insert indicated.

B. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.2: For piping touchup paints, certify each interior field- appliedpaint meets the VOC limits specified in Section 018113.

C. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and operators.


A. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel

Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

B. Engineering Responsibility: Design and calculations for each multiple pipe support,


trapeze, and seismic restraint by a qualified professional engineer.

1. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to

practice in jurisdiction where the Project is located and who is experienced in

providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as

those performed for installations of hangers and supports that are similar to those

indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


following:1. Pipe Hangers:

a. AAA Technology and Specialties Co., Inc.b. B-Line Systems, Inc.c. Carpenter & Patterson, Inc.d. Empire Tool & Manufacturing Co., Inc.

e. Globe Pipe Hanger Products, Inc.f. Grinnell Corp.g. GS Metals Corp.h. Michigan Hanger Co., Inc.i. National Pipe Hanger Corp.

j. PHD Manufacturing, Inc.k. PHS Industries, Inc.l. Piping Technology & Products, Inc.

2. Channel Support Systems:a. B-Line Systems, Inc.

b. Grinnell Corp.; Power-Strut Unit.

c. GS Metals Corp.

d. Michigan Hanger Co., Inc.; O-Strut Div.

e. National Pipe Hanger Corp.f. Thomas & Betts Corp.g. Unistrut Corp.h. Wesanco, Inc.

3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts:

a. Carpenter & Patterson, Inc.b. Michigan Hanger Co., Inc.c. PHS Industries, Inc.d. Pipe Shields, Inc.e. Rilco Manufacturing Co., Inc.f. Value Engineered Products, Inc.

4. Powder-Actuated Fastener Systems:

a. Gunnebo Fastening Corp.b. Hilti, Inc.c. ITW Ramset/Red Head.d. Masterset Fastening Systems, Inc.

2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Pipe Hangers, Supports, and Components: MSS SP-58, factory-fabricated components. Referto "Hanger and Support Applications" Article in Part 3 for where to use specific hanger andsupport types.


1. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: For piping and equipment that will not have field- applied

finish.2. Nonmetallic Coatings: On attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in

direct contact with copper tubing.

B. Channel Support Systems: MFMA-2, factory-fabricated components for field assembly.1. Coatings: Manufacturer’s standard finish, unless bare metal surfaces are indicated.

2. Nonmetallic Coatings: On attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are

in direct contact with copper tubing.

C. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: 100-psi minimum compressive-strength insulation, encased in

sheet metal shield.

1. Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type I cellular glass with vapor barrier or water-repellent-treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate with vapor barrier.

2. Material for Hot Piping: ASTM C 552, Type I cellular glass or water-repellent-

treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate.

3. For Trapeze or Clamped System: Insert and shield cover entire circumference of pipe.

4. For Clevis or Band Hanger: Insert and shield cover over lower 180 degrees of pipe.

5. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below

ambient air temperature.


A. Powder-Actuated Drive-Pin Fasteners: Powder-actuated-type, drive-pin attachments with pull-

out and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

B. Mechanical-Anchor Fasteners: Insert-type attachments with pull-out and shear capacities

appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

C. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars, black and galvanized.

D. Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, factory-mixed and -packaged, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry,

hydraulic-cement grout.1. Characteristics: Post hardening and volume adjusting; recommended for both

interior and exterior applications.2. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.3. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS

A. Specific hanger requirements are specified in Sections specifying equipment and systems.

B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in

piping system Specification Sections.

C. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified inpiping system Specification Sections, install the following types:1. Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or


insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of 120 to 450 deg F pipes, NPS 4

to NPS 16, requiring up to 4 inches of insulation.3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes,

NPS 3/4 to NPS 24, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation.4. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS

24, if little or no insulation is required.5. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to allow off-

center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.

6. Adjustable Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of

noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 8.7. Adjustable Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated stationary

pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.

8. Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of noninsulated stationary


9. Adjustable Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of noninsulated

stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 2.

10. Split Pipe-Ring with or without Turnbuckle-Adjustment Hangers (MSS Type 11): For

suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 8. Copper pipe rings shall

be used on copper pipe. Painted steel pipe rings are not approved for use.

11. Extension Hinged or Two-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of

noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 3.12. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipe, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.

13. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or

contraction.14. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel

pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.

15. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36, with

steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange and with U-bolt to retain pipe.

16. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for pipes,

NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36, if vertical adjustment is required, with steel pipe base stanchion

support and cast-iron floor flange.

D. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping systemSpecification Sections, install the following types:1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to

NPS 20.2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers,

NPS 3/4 to NPS 20, if longer ends are required for riser clamps.

E. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping

system Specification Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads.

2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.

3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings.

4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of

building attachments.

5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.

F. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping systemSpecification Sections, install the following types:1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend


pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-

joist construction to attach to top flange of structural shape.

3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams,

channels, or angles.

4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.

5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads

are considerable and rod sizes are large.6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.

7. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to

flange edge.

8. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams.

9. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel I-

beams for heavy loads.

10. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel I-

beams for heavy loads, with link extensions.

11. Malleable Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to

structural steel.12. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from

above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb.b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb.c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.

13. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.

14. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required.

15. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear

horizontal movement where head room is limited.

G. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping systemSpecification Sections, install the following types:1. Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with

insulation that matches adjoining insulation.2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended by manufacturer to prevent

crushing insulation.

3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe, 360-degree insert of high-

density, 100-psi minimum compressive-strength, water-repellent-treated calcium silicate

or cellular-glass pipe insulation, same thickness as adjoining insulation with vapor barrier

and encased in 360-degree sheet metal shield.

3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stressesfrom movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment. Support of piping and ductworksystems shall be distributed across the building structural system. Alternate hanger locationswhen multiple pipes are supported in one area to ensure single trusses are not independentlybearing the weight of multiple pipes in any one area. Additional structural support systems shallbe provided to distribute load when point loads exceed the rating of the building structuralsystem. All high point loads shall be submitted to the structural engineer for review andapproval. Provide hanger within 12” of all changes in direction.

B. Coordinate and follow mechanical support building attachment requirements of manufacturersof building structural systems. of vertical expansion bolts in holes drilled in plank is not


permitted. In general, the vertical rods shall extend up through the top of the plank and shall beattached with a bolt and steel plates sized per the requirements of the plank manufacturer forthe range of loads to be incurred. Furnish shop drawings of proposed attachment methodswhich have been reviewed and approved by manufacturer of precast concrete plank.

C. Support hangers from concrete inserts in poured slabs or beam clamps. Furnish, located andset such inserts. Construct inserts of malleable iron or pressed steel with space for rods of allsizes. Install inserts for pipes 3” and larger in size with a reinforcing rod 5/8” in diameter runthrough a slot in the insert specifically provided for this purpose.

D. If piping is required in a space where no inserts have been provided, drill holes in the slab orplank (subject to structural engineer’s prior approval) and provide rods and hanger attached toan approved fishplate or install 2 Star No. 7000 shields but the hanger spacing definedhereinbefore to be reduced to 5 feet. The carrying capacity and size of each shield to becalculated on the basis of the spacing indicated above the minimum size to be 3/8 inch. Installadditional shields of the same size so that the number of hangers are of adequate size tosupport the loads which they carry. Shields may be used in concrete slabs only.

E. Regardless of the type of construction (i.e., concrete, concrete-deck-steel, concrete plank, woodor other variations) take particular care to support main lines and large and heavy pipes in anapproved manner, including the furnishing and installation of supplementary steel, if required.Supplementary steel shall be mill-rolled sections. Submit shop drawings, indicating supportmethods, point loadings to the building structure and hanger locations for review.

F. Pipe Hanger and Support Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89.

Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from

building structure.

G. Channel Support System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and support

together on field-assembled channel systems.1. Field assemble and install according to manufacturer's written instructions.

H. Heavy-Duty Steel Trapeze Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping

and support together on field-fabricated, heavy-duty trapezes.

1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or

install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual

pipe hangers.

2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being supported.

Weld steel according to AWS D-1.1.

I. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Spaceattachments within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-69. Install additionalattachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, and expansionjoints, and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed;fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

J. Install powder-actuated drive-pin fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completelycured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fastenersaccording to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual. Verify acceptability ofinstallation location with building structural engineer prior to use.

K. Install mechanical-anchor fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured.Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions. Verify acceptability ofinstallation location with building structural engineer prior to use.


L. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, andother accessories.

M. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of pipingsystems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action ofexpansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

N. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximumpipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," is not exceeded.

O. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following:1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.

a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through

insulation.

b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield

insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.

c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.9.

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39 protection saddles, if insulation without vapor barrier is

indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-

distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40 protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier.

Shields shall span arc of 180 degrees.


distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:

a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick.b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.c. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.d. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick.

e. NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick.5. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood inserts.6. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield.

7. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.

P. Copper hangers and supports shall be used with all copper piping.

3.3 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure above or to supportequipment above floor.

B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface.

3.4 METAL FABRICATION

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for heavy-duty steel trapezes and equipmentsupports.

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field-weld connections that cannot be

shop-welded because of shipping size limitations.


C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearanceand quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following:1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion

resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.

3. Remove welding flux immediately.

4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours

of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieveindicated slope of pipe.

3.6 PAINTING

A. Touching Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areasimmediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shoppainting.1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

B. Touching Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded

areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 09 Section "Painting."

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and applygalvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

END OF SECTION

Building Addition & Renovations for Vibration & Seismic Controls for PlumbingThe Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 220548 - 1

SECTION 22 05 48

VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this

Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:1. Isolation pads.2. Isolation mounts.3. Restrained elastomeric isolation mounts.4. Housed spring mounts.

5. Elastomeric hangers.6. Spring hangers.7. Spring hangers with vertical-limit stops.8. Pipe riser resilient supports.9. Resilient pipe guides.

10. Restraining braces and cables.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. IBC: International Building Code.

B. ICC-ES: ICC-Evaluation Service.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


1. Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration

isolation device.


C. Qualification Data: For professional engineer and testing agency.

D. Field quality-control test reports.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air-mounting systems to include in operation

and maintenance manuals.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience andcapability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a nationally recognized testing


laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable toauthorities having jurisdiction.

B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural

Welding Code - Steel."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATORS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of

the following:1. Ace Mountings Co., Inc.2. Amber/Booth Company, Inc.3. California Dynamics Corporation.4. Isolation Technology, Inc.5. Kinetics Noise Control.

6. Mason Industries.7. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc.8. Vibration Isolation.9. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.

B. Pads: Arranged in single or multiple layers of sufficient stiffness for uniform loadingover pad area, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized-steel baseplates, andfactory cut to sizes that match requirements of supported equipment.1. Resilient Material: Oil- and water-resistant neoprene.

C. Mounts: Double-deflection type, with molded, oil-resistant rubber, hermetically sealed

compressed fiberglass, or neoprene isolator elements with factory-drilled,

encapsulated top plate for bolting to equipment and with baseplate for bolting to

structure. Color-code or otherwise identify to indicate capacity range.

1. Materials: Cast-ductile-iron or welded steel housing containing two separate

and opposing, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene elements that prevent central

threaded element and attachment hardware from contacting the housing during

normal operation.2. Neoprene: Shock-absorbing materials compounded according to the standard

for bridge-bearing neoprene as defined by AASHTO.

D. Spring Isolators: Freestanding, laterally stable, open-spring isolators.

1. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of

the spring at rated load.

2. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.

3. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.

4. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed,

without deformation or failure.

5. Baseplates: Factory drilled for bolting to structure and bonded to 1/4-inch- thick,

rubber isolator pad attached to baseplate underside. Baseplates shall limit floor

load to 500 psig.6. Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and cap

screw to fasten and level equipment.


E. Spring Hangers: Combination coil-spring and elastomeric-insert hanger with spring andinsert in compression.1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for

a maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding

or reducing isolation efficiency.


the spring at rated load.3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.




6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel-washer-

reinforced cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of

frame.

7. Self-centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and

support spring coil.

F. Pipe Riser Resilient Support: All-directional, acoustical pipe anchor consisting of 2steel tubes separated by a minimum of 1/2-inch- thick neoprene. Include steel andneoprene vertical-limit stops arranged to prevent vertical travel in both directions.Design support for a maximum load on the isolation material of 500 psig and for equalresistance in all directions.

G. Resilient Pipe Guides: Telescopic arrangement of 2 steel tubes or post and sleevearrangement separated by a minimum of 1/2-inch- thick neoprene. Where clearancesare not readily visible, a factory-set guide height with a shear pin to allow verticalmotion due to pipe expansion and contraction shall be fitted. Shear pin shall beremovable and reinsertable to allow for selection of pipe movement. Guides shall becapable of motion to meet location requirements.

2.2 FACTORY FINISHES

A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic controldevices for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and otherconditions affecting performance.

B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual

locations before installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 APPLICATIONS

A. Multiple Pipe Supports: Secure pipes to trapeze member with clamps approved forapplication by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Include spring isolators on first four hangers on discharge pipe of booster pump.


3.3 VIBRATION-CONTROL DEVICE INSTALLATION

A. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing tostructure at flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of joists, or at structural membersas required by the structural engineer. Coordinate all attachments with manufacturer ofstructural system to ensure proper anchorage and support.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust isolators after piping system is at operating weight.

END OF SECTION

Building Addition & Renovations for Identification for Plumbing Piping & EquipmentThe Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 220553 - 1

SECTION 22 05 53IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following mechanical identification materials and their installation:1. Equipment markers.2. Equipment signs.3. Access panel and door markers.

4. Pipe markers.5. Duct markers.6. Valve tags.7. Valve schedules.8. Warning tags.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identificationmaterial and device.

C. Valve numbering scheme.

D. Valve Schedules: For each piping system. Furnish extra copies (in addition to mounted copies)

to include in maintenance manuals.


A. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME A13.1, "Scheme for the Identification of PipingSystems," for letter size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification devicesfor piping, unless otherwise required by the Owner.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of

surfaces where devices are to be applied.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.

C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.1 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION DEVICES

A. Equipment Markers: Engraved, color-coded laminated plastic. Include contact-type, permanentadhesive.1. Terminology: Match schedules as closely as possible.

2. Data:a. Name and plan code.b. Equipment service.

3. Size: 2-1/2 by 4 inches for control devices, dampers, and valves; 4-1/2 by 6 inches for

equipment.

B. Access Panel and Door Markers: 1/16-inch thick, engraved laminated plastic, with abbreviatedterms and numbers corresponding to identification. Provide 1/8-inch center hole for attachment.

1. Fasteners: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or contact-type, permanent adhesive.

2.2 PIPING IDENTIFICATION DEVICES

A. Manufactured Pipe Markers, General: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service,

and showing direction of flow.

1. Lettering: Use piping system terms indicated and abbreviate only as necessary for each

application length.2. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: Full-band pipe markers

extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location.

3. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches and Larger: Either full-band or strip-typepipe markers at least three times letter height and of length required for label.

4. Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions;

or as separate unit on each pipe marker to indicate direction of flow.

B. Pretensioned Pipe Markers: Precoiled semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference ofpipe and to attach to pipe without adhesive.

C. Shaped Pipe Markers: Preformed semirigid plastic formed to partially cover circumference ofpipe and to attach to pipe with mechanical fasteners that do not penetrate insulation vaporbarrier.

D. Self-Adhesive Pipe Markers: Plastic with pressure-sensitive, permanent-type, self- adhesiveback.

E. Plastic Tape: Continuously printed, vinyl tape at least 3 mils thick with pressure- sensitive,permanent-type, self-adhesive back.1. Width for Markers on Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: 3/4 inch

minimum.

2. Width for Markers on Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches or Larger: 1-1/2 inches

minimum.

2.3 DUCT IDENTIFICATION DEVICES

A. Duct Markers: Preprinted, color-coded plastic with pressure-sensitive, permanent-type, self-adhesive back. Include direction and quantity of airflow and duct service (such as supply,return, and exhaust). Include contact-type, permanent adhesive.

2.4 VALVE TAGS


A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-inch numbers, with numbering scheme approved by Architect. Provide 5/32- inch hole forfastener.1. Material: 0.032-inch thick brass.

2. Valve-Tag Fasteners: Brass wire-link or beaded chain; or S-hook.

2.5 VALVE SCHEDULES

A. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on standard-size bond paper. Tabulate valvenumber, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room orspace), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations foridentification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses. Provide in plasticsleeves located in 3-ring binder.

2.6 WARNING TAGS

A. Warning Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags; of plasticized card

stock with matte finish suitable for writing.1. Size: 3 by 5-1/4 inches minimum.2. Fasteners: Reinforced grommet and wire or string.

3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as DANGER, CAUTION, or DO NOT

OPERATE.4. Color: Yellow background with black lettering.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATIONS, GENERAL

A. Products specified are for applications referenced in other Division 22 Sections. If more thansingle-type material, device, or label is specified for listed applications, selection is Installer'soption.

3.2 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

A. Install and permanently fasten equipment nameplates on each major item of mechanicalequipment that does not have nameplate or has nameplate that is damaged or located wherenot easily visible. Locate nameplates where accessible and visible. Include nameplates for thefollowing general categories of equipment:1. Water heaters.2. Storage tanks.

3. Pumps.4. Mixing valves.5. Filters.

B. Install equipment signs with screws or permanent adhesive on or near each major item of

mechanical equipment. Locate signs where accessible and visible.1. Letter Size: Minimum 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24

inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger letteringfor greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two- thirds to three-fourths thesize of principal lettering.


2. Data: Distinguish among multiple units, indicate operational requirements, indicatesafety and emergency precautions, warn of hazards and improper operations, andidentify units.

C. Install access panel markers with screws on equipment access panels.

3.3 PIPING IDENTIFICATION

A. Install manufactured pipe markers indicating service on each piping system. Install with flow

indication arrows showing direction of flow.1. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: Pretensioned pipe markers. Use

size to ensure a tight fit.

2. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: Self-adhesive pipe markers.

Use color-coded, self-adhesive plastic tape, at least 3/4 inch wide, lapped at least 1-1/2

inches at both ends of pipe marker, and covering full circumference of pipe.3. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches and Larger: Shaped pipe markers.

Use size to match pipe and secure with fasteners.4. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches and Larger: Self-adhesive pipe markers.

Use color-coded, self-adhesive plastic tape, at least 1-1/2 inches wide, lapped at least 3inches at both ends of pipe marker, and covering full circumference of pipe.

B. Locate pipe markers and color bands where piping is exposed in finished spaces; machinerooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exteriornonconcealed locations as follows:1. Near each valve and control device.2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.

Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.

3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and nonaccessible enclosures.

4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed

piping.5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.

6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in

areas of congested piping and equipment.7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced markers.

3.4 DUCT IDENTIFICATION

A. Install duct markers with permanent adhesive on air ducts in the following color codes:1. Colors per PSU standards.2. Letter Size: Minimum 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches,

1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering forgreater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two- thirds to three-fourths the sizeof principal lettering.

B. Locate markers near points where ducts enter into concealed spaces and at maximum intervalsof 50 feet in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by removable ceiling system.

3.5 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves withinfactory-fabricated equipment units; plumbing fixture supply stops; shutoff valves; faucets;convenience and lawn-watering hose connections; and HVAC terminal devices and similar


roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.

B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and

with captions similar to those indicated in the following:1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape:

a. Domestic Hot, Cold, and Non-potable Water: 1-1/2 inches.b. Fire Protection: 1-1/2 inches.c. Gas: 1-1/2 inches.

2. Valve-Tag Color:a. Standard.

3. Letter Color:

a. White or black.

3.6 VALVE-SCHEDULE INSTALLATION

A. Mount valve schedule in plastic slip sheets located in the 3-ring binder.

3.7 WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items whererequired.

3.8 ADJUSTING

A. Relocate mechanical identification materials and devices that have become visually blocked by

other work.

3.9 CLEANING

A. Clean faces of mechanical identification devices and glass frames of valve schedules.

END OF SECTION

Building Addition & Renovations for Plumbing Equipment InsulationThe Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 220716 - 1

SECTION 22 07 16PLUMBING EQUIPMENT INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General andSupplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to thisSection.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes blanket, board, and block insulation; insulating cements; field-applied jackets; accessories and attachments; and sealing compounds.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and

field applied, if any), for each type of product indicated.

B. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities havingjurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance ofinsulation materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets with requirementsindicated. Include dates of tests.


A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed anapprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the U.S.Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing materials identical tothose specified in this Section according to ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspectingagency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacketmaterials and sealer and cement material containers with appropriate markings ofapplicable testing and inspecting agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread rating of 25 or less, and smoke-

developed rating of 50 or less.

2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread rating of 75 or less, and smoke-



A. Packaging: Ship insulation materials in containers marked by manufacturer withappropriate ASTM specification designation, type and grade, and maximum usetemperature.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate clearance requirements with equipment Installer for insulation application.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


the following:

1. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation:

a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.

b. Rubatex Corp.

2.2 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubbermaterials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type II for sheet materials.1. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

a. Low-Emitting Materials: For field applications that are inside the

weatherproofing system, use adhesives that comply with the limits for

VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D as

specified in Section 018113.

2. Ultraviolet-Protective Coating: As recommended by insulation manufacturer.

2.3 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Mastics: Materials recommended by insulation material manufacturer that are

compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation

and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials

that will adversely affect insulation application.

3.3 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Apply insulation materials, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer'swritten instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; and free of voidsthroughout the length of equipment.

B. Refer to schedules at the end of this Section for materials, forms, jackets, andthicknesses required for each equipment system.

C. Use accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Useaccessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket ineither the wet or dry state.


D. Apply multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

E. Seal joints and seams with vapor-retarder mastic on insulation indicated to receive a

vapor retarder.

F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

G. Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints

with adhesive recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.

H. Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical.

I. Apply insulation over fittings and specialties, with continuous thermal and vapor-

retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated.

J. Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated,seal ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer tomaintain vapor retarder.

K. Cut insulation according to manufacturer's written instructions to prevent compressing

insulation to less than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.

L. Insulate the following indoor equipment:1. Domestic hot-water storage tanks and expansion tanks, not factory insulated.

M. Omit insulation from the following:1. Vibration-control devices.

2. Testing agency labels and stamps.3. Nameplates and data plates.4. Manholes.5. Handholes.6. Cleanouts.

3.4 INDOOR TANK AND VESSEL INSULATION APPLICATION

A. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation Applications for Tanks and Vessels: Applyinsulation over entire surface of tanks and vessels according to the manufacturer'swritten instructions.

1. Apply 100 percent coverage of adhesive to surface with manufacturer’s

recommended adhesive.2. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints.

3.5 FINISHES

A. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two

coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.


A. Inspection: Perform the following field quality-control inspections, after installing

insulation materials, jackets, and finishes, to determine compliance with requirements:

1. Inspect pumps and tanks randomly selected by Architect.

2. Replace/repair damaged insulation sections where tears, abrasions or punctures


are visible.

B. Insulation applications will be considered defective if sample inspection revealsnoncompliance with requirements. Remove defective Work and replace with newmaterials according to these Specifications.

3.7 EQUIPMENT APPLICATIONS

A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are specified in schedules at the end of this

Section.

3.8 INDOOR TANK AND VESSEL INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE

A. Equipment: Air separators and expansion tanks, not factory insulated.1. Operating Temperature: 60 to 180 deg F.2. Insulation Material: Flexible elastomeric.3. Insulation Thickness: One ¾” layer.4. Finish: Manufacturer’s protective coating.

B. Equipment: Domestic hot-water storage tanks, not factory insulated.1. Operating Temperature: 55 to 140 deg F.2. Insulation Material: Flexible elastomeric.3. Insulation Thickness: Two ¾” layers.4. Finish: Manufacturer’s protective coating.

END OF SECTION

Building Addition & Renovations for Plumbing Pipe InsulationThe Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 220719 - 1

SECTION 22 07 19PLUMBING PIPE INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes preformed, rigid and flexible pipe insulation; insulating cements; field-

applied jackets; accessories and attachments; and sealing compounds.

B. Related Sections include the following:1. Division 07 Section "Firestopping" for firestopping materials and requirements for

penetrations through fire and smoke barriers.

2. Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe insulation shields and

protection saddles.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field

applied, if any), for each type of product indicated.

B. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities havingjurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulationmaterials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets with requirements indicated. Includedates of tests.


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing materials identical to thosespecified in this Section according to ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agencyacceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials andsealer and cement material containers with appropriate markings of applicable testing andinspecting agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread rating of 25 or less, and smoke- developed

rating of 50 or less.

2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread rating of 75 or less, and smoke- developed

rating of 150 or less.


A. Packaging: Ship insulation materials in containers marked by manufacturer with appropriateASTM specification designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Division22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."


B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for insulation application.

C. Coordinate installation and testing of steam or electric heat tracing.

1.7 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule insulation application after testing piping systems and, where required, after installingand testing heat-trace tape. Insulation application may begin on segments of piping that havesatisfactory test results.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of thefollowing:1. Mineral-Fiber Insulation:

a. CertainTeed Manson.b. Knauf FiberGlass GmbH.c. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp.d. Schuller International, Inc.


A. All insulation shall have a maximum conductivity of 0.26 Btu per inch/h-sqft-degree F.

B. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin complying with the

following:

1. Preformed Pipe Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 547, Type 1, with factory- applied, all-purpose, vapor-retarder jacket. U.L. 25/50 fire/smoke rating compliant.

2. Fire-Resistant Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C in the following classes and grades:a. Class 1, Grade A for bonding glass cloth and tape to unfaced glass-fiber

insulation, for sealing edges of glass-fiber insulation, and for bonding lagging

cloth to unfaced glass-fiber insulation.b. Class 2, Grade A for bonding glass-fiber insulation to metal surfaces.

3. Vapor-Retarder Mastics: Fire- and water-resistant, vapor-retarder mastic for indoor

applications. Comply with MIL-C-19565C, Type II.

4. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cements: Comply with ASTM C 195.

C. Prefabricated Thermal Insulating Fitting Covers: Comply with ASTM C 450 for dimensions used

in preforming insulation to cover valves, elbows, tees, and flanges.

2.3 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS

A. General: ASTM C 921, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Standard PVC Fitting Covers: Factory-fabricated fitting covers manufactured from 20- mil- thick,

high-impact, ultraviolet-resistant PVC. U.L. 25/50 smoke/fire rating compliant.

1. Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges,

reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P-trap and supply

covers for lavatories for the disabled.


2. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

a. Low Emitting Materials: For field applications that are inside the weatherproofing

system, use adhesives that comply with the limits for VOC content when calculated

according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D as specified in Section 018113.

2.4 ACCESSORIES AND ATTACHMENTS

A. Glass Cloth and Tape: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I for cloth and Type II for tape. Woven

glass-fiber fabrics, plain weave, presized a minimum of 8 oz./sq. yd..

1. Tape Width: 4 inches.

B. Bands: 3/4 inch wide, in one of the following materials compatible with jacket:1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304; 0.020 inch thick.2. Galvanized Steel: 0.005 inch thick.

3. Aluminum: 0.007 inch thick.4. Brass: 0.010 inch thick.5. Nickel-Copper Alloy: 0.005 inch thick.

2.5 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Mastics: Materials recommended by insulation material manufacturer that are compatible withinsulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other

conditions affecting performance of insulation application.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry pipe and fitting surfaces. Remove materials that will

adversely affect insulation application.


A. Apply insulation materials, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer's writteninstructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length ofpiping, including fittings, valves, and specialties.

B. Refer to schedules at the end of this Section for materials, forms, jackets, and thicknessesrequired for each piping system.

C. Use accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Useaccessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet ordry state.

D. Apply insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal pipe runs.


E. Apply multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.

G. Seal joints and seams with vapor-retarder mastic on insulation indicated to receive a vapor

retarder.

H. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

I. Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with

adhesive recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.

J. Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical.

K. Apply insulation over fittings, valves, and specialties, with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated. Refer to special instructions for applying insulationover fittings, valves, and specialties.

L. Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor retarder is indicated, seal penetrations in insulation at

hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-retarder mastic.

1. Apply insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.2. For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, extend insulation on

anchor legs at least 12 inches from point of attachment to pipe and taper insulation ends.Seal tapered ends with a compound recommended by the insulation materialmanufacturer to maintain vapor retarder.

3. Install insert materials and apply insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation

to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by the insulation

material manufacturer.4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over

jacket, arranged to protect the jacket from tear or puncture by the hanger, support, andshield.

M. Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, taperinsulation ends. Seal tapered ends with a compound recommended by the insulation materialmanufacturer to maintain vapor retarder.

N. Apply adhesives and mastics at the manufacturer's recommended coverage rate.

O. Apply insulation with integral jackets as follows:1. Pull jacket tight and smooth.2. Circumferential Joints: Cover with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as insulation

jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of

strip and spaced 4 inches o.c.3. Longitudinal Seams: Overlap jacket seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Apply insulation with

longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap.Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 4 inches o.c.

a. Exception: Do not staple longitudinal laps on insulation having a vapor retarder.

4. Vapor-Retarder Mastics: Where vapor retarders are indicated, apply mastic on seams

and joints and at ends adjacent to flanges, unions, valves, and fittings.

5. At penetrations in jackets for thermometers and pressure gages, fill and seal voids with

vapor-retarder mastic.


P. Exterior Wall Penetrations: For penetrations of below-grade exterior walls, terminate insulationflush with mechanical sleeve seal. Seal terminations with vapor-retarder mastic.

Q. Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through walls and floors.

R. Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through penetrations

of fire-rated walls and partitions.

1. Firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers are specified in Division 07 Section

"Firestopping".

S. Floor Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through floor assembly.

1. For insulation with vapor retarders, seal insulation with vapor-retarder mastic where floor

supports penetrate vapor retarder.

3.4 MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION APPLICATION

A. Apply insulation to straight pipes and tubes as follows:

1. Where vapor retarders are indicated, seal longitudinal seams and end joints with vapor-

retarder mastic. Apply vapor retarder to ends of insulation at intervals of 15 to 20 feet to

form a vapor retarder between pipe insulation segments.

2. For insulation with factory-applied jackets, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6

inches o.c.

3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets with vapor retarders, do not staple longitudinal

tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by the insulation material

manufacturer and seal with vapor-retarder mastic.

B. Apply insulation to flanges as follows:1. Apply preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.

2. Make width of insulation segment the same as overall width of the flange and bolts, plus

twice the thickness of the pipe insulation.

3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of

adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation.

4. Apply canvas jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlapping

seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints with vapor-retarder mastic.

C. Apply insulation to fittings and elbows as follows:1. Apply premolded insulation sections of the same material as straight segments of pipe

insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer’s written instructions.2. When premolded insulation elbows and fittings are not available, apply mitered sections

of pipe insulation, or glass-fiber blanket insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe

insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire, tape, or bands.3. Cover fittings with standard PVC fitting covers.4. Cover fittings with heavy PVC fitting covers. Overlap PVC covers on pipe insulation

jackets at least 1 inch at each end. Secure fitting covers with manufacturer's attachments

and accessories. Seal seams with tape and vapor-retarder mastic.

D. Apply insulation to valves and specialties as follows:

1. Apply premolded insulation sections of the same material as straight segments of pipeinsulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer’s written instructions.

2. When premolded insulation sections are not available, apply glass-fiber blanket insulationto valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve


operation without disturbing insulation. For check valves, arrange insulation for access tostrainer basket without disturbing insulation.

3. Apply insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.

4. Use preformed standard PVC fitting covers for valve sizes where available. Secure fitting

covers with manufacturer's attachments and accessories. Seal seams with tape and


5. Use preformed heavy PVC fitting covers for valve sizes where available. Secure fitting

covers with manufacturer's attachments and accessories. Seal seams with tape and


6. For larger sizes where PVC fitting covers are not available, seal insulation with canvas

jacket and sealing compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.

3.5 PIPING SYSTEM APPLICATIONS

A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are specified in schedules at the end of this Section.

B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not apply insulation to the followingsystems, materials, and equipment:1. Flexible connectors.

2. Vibration-control devices.3. Fire-suppression piping.4. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces, unless otherwise indicated.5. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings, unless potential for personnel injury.6. Air chambers, unions, strainers, check valves, plug valves, and flow regulators.


A. Inspection: Perform the following field quality-control inspections, after installing insulationmaterials, jackets, and finishes, to determine compliance with requirements:1. Inspect fittings and valves randomly selected by PSU OPP Services.

2. Remove fitting covers from 20 elbows or 1 percent of elbows, whichever is less, for

various pipe sizes.3. Remove fitting covers from 20 valves or 1 percent of valves, whichever is less,for various

pipe sizes.

B. Insulation applications will be considered defective if sample inspection reveals noncompliancewith requirements. Remove defective Work and replace with new materials according to theseSpecifications.

C. Reinstall insulation and covers on fittings and valves uncovered for inspection according tothese Specifications.

3.7 INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Refer to insulation application schedules for required insulation materials, vaporretarders, and field-applied jackets.

B. Application schedules identify piping system and indicate pipe size ranges and material,thickness, and jacket requirements.

3.11 INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE

A. Insulate the following piping systems with material and thickness as scheduled below:


Insulation Thickness In Inches for Pipe Sizes In Inches

Interior PipingService

Material

1”and

less

1¼” to1.5”

2” to 4” 5” to 6”8” andlarger

Notes

VaporBarrierYes/N

o

ExteriorPipe

JacketTypePVC/ALUM

Domestic Hot

Water & Hot

Water

Recirculation

JacketedFiberglass

1 1 1 1 1 1 No -

Domestic Cold

and Non-Potable

Water

Jacketed

Fiberglass½ ½ ½ ½ ½ 1, 2 Yes -

Condensate

Drains

Jacketed

Fiberglass½ ½ ½ ½ ½ 3 Yes -

Notes:1. All vertical risers and horizontal piping above grade must be insulated.

Condensate piping in mechanical rooms is not required to be insulated.2. Where rigid insulation is required because the piping is expected to be exposed to impact or

abuse, use calcium silicate pipe insulation with thickness to maintain the R-value of the

specified thickness scheduled.3. Plumbing Insulation Omitted: Omit insulation on chrome-plated exposed piping (except for

handicapped fixtures), air chambers, unions, strainers, check valves, balance cocks, flowregulators, drain lines from water coolers, drainage piping, fire protection piping, and pre-insulated equipment. All other portions of system shall be fully insulated.

END OF SECTION

Building Addition & Renovations for Domestic Water PipingThe Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 221116 - 1

SECTION 22 11 16DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Aboveground domestic water pipes, tubes, fittings, and specialties inside the building.2. Escutcheons.3. Sleeves and sleeve seals.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following products:

1. Transition fittings.2. Dielectric fittings.3. Escutcheons.4. Sleeves and sleeve seals.5. Water penetration systems.


A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B. Comply with NSF 14 for plastic, potable domestic water piping and components.

C. Comply with NSF 61 for potable domestic water piping and components.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fittingmaterials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.

2.2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L water tube, drawn temper.

1. Cast-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, pressure fittings.2. Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings.3. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends.4. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-and-

socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends.

2.3 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS


A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick or ASME B16.21,nonmetallic and asbestos free, unless otherwise indicated; full-face or ring type unless otherwiseindicated.

B. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.

C. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTMB 813.

D. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-dutybrazing unless otherwise indicated.


A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials or ferrous material bodywith separating nonconductive insulating material suitable for system fluid, pressure, andtemperature.

B. Dielectric Unions:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of thefollowing:a. Capitol Manufacturing Company.b. Central Plastics Company.c. EPCO Sales, Inc.d. Hart Industries International, Inc.e. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products.

2. Description:a. Pressure Rating: 150 psig at 180 deg F.b. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

C. Dielectric Couplings:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of thefollowing:a. Calpico, Inc.b. Lochinvar Corporation.

2. Description:a. Galvanized-steel coupling.b. Pressure Rating: 300 psig at 225 deg F.c. End Connections: Female threaded.d. Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic.

2.5 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS


1. Flex-Hose Co., Inc.2. Flexicraft Industries.3. Flex Pression, Ltd.4. Flex-Weld, Inc.5. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.6. Mercer Rubber Co.7. Metraflex, Inc.


8. Proco Products, Inc.9. Tozen Corporation.10. Unaflex, Inc.11. Universal Metal Hose; a Hyspan company

2.6 ESCUTCHEONS

F. General: Manufactured ceiling, floor, and wall escutcheons and floor plates.

G. One Piece, Cast Brass: Polished, chrome-plated or rough-brass finish with setscrews.

H. One Piece, Deep Pattern: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with chrome-plated finish.

I. One Piece, Stamped Steel: Chrome-plated finish with setscrew or spring clips.

J. Split Casting, Cast Brass: Polished, chrome-plated or rough-brass finish with concealed hinge andsetscrew.

K. Split Plate, Stamped Steel: Chrome-plated finish with concealed hinge, setscrew or spring clips.

L. One-Piece Floor Plates: Cast-iron flange with holes for fasteners.

M. Split-Casting Floor Plates: Cast brass with concealed hinge.

2.7 SLEEVES

A. Cast-Iron Wall Pipes: Fabricated of cast iron, and equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, withplain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.

O. Galvanized-Steel-Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with weldedlongitudinal joint.

P. Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc-coated,with plain ends.


1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with setscrews.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of domesticwater piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss,expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layoutare approved on Coordination Drawings.

B. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting.

C. Install domestic water piping level without pitch and plumb.

D. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupantsunless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.


E. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at rightangles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicatedotherwise.

F. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, andcoordinate with other services occupying that space.

G. Install piping adjacent to equipment and specialties to allow service and maintenance.

H. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

I. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher thansystem pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

J. Install piping free of sags and bends.

K. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

L. Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment, machine, andspecialty.


A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings beforeassembly.

C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threadsfull and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Joinpipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or

damaged.

D. Brazed Joints: Join copper tube and fittings according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," "BrazedJoints" Chapter.

E. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux to end of tube. Join copper tube andfittings according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

F. Ductile-Iron-Piping Grooved Joints: Cut groove end of pipe. Assemble coupling with housing,gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join ductile-iron pipe and grooved-end fittings according to AWWAC606 for ductile-iron-pipe, cut-grooved joints.

G. Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of bothpiping systems.


A. General-Duty Valves: Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves forPlumbing Piping" for valve installations.

B. Install shutoff valve close to water main on each branch and riser serving plumbing fixtures orequipment, on each water supply to equipment, and on each water supply to plumbing fixtures that


do not have supply stops. Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use butterfly orgate valves for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

C. Install calibrated balancing valves in each hot water circulation return branch. Set calibratedbalancing valves partly open to restrict but not stop flow. Refer to Division 22 Section “PlumbingSpecialties” for calibrated balancing valves.

D. Install drain valves for equipment at base of each water riser, at low points in horizontal piping, andwhere required to drain water piping. Drain valves are specified in Division 22 Section "DomesticWater Piping Specialties."

1. Hose-End Drain Valves: At low points in water mains, risers, and branches.

3.4 DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.

B. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric couplings or unions.

3.5 FLEXIBLE CONNECTOR INSTALLATION

A. Install flexible connectors in suction and discharge piping connections to each domestic waterpump.

B. Install bronze-hose flexible connectors in copper domestic water tubing.


A. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping andEquipment" for pipe hanger and support products and installation.

1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42, clamps.2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:

a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.

3. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

B. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

C. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch.

D. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum roddiameters:

1. NPS 3/4 and Smaller: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod.2. NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod.3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod.4. NPS 2-1/2: 108 inches with 1/2-inch rod.

E. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet.

F. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum roddiameters:

1. NPS 1-1/4 and Smaller: 84 inches with 3/8-inch rod.2. NPS 1-1/2: 108 inches with 3/8-inch rod.


3. NPS 2: 10 feet with 3/8-inch rod.4. NPS 2-1/2: 11 feet with 1/2-inch rod.

G. Support piping and tubing not listed in this article according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer'swritten instructions.

3.7 ESCUTCHEON INSTALLATION

A. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.

B. Escutcheons for New Piping:

1. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One piece, deep pattern.2. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One piece, cast brass with

polished chrome-plated finish.3. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One piece, cast brass with polished

chrome-plated finish.4. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One piece, cast brass with polished chrome-

plated finish.5. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One piece, cast brass.6. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece floor plate.

3.8 SLEEVE INSTALLATION

A. General Requirements: Install sleeves for pipes and tubes passing through penetrations in floors,partitions, roofs, and walls.

B. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.

C. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves.

D. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

E. Install sleeves in new partitions, slabs, and walls as they are built.

F. For interior wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation usingjoint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Division07 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants.

G. For exterior wall penetrations above grade, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe using jointsealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Division 07Section "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants.

H. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve andpipe or pipe insulation unless otherwise indicated.

I. Install sleeve materials according to the following applications:

1. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Concrete Floor Slabs: Steel pipe.

2. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Concrete Floor Slabs of Mechanical Equipment Areas orOther Wet Areas: Steel pipe.a. Extend sleeves 2 inches above finished floor level.b. For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing, extend cast-iron sleeve

fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified. Secureflashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extendsleeve to 2 inches above finished floor level. Comply with requirements in Division 07Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing.


3. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Gypsum-Board Partitions:a. Steel pipe sleeves for pipes smaller than NPS 6.b. Exception: Sleeves are not required for water supply tubes and waste pipes for

individual plumbing fixtures if escutcheons will cover openings.4. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Interior Concrete Walls:

a. Steel pipe sleeves for pipes smaller than NPS 6.

J. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors atpipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements inDivision 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for firestop materials and installations.

3.9 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Identification forPlumbing Piping and Equipment" for identification materials and installation.

B. Label pressure piping with system operating pressure.



B. Piping Inspections:

1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and approvedby authorities having jurisdiction.

2. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day before inspectionmust be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction:a. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-

in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.b. Final Inspection: Arrange final inspection for authorities having jurisdiction to observe

tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.3. Re-inspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests or

inspections, make required corrections and arrange for re-inspection.4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Piping Tests:

1. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound andthat piping is full of water.

2. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered,extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate report for eachtest, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

3. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered andunconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered orconcealed before it was tested.

4. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure, withoutexceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow to standfor four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.

5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof untilsatisfactory results are obtained.

6. Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required.

D. Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.


3.11 ADJUSTING

A. Perform the following adjustments before operation:

1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs.2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position.3. Open throttling valves to proper setting.4. Adjust balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide adequate flow.

a. Manually adjust ball-type balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping toprovide flow of hot water in each branch.

b. Adjust calibrated balancing valves to flows indicated.c. Provide a written balancing report of hot water return system.

5. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and for temporary sealing of piping duringinstallation.

6. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs.7. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for

application where used and are clean and ready for use.8. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.

3.12 CLEANING

A. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows:

1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repairedbefore using.

2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction; ifmethods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either AWWA C651 or AWWAC652 or follow procedures described below:a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at

outlets.b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:

1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200 ppm ofchlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.

c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming fromsystem after the standing time.

d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeatprocedures if biological examination shows contamination.

B. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities.

3.13 PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Flanges and unions may be used for aboveground piping joints unless otherwise indicated.

B. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2nd smaller, shall be 1 one of the following:

1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L ; cast- or wrought- copper solder-joint fittings; andsoldered joints.

C. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, shall be one of the following:

1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; cast- or wrought-copper solder-joint fittings; andsoldered joints.

3.14 VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the


following requirements apply:

1. Shutoff Duty: Use ball valves.2. Hot-Water Circulation Piping, Balancing Duty: Calibrated balancing valves.3. Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves.

B. Use check valves to maintain correct direction of domestic water flow to and from equipment.

C. Iron grooved-end valves may be used with grooved-end piping.

END OF SECTION

Building Addition & Renovations for Facility Natural-Gas PipingThe Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 221120 - 1

SECTION 22 11 20FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Pipes, tubes, and fittings.2. Piping specialties.3. Piping and tubing joining materials.4. Valves.5. Pressure regulators.


A. Minimum Operating-Pressure Ratings:

1. Piping and Valves: 100 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated.2. Service Regulators: 100 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated.

B. Natural-Gas System Pressure within Buildings: 0.60 specific gravity, 3.0 psi inlet pressure, 2.0 psipressure drop.

C. Delegated Design: Design restraints and anchors for natural-gas piping and equipment, includingcomprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performancerequirements and design criteria indicated.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: For facility natural-gas piping layout. Include plans, piping layout and elevations,sections, and details for fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers, supports for multiple pipes, alignmentguides, expansion joints and loops, and attachments of the same to building structure. Detaillocation of anchors, alignment guides, and expansion joints and loops.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For natural-gas piping and equipment indicated to comply withperformance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by thequalified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Detail fabrication and assembly of seismic restraints.2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting seismic restraints.

D. Welding certificates.

E. Field quality-control reports.

F. Operation and maintenance data.


A. Steel Support Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWSD1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."


B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler andPressure Vessel Code.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B.

1. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern.2. Wrought-Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M for butt welding and socket welding.3. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground joint, and

threaded ends.4. Protective Coating for Underground Piping: Factory-applied, three-layer coating of epoxy,

adhesive, and PE.

a. Joint Cover Kits: Epoxy paint, adhesive, and heat-shrink PE sleeves.

B. PE Pipe: ASTM D 2513, SDR 11.

1. PE Fittings: ASTM D 2683, socket-fusion type or ASTM D 3261, butt-fusion type withdimensions matching PE pipe.

2. PE Transition Fittings: Factory-fabricated fittings with PE pipe complying with ASTM D2513, SDR 11; and steel pipe complying with ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, Schedule 40,Type E or S, Grade B.

3. Anodeless Service-Line Risers: Factory fabricated and leak tested.

a. Underground Portion: PE pipe complying with ASTM D 2513, SDR 11 inlet.b. Casing: Steel pipe complying with ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, black steel,

Type E or S, Grade B, with corrosion-protective coating covering.c. Aboveground Portion: PE transition fitting.d. Outlet shall be threaded or suitable for welded connection.e. Tracer wire connection.f. Ultraviolet shield.g. Stake supports with factory finish to match steel pipe casing or carrier pipe.

4. Transition Service-Line Risers: Factory fabricated and leak tested.

a. Underground Portion: PE pipe complying with ASTM D 2513, SDR 11 inlet connectedto steel pipe complying with ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B,with corrosion-protective coating for aboveground outlet.

b. Outlet shall be threaded or suitable for welded connection.c. Bridging sleeve over mechanical coupling.d. Factory-connected anode.e. Tracer wire connection.f. Ultraviolet shield.g. Stake supports with factory finish to match steel pipe casing or carrier pipe.

2.2 PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Appliance Flexible Connectors:


1. Indoor, Fixed-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.24.2. Indoor, Movable-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.69.3. Outdoor, Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.75.4. Corrugated stainless-steel tubing with polymer coating.5. Operating-Pressure Rating: 0.5 psig.6. End Fittings: Zinc-coated steel.

7. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1.8. Maximum Length: 72.

B. Quick-Disconnect Devices: Comply with ANSI Z21.41.

1. Copper-alloy convenience outlet and matching plug connector.2. Nitrile seals.3. Hand operated with automatic shutoff when disconnected.4. For indoor or outdoor applications.5. Adjustable, retractable restraining cable.

C. Y-Pattern Strainers:

1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection.2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller.3. Strainer Screen: 40-mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket with 50

percent free area.4. CWP Rating: 125 psig.

D. Weatherproof Vent Cap: Cast- or malleable-iron increaser fitting with corrosion-resistant wirescreen, with free area at least equal to cross-sectional area of connecting pipe and threaded-endconnection.


A. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural gas.

B. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate forwall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

C. Brazing Filler Metals: Alloy with melting point greater than 1000 deg F complying withAWS A5.8/A5.8M. Brazing alloys containing more than 0.05 percent phosphorus are prohibited.

2.4 MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVES

A. See "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas ShutoffValve Schedule" Articles for where each valve type is applied in various services.

B. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Comply with ASME B16.33.

1. CWP Rating: 125 psig.2. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1.3. Dryseal Threads on Flare Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.3.4. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Underground Manual Gas

Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles.5. Listing: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for

valves 1 inch and smaller.6. Service Mark: Valves 1-1/4 inches to NPS 2 shall have initials "WOG" permanently marked

on valve body.


C. One-Piece, Bronze Ball Valve with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of thefollowing:

a. BrassCraft Manufacturing Company; a Masco company.b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div.c. Lyall, R. W. & Company, Inc.d. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.e. Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter Company.

2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584.3. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.4. Stem: Bronze; blowout proof.5. Seats: Reinforced TFE; blowout proof.6. Packing: Separate packnut with adjustable-stem packing threaded ends.7. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve

Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles.8. CWP Rating: 600 psig.9. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction.10. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body.

D. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110.



2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584.3. Ball: Chrome-plated bronze.4. Stem: Bronze; blowout proof.5. Seats: Reinforced TFE; blowout proof.6. Packing: Threaded-body packnut design with adjustable-stem packing.7. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve



E. Two-Piece, Regular-Port Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110.




2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584.3. Ball: Chrome-plated bronze.4. Stem: Bronze; blowout proof.5. Seats: Reinforced TFE.6. Packing: Threaded-body packnut design with adjustable-stem packing.7. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve



F. Bronze Plug Valves: MSS SP-78.


a. Lee Brass Company.b. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.

2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584.3. Plug: Bronze.4. Ends: Threaded, socket, as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule"

and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles.5. Operator: Square head or lug type with tamperproof feature where indicated.6. Pressure Class: 125 psig.7. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to


G. PE Ball Valves: Comply with ASME B16.40.


a. Kerotest Manufacturing Corp.b. Lyall, R. W. & Company, Inc.c. Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter Company.

2. Body: PE.3. Ball: PE.4. Stem: Acetal.5. Seats and Seals: Nitrile.6. Ends: Plain or fusible to match piping.7. CWP Rating: 80 psig .8. Operating Temperature: Minus 20 to plus 140 deg F.9. Operator: Nut or flat head for key operation.10. Include plastic valve extension.11. Include tamperproof locking feature for valves where indicated on Drawings.

H. Valve Boxes:

1. Cast-iron, two-section box.2. Top section with cover with "GAS" lettering.3. Bottom section with base to fit over valve and barrel a minimum of 5 inches in diameter.


4. Adjustable cast-iron extensions of length required for depth of bury.5. Include tee-handle, steel operating wrench with socket end fitting valve nut or flat head, and

with stem of length required to operate valve.

2.5 MOTORIZED GAS VALVES

A. Electrically Operated Valves: Comply with UL 429.


a. ASCO Power Technologies, LP; Division of Emerson.b. Dungs, Karl, Inc.c. Eclipse Combustion, Inc.d. Goyen Valve Corp.; Tyco Environmental Systems.e. Magnatrol Valve Corporation.

f. Parker Hannifin Corporation; Climate & Industrial Controls Group; Skinner Valve Div.g. Watts Regulator Co.; Division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Pilot operated.3. Body: Brass or aluminum.4. Seats and Disc: Nitrile rubber.5. Springs and Valve Trim: Stainless steel.6. 120-V ac, 60 Hz, Class B, continuous-duty molded coil, and replaceable.7. NEMA ICS 6, Type 4, coil enclosure.8. Normally closed.9. Visual position indicator.

2.6 PRESSURE REGULATORS

A. General Requirements:

1. Single stage and suitable for natural gas.2. Steel jacket and corrosion-resistant components.3. Elevation compensator.4. End Connections: Threaded for regulators NPS 2 and smaller.

B. Line Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.80.


a. Actaris.b. American Meter Company.c. Eclipse Combustion, Inc.d. Fisher Control Valves and Regulators; Division of Emerson Process Management.e. Invensys.f. Maxitrol Company.g. Richards Industries; Jordan Valve Div.

2. Body and Diaphragm Case: Cast iron or die-cast aluminum.3. Springs: Zinc-plated steel; interchangeable.4. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc-plated steel.5. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber resistant to gas impurities, abrasion, and deformation at the valve

port.6. Orifice: Aluminum; interchangeable.


7. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon.8. Single-port, self-contained regulator with orifice no larger than required at maximum

pressure inlet, and no pressure sensing piping external to the regulator.9. Pressure regulator shall maintain discharge pressure setting downstream, and not exceed

150 percent of design discharge pressure at shutoff.10. Overpressure Protection Device: Factory mounted on pressure regulator.11. Atmospheric Vent: Factory- or field-installed, stainless-steel screen in opening if not

connected to vent piping.12. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 2 psig.

C. Appliance Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.18.


a. Canadian Meter Company Inc.b. Eaton Corporation; Controls Div.c. Harper Wyman Co.d. Maxitrol Company.e. SCP, Inc.

2. Body and Diaphragm Case: Die-cast aluminum.3. Springs: Zinc-plated steel; interchangeable.4. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc-plated steel.5. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber.6. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon.7. Factory-Applied Finish: Minimum three-layer polyester and polyurethane paint finish.8. Regulator may include vent limiting device, instead of vent connection, if approved by

authorities having jurisdiction.9. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 1 psig.

2.7 DIELECTRIC UNIONS

A. Dielectric Unions:


a. Capitol Manufacturing Company.b. Central Plastics Company.c. Hart Industries International, Inc.d. Jomar International Ltd.e. Matco-Norca, Inc.f. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.g. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.h. Wilkins; a Zurn company.

2. Description:

a. Standard: ASSE 1079.b. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F.c. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

2.8 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING

A. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, PE film warning tape manufactured formarking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick,


continuously inscribed with a description of utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacketfor corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches deep;colored yellow.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 OUTDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with the International Fuel Gas Code for installation and purging of natural-gas piping.

B. Install underground, natural-gas piping buried at least 36 inches below finished grade. Comply withrequirements in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.

1. If natural-gas piping is installed less than 36 inches below finished grade, install it incontainment conduit.

C. Install underground, PE, natural-gas piping according to ASTM D 2774.

D. Steel Piping with Protective Coating:

1. Apply joint cover kits to pipe after joining to cover, seal, and protect joints.2. Repair damage to PE coating on pipe as recommended in writing by protective coating

manufacturer.3. Replace pipe having damaged PE coating with new pipe.

E. Copper Tubing with Protective Coating:

1. Apply joint cover kits over tubing to cover, seal, and protect joints.2. Repair damage to PE coating on pipe as recommended in writing by protective coating

manufacturer.

F. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

3.2 INDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with the International Fuel Gas Code for installation and purging of natural-gas piping.

B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of pipingsystems. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss,expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layoutare approved on Coordination Drawings.

C. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, sleeves, and openings in building structure during progressof construction, to allow for mechanical installations.

D. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms andservice areas.

E. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at rightangles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicatedotherwise.

F. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

G. Locate valves for easy access.


H. Install natural-gas piping at uniform grade of 2 percent down toward drip and sediment traps.

I. Install piping free of sags and bends.

J. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

K. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

L. Comply with requirements in Sections specifying gas-fired appliances and equipment for roughing-in requirements.

M. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect, including service-meter outlets. Locate where accessible to permit cleaning and emptying. Do not install wherecondensate is subject to freezing.

1. Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped.Use nipple a minimum length of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches long and samesize as connected pipe. Install with space below bottom of drip to remove plug or cap.

N. Extend relief vent connections for service regulators, line regulators, and overpressure protectiondevices to outdoors and terminate with weatherproof vent cap.

O. Conceal pipe installations in walls, pipe spaces, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or floors,and in floor channels unless indicated to be exposed to view.

P. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side down.

Q. Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping.

R. Install unions in pipes NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to each pieceof equipment.

S. Do not use natural-gas piping as grounding electrode.

T. Install strainer on inlet of each line-pressure regulator and automatic or electrically operated valve.

U. Install pressure gage upstream and downstream from each line regulator. Pressure gages arespecified in Division 23 Section "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping."

V. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements forsleeves specified in Division 23 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping."

W. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirementsfor sleeve seals specified in Division 23 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping."

X. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirementsfor escutcheons specified in Division 23 Section "Escutcheons for HVAC Piping."


A. Install manual gas shutoff valve for each gas appliance ahead of corrugated stainless-steel tubingor copper connector.

B. Install underground valves with valve boxes.


C. Install regulators and overpressure protection devices with maintenance access space adequate forservicing and testing.

D. Install earthquake valves aboveground outside buildings according to listing.

E. Install anode for metallic valves in underground PE piping.


A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

C. Threaded Joints:

1. Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads complying with ASME B1.20.1.2. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies.3. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter of pipe.4. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dryseal

threading is specified.5. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or

damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

D. Welded Joints:

1. Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualified processes and weldingoperators.

2. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.3. Patch factory-applied protective coating as recommended by manufacturer at field welds

and where damage to coating occurs during construction.

E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter.

F. Flared Joints: Cut tubing with roll cutting tool. Flare tube end with tool to result in flare dimensionscomplying with SAE J513. Tighten finger tight, then use wrench. Do not overtighten.

G. PE Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or papertowels. Join according to ASTM D 2657.

1. Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion.2. Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.


A. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devicesspecified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

B. Comply with requirements for pipe hangers and supports specified in Division 23 Section "Hangersand Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

C. Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rodsizes:

1. NPS 1 and Smaller: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.2. NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.


3.6 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect to utility's gas main according to utility's procedures and requirements.

B. Install natural-gas piping electrically continuous, and bonded to gas appliance equipmentgrounding conductor of the circuit powering the appliance according to NFPA 70.

C. Install piping adjacent to appliances to allow service and maintenance of appliances.

D. Connect piping to appliances using manual gas shutoff valves and unions. Install valve within 72inches of each gas-fired appliance and equipment. Install union between valve and appliances orequipment.

E. Sediment Traps: Install tee fitting with capped nipple in bottom to form drip, as close as practical toinlet of each appliance.

3.7 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING

A. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment"for piping and valve identification.

B. Install detectable warning tape directly above gas piping, 12 inches below finished grade, except 6inches below subgrade under pavements and slabs.


A. Test, inspect, and purge natural gas according the International Fuel Gas Code and authoritieshaving jurisdiction.

B. Natural-gas piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.9 OUTDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Underground natural-gas piping shall be one of the following:

1. PE pipe and fittings joined by heat fusion; service-line risers with tracer wire terminated in anaccessible location.

2. Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints. Coat pipe and fittings with protectivecoating for steel piping.

3. Annealed-temper copper tube with wrought-copper fittings and brazed joints. Coat pipe andfittings with protective coating for copper tubing.

B. Aboveground natural-gas piping shall be one of the following:

1. Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints.2. Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints.3. Annealed-temper copper tube with wrought-copper fittings and brazed joints.

C. Branch Piping in Cast-in-Place Concrete to Single Appliance: Annealed-temper copper tube withwrought-copper fittings and brazed joints. Install piping embedded in concrete with no joints inconcrete.

D. Containment Conduit: Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints. Coat pipe and fittings


with protective coating for steel piping.

3.10 INDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Aboveground, branch piping NPS 1 and smaller shall be the following:

1. Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints.

B. Aboveground, distribution piping shall be one of the following:

1. Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints.2. Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints.

C. Underground, below building, piping shall be one of the following:

1. Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints.2. Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints.

D. Containment Conduit: Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints. Coat pipe and fittingswith protective coating for steel piping.

E. Containment Conduit Vent Piping: Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded or wrought-steel fittings with welded joints. Coat underground pipe and fittings with protective coating for steelpiping.

3.11 UNDERGROUND MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Connections to Existing Gas Piping: Use valve and fitting assemblies made for tapping utility's gasmains and listed by an NRTL.

B. Underground: Bronze plug valves.

3.12 ABOVEGROUND MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Valves for pipe sizes NPS 2 and smaller at service meter shall be one of the following:

1. One-piece, bronze ball valve with bronze trim.2. Two-piece, regular-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim.3. Bronze plug valve.

B. Distribution piping valves for pipe sizes NPS 2 and smaller shall be one of the following:


C. Valves in branch piping for single appliance shall be one of the following:


END OF SECTION

Building Addition & Renovations for Sanitary Waste and Vent PipingThe Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 221316 - 1

SECTION 22 13 16SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following soil and waste, sanitary drainage and vent piping inside thebuilding:

1. Pipe, tube, and fittings.2. Special pipe fittings.

1.2 PERFORMANCEREQUIREMENTS

A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum workingpressure, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water.2. Waste, Force-Main Piping: 100 psig.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Field quality-control inspection and test reports.


A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plasticpiping components. Include marking with "NSF-dwv" for plastic drain, waste, and vent piping; and"NSF-drain" for plastic drain piping.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fittingmaterials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.

2.2 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Solid-Wall schedule 40 PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, drain, waste, and vent.

B. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns andto fit Schedule 40 pipe.

C. Adhesive Primer: ASTM F 656.

1. Adhesive primer shall have a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated according to40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2. Adhesive primer shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the CaliforniaDepartment of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile OrganicEmissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."


D. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564.

1. PVC solvent cement shall have a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when calculated accordingto 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2. Solvent cement shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the CaliforniaDepartment of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile OrganicEmissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

2.3 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS

A. Transition Couplings:

1. General Requirements: Fitting or device for joining piping with small differences in OD's orof different materials. Include end connections same size as and compatible with pipes tobe joined.

2. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping systemfitting.

3. Unshielded, Nonpressure Transition Couplings:a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of

the following:1) Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co.2) Fernco Inc.3) Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc.4) Plastic Oddities; a division of Diverse Corporate Technologies, Inc.

b. Standard: ASTM C 1173.c. Description: Elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition pattern. Include shear

ring and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on eachend.

d. Sleeve Materials:1) For Cast-Iron Soil Pipes: ASTM C 564, rubber.2) For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC.3) For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible with

pipe materials being joined.

4. Shielded, Nonpressure Transition Couplings:a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of

the following:1) Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co.2) Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc.

b. Standard: ASTM C 1460.c. Description: Elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full-length, corrosion-resistant outer

shield and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on eachend.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTH MOVING

A. Comply with requirements for excavating, trenching, and backfilling specified in Division 31 Section“Earth Moving”.

3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Special pipe fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure ratings may be used inapplications below, unless otherwise indicated.


B. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Aboveground gravity, soil, waste, and vent piping NPS 6 and smaller shall be any of the following:

1. PVC drain, waste, and vent piping.

D. Condensate disposal piping shall be the following:

1. PVC drain, waste, and vent piping.


A. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Resultsfor Plumbing."

B. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate branches,bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used on verticalstacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn, double Y-branchand 1/8-bend fittings if 2 fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe.Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not change direction of flowmore than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of differentsizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

C. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, unless otherwiseindicated:

1. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 1 percent downward in direction of flow.2. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.

D. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authoritieshaving jurisdiction.


A. Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common WorkResults for Plumbing."

B. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-free-alloysolder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Plastic, Nonpressure-Piping, Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipeand fittings according to the following:

1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solventcements.

2. PVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855 and ASTM 2665 Appendixes.


A. Pipe hangers and supports are specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports forPlumbing Piping and Equipment." Install the following:

1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: According to the following:

a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.


c. Longer Than 100 Feet, if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls.

Support pipe rolls on trapeze.4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

B. Install supports according to Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping andEquipment."

C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

D. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch minimum rods.

E. Install hangers for PVC soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum roddiameters:

1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 48 inches with 3/8-inch rod.2. NPS 3: 48 inches with 1/2-inch rod.3. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 48 inches with 5/8-inch rod.4. NPS 6: 48 inches with 3/4-inch rod.

F. Install supports for vertical PVC soil piping every 48 inches.

G. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum roddiameters:

1. NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod.2. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod.3. NPS 2-1/2: 108 inches with 1/2-inch rod.4. NPS 3 to NPS 5: 10 feet with 1/2-inch rod.5. NPS 6: 10 feet with 5/8-inch rod.

H. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet.

I. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's writteninstructions.

3.6 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect drainage and vent piping to the following:

1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than requiredby plumbing code.

2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated, butnot smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.


A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must bemade. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in afterroughing-in and before setting fixtures.

2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observetests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make


required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, untilsatisfactory results are obtained.

2. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.

3.8 CLEANING

A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and toprevent damage from traffic and construction work.

C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.

END OF SECTION

Building Addition & Renovations for Domestic-Water Heat ExchangersThe Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 223500 - 1

SECTION 22 35 00DOMESTIC-WATER HEAT EXCHANGERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Tankless wall-mounted domestic-water heat exchanger.2. Floor-mounted storage domestic-water heat exchanger.3. Domestic-water, heat-exchanger accessories.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type and size of domestic-water heat exchanger indicated.

B. Shop Drawings:


C. Product certificates. ASME Certification.

D. Domestic-Water, Heat-Exchanger Labeling: Certified and labeled by testing agency acceptable toauthorities having jurisdiction.

E. Source quality-control reports.

F. Field quality-control reports.

G. Operation and maintenance data.

H. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by aqualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.

C. ASME Compliance: Where ASME-code construction is indicated, fabricate and label heat-exchanger storage tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII,Division 1.

D. NSF Compliance: Fabricate and label equipment components that will be in contact with potablewater to comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects."

1.4 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replacecomponents of domestic-water heat exchangers that fail in materials or workmanship withinspecified warranty period.

1. Warranty Periods: From date of Substantial Completion.a. Tankless Domestic-Water Heat Exchangers:


1) Heat Exchanger: Ten Years2) Parts: Five Years3) Controls and Other Components: One year4) Labor: One Year

b. Floor Mounted Domestic-Water Heat Exchanger:1) Heat Exchanger: Three Years2) Parts: One Year3) Controls and Other Components: One year4) Labor: One Year

c. Compression Tank: One Year

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TANKLESS WALL MOUNTED, DOMESTIC-WATER HEAT EXCHANGERS

A. Tankless High Efficiency Condensing Type, Domestic-Water Heat Exchangers:

1. Furnish and install as shown on the drawings Commercial Natural Gas Fired water heater asmanufactured by AO Smith, or approved equal.

2. ATI-540H-N3. Copper coil integral fin and tube construction with quick release brass or bronze waterways.4. The water heater shall be a factory-assembled packaged and tested.5. The heater shall be vented with 3” or 4” schedule 40 PVC, CPVC or ABS vent pipe or

stainless steel Category III vent pipe at a distance not to exceed 70’ (equivalent) for 3” ventor 100’ (equivalent) for 4” vent terminating vertically with concentric vent kit

6. The heater shall be controlled by an onboard solid-state printed circuit board monitoringincoming and outgoing temperatures with factory installed thermistors, sensing andcontrolling flow rate to set point temperature, controlling both air and gas mixture inputs tomaintain thermal combustion efficiency.

7. The heater shall also consist of inline fusing, a spark ignition and sensor system, aluminizedstainless steel burners, an air-fuel ratio sensor, a high limit temperature switch. Modulatingand proportional gas valves, freeze protection sensor with ceramic heating blocks and anoverheat cut-off fuse.

8. The water heater shall be CSA listed, exceed the energy efficiency requirements of ASHRAE90.1b-1992 and shall comply with SQAQMD Rule 1146.2 Ultra-Low NOx Standards.

9. Each packaged water heater shall consist of the following components, completely factory-assembled, ready for connection to services:a. Compact water heater with vertical support.b. Bronze ASME rated pressure and temperature relief valve set at 150 psig and 210°F.c. Bronze ASME rated pressure relief valve set at 150 psig.d. Bronze circulator pump re-wired with pilot lighted ON/OFF switch operating a115

volts/60-hertz/single phase.e. Double solenoid temperature limit system.f. Insulation is in accordance with the current ASHRAE standards. It is a flexible foam

insulation laminated to a durable, reinforced PVC jacket.g. Integral Temperature control systemh. Temperature control valve, one (1) ¾” pneumatic control valve with air kit.i. Float and thermostatic trap.j. Domestic water thermometer (3½ “diameter dial minimum) direct mounted with

separable thermowell.k. Steam pressure gauge (3½ “diameter dial minimum) with shut-off cock.l. Auxiliary steam drip trap.m. Strainers.

B. Final Assembly


1. The entire water heater shall be factory-assemble and tested, requiring only connection toservices. Complete operating, adjustment and start up instructions shall be provided inbooklet form.

C. Guarantee

1. The heater manufacturer shall guarantee all components and workmanship for one year fromdate of start-up, provided that the units are started within six months from date of shipment.The manufacturer shall also guarantee that the heater will perform at rated capacity, asverified by an independent testing laboratory.

2.2 FLOOR MOUNTED STORAGE DOMESTIC-WATER, HEAT-EXCHANGER

A. Floor Mounted High Efficiency Condensing Type, Domestic-Water Heat Exchangers:

1. Furnish and install as shown on the drawings Commercial Natural Gas Fired water heater asmanufactured by AO Smith, or approved equal.

2. Cyclone Mxi BTH-199A Mxi minimum 95% thermal efficiency.3. Water Heater to provide 100 gallon storage capacity, an input rating of 199,900 BTU/HR, a

recovery rating of 235 gallons per hour at 100 degree F temperature rise and a maximumhydrostatic working pressure of 160 psi.

4. Water heater shall provide modulating gas burner that automatically adjusts the input basedon demand, powered anodes that are non-sacrificial and maintenance free. Have seamlessglass-lined steel tank construction with glass lining applied to all water-side surfaces after thetank has been assembled and welded.

5. The water heater shall meet the thermal efficiency and/or standby loss requirements of theU.S. Department of Energy and current edition of ASHRAE/IES 90.1.

6. The heater shall have foam insulation and a CSA Certified and ASME rated T&P relief valve,have a down-fired power burner designed for precise mixing of air and gas for optimumefficiency, requiring no special calibration on start-up and be approved for 0” clearance tocombustibles.

7. The control shall be an integrated solid-state temperature ignition control device with integraldiagnostics, graphic user interface, fault history display and shall have digital temperaturereadout.

8. Design certified by Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Inc., according to ANSI Z21.10.3-CSA4.3 standards governing storage type water heaters.

9. The heater shall be standard power vented with 3” or 4” schedule 40 PVC pipe for a totaldistance of 50’ or 120’ equivalent feet of vent piping, terminating vertically with concentricvent kit.

10. The heater shall incorporate the iCOMM system for remote monitoring, leak detection andfault alert.

11. The water heater shall comply with SQAQMD Rule 1146.2 and other air quality managementdistricts with similar requirements for low NOx emissions.

12. Each packaged water heater shall consist of the following components, completely factory-assembled, ready for connection to services:a. Compact water heater with vertical support.b. Bronze ASME rated pressure and temperature relief valve set at 150 psig and 210°F.c. Bronze ASME rated pressure relief valve set at 150 psig.d. Bronze circulator pump re-wired with pilot lighted ON/OFF switch operating a115

volts/60-hertz/single phase.e. Double solenoid temperature limit system.f. Insulation is in accordance with the current ASHRAE standards. It is a flexible foam

insulation laminated to a durable, reinforced PVC jacket.g. Integral Temperature control systemh. Temperature control valve, one (1) ¾” pneumatic control valve with air kit.i. Float and thermostatic trap.


j. Domestic water thermometer (3½ “diameter dial minimum) direct mounted withseparable thermowell.

k. Steam pressure gauge (3½ “diameter dial minimum) with shut-off cock.l. Auxiliary steam drip trap.m. Strainers

2.3 DOMESTIC-WATER, HEAT-EXCHANGER ACCESSORIES

A. Domestic-Water Compression Tanks:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of thefollowing:a. AMTROL Inc.b. Taco, Inc.c. Bell & Gossett

2. Description: ASME steel pressure-rated tank constructed with welded joints and factory-installed butyl-rubber diaphragm. Include air precharge to minimum system-operatingpressure at tank.

3. Construction:a. Tappings: Factory-fabricated steel, welded to tank before testing and labeling.

Include ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread.b. Interior Finish: Comply with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable-water tank linings,

including extending finish into and through tank fittings and outlets.c. Air-Charging Valve: Factory installed.

4. Capacity and Characteristics:a. Working-Pressure Rating: 100 psig.

B. Piping-Type Heat Traps: Field-fabricated piping arrangement according to ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.

C. Heat-Trap Fittings: ASHRAE 90.2.

D. Combination Temperature-and-Pressure Relief Valves: ASME rated and stamped. Include relievingcapacity at least as great as heat input, and include pressure setting less than heat- exchangerworking-pressure rating. Select relief valves with sensing element that extends into storage tank.

E. Pressure Relief Valves: ASME rated and stamped. Include pressure setting less than heat-exchanger working-pressure rating.

F. Vacuum Relief Valves: ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4-M.

2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Factory Tests: Test and inspect domestic-water heat exchangers specified to be ASME-codeconstruction, according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

B. Hydrostatically test domestic-water heat exchangers to minimum of one and one-half timespressure rating before shipment.

C. Domestic-water heat exchangers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests andinspections. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for retestingand re-inspecting requirements and Division 01 Section "Execution" for requirements for correctingthe Work.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DOMESTIC-WATER, HEAT-EXCHANGER INSTALLATION

A. Domestic-Water, Heat-Exchanger Mounting: Install floor-mounted domestic-water heat exchangerson concrete base. Comply with requirements for concrete bases specified in Division 03 Section"Cast-in-Place Concrete."

1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated,install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base.

2. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concretebase and anchor into structural concrete floor.

3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.5. Anchor heat exchangers to substrate.

B. Install domestic-water heat exchangers level and plumb, according to layout drawings, originaldesign, and referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrangeunits so controls and devices needing service are accessible.

1. Install shutoff valves on domestic-water-supply piping to heat exchangers and on domestic-hot-water outlet piping. Comply with requirements for shutoff valves specified in Division 22Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping."

2. Install shutoff valves on heating hot-water piping to heat exchangers. Comply withrequirements for shutoff valves specified in Division 23 Section "General-Duty Valves forHVAC Piping."

C. Install domestic-water heat exchangers with seismic-restraint devices. Comply with requirementsfor seismic-restraint devices specified in Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls forPlumbing Piping and Equipment."

D. Install temperature and pressure relief valves in top portion of storage-tank shells of domestic-water heat exchangers with domestic-water storage. Use relief valves with sensing elements thatextend into shells. Extend relief-valve outlet, with drain piping same as domestic-water piping incontinuous downward pitch, and discharge by positive air gap onto closest floor drain.

E. Install combination temperature-and-pressure relief valves in water piping for domestic-water heatexchangers without storage. Extend relief-valve outlet, with drain piping same as domestic-waterpiping in continuous downward pitch, and discharge by positive air gap onto closest floor drain.

F. Install heat-exchanger drain piping as indirect waste to spill by positive air gap into open drains orover floor drains. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water piping for domestic-water heatexchangers that do not have tank drains. Comply with requirements for hose-end drain valvesspecified in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."

G. Install thermometer on each domestic-water, heat-exchanger, inlet and outlet piping, and installthermometer on each domestic-water, heat-exchanger, heating-fluid inlet and outlet piping. Complywith requirements for thermometers specified in Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages forPlumbing Piping."

H. Install pressure gages on domestic-water, heat-exchanger, heating-fluid piping. Comply withrequirements for pressure gages specified in Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for PlumbingPiping."

I. Fill domestic-water heat exchangers with water.


J. Charge domestic-water compression tanks with air.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping."

B. Comply with requirements for heating hot-water piping specified in Division 23 Section "HydronicPiping."

C. Comply with requirements for steam and condensate piping specified in Division 23 Section"Steam and Condensate Heating Piping."

D. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

E. Where installing piping adjacent to domestic-water heat exchangers, allow space for service andmaintenance of heat exchangers. Arrange piping for easy removal of domestic-water heatexchangers.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 22Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."



1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspectcomponents, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assistin testing.

2. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest untilno leaks exist.

3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm properoperation.

4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls andequipment.

B. Domestic-water heat exchangers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests andinspections. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for retestingand re-inspecting requirements and Division 01 Section "Execution" for requirements for correctingthe Work.


3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel toadjust, operate, and maintain shell-and-tube domestic-water heat exchangers.

END OF SECTION

Building Addition & Renovations for Plumbing FixturesThe Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 224000 - 1

SECTION 22 40 00

PLUMBING FIXTURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Faucets for lavatories and sinks.2. Flushometers.3. Toilet seats.4. Protective shielding guards.5. Fixture supports.6. Water closets.7. Lavatories.8. Kitchen sinks.9. Multi-station lavatory.10. Urinals.11. Janitors sink.12. Shower controls.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.

B. Accessible Fixture: Plumbing fixture that can be approached, entered, and used by people withdisabilities.

C. FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic.

D. PMMA: Polymethyl methacrylate (acrylic) plastic.

E. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

F. Solid Surface: Nonporous, homogeneous, cast-polymer-plastic material with heat-, impact-,scratch-, and stain-resistance qualities.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Operation and maintenance data.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked forintended use.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC A117.1, "Accessible and UsableBuildings and Facilities"; Public Law 90-480, "Architectural Barriers Act"; and Public Law 101-336,"Americans with Disabilities Act"; for plumbing fixtures for people with disabilities.


C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in Public Law 102-486, "Energy Policy Act,"about water flow and consumption rates for plumbing fixtures.

D. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects," forfixture materials that will be in contact with potable water.

E. Select combinations of fixtures and trim, faucets, fittings, and other components that arecompatible.

F. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for plumbingfixtures:

1. Vitreous-China Fixtures: ASME A112.19.2M.2. Water-Closet, Flush Valve, Tank Trim: ASME A112.19.5.

G. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for lavatory andsink faucets:

1. Faucets: ASME A112.18.1.2. Integral, Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001.3. NSF Potable-Water Materials: NSF 61.4. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1.5. Sensor-Actuated Faucets and Electrical Devices: UL 1951.6. Supply Fittings: ASME A112.18.1.7. Brass Waste Fittings: ASME A112.18.2.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LAVATORY FAUCETS

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the productindicated on Drawings and as noted below or approved equal:a. American Standard Companies, Inc.

2. Description: See Plumbing Fixture Schedule on drawings.

2.2 SINK FAUCETS



2.3 FLUSHOMETERS



3. Flushometer for urinal and water-closet-type fixture. Include brass body with corrosion-resistant internal components, non-hold-open feature, control stop with check valve,


vacuum breaker, copper or brass tubing, and polished chrome-plated finish on exposedparts.

2.4 TOILET SEATS

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the productindicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:a. Bemis Manufacturing Company.b. Centoco Manufacturing Corp.c. Church Seats.d. Kohler Co.e. Olsonite Corp.

2. Description: Toilet seat for water-closet-type fixture.a. Material: Molded, solid plastic with antimicrobial agent.b. Configuration: Open front without cover.c. Size: Elongated.d. Hinge Type: SC, self-sustaining, check.e. Class: Standard commercial.f. Color: White.

2.5 FIXTURE SUPPORTS


1. Josam Company.2. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.3. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.4. Watts Drainage Products Inc.; a div. of Watts Industries, Inc.5. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

B. Urinal Supports:

1. Description: Type II, urinal carrier with hanger and bearing plates for wall-mounting, urinal-type fixture. Include steel uprights with feet.

2. Accessible-Fixture Support: Include rectangular steel uprights.

C. Lavatory Supports:

1. Description: Type II, lavatory carrier with concealed arms and tie rod for wall-mounting,lavatory-type fixture. Include steel uprights with feet.

2. Accessible-Fixture Support: Include rectangular steel uprights.

2.6 WATER CLOSETS



2.7 LAVATORIES

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the productindicated on Drawings and as noted below or approved equal:a. American Standard Companies, Inc



2.8 SINKS

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the productindicated on Drawings and as noted below or approved equal:a. Elkay, Inc.


2.9 MULTI-STATION LAVATORY

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the productindicated on Drawings and as noted below or approved equal:a. Bradley


2.10 URINALS

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the productindicated on Drawings and noted below or approved equal:a. American Standard Companies, Inc.


2.11 MOP BASIN

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the productindicated on Drawings and as noted below or approved equal:a. E.L. Mustee


2.12 SHOWER CONTROLS

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the productindicated on Drawings and as noted below or approved equal:a. Symmons


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Assemble plumbing fixtures, trim, fittings, and other components according to manufacturers'written instructions.

B. Install off-floor supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-mounting fixtures.

1. Use carrier supports with waste fitting and seal for back-outlet fixtures.2. Use carrier supports without waste fitting for fixtures with tubular waste piping.3. Use chair-type carrier supports with rectangular steel uprights for accessible fixtures.

C. Install back-outlet, wall-mounting fixtures onto waste fitting seals and attach to supports.

D. Install floor-mounting fixtures on closet flanges or other attachments to piping or building substrate.


E. Install wall-mounting fixtures with tubular waste piping attached to supports.

F. Install fixtures level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.

G. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each fixture to be connected to waterdistribution piping. Attach supplies to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures.Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation.

H. Install trap and tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be directly connected tosanitary drainage system.

I. Install tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be indirectly connected to drainagesystem.

J. Install flushometer valves for accessible water closets and urinals with handle mounted on wideside of compartment. Install other actuators in locations that are easy for people with disabilities toreach.

K. Install toilet seats on water closets.

L. Install faucet-spout fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if faucets are notavailable with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.

M. Install water-supply flow-control fittings with specified flow rates in fixture supplies at stop valves.

N. Install faucet flow-control fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if faucetsare not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.

O. Install shower flow-control fittings with specified maximum flow rates in shower arms.

P. Install traps on fixture outlets.

1. Exception: Omit trap on fixtures with integral traps.2. Exception: Omit trap on indirect wastes, unless otherwise indicated.

Q. Install escutcheons at piping wall and ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations and withincabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings.Escutcheons are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."

R. Seal joints between fixtures and walls, floors, and countertops using sanitary-type, one-part,mildew-resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Sealants are specified inDivision 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicategeneral arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent piping.Use size fittings required to match fixtures.

C. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for ElectricalSystems."

D. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and


Cables."

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Operate and adjust faucet controls. Replace damaged or malfunctioning fixtures, fittings andcontrols.

B. Operate and adjust disposers. Replace damaged and malfunctioning units and controls.

C. Adjust water pressure at faucets, shower valves and flushometer valves to produce proper flowand stream.

D. Replace washers and seals of leaking and dripping faucets and stops.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean fixtures, faucets and other fittings with manufacturers recommended cleaning methods andmaterials.

B. Remove faucet spouts and strainers, remove sediment and debris and reinstall strainers andspouts.

C. Remove sediment and debris from drains.


A. Verify that installed plumbing fixtures are categories and types specified for locations whereinstalled.

B. Check that plumbing fixtures are complete with trim, faucets, fittings, and other specifiedcomponents.

C. Inspect installed plumbing fixtures for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.

D. Test installed fixtures after water systems are pressurized for proper operation. Replacemalfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until units operate properly.

E. Install fresh batteries in sensor-operated mechanisms.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings.

B. Do not allow use of plumbing fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.

END OF SECTION

Building Addition & Renovations for Plumbing SpecialtiesThe Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 224200 - 1

SECTION 22 42 00

PLUMBING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following plumbing specialties:1. Water regulators.2. Balancing valves.

3. Thermostatic water mixing valves.4. Strainers.5. Washer-supply outlets.6. Key-operation hydrants.7. Wheel-handle wall hydrants.

8. Drain valves.9. Miscellaneous piping specialties.


1. Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for water meters,

thermometers, and pressure gages.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic piping materials:1. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.

2. PE: Polyethylene plastic.3. PUR: Polyurethane plastic.4. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.


A. Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with

following minimum working-pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Domestic Water Piping: 125 psig.

2. Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water.3. Storm Drainage Piping: 10-foot head of water.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated capacities and shipping, installed, and operating weights.

Indicate materials, finishes, dimensions, required clearances, and methods of

assembly of components; and piping and wiring connections for the following:

1. Water regulators.

2. Balancing valves, water filters, and strainers.3. Thermostatic water mixing valves.


4. Water hammer arresters.

5. Drain valves, hose bibbs, and hydrants.6. Washer-supply outlets.7. Cleanouts, floor drains and roof drains.8. Vent terminals and roof flashing assemblies.

B. Maintenance Data: For plumbing specialties to include in maintenance manuals.Include the following:1. Backflow preventers and water regulators.2. Thermostatic water mixing valves.3. Hydrants.


A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements ofplumbing specialties and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division01 Section "Product Requirements."

B. Plumbing specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing

agency.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined inNFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,and marked for intended use.

D. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for piping

materials and installation.

E. NSF Compliance:1. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for

plastic domestic water piping components. Include marking "NSF-pw" on plastic

potable-water piping and "NSF-dwv" on plastic drain, waste, and vent piping.

2. Comply with NSF 61, “Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects,

Sections 01 through 09," for potable domestic water plumbing specialties.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WATER REGULATORS

A. Available Manufacturers:

B. Manufacturers:1. Armstrong-Yoshitake, Inc.2. Cashco, Inc.3. Cla-Val Co.4. Conbraco Industries, Inc.5. FLOMATIC Corp.

6. IMI Cash Valve.7. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.8. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div.

C. General: ASSE 1003, water regulators, rated for initial working pressure of 150 psigminimum. Include integral factory-installed or separate field-installed, Y-pattern


strainer.1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends.

a. General-Duty Service: Single-seated, direct operated, unless otherwise

indicated.

b. Booster Heater Water Supply: Single-seated, direct operated with

integral bypass.

2. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Bronze or cast-iron body with flanged ends. Include

AWWA C550 or FDA-approved, interior epoxy coating for regulators with cast-

iron body.

3. Interior Components: Corrosion-resistant materials.

2.2 BALANCING VALVES

A. Calibrated Balancing Valves: Adjustable, with two readout ports and memory settingindicator. Include manufacturer's standard hoses, fittings, valves, differential pressuremeter, and carrying case.1. Model: Bell & Gossett “RF” – Low Flow Applications:2. Manufacturers:

a. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.

b. Armstrong-Yoshitake, Inc.c. Flow Design, Inc.d. ITT Industries; Bell & Gossett Div.e. Taco, Inc.f. Tour & Andersson, Inc.g. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

3. NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze body with brass ball, adjustment knob, calibrated

nameplate, and threaded or solder-joint ends.

2.3 THERMOSTATIC WATER MIXING VALVES

A. Available Manufacturers:

B. Manufacturers:1. Lawler Manufacturing Company, Inc.

2. Leonard Valve Company.

3. Mark Controls Corp.; Powers Process Controls.

4. Speakman5. Symmons Industries, Inc.6. T & S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc.

C. General: ASSE 1017, manually adjustable, thermostatic water mixing valve with

bronze body. Include check stop and union on hot- and cold-water-supply inlets,

adjustable temperature setting, and thermometer.

1. Type: Bimetal thermostat, operation and pressure rating 125 psig minimum.

D. Thermostatic Water Mixing Valves: Unit, with the following:1. Piping, valves, thermometer, and unions.2. Piping Component Finish: As scheduled.

2.4 STRAINERS

A. Strainers: Y-pattern, unless otherwise indicated, and full size of connecting piping.


Include ASTM A 666, Type 304, stainless-steel screens with 3/64-inch round

perforations, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Pressure Rating: 125-psig minimum steam working pressure, unless otherwiseindicated.

2. NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze body, with female threaded ends.

3. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Cast-iron body, with interior AWWA C550 or FDA-

approved, epoxy coating and flanged ends.4. Y-Pattern Strainers: Screwed screen retainer with centered blowdown.

a. Drain: Field-installed, hose-end drain valve.5. T-Pattern Strainers: Malleable-iron or ductile-iron body with grooved ends;

access end cap with drain plug and access coupling with rubber gasket.

6. Basket Strainers: Bolted flange or clamp cover, and basket with lift-out handle.

a. Type: Simplex with one basket.b. Drain: Field-installed, hose-end drain valve.

2.5 OUTLET BOXES

A. Clothes Washer Outlet Boxes: With hot- and cold-water hose connections, drain, andthe following:1. Box and Faceplate: Enameled or epoxy-painted steel.2. Shutoff Fitting: Combination, single lever.3. Supply Fittings: Two NPS 1/2 gate, globe, or ball valves and NPS 1/2 copper,

water tubing.4. Drain: NPS 2 standpipe, P-trap, and direct waste connection to drainage piping.

5. Inlet Hoses: Two ASTM D 3571, 60-inch- long, rubber household clothes

washer inlet hoses with female hose-thread couplings.6. Drain Hose: One 48-inch long, rubber household clothes washer drain hose with

hooked end.

7. Provide with integral water hammer arrestors.

2.6 KEY-OPERATION HYDRANTS

A. Manufacturers:1. Woodford Manufacturing Co.2. Josam Co.3. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.4. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.5. Watts Industries, Inc.; Drainage Products Div.

6. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Jonespec Div.

7. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Specification Drainage Operation.

B. General: ASME A112.21.3M, key-operation hydrant with pressure rating of 125 psig.1. Inlet: NPS 3/4 or NPS 1 threaded or solder joint.2. Outlet: ASME B1.20.7, garden-hose threads.3. Operating Keys: One with each key-operation hydrant.

C. Nonfreeze Exposed-Outlet Wall Hydrants: ASSE 1019, self-drainable with integralnonremovable hose-connection vacuum breaker, casing and operating rod to matchwall thickness, projecting outlet, and wall clamp.

1. Classification: Automatic draining with hose removed or with hose attached and

nozzle closed.2. Nozzle and Wall Plate Finish: As scheduled.


D. Nonfreeze Concealed-Outlet Wall Hydrants: ASSE 1019, self-drainable with flush-mounting box with cover, integral nonremovable hose-connection vacuum breaker,casing and operating rod to match wall thickness, concealed outlet, and wall clamp.1. Classification: Automatic draining with hose removed or with hose attached and

nozzle closed.

2. Box and Cover Finish: As scheduled.

2.7 WHEEL-HANDLE WALL HYDRANTS

A. Manufacturers:1. Mansfield Plumbing Products, Inc.2. NIBCO INC.3. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co., Inc.

4. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.5. Woodford Manufacturing Co.6. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Jonespec Div.

B. Description: Frost-proof design similar to ASME A112.21.3M, for wall mounting with

wheel-handle operation, NPS 1/2 or NPS 3/4 threaded or solder-joint inlet, casing and

operating rod to match wall thickness, and projecting outlet with ASME B1.20.7

garden-hose threads on outlet. Include wall clamp; integral vacuum breaker or

nonremovable, drainable hose-connection vacuum breaker complying with ASSE

1011; and garden-hose threads complying with ASME B1.20.7 on outlet.

2.8 DRAIN VALVES

A. Hose-End Drain Valves: MSS SP-110, NPS 3/4 ball valve, rated for 400-psig minimum

CWP. Include two-piece, copper-alloy body with standard port, chrome-plated brass

ball, replaceable seats and seals, blowout-proof stem, and vinyl-covered steel handle.

1. Inlet: Threaded or solder joint.

2. Outlet: Short-threaded nipple with ASME B1.20.7, garden-hose threads and

cap.

B. Stop-and-Waste Drain Valves: MSS SP-110, ball valve, rated for 200-psig minimumCWP or MSS SP-80, Class 125, gate valve; ASTM B 62 bronze body, with NPS 1/8side drain outlet and cap.

2.9 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Water Hammer Arresters: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201, piston type with pressurizedmetal-tube cushioning chamber. Sizes indicated are based on ASSE 1010, Sizes AAand A through F or PDI-WH 201, Sizes A through F.1. Manufacturers:

a. Amtrol, Inc.

b. Josam Co.c. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.d. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co., Inc.e. Watts Industries, Inc.; Drainage Products Div.f. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

g. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div.

B. Hose Bibbs: Bronze body with replaceable seat disc complying with ASMEA112.18.1M for compression-type faucets. Include NPS 1/2 or NPS 3/4 threaded or


solder-joint inlet, of design suitable for pressure of at least 125 psig; integral,nonremovable, drainable hose-connection vacuum breaker; and garden-hose threadscomplying with ASME B1.20.7 on outlet.1. Finish for Equipment Rooms: Rough bronze, or chrome or nickel plated.2. Operation for Equipment Rooms: Wheel handle or operating key.3. Include operating key with each operating-key hose bibb.4. Include integral wall flange with each chrome- or nickel-plated hose bibb.

C. Air Vents: Float type for automatic air venting.1. Bolted Construction: Bronze body with replaceable, corrosion-resistant metal

float and stainless-steel mechanism and seat; threaded NPS 1/2 minimum inlet;

125-psig minimum pressure rating at 140 deg F; and threaded vent outlet.

D. Roof Flashing Assemblies: Refer to Division 7 specifications.

E. Open Drains: Shop or field fabricate from ASTM A 74, Service class, hub-and-spigot,cast-iron, soil-pipe fittings. Include P-trap, hub-and-spigot riser section; and whererequired, increaser fitting, joined with ASTM C 564, rubber gaskets.

F. Deep-Seal Traps: Cast-iron or bronze casting, with inlet and outlet matchingconnected piping and cleanout trap seal primer valve connection.1. NPS 2: 4-inch- minimum water seal.

2. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: 5-inch- minimum water seal.

G. Floor-Drain Inlet Fittings: Cast iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet,

and trap seal primer valve connection.

H. Fixed Air-Gap Fittings: Manufactured cast-iron or bronze drainage fitting with semi-open top with threads or device to secure drainage inlet piping in top and bottomspigot or threaded outlet larger than top inlet. Include design complying with ASMEA112.1.2 that will provide fixed air gap between installed inlet and outlet piping.

I. Stack Flashing Fittings: Counterflashing-type, cast-iron fitting, with bottom recess forterminating roof membrane, and with threaded or hub top for extending vent pipe.

J. Expansion Joints: ASME A112.21.2M, assembly with cast-iron body with bronzesleeve, packing gland, and packing; of size and end types corresponding toconnected piping.

2.10 CLEANOUTS

A. Cleanouts: Comply with ASME A112.36.2M.1. Manufacturers:

a. Plastic Oddities.b. Josam Co.c. Tyler Pipe, Wade Div.d. Wade.e. Watts Industries, Inc., Drainage Products Div.f. Zurn Industries, Inc., Jonespec Div.g. Zurn Industries, Inc., Specification Drainage Operation.

B. General: Cleanouts shall be provided with a bronze plug. Floor cleanouts in wetlocations to be furnished with flashing clamp device and set in the center of a 24” x24” flashing pan except for slab on grade or grade cleanout applications.


C. Floor Cleanouts: All exposed F.C.O. to have satin finish bronze tops unless otherwise

noted.

1. All floor cleanouts to be installed flush with finished concrete floor.

a. Plastic Oddities

b. Josam Co.

D. Wall Cleanouts, where required with tapped tee.1. For pipe spaces and walls without access:

a. Plastic Oddities

b. Josam Co.

c. The wall cleanout cover plate is to match wall finish. Apply wallpaper to

match walls that are papered. Apply paint to match walls that are painted.

E. Cleanout Plugs

1. For accessible pipe spaces and exposed sewer piping (end of main, heel,

wyes, etc.) with tapped spigot

a. Plastic Oddities

b. Josam Co.

F. Grade Cleanout

1. Provide cast iron riser to grade with concrete base under riser wye, and 12 x

12 x 8” thick concrete pad at grade with cleanout centered in pad for all

installations in grassed areas. Provide all grade cleanouts within landscaping

beds minus concrete pad.

a. Plastic Oddities

b. Josam Co.

2.11 FLOOR DRAINS AND FLOOR SINKS

A. Floor Drains and Floor Sinks: Comply with ASME A112.21.1M.1. Manufacturers:

a. Plastic Oddities.b. Josam Co., Blucher-Josam Div.

c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.d. Tyler Pipe, Wade Div.e. Wade.f. Watts Industries, Inc., Drainage Products Div.g. Zurn Industries, Inc., Jonespec Div.h. Zurn Industries, Inc., Specification Drainage Operation.

2. Body Material: Cast iron.

3. Seepage Flange: Required.4. Clamping Device: Required.5. Outlet: As schedule for all floor sinks.6. Exposed Surfaces and Interior Lining: Acid-resistant enamel.

7. Top or Strainer Material: Nickel bronze.

8. Top Shape: As scheduled.

9. Top Loading Classification: As scheduled.

10. Interior Coating: Acid resistant (floor sinks only).

11. Provide all floor drains with ProSet Trapguard trap seal.

12. Provide floor drains with removable sediment bucket where noted.


Grate to require sediment bucket for proper installation.

13. Provide floor drains with removable sediment bucket where noted.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping joiningmaterials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.

B. Install pressure regulators with inlet and outlet shutoff valves and balance valvebypass. Install pressure gages on inlet and outlet.

C. Install strainers on supply side of each control valve, pressure regulator, and solenoidvalve.

D. Install trap seal primer valves with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap aminimum of 1 percent and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust valvefor proper flow.

E. Install expansion joints on vertical risers, stacks, and conductors.

F. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the

following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage

piping unless larger cleanout is indicated.2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.

3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 80 feet

for larger piping.

4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.

G. Install cleanout deck plates with top flush with finished floor, for floor cleanouts for

piping below floors.

H. Install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush withfinished wall, for cleanouts located in concealed piping. All covers shall be finished tomatch the wall material in exposed public locations.

I. Install flashing flange and clamping device with each stack and cleanout passing

through floors with waterproof membrane.

J. Install vent flashing sleeves on stacks passing through roof. Secure over stack flashing

according to manufacturer's written instructions.

K. Install frost-proof vent caps on each vent pipe passing through roof. Maintain 1-inch

clearance between vent pipe and roof substrate.

L. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains

flush with finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.1. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance.2. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor

drainage. Set with grates depressed according to the following drainage arearadii:


a. Radius, 30 Inches or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not less

than 1/4-inch total depression.

b. Radius, 30 to 60 Inches: Equivalent to 1 percent slope.

c. Radius, 60 Inches or Larger: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not

greater than 1-inch total depression.

3. Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain

and adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where

penetrated.4. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless

otherwise indicated.

M. Install roof drains at low points of roof areas according to roof membranemanufacturer's written installation instructions.1. Install roof-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain

and adjoining roofing. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where

penetrated.

2. Position roof drains for easy access and maintenance.

N. Fasten wall-hanging plumbing specialties securely to supports attached to buildingsubstrate if supports are specified and to building wall construction if no support isindicated.

O. Fasten recessed-type plumbing specialties to reinforcement built into walls.

P. Install individual shutoff valve in each water supply to plumbing specialties. Use ball,gate, or globe valve if specific valve is not indicated. Install shutoff valves in accessiblelocations. Refer to Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping" forgeneral-duty ball, butterfly, check, gate, and globe valves.

Q. Install air vents at piping high points. Include ball, gate, or globe valve inlet.

R. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locationsand within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to concealprotruding pipe fittings.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawingsindicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect plumbing specialties to piping specified in other Division 22 Sections.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and

debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.


3.4 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner’s maintenance

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain all equipment. Refer to Division 01 Section.

END OF SECTION

Building Addition & Renovations for Drinking Fountains and Water CoolersThe Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 224700 - 1

SECTION 22 47 00DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND WATER COOLERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:1. Electric Water Coolers.2. Fixture supports.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Accessible Water Cooler: Fixture that can be approached and used by people with disabilities.

B. Fitting: Device that controls flow of water into or out of fixture.

C. Water Cooler: Electrically powered fixture for generating and delivering cooled drinking water.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished

specialties; and accessories for each type of fixture indicated.

B. Maintenance Data: For fixtures to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 01.



B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in the U.S. Architectural & TransportationBarriers Compliance Board's "Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (UFAS), 1985-494-187"about fixtures for people with disabilities.

C. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects," forfixture materials that will be in contact with potable water.

D. ARI Standard: Comply with ARI 1010, "Self-Contained, Mechanically Refrigerated Drinking-Water Coolers," for water coolers and with ARI’s “Directory of Certified Drinking Water Coolers"for type and style classifications.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate roughing-in and final fixture locations, and verify that fixtures can be installed to

comply with original design and referenced standards.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WATER COOLERS WITH BOTTLE FILL STATION

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the productindicated on Drawings and as noted below or approved equal:a. Elkay Manufacturing Co. (Model #LZSTL8WSSP)

2. Bubbler: Flex-Guard Safety Bubbler utilizing an infused anti-microbial pliable polyester

elastomer to prevent accidental mouth injuries. Flexes on impact.

3. Stainless steel basin with integral drain and galvanized stainless steel cooler chassis.

Stainless steel bottle filler wrapper with ABS plastic alcove4. Control: Easy-touch front and side push-bar (Cooler) Sanitary, touchless activation with

auto 20-second shut-off (Bottle Filler)5. Visual User interface display with Innovative Green Ticker counting of bottles saved from

waste and LED Visual Filter Monitor showing when replacement is necessary.6. Water Sentry Plus 3000-gallon capacity filtration system certified to NSF/ANSI 42 & 53

(Lead, Class 1 Particulate, Chlorine, Taste & Odor)7. Supply: NPS 3/8 with ball, gate, or globe valve.

8. Drain: Grid with NPS 1-1/4 minimum horizontal waste and trap complying with ASME

A112.18.1M.

9. Cooling System: Electric, hermetically sealed compressor, reciprocating type, single

phase. Sealed-in lifetime lubrication. Fan cooled condenser, copper tube with aluminum

fins. Fan motor is permanently lubricated. Combination tube-tank type cooling unit. Self-

cleansing. Continuous copper tubing with stainless steel tank. Fully insulated with EPS

foam which meets UL requirements for self-extinguishing material.

a. Capacity: 8 gph of 50 deg F cooled water from 80 deg F inlet water and 90 deg F


b. Electrical Characteristics:120-Vac; single phase; 60 Hz.c. Refrigerant R134a is controlled by accurately calibrated capillary tube.d. Electronic temperature control requires no adjustmente. Solid-State temperature sensing device with no moving parts.f. Warranty: 5 year limited on the unit’s refrigeration system. 1 year electrical

component and water system warranty from date of installation.

2.2 BOTTLE FILL STATION

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product

indicated on Drawings and as noted below or approved equal:

a. Elkay Manufacturing Co. (Model #LZWSM8K)

2. In-wall recessed bottle filling station for use with EDFPBM SwirlFlo fountains.

3. Stainless steel construction with ABS plastic alcove. Stainless steel louvered ventilating

grille. MFWS 100 galvanized steel wall mounting box and frame4. Control: Sanitary, touchless activation with auto 20-second shut-off (Bottle Filler)5. Visual User interface display with Innovative Green Ticker counting of bottles saved from

waste and LED Visual Filter Monitor showing when replacement is necessary.6. Water Sentry Plus 3000-gallon capacity filtration system certified to NSF/ANSI 42 & 53

(Lead, Class 1 Particulate, Chlorine, Taste & Odor)7. Supply: NPS 3/8 with ball, gate, or globe valve.

8. Drain: Grid with NPS 1-1/4 minimum horizontal waste and trap complying with ASME

A112.18.1M.

9. Cooling System: High-efficiency electric, hermetically sealed compressor, reciprocating


type, single phase. Sealed-in lifetime lubrication. Fan cooled condenser. Fan motor is

permanently lubricated. Combination tube-tank type cooling unit. Self-cleansing.

Continuous copper tubing with stainless steel tank. Fully insulated with EPS foam which

meets UL requirements for self-extinguishing material.

a. Capacity: 8 gph of 50 deg F cooled water from 80 deg F inlet water and 90 deg F


b. Electrical Characteristics:120-Vac; single phase; 60 Hz.c. Refrigerant R134a is controlled by accurately calibrated capillary tube.d. Electronic temperature control requires no adjustmente. Solid-State temperature sensing device with no moving parts.f. Warranty: 5 year limited on the unit’s refrigeration system. 1 year electrical

component and water system warranty from date of installation.g. Extra Materials: 51300C-24 pack of replacement filters.

2.3 FIXTURE SUPPORTS

A. Off-Floor, Plumbing Fixture Supports: ASME A112.6.1M, water-cooler carriers.Include vertical, steel uprights with feet and tie rods and bearing plates with mounting studs

matching fixture to be supported.

1. Manufacturers:a. Josam Co.b. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.c. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.d. Watts Industries, Inc.; Watts Drainage Products Div.

e. Zurn Specifications Drainage Operation.2. Type I: Hanger-type carrier with two vertical uprights.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for water and waste piping systems to verify actual locations of pipingconnections before fixture installation. Verify that sizes and locations of piping and types ofsupports match those indicated.

B. Examine walls and floors for suitable conditions where fixtures are to be installed.


3.2 APPLICATIONS

A. Use carrier off-floor supports for wall-hanging fixtures, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Use chrome-plated brass or copper tube, fittings, and valves in locations exposed to view.

Plain copper tube, fittings, and valves may be used in concealed locations.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install off-floor supports affixed to building substrate and attach wall-hanging fixtures, unlessotherwise indicated.

B. Install fixtures level and plumb.

C. Install water-supply piping with shutoff valve on supply to each fixture to be connected to water


distribution piping. Use ball, gate, or globe valve. Install valves in locations where they can beeasily reached for operation. Refer to Division 22 Section "General- Duty Valves for PlumbingPiping" for general-duty valves.

D. Install trap and waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be connected to sanitary drainage

system.

E. Install pipe escutcheons at wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations. Use deep- patternescutcheons where required to conceal protruding pipe fittings. Refer to Division 22 Section"Common Work Results for Plumbing" for escutcheons.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicategeneral arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Connect water supplies from water distribution piping to fixtures.

C. Connect drain piping from fixtures to drainage piping.

D. Ground equipment.

1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published

torque-tightening values. If manufacturer’s torque values are not indicated, use those

specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.


A. Water-Cooler Testing: After electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance withrequirements. Test and adjust controls and safeties.

B. Repair or replace malfunctioning units. Retest as specified above after repairs or replacements

are made.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust fixture flow regulators for proper flow and stream height.

B. Adjust water-cooler temperature settings.

3.7 CLEANING

A. After completing fixture installation, inspect unit. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt,and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish.

B. Clean fixtures, on completion of installation, according to manufacturer’s written instructions.

END OF SECTION

Building Addition & Renovations for Common Work Results for HVACThe Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 230500 - 1

SECTION 23 05 00

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

A.

RELATED DOCUMENTS

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and


Section.

B. The General Contractor and sub-contractors shall be responsible for coordinating withand scheduling the scope of work outlined in the specifications. In additionresponsibilities of this contractor include:

1. Coordination of all scopes of work between the General Contractor and all sub-

contractors at the start of construction. All parties shall meet to review the scope of

work, responsibilities of each party, establish timelines and critical milestones and

establish a process for distribution of documentation.

2. Submit all documentation including submittals and requests for information through

the General Contractor for review by other trades, the Engineer and the Architect.

3. Submit a proposed schedule for submittals, system coordination, system installation,

system testing and training for incorporation to the overall project schedule.4. Coordination of all items required to be provided by the General Contractor and sub-

contractors. Submit an agreed upon list indicating each item and associated datesfor each item to be completed.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following basic mechanical materials and methods to complementother Division 23 Sections.1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.

2. Concrete base construction requirements.

3. Escutcheons.4. Dielectric fittings.5. Mechanical sleeve seals.

6. Nonshrink grout for equipment installations.7. Field-fabricated metal and wood equipment supports.8. Installation requirements common to equipment specification sections.9. Cutting and patching.10. Touchup painting and finishing.

B. Pipe and pipe fitting materials are specified in Division 22 piping system Sections.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furredspaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above


ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawl spaces, and tunnels.

B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finishedoccupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.

C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors, or subject to outdoor ambienttemperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.

D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contactby building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts.

E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weatherconditions and physical contact by building occupants, but subject to outdoor ambienttemperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.

F. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:1. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.2. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic.3. NP: Nylon plastic.4. PE: Polyethylene plastic.

5. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

G. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials:1. CR: Chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic rubber.2. EPDM: Ethylene propylene diene terpolymer rubber.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For dielectric fittings and flexible connectors.


Comply with ASME A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field, colors, and viewing anglesof identification devices.

1.6 CODE COMPLIANCE

A. All work shall comply with the latest adopted State and Local Codes, as well as all Federal,State, and Municipal regulations. This includes but is not limited to the following:1. International Building Code2. International Mechanical Code

3. International Plumbing Code4. International Fire Code5. International Energy Conservation Code6. International Fuel Gas Code7. National Electric Code8. Local Code Amendments9. NFPA 90A and 90B

10. NFPA 9611. NFPA 13


12. NFPA 2013. NFPA 7214. NFPA 101


A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping,storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and prevent entrance of dirt, debris, andmoisture.

B. Protect stored pipes and tubes from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. Do not exceed

structural capacity of floor, if stored inside.

C. Protect flanges, fittings, and piping specialties from moisture and dirt.

D. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.

E. Protect all ductwork from dirt, debris and moisture. Ductwork shall have all openingscovered until system is operational. Ductwork shall not be stored in areas that are notcompletely sealed from the weather. All ductwork shall be stored elevated above the floorsurface. Any ductwork not protected shall be cleaned, treated or replaced according to levelof exposure.

1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate mechanical equipment installation with other building components.

B. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of

construction to allow for mechanical installations.

C. Review bar joist manufacturer shop drawings during the submittal review process andindicate locations and sizes of all required openings needed to accommodate ductwork,equipment, louvers, etc.

D. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured- in-place

concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed.

E. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment forefficient flow of the Work. Coordinate installation of large equipment requiring positioningbefore closing in building.

F. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors if mechanical items requiring accessare concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division08 Section "Access Doors."

G. Coordinate installation of identifying devices after completing covering and painting, ifdevices are applied to surfaces. Install identifying devices before installing acousticalceilings and similar concealment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.1 MANUFACTURERS


following:

1. Dielectric Flanges:

a. Capitol Manufacturing Co.

b. Central Plastics Co.c. Epco Sales Inc.d. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

2. Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits:

a. Calpico, Inc.b. Central Plastics Co.

3. Dielectric Couplings:

a. Calpico, Inc.b. Epco Sales, Inc.c. Metraflex Co.d. Lochinvar Corp.

4. Dielectric Nipples:

a. Epco Sales, Inc.b. Grinnell Corp.; Grinnell Supply Sales Co.c. Perfection Corp.d. Victaulic Co. of America.

5. Metal, Flexible Connectors:

a. ANAMET Industrial, Inc.b. Central Sprink, Inc.c. Flexicraft Industries.d. Flex-Weld, Inc.e. Grinnell Corp.; Grinnell Supply Sales Co.

f. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.g. McWane, Inc.; Tyler Pipe; Gustin-Bacon Div.h. Metraflex Co.i. Uniflex, Inc.

6. Rubber, Flexible Connectors:a. General Rubber Corp.b. Mercer Rubber Co.

c. Metraflex Co.d. Proco Products, Inc.e. Red Valve Co., Inc.f. Uniflex, Inc.

7. Mechanical Sleeve Seals:

a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.b. Calpico, Inc.c. Metraflex Co.d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

2.2 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS

A. Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for pipe and fitting materials and joining

methods.





B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of pipingsystem contents.1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness, unless

thickness or specific material is indicated.

a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast- bronze flanges.

b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.

2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-

face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32.

1. Alloy Sn95 or Alloy Sn94: Approximately 95 percent tin and 5 percent silver, with

0.10 percent lead content.

2. Alloy E: Approximately 95 percent tin and 5 percent copper, with 0.10 percentmaximum lead content.

3. Alloy HA: Tin-antimony-silver-copper zinc, with 0.10 percent maximum lead

content.

4. Alloy HB: Tin-antimony-silver-copper nickel, with 0.10 percent maximum lead

content.

5. Alloy Sb5: 95 percent tin and 5 percent antimony, with 0.20 percent maximum

lead content.

E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8.1. BCuP Series: Copper-phosphorus alloys.2. BAg1: Silver alloy.

F. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall

thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

G. Solvent Cements: Manufacturer's standard solvent cements for the following:1. ABS Piping: ASTM D 2235. (VOC content of 325 g/L or less when calculated

according to 40 CFR 59, subpart D – EPA Method 24).

2. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493 (VOC content of 490 g/L or less when calculated

according to 40 CFR 59, subpart D – EPA Method 24).

3. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564 (VOC content of 510 g/L or less when calculated

according to 40 CFR 59, subpart D – EPA Method 24). Include primer according to

ASTM F 656. (VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR

59, subpart D – EPA Method 24).

4. PVC to ABS Piping Transition: ASTM D 3138 (VOC content of 325 g/L or lesswhen calculated according to 40 CFR 59, subpart D – EPA Method 24).

H. Plastic Pipe Seals: ASTM F 477, elastomeric gasket.


I. Couplings: Iron-body sleeve assembly, fabricated to match OD of plain-end, pressure pipes.

1. Sleeve: ASTM A 126, Class B, gray iron.

2. Followers: ASTM A 47 malleable iron or ASTM A 536 ductile iron.3. Gaskets: Rubber.4. Bolts and Nuts: AWWA C111.

5. Finish: Enamel paint.


A. General: Assembly or fitting with insulating material isolating joined dissimilar metals, toprevent galvanic action and stop corrosion.

B. Description: Combination of copper alloy and ferrous; threaded, solder, plain, and weld-neck

end types and matching piping system materials.

C. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.

D. Revise pressure ratings and temperatures in five paragraphs below as required or add otheroptions for specific applications.

E. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300-psig

minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.

F. Dielectric-Flange Insulation Kits: Field-assembled, companion-flange assembly, full-face orring type. Components include neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene boltsleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers.1. Provide separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts for 150- or 300-psig

minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.

G. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplasticlining; threaded ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.

H. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplasticlining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 degF.

I. NSF certified when used in potable water systems.

J. Dielectric unions are not permitted for use.

2.5 PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Sleeves: The following materials are for wall, floor, slab, and roof penetrations:

1. Steel Sheet Metal: 0.0299-inch minimum thickness, galvanized, round tube closed

with welded longitudinal joint.

2. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.3. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with

plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.4. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange.


Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.

a. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.

B. Mechanical Sleeve Seals: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly to fill

annular space between pipe and sleeve.

1. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe.

Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

2. Pressure Plates: Include two for each sealing element.3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length

required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealingelement.

C. Escutcheons: Manufactured wall, ceiling, and floor plates; shallow type. Deep pattern styleto conceal protruding fittings and sleeves must be approved in writing prior to use.1. ID: Closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping.2. OD: Completely cover opening.3. Cast Brass: One piece, with set screw.

a. Finish: Polished chrome-plate.

2.6 GROUT

A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B.1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout,

nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exteriorapplications.

2. Design Mix: 5000-psig, 28-day compressive strength.

3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. General: Install piping as described below, unless piping Sections specify otherwise.Individual Division 22 piping Sections specify unique piping installation requirements.

B. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicategeneral location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangementswere used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other designconsiderations. Install piping as indicated, unless deviations to layout are approved onCoordination Drawings. Provide expansion devices as required by jurisdictional codes.Provide all miscellaneous, minor offsets required to accommodate other buildingcomponents and provide fully functional system.

C. Install all piping systems at indicated slope or code required slope if not indicated.

D. Install components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

E. Install piping in concealed interior and exterior locations, except in equipment rooms andservice areas.


F. Install piping free of sags and bends.

G. Install exposed interior and exterior piping at right angles or parallel to building walls.Diagonal runs are prohibited, unless otherwise indicated.

H. Install piping tight to slabs, beams, joists, columns, walls, and other building elements. Allowsufficient space above removable ceiling panels to allow for ceiling panel removal.

I. Install piping to allow application of insulation plus 1-inch clearance around insulation.

J. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit valve servicing.

K. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

L. Install couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions.

M. Install pipe escutcheons for pipe penetrations of concrete and masonry walls and wall boardpartitions.1. Chrome-Plated: Cast brass, one piece, with set screw, and polished chrome-

plated finish in exposed areas.2. Uninsulated Piping Floor Plates in Utility Areas: Cast-iron floor plates.

3. Insulated Piping: Cast brass or stamped steel; with concealed hinge, spring

clips, and chrome-plated finish.4. Piping in Utility Areas: Cast brass or stamped steel, with set-screw or spring clips.

N. Install steel pipe sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, andconcrete floor and roof slabs and steel sheetmetal sleeves in all other locations. Isolateheating hot and chilled water piping from building components at all penetrations with pipeinsulation.

O. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, and concrete floor

and roof slabs.1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.

a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areasor other wet areas 4 inches above finished floor level. Extend cast-ironsleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring isspecified.

2. Build sleeves into new walls and slabs as work progresses.3. Install sleeves two sizes larger than carried pipe and large enough to provide 1/4-

inch annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the

following sleeve materials:

a. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than 6-inch NPS.b. Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane

waterproofing. Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section ofcast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor level.Refer to Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing.

1) Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with no shrink, nonmetallic

grout.

4. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and

pipe or pipe insulation, using elastomeric joint sealants. Refer to Division 07

Section "Joint Sealants" for materials.

5. Use Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O, neutral-curing silicone sealant, unless


otherwise indicated.

P. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall, Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves andmechanical sleeve seals. Size sleeve for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe andsleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter.2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches in diameter and larger.

3. Assemble and install mechanical sleeve seals according to manufacturer's written

instructions. Tighten bolts that cause rubber sealing elements to expand and make

watertight seal.

Q. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and

floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestopping materials. Refer to

Division 07 Section "Firestopping" for materials.

R. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

S. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in

requirements.

T. Piping Joint Construction: Join pipe and fittings as follows and as specifically required in

individual piping specification Sections:1. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

2. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings

before assembly.

3. Soldered Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Soldering Manual," Chapter

"The Soldering of Pipe and Tube"; or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."4. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," Chapter

"Pipe and Tube."

5. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME

B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to

remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:a. Note internal length of threads in fittings or valve ends, and proximity of

internal seat or wall, to determine how far pipe should be threaded into joint.b. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads, unless

dry seal threading is specified.

c. Align threads at point of assembly.

d. Tighten joint with wrench. Apply wrench to valve end into which pipe is

being threaded.

e. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are

corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open

welds.6. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, "Recommended

Practices and Procedures for Welding Low Carbon Steel Pipe," using qualifiedprocesses and welding operators according to "Quality Assurance" Article.

7. Flanged Joints: Align flange surfaces parallel. Select appropriate gasket material,

size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically

positioned. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of

flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt

threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly using torque wrench.


U. Piping Connections: Make connections according to the following, unless otherwiseindicated:1. Install nipple fittings, in piping 2-inch NPS and smaller, adjacent to each valve and

at final connection to each piece of equipment with 2-inch NPS or smaller threadedpipe connection. Dielectric unions are not permitted.

2. Install flanges, in piping 2-1/2-inch NPS and larger, adjacent to flanged valves andat final connection to each piece of equipment with flanged pipe connection.

3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric nipple fittings and flanges to connect piping

materials of dissimilar metals.

4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping

materials of dissimilar metals.

3.2 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install equipment to provide maximum possible headroom, if mounting heights are notindicated.

B. Install equipment according to approved submittal data. Portions of the Work are shown onlyin diagrammatic form. Refer conflicts to Architect.

C. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and

components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement ofcomponents. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference toother installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations. Provide the greater ofcode, manufacturer or drawing clearances in all cases.

E. Install equipment giving right of way to piping installed at required slope.

F. Install flexible connectors on equipment side of shutoff valves, horizontally and parallel toequipment shafts if possible.

3.3 PAINTING AND FINISHING

A. Refer to Division 09 Section "Painting" for paint materials, surface preparation, andapplication of paint.

B. Paint all louvers to match the exterior wall color. Coordinate color with Architect.

C. Paint all plumbing vents-through-roof to match the roof color. Coordinate color with Architect

3.4 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE

A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, andelevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment.


B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."

3.5 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces

necessary for mechanical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of trades

involved.

B. Repair cut surfaces to match adjacent surfaces. All repairs shall be performed by

individuals skilled in their particular trade.

3.6 GROUTING

A. Install nonmetallic, nonshrink, grout for mechanical equipment base bearing surfaces,pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors. Mix grout according tomanufacturer's written instructions.

B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.

C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.

D. Avoid air entrapment during placing of grout.

E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.

F. Place grout on concrete bases to provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.

G. Place grout around anchors.

H. Cure placed grout according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.7 ELECTRICAL/MECHANICAL COORDINATION

A. Furnish electrical services to Division 23 equipment as outlined below.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, all mechanical equipment motors and controls shall befurnished, set in place, and wired By the Division 23 Contractor. Contractor shouldnote that the intent of this wiring schedule is to have the Division 23 Contractorresponsible for coordinating all control wiring as outlined, whether or not specificallycalled for by the mechanical or electrical drawings and specifications. Comply with theapplicable requirements of Division 23 for electrical work of this Division 26 which isnot otherwise specified. No extras will be allowed for Contractor's failure to provide forthese required items. The Division 26 Contractor shall refer to the Division 23specifications and plans for all power wiring and shall advise the Architect/Engineer ofany discrepancies prior to bidding.


Item Furnished By Set By Power Wiring Control Wiring

Equipment Motors MC MC EC ---

Motor Starters and Overload Heaters(See Note 1)

MC EC EC MC

Fused & Non-fused Disconnect

Switches, Thermal Overload Heaters

(See Note 5)

EC EC EC ---

Manual Operating & Speed Switches(carrying load currents) (See Note 3 &4)

MC MC MC MC

Control Relays & Transformer (SeeNote 2)

MC MC MC MC

Thermostats (Line Voltage) including

Aquastats

MC MC MC MC

Temperature Control Panels MC MC MC MC

Building Fire Alarm System Fire

& Smoke Detectors, including Relays

for Fan Shutdown

EC EC EC EC

Motor & Solenoid Valves, DamperMotors, PE & EP Switches, ControlValves, Fan Interlocking Wiring,Low Voltage Thermostats

MC MC MC MC

Duct Detection (Note 6) MC MC --- EC

Pilot Lights (Manually operatedSwitches not carrying Load Currents)(See Note 3)

MC MC --- MC


Item Furnished By Set By Power Wiring Control Wiring

Fire Sprinkler System Alarms,Tamper Switches, Flow Switches,Pressure Switches and Fire AlarmSystems Tie-ins to provide acomplete Fire Protection System

FPC FPC --- EC

Temporary Heating Connections MC MC EC MC

Smoke Dampers and Combination

Fire/Smoke Dampers MC MC EC EC

MC = Mechanical Contractor Under Division 23 of the WorkEC = Electrical Contractor Under Division 26 of the WorkFPC = Fire Protection Contractor

Notes for the Electrical/Mechanical Coordination Schedule.1. All starters, other than those noted on the Electrical Drawings shall be

furnished under Division 23. All starters furnished under Division 23 shall becomplete with three overload heaters and shall conform to NEC and NEMArequirements. All starters shall have 65,000 AIC rating.

2. Control relays and control transformers shall be furnished under Division23 except where furnishing such items are specifically required under Division26 specifications and/or drawings or with packaged control of systems underDivision 22.

3. Pushbuttons stations carrying full load current are to be wired under Division

26 of the work.

4. Exhaust Fans: The Electrical Contractor under Division 26 of the work shall

furnish and install circuits, feeders and disconnect switches (where specified),

and make all connections to motors and controls unless interlocked with other

mechanical equipment or exhaust fans in locations indicated. Where exhaust

fans are switched with lights, a two-pole toggle switch will be provided under

Division 26. Where exhaust fans are interlocked with other mechanical

equipment, the interlock wiring will be furnished by the Mechanical Contractor

under Division 23.

5. Some equipment will be furnished with integral disconnecting means.

Refer to the Mechanical Equipment Schedule on the drawings for additional

information.6. Electrical contractor provides control wiring to fire alarm panel and from fire alarm

panel to mechanical unit.

C. All temperature control conduit and wiring shall be furnished and installed under Division 23.All motorized damper equipment shall be furnished and installed under Division 23 and 120volt power for controls wired under Division 23.

D. Control wiring includes all low voltage and 120 volt wiring.

END OF SECTION

Building Addition & Renovations for Common Motor Requirements for HVAC EquipmentThe Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 230513 - 1

SECTION 23 05 13COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions

and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes basic requirements for factory-installed and field-installed motors.

B. Related Sections include the following:1. Division 23 Section “Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for

mounting motors and vibration isolation and seismic-control devices.

2. Division 23 Sections for application of motors and reference to specific motor requirements

for motor-driven equipment.

3. Division 26 Section "Transient Voltage Suppression" for low-voltage power, control, and

communication surge suppressors.4. Division 26 Section "Fuses" for fuses in fusible switches.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Factory-Installed Motor: A motor installed by motorized-equipment manufacturer as a componentof equipment.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data for Motors and Controllers: For each type and size of motor, provide nameplate dataand ratings; shipping, installed, and operating weights; mounting arrangements; size, type, andlocation of winding terminations; conduit entry and ground lug locations; and information oncoatings or finishes.

B. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

C. Shop Drawings: For each enclosed controller.1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required clearances and

service space around equipment. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment

features, and ratings. Include the following:

a. Enclosure types and details.b. Nameplate legends.c. Short-circuit current rating of integrated unit.d. UL listing for series rating of overcurrent protective devices in combination controllers.

e. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent


protective devices in combination controllers.

D. Maintenance Data: For enclosed controllers and components to include in maintenance manualsspecified in Division 01. In addition to requirements specified in Division 01 Section "CloseoutProcedures," include the following:1. Routine maintenance requirements for enclosed controllers and all installed components.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities havingjurisdiction, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, as documentedaccording to ASTM E 548.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain field-installed motors of a single type through one source from a singlemanufacturer.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked forintended use.

D. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices. Provide motors that are:1. Compatible with the following:2. Magnetic controllers.

3. Matched to torque and horsepower requirements of the load.

4. Matched to ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.

B. Coordinate motor support with requirements for driven load; access for maintenance and motorreplacement; installation of accessories, belts, belt guards; and adjustment of sliding rails for belttensioning.

C. Coordinate layout and installation of enclosed controllers with other construction including conduit,piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and requiredclearances for equipment access doors and panels.

D. Coordinate features of enclosed controllers and accessory devices with pilot devices and control

circuits to which they connect.

E. Coordinate features, accessories, and functions of each enclosed controller with ratings andcharacteristics of supply circuit, motor, required control sequence, and duty cycle of motor andload.


A. Store enclosed controllers indoors in clean, dry space with uniform temperature to preventcondensation. Protect enclosed controllers from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive


substances, and physical damage.

B. If stored in areas subjected to weather, cover enclosed controllers to protect from weather, dirt,dust, corrosive substances, and physical damage. Remove loose packing and flammable materialsfrom inside controllers; install electric heating of sufficient wattage to prevent condensation.

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged withprotective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.1. Spare Fuses: Not less than one set of three of each type and rating.2. Indicating Lights: Two of each type installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MOTOR REQUIREMENTS

A. Motor requirements apply to factory-installed motors except as follows:

1. Different ratings, performance, or characteristics for a motor are specified in another

Section.

2. Manufacturer for a factory-installed motor requires ratings, performance, or characteristics,

other than those specified in this Section, to meet performance specified.

2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS

A. Motors 3/4 HP and Larger: Three phase. (Unless otherwise noted)

B. Motors Smaller Than 3/4 HP: Single phase with thermal protection. (Unless otherwise noted)

C. Frequency Rating: 60 Hz.

D. Voltage Rating: NEMA standard voltage selected to operate on nominal circuit voltage to whichmotor is connected.

E. Service Factor: 1.15 for open dripproof motors; 1.0 for totally enclosed motors.

F. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 105 deg F and at altitude of 3300 feet above sea

level.

G. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loadsat designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence,and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.

H. Enclosure: Open dripproof.

I. Starters: Provide starters of appropriate duty and rating classification for all motors.Combination starters/disconnects shall be provided for all equipment where disconnect and starterare mounted in an interior, accessible location. Starters for equipment with exterior disconnects


shall be separate from the disconnect.

J. Grounding: All motors supplied by variable frequency drives shall be grounded in the factory.Acceptable grounding methods include grounding brushes, Mercotac electrical slip rings, or Aegisgrounding rings.

2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS

A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.

B. Efficiency: Premium efficiency, meeting current ASHRAE energy conservation standards. Highefficiency for motors 1 HP and larger.

C. Stator: Copper windings, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Multispeed motors shall have separate winding for each speed.

E. Rotor: Squirrel cage, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Bearings: Double-shielded, prelubricated ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.

G. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating, unless otherwise indicated.

H. Insulation: Class F, unless otherwise indicated.

I. Code Letter Designation:1. Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or G.2. Motors Smaller Than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.

J. Enclosure: Cast iron for motors 7.5 hp and larger; rolled steel for motors smaller than 7.5 hp.

1. Finish: Manufacturer’s standard painted finish.

2.4 POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Motors Used with Reduced-Inrush Controllers: Match wiring connection requirements for controller

with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box, suited to control method.

B. Rugged-Duty Motors: Totally enclosed, with 1.25 minimum service factor, greased bearings,integral condensate drains, and capped relief vents. Windings insulated with nonhygroscopicmaterial.1. Finish: Chemical-resistant paint over corrosion-resistant primer.

C. Source Quality Control: Perform the following tests on each motor according to NEMA MG 1:1. Measure winding resistance.2. Read no-load current and speed at rated voltage and frequency.3. Measure locked rotor current at rated frequency.

4. Perform high-potential test.

2.5 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS


A. Type: One of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific motor application:1. Permanent-split capacitor.2. Split-phase start, capacitor run.3. Capacitor start, capacitor run.

B. Shaded-Pole Motors: For motors 1/20 hp and smaller only.

C. Efficiency: Efficiency meeting current ASHRAE energy conservation standards. High efficiency formotors 1 HP and larger.

D. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor whenwinding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation.Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns to normalrange.

E. Bearings: Ball type for belt-connected motors and other motors with high radial forces on motor

shaft; sealed, prelubricated-sleeve type for other single-phase motors.

F. Source Quality Control: Perform the following tests on each motor according to NEMA MG 1:1. Measure winding resistance.2. Read no-load current and speed at rated voltage and frequency.3. Measure locked rotor current at rated frequency.4. Perform high-potential test.

2.6 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER: (MOTORS)

A. Except where item of mechanical equipment (which otherwise complies with requirements) mustbe integrally equipped with motor produced by another manufacturer, provide motors formechanical equipment manufactured by one of the following:1. Baldor Electric Co.2. Eaton Crop.

3. General Electric Co.4. Lincoln Electric Co.5. Magne Tek6. Marathon Electric Mfg. Corp.7. Reliance Electric Co.

8. Westinghouse Electric Corp.

2.7 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: (STARTERS)

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:1. Manual and Magnetic Enclosed Controllers:

a. General Electrical Distribution & Control.b. Siemens/Furnas Controls.

c. Cutler-Hammer.

2.8 MAGNETIC ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS (STARTERS)


A. Description: NEMA ICS 2, Class A, full voltage, nonreversing, across the line, unless otherwise

indicated.

B. All starters for polyphase motors (3 HP and larger) shall be provided with phase protection, to

protect against loss of phase and phase reversal.

C. Control Circuit: 120 V; obtained from equipment control system with a control power source or

transformer of sufficient capacity to operate connected pilot, indicating and control devices, plus

100 percent spare capacity.

D. Combination Controller: Factory-assembled combination controller and disconnect switch.

1. Fusible Disconnecting Means: NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, fusible switch with rejection-type

fuse clips rated for fuses. Select and size fuses to provide Type 2 protection according to

IEC 947-4-1, as certified by a nationally recognized testing laboratory.

2. Nonfusible Disconnecting Means: NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, nonfusible switch.

E. Adjustable Overload Relay: Dip switch selectable for motor running overload protection with NEMAICS 2, Class 20 tripping characteristic, and selected to protect motor against voltage and currentunbalance and single phasing. Provide relay with Class II ground- fault protection, with start andrun delays to prevent nuisance trip on starting.

F. Solid-State, Reduced-Voltage Controller: NEMA ICS 2, suitable for use with NEMA MG 1, DesignB, polyphase, medium induction motors.1. Adjustable acceleration rate control utilizing voltage or current ramp, and adjustable starting

torque control with up to 500 percent current limitation for 20 seconds.

2. Surge suppressor in solid-state power circuits providing 3-phase protection against damage

from supply voltage surges 10 percent or more above nominal line voltage.

3. LED indicators showing motor and control status, including the following conditions:

a. Control power available.

b. Controller on.c. Overload trip.d. Loss of phase.e. Shorted silicon-controlled rectifier.

4. Automatic voltage-reduction controls to reduce voltage when motor is running at light load.

5. Motor running contactor operating automatically when full voltage is applied to motor.

2.9 ENCLOSURES

A. Description: Surface-mounted cabinets as indicated. NEMA 250, Type 1, unless otherwiseindicated to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.1. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

2. Kitchen Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel.3. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.

2.10 ACCESSORIES

A. Devices shall be factory installed in controller enclosure, unless otherwise indicated.


B. Push-Button Stations, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches: NEMA ICS 2, heavy-duty type.

C. Stop and Lockout Push-Button Station: Momentary-break, push-button station with a factory-applied hasp arranged so padlock can be used to lock push button in depressed position withcontrol circuit open.

D. Control Relays: Auxiliary and adjustable time-delay relays.

E. Elapsed Time Meters: Heavy duty with digital readout in hours.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to receive field-installed motors for compliance with requirements, installation

tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine roughing-in of conduit systems to verify actual locations of conduit connections before

motor installation.


3.2 APPLICATIONS

A. Select features of each enclosed controller to coordinate with ratings and characteristics of supplycircuit and motor; required control sequence; duty cycle of motor, drive, and load; and configurationof pilot device and control circuit affecting controller functions.

B. Select horsepower rating of controllers to suit motor controlled.

3.3 MOTOR INSTALLATION

A. Anchor each motor assembly to base, adjustable rails, or other support, arranged and sizedaccording to manufacturer's written instructions. Attach by bolting. Level and align with loadtransfer link.

B. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 22 Section "Vibration and

Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

3.4 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION

A. See Division 26 Section "Common Work Results for Electrical" for general installation

requirements.

B. For control equipment at walls, bolt units to wall or mount on lightweight structural-steel channels


bolted to wall. For controllers not at walls, provide freestanding racks complying with Division 26Section "Common Work Results for Electrical."

C. Install freestanding equipment on concrete bases complying with Division 03 Section "Cast-in-

Place Concrete."

D. Enclosed Controller Fuses: Install fuses in each fusible switch. Comply with requirements in

Division 26 Section "Fuses."

3.5 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Install wiring between enclosed controllers according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical

Power Conductors and Cables."

B. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures.

C. Connect hand-off-automatic switch and other automatic-control devices where applicable.

1. Connect selector switches to bypass only manual- and automatic-control devices that have

no safety functions when switch is in hand position.

2. Connect selector switches with enclosed controller circuit in both hand and automatic

positions for safety-type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, high-

temperature cutouts, and motor overload protectors.


A. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:

1. Run each motor with its controller. Demonstrate correct rotation, alignment, and speed at

motor design load.2. Test interlocks and control features for proper operation.3. Verify that current in each phase is within nameplate rating.4. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed controller bus.

B. Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing:

1. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in NETA

ATS, Section 7.15.1. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance;

otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

C. Field Service: (Controllers) Inspect field-assembled components and equipment

installation, including pretesting and adjusting solid-state controllers.1. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:

a. Test procedures used.b. Test results that comply with requirements.

c. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to

achieve compliance with requirements.

3.7 ADJUSTING


A. Align motors, bases, shafts, pulleys and belts. Tension belts according to manufacturer's written

instructions.

3.8 CLEANING

A. After completing equipment installation, inspect unit components. Remove paint splatters and

other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish.

B. Clean motors, on completion of installation, according to manufacturer’s written instructions.

3.9 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Verify that enclosed controllers are installed and connected according to the Contract Documents.

B. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.10 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner’s maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain enclosed controllers.1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting and

stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining equipment and schedules.

2. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 01 Section "Operation and

Maintenance Data."

3. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days of advance

notice.

END OF SECTION

Building Addition & Renovations for Hangers & Supports for HVAC Piping & EquipmentThe Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 230529 - 1

SECTION 23 05 29HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes hangers and supports for mechanical system piping and equipment.


1. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for materials for attaching hangers and supports

to building structure.2. Division 21 Sections on fire-suppression piping for fire-suppression pipe hangers.

3. Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and

Equipment" for vibration isolation and seismic restraint devices.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for the Valve and Fittings Industry.

B. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers andSupports."


A. Design channel support systems for piping to support multiple pipes capable of supporting


B. Design heavy-duty steel trapezes for piping to support multiple pipes capable of supporting


1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of pipe hanger, channel support system component, and thermal-

hanger shield insert indicated.

B. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and operators.



A. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure VesselCode: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

B. Engineering Responsibility: Design and calculations for each multiple pipe support,

trapeze, and seismic restraint by a qualified professional engineer.

1. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to

practice in jurisdiction where the Project is located and who is experienced in providing

engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those

performed for installations of hangers and supports that are similar to those indicated for

this Project in material, design, and extent.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


following:

1. Pipe Hangers:

a. AAA Technology and Specialties Co., Inc.

b. B-Line Systems, Inc.c. Carpenter & Patterson, Inc.d. Empire Tool & Manufacturing Co., Inc.e. Globe Pipe Hanger Products, Inc.f. Grinnell Corp.

g. GS Metals Corp.h. Michigan Hanger Co., Inc.i. National Pipe Hanger Corp.j. PHD Manufacturing, Inc.k. PHS Industries, Inc.

l. Piping Technology & Products, Inc.

2. Channel Support Systems:

a. B-Line Systems, Inc.b. Grinnell Corp.; Power-Strut Unit.c. GS Metals Corp.

d. Michigan Hanger Co., Inc.; O-Strut Div.e. National Pipe Hanger Corp.f. Thomas & Betts Corp.g. Unistrut Corp.h. Wesanco, Inc.

3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts:

a. Carpenter & Patterson, Inc.

b. Michigan Hanger Co., Inc.

c. PHS Industries, Inc.


d. Pipe Shields, Inc.

e. Rilco Manufacturing Co., Inc.f. Value Engineered Products, Inc.

4. Powder-Actuated Fastener Systems:

a. Gunnebo Fastening Corp.b. Hilti, Inc.

c. ITW Ramset/Red Head.d. Masterset Fastening Systems, Inc.


A. Pipe Hangers, Supports, and Components: MSS SP-58, factory-fabricated components. Referto "Hanger and Support Applications" Article in Part 3 for where to use specific hanger andsupport types.

1. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: For piping and equipment that will not have field- applied

finish.

2. Nonmetallic Coatings: On attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in

direct contact with copper tubing.

B. Channel Support Systems: MFMA-2, factory-fabricated components for field assembly.

1. Coatings: Manufacturer’s standard finish, unless bare metal surfaces are indicated.

2. Nonmetallic Coatings: On attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are indirect contact with copper tubing.

C. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: 100-psi minimum compressive-strength insulation, encased insheet metal shield.1. Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type I cellular glass with vapor barrier or water-

repellent-treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate with vapor barrier.

2. Material for Hot Piping: ASTM C 552, Type I cellular glass or water-repellent-

treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate.

3. For Trapeze or Clamped System: Insert and shield cover entire circumference of pipe.

4. For Clevis or Band Hanger: Insert and shield cover over lower 180 degrees of pipe.

5. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below



A. Powder-Actuated Drive-Pin Fasteners: Powder-actuated-type, drive-pin attachments with pull-

out and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

B. Mechanical-Anchor Fasteners: Insert-type attachments with pull-out and shear capacities

appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

C. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars, black and galvanized.


D. Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, factory-mixed and -packaged, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry,hydraulic-cement grout.1. Characteristics: Post hardening and volume adjusting; recommended for both interior

and exterior applications.2. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.

3. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS

A. Specific hanger requirements are specified in Sections specifying equipment and systems.

B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in

piping system Specification Sections.

C. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified inpiping system Specification Sections, install the following types:1. Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or

insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.

2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of 120 to 450 deg F pipes, NPS 4

to NPS 16, requiring up to 4 inches of insulation.3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes,

NPS 3/4 to NPS 24, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation.4. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes, NPS 1/2

to NPS 24, if little or no insulation is required.

5. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to allow off-

center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.

6. Adjustable Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of

noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 8.

7. Adjustable Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated

stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.

8. Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of noninsulated stationary


9. Adjustable Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of noninsulated

stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 2.10. Split Pipe-Ring with or without Turnbuckle-Adjustment Hangers (MSS Type 11): For

suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 8. Copper pipe rings shallbe used on copper pipe. Painted steel pipe rings are not approved for use.

11. Extension Hinged or Two-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of

noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 3.

12. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipe, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.

13. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or

contraction.14. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel

pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.


15. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36, with

steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange and with U-bolt to retain

pipe.

16. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for pipes,

NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36, if vertical adjustment is required, with steel pipebase stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.

D. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping systemSpecification Sections, install the following types:1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to

NPS 20.2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers,

NPS 3/4 to NPS 20, if longer ends are required for riser clamps.

E. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping

system Specification Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads.2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings.

4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of

building attachments.

5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.

F. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system

Specification Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend

pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.

2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar- joist

construction to attach to top flange of structural shape.3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams,

channels, or angles.

4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.

5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads

are considerable and rod sizes are large.6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.

7. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to

flange edge.

8. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams.

9. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel I-

beams for heavy loads.

10. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel I-

beams for heavy loads, with link extensions.

11. Malleable Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to

structural steel.

12. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from above

by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb.


b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb.c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.

13. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.14. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required.

15. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear

horizontal movement where head room is limited.

G. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system

Specification Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids withinsulation that matches adjoining insulation.

2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended by manufacturer to prevent

crushing insulation.

3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe, 360-degree insert of high-

density, 100-psi minimum compressive-strength, water-repellent-treated calcium silicate

or cellular-glass pipe insulation, same thickness as adjoining insulation with vapor barrier

and encased in 360-degree sheet metal shield.


A. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stressesfrom movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment. Support of piping and ductworksystems shall be distributed across the building structural system. Alternate hanger locationswhen multiple pipes are supported in one area to ensure single trusses are not independentlybearing the weight of multiple pipes in any one area. Additional structural support systems shallbe provided to distribute load when point loads exceed the rating of the building structuralsystem. All high point loads shall be submitted to the structural engineer for review andapproval. Provide hanger within 12” of all changes in direction.

B. Coordinate and follow mechanical support building attachment requirements of manufacturersof building structural systems. of vertical expansion bolts in holes drilled in plank is notpermitted. In general, the vertical rods shall extend up through the top of the plank and shall beattached with a bolt and steel plates sized per the requirements of the plank manufacturer forthe range of loads to be incurred. Furnish shop drawings of proposed attachment methodswhich have been reviewed and approved by manufacturer of precast concrete plank.

C. Support hangers from concrete inserts in poured slabs or beam clamps. Furnish, located andset such inserts. Construct inserts of malleable iron or pressed steel with space for rods of allsizes. Install inserts for pipes 3” and larger in size with a reinforcing rod 5/8” in diameter runthrough a slot in the insert specifically provided for this purpose.

D. If piping is required in a space where no inserts have been provided, drill holes in the slab orplank (subject to structural engineer’s prior approval) and provide rods and hanger attached toan approved fishplate or install 2 Star No. 7000 shields but the hanger spacing definedhereinbefore to be reduced to 5 feet. The carrying capacity and size of each shield to becalculated on the basis of the spacing indicated above the minimum size to be 3/8 inch. Installadditional shields of the same size so that the number of hangers are of adequate size tosupport the loads which they carry. Shields may be used in concrete slabs only.


E. Regardless of the type of construction (i.e., concrete, concrete-deck-steel, concrete plank, woodor other variations) take particular care to support main lines and large and heavy pipes in anapproved manner, including the furnishing and installation of supplementary steel, if required.Supplementary steel shall be mill-rolled sections. Submit shop drawings, indicating supportmethods, point loadings to the building structure and hanger locations for review.

F. Pipe Hanger and Support Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install

hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from

building structure.

G. Channel Support System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and supporttogether on field-assembled channel systems.1. Field assemble and install according to manufacturer's written instructions.

H. Heavy-Duty Steel Trapeze Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping

and support together on field-fabricated, heavy-duty trapezes.1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe

size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above

for individual pipe hangers.

2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being supported.

Weld steel according to AWS D-1.1.

I. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Space

attachments within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-69. Install additional

attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, and expansion

joints, and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed;

fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

J. Install powder-actuated drive-pin fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completelycured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fastenersaccording to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual. Verify acceptability ofinstallation location with building structural engineer prior to use.

K. Install mechanical-anchor fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured.Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions. Verify acceptability ofinstallation location with building structural engineer prior to use.

L. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, andother accessories.

M. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of pipingsystems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action ofexpansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

N. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximumpipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," is not exceeded.

O. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following:


1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through

insulation.

b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield

insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.9.

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39 protection saddles, if insulation without vapor barrier isindicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-

distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40 protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier.

Shields shall span arc of 180 degrees.


distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:

a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick.b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.c. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.d. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick.e. NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick.

5. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood inserts.

6. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield.

7. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.

P. Copper hangers and supports shall be used with all copper piping.

3.3 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure above or to supportequipment above floor.

B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface.

3.4 METAL FABRICATION

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for heavy-duty steel trapezes and equipmentsupports.

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field-weld connections that cannot beshop-welded because of shipping size limitations.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearanceand quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion

resistance of base metals.


2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.

3. Remove welding flux immediately.

4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours

of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve

indicated slope of pipe.

3.6 PAINTING

A. Touching Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areasimmediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shoppainting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

B. Touching Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded

areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 09 Section "Painting."

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply

galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

D. Utilize paints and coatings that comply with the limits for VOC content when calculatedaccording to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D, and Section 018113 LEED & Sustainable DesignRequirements. VOC content of Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metalsshould not exceed 250 g/L.

3.7 PIPE HANGER AND SUPPORT SPACING SCHEDULE:

Material Installation Pipe Size Max. HangerSpacing

Min. RodDia.

CopperHorizontal

3/4” 5 feet 1/4”

1” to 1-1/4” 6 feet 1/4”

1-1/2 to 2” 8 feet 3/8”

Steel Horizontal

2-1/2” 10 feet 3/8”

3” 12 feet 3/8”

4” 14 feet 1/2”


6” 17 feet 1/2”

8” 19 feet 5/8”

Copper, Steel &Plastic

Vertical All Sizes 10 feet or everyfloor

N/A

Plastic Pipe Horizontal All sizes Recommended permanufacturer

3/8"

Note 1: Maximum spacing may be increased to 10 feet where ten foot lengths of pipe are installed.

END OF SECTION

Building Addition & Renovations for Vibration & Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping & EquipmentThe Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 230548 - 1

SECTION 23 05 48

VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and


Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:1. Isolation pads.2. Isolation mounts.3. Restrained elastomeric isolation mounts.4. Housed spring mounts.

5. Elastomeric hangers.6. Spring hangers.7. Spring hangers with vertical-limit stops.8. Pipe riser resilient supports.9. Resilient pipe guides.

10. Restrained vibration isolation roof-curb rails.11. Seismic snubbers.12. Restraining braces and cables.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. IBC: International BuildingCode.

B. ICC-ES: ICC-EvaluationService.

C. OSHPD: Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development for the State of

California.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


1. Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration

isolation device.

2. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for

each type and size of seismic-restraint component used.a. Tabulate types and sizes of seismic restraints, complete with report

numbers and rated strength in tension and shear as evaluated by an

agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

b. Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and

compliance with requirements.


3. Interlocking Snubbers: Include ratings for horizontal, vertical, and combined loads.

B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For vibration isolation and seismic-restraint detailsindicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, includinganalysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible fortheir preparation.1. Design Calculations: Calculate static and dynamic loading due to equipment

weight and operation, seismic and wind forces required to select vibration

isolators, seismic and wind restraints, and for designing vibration isolation

bases.a. Coordinate design calculations with wind load calculations required for

equipment mounted outdoors. Comply with requirements in otherDivision 23 Sections for equipment mounted outdoors.

2. Riser Supports: Include riser diagrams and calculations showing anticipatedexpansion and contraction at each support point, initial and final loads onbuilding structure, spring deflection changes, and seismic loads. Includecertification that riser system has been examined for excessive stress and thatnone will exist.

3. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail overall dimensions, including anchorages

and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary

motor slides and rails, base weights, equipment static loads, power

transmission, component misalignment, and cantilever loads.

4. Seismic- and Wind-Restraint Details:

a. Design Analysis: To support selection and arrangement of seismic

and wind restraints. Include calculations of combined tensile and shear

loads.

b. Details: Indicate fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachments of

restraints to the restrained items and to the structure. Show attachment

locations, methods, and spacings. Identify components, list their

strengths, and indicate directions and values of forces transmitted to the

structure during seismic events. Indicate association with vibration

isolation devices.

c. Coordinate seismic-restraint and vibration isolation details with wind-

restraint details required for equipment mounted outdoors. Comply with

requirements in other Division 23 Sections for equipment

mounted outdoors.

d. Preapproval and Evaluation Documentation: By an agency acceptable toauthorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum ratings of restraint itemsand the basis for approval (tests or calculations).

C. Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of seismic bracing for HVAC piping andequipment with other systems and equipment in the vicinity, including other supportsand seismic restraints.

D. Welding certificates.

E. Qualification Data: For professional engineer and testing agency.

F. Field quality-control test reports.

G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air-mounting systems to include in operation

and maintenance manuals.



A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience andcapability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a nationally recognized testinglaboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable toauthorities having jurisdiction.

B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural

Welding Code - Steel."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATORS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one ofthe following:1. Ace Mountings Co., Inc.

2. Amber/Booth Company, Inc.3. California Dynamics Corporation.4. Isolation Technology, Inc.5. Kinetics Noise Control.6. Mason Industries.

7. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc.8. Vibration Isolation.9. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.

B. Pads: Arranged in single or multiple layers of sufficient stiffness for uniform loadingover pad area, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized-steel baseplates, andfactory cut to sizes that match requirements of supported equipment.1. Resilient Material: Oil- and water-resistant neoprene.

C. Mounts: Double-deflection type, with molded, oil-resistant rubber, hermetically sealedcompressed fiberglass, or neoprene isolator elements with factory-drilled,encapsulated top plate for bolting to equipment and with baseplate for bolting tostructure. Color-code or otherwise identify to indicate capacity range.1. Materials: Cast-ductile-iron or welded steel housing containing two separate

and opposing, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene elements that prevent centralthreaded element and attachment hardware from contacting the housing duringnormal operation.

2. Neoprene: Shock-absorbing materials compounded according to the standard


D. Restrained Mounts: All-directional mountings with seismic restraint.

1. Materials: Cast-ductile-iron or welded steel housing containing two separate

and opposing, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene elements that prevent central

threadedelement and attachment hardware from contacting the housing during normaloperation.

2. Neoprene: Shock-absorbing materials compounded according to the standard


E. Spring Isolators: Freestanding, laterally stable, open-spring isolators.







without deformation or failure.5. Baseplates: Factory drilled for bolting to structure and bonded to 1/4-inch- thick,

rubber isolator pad attached to baseplate underside. Baseplates shall limit floor

load to 500 psig.

6. Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and

cap screw to fasten and level equipment.

F. Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open-spring isolators with seismic or

limit-stop restraint.1. Housing: Steel with resilient vertical-limit stops to prevent spring extension due

to weight being removed; factory-drilled baseplate bonded to 1/4-inch- thick,neoprene or rubber isolator pad attached to baseplate underside; and adjustableequipment mounting and leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation.

2. Restraint: Seismic or limit stop as required for equipment and authorities having

jurisdiction.



4. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.5. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.



G. Housed Spring Mounts: Housed spring isolator with integral seismic snubbers.1. Housing: Ductile-iron or steel housing to provide all-directional seismic restraint.

2. Base: Factory drilled for bolting to structure.

3. Snubbers: Vertically adjustable to allow a maximum of 1/4-inch travel up or

down before contacting a resilient collar.

H. Elastomeric Hangers: Single or double-deflection type, fitted with molded, oil-resistantelastomeric isolator elements bonded to steel housings with threaded connections forhanger rods. Color-code or otherwise identify to indicate capacity range.

I. Spring Hangers: Combination coil-spring and elastomeric-insert hanger with spring and

insert in compression.

1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for








without deformation or failure.6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel-washer-

reinforced cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame.7. Self-centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and



J. Spring Hangers with Vertical-Limit Stop: Combination coil-spring and elastomeric-

insert hanger with spring and insert in compression and with a vertical-limit stop.

1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for




the spring at rated load.3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.




6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene.

7. Adjustable Vertical Stop: Steel washer with neoprene washer "up-stop" on

lower threaded rod.

8. Self-centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and


K. Thrust Limits: Combination coil spring and elastomeric insert with spring and insert incompression and with a load stop. Include rod and angle-iron brackets for attaching toequipment.1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded rods and to allow for a

maximum of 30 degrees of angular rod misalignment without binding orreducingisolation efficiency.


the spring at rated load.3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of the rated vertical stiffness.5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed,

without deformation or failure.6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene.

7. Coil Spring: Factory set and field adjustable for a maximum of 1/4-

inch movement at start and stop.

L. Pipe Riser Resilient Support: All-directional, acoustical pipe anchor consisting of 2steel tubes separated by a minimum of 1/2-inch- thick neoprene. Include steel andneoprene vertical-limit stops arranged to prevent vertical travel in both directions.Design support for a maximum load on the isolation material of 500 psig and for equalresistance in all directions.

M. Resilient Pipe Guides: Telescopic arrangement of 2 steel tubes or post and sleevearrangement separated by a minimum of 1/2-inch- thick neoprene. Where clearancesare not readily visible, a factory-set guide height with a shear pin to allow verticalmotion due to pipe expansion and contraction shall be fitted. Shear pin shall beremovable and reinsertable to allow for selection of pipe movement. Guides shall becapable of motion to meet location requirements.

2.2 RESTRAINED VIBRATION ISOLATION ROOF-CURB


the following:

1. Amber/Booth Company, Inc.

2. California Dynamics Corporation.3. Isolation Technology, Inc.4. Kinetics Noise Control.


5. Mason Industries.6. Thybar Corporation.

7. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc.8. Vibration Isolation.9. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.

B. General Requirements for Restrained Vibration Isolation Roof-Curb: Factory-

assembled, fully enclosed, insulated, air- and watertight curb rail designed to resiliently

support equipment and to withstand seismic and wind forces.

C. Lower Support Assembly: Formed sheet-metal section containing adjustable andremovable steel springs that support upper frame. Upper frame shall providecontinuous support for equipment and shall be captive to resiliently resist seismic andwind forces. Lower support assembly shall have a means for attaching to buildingstructure and a wood nailer for attaching roof materials, and shall be insulated with aminimum of 2 inches of rigid, glass-fiber insulation on inside of assembly.

D. Spring Isolators: Adjustable, restrained spring isolators shall be mounted on 1/4-inch-thick, elastomeric vibration isolation pads and shall have access ports, for leveladjustment, with removable waterproof covers at all isolator locations. Isolators shallbe located so they are accessible for adjustment at any time during the life of theinstallation without interfering with the integrity of the roof.

1. Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open-spring isolators with

wind restraint.a. Housing: Steel with resilient vertical-limit stops and adjustable equipment

mounting and leveling bolt.

b. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed

height of the spring at rated load.

c. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated

load.d. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.e. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed,

without deformation or failure.2. Pads: Arranged in single or multiple layers of sufficient stiffness for uniform

loading over pad area, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized-steel

baseplates, and factory cut to sizes that match requirements of supportedequipment.a. Resilient Material: Oil- and water-resistant standard neoprene.

E. Snubber Bushings: All-directional, elastomeric snubber bushings at least 1/4 inch thick.

F. Water Seal: Galvanized sheet metal with EPDM seals at corners, attached to uppersupport frame, extending down past wood nailer of lower support assembly, andcounterflashed over roof materials.

2.3 VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT BASES


the following:1. Amber/Booth Company, Inc.2. California Dynamics Corporation.3. Isolation Technology, Inc.4. Kinetics Noise Control.5. Mason Industries.


6. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc.

7. Vibration Isolation.8. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.

B. Inertia Base: Factory-fabricated, welded, structural-steel bases and rails ready for

placement of cast-in-place concrete.

1. Design Requirements: Lowest possible mounting height with not less than 1-

inch clearance above the floor. Include equipment anchor bolts and auxiliary

motor slide bases or rails.

a. Include supports for suction and discharge elbows for pumps.

2. Structural Steel: Steel shapes, plates, and bars complying with ASTM A 36/A36M. Bases shall have shape to accommodate supported equipment.

3. Support Brackets: Factory-welded steel brackets on frame for outrigger isolation

mountings and to provide for anchor bolts and equipment support.

4. Fabrication: Fabricate steel templates to hold equipment anchor-bolt sleeves

and anchors in place during placement of concrete. Obtain anchor-bolt

templates from supported equipment manufacturer.

2.4 FACTORY FINISHES

A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting.

B. Utilize paints and coatings that comply with the limits for VOC content when calculatedaccording to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D. VOC content of Anticorrosive and Antirust PaintsApplied to Ferrous Metals should not exceed 250 g/L.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation for compliance with

requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual

locations before installation.


3.2 APPLICATIONS

A. Multiple Pipe Supports: Secure pipes to trapeze member with clamps approved forapplication by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

3.3 VIBRATION-CONTROL AND SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories" for installation of

roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.

B. Install bushing assemblies for anchor bolts for floor-mounted equipment, arranged to


provide resilient media between anchor bolt and mounting hole in concrete base.

C. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged toprovide resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels areattached to wall.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified third party testing agency to perform tests and

inspections.

B. Perform tests and inspections.

C. Remove and replace malfunctioning isolators and retest as specified above. Verifyresults with Owner where required.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust isolators after piping system is at operating weight.

B. Adjust active height of spring isolators.

C. Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode ofoperation.

END OF SECTION

Building Addition & Renovations for Identification for HVAC Piping & EquipmentThe Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 230553 - 1

SECTION 23 05 53

IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following mechanical identification materials and their installation:

1. Equipment markers.

2. Equipment signs.

3. Access panel and door markers.4. Pipe markers.5. Duct markers.6. Valve tags.7. Valve schedules.

8. Warning tags.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification

material and device.

C. Valve numbering scheme.

D. Valve Schedules: For each piping system. Furnish extra copies (in addition to mounted copies)

to include in maintenance manuals.


A. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME A13.1, "Scheme for the Identification of PipingSystems," for letter size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification devicesfor piping, unless otherwise required by the Owner.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of

surfaces where devices are to be applied.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.


C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION DEVICES

A. Equipment Markers: Engraved, color-coded laminated plastic. Include contact-type, permanent

adhesive.1. Terminology: Match schedules as closely as possible.2. Data:

a. Name and plan code.b. Equipment service.

3. Size: 2-1/2 by 4 inches for control devices, dampers, and valves; 4-1/2 by 6 inches for

equipment.

B. Access Panel and Door Markers: 1/16-inch thick, engraved laminated plastic, with abbreviatedterms and numbers corresponding to identification. Provide 1/8-inch center hole for attachment.1. Fasteners: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or contact-type, permanent adhesive.

2.2 PIPING IDENTIFICATION DEVICES

A. Manufactured Pipe Markers, General: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service,and showing direction of flow.1. Lettering: Use piping system terms indicated and abbreviate only as necessary for each

application length.

2. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: Full-band pipe markers

extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location.

3. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches and Larger: Either full-band or strip-type

pipe markers at least three times letter height and of length required for label.

4. Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions; or

as separate unit on each pipe marker to indicate direction of flow.

B. Pretensioned Pipe Markers: Precoiled semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of

pipe and to attach to pipe without adhesive.

C. Shaped Pipe Markers: Preformed semirigid plastic formed to partially cover circumference ofpipe and to attach to pipe with mechanical fasteners that do not penetrate insulation vaporbarrier.

D. Self-Adhesive Pipe Markers: Plastic with pressure-sensitive, permanent-type, self- adhesive

back.

E. Plastic Tape: Continuously printed, vinyl tape at least 3 mils thick with pressure- sensitive,

permanent-type, self-adhesive back.

1. Width for Markers on Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: 3/4 inch

minimum.

2. Width for Markers on Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches or Larger: 1- 1/2

inches minimum.


2.3 DUCT IDENTIFICATION DEVICES

A. Duct Markers: Preprinted, color-coded plastic with pressure-sensitive, permanent-type, self-adhesive back. Include direction and quantity of airflow and duct service (such as supply, return,and exhaust). Include contact-type, permanent adhesive.

2.4 VALVE TAGS

A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-inch numbers, with numbering scheme approved by Architect. Provide 5/32- inch hole forfastener.1. Material: 0.032-inch thick brass.2. Valve-Tag Fasteners: Brass wire-link or beaded chain; or S-hook.

2.5 VALVE SCHEDULES

A. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on standard-size bond paper. Tabulate valvenumber, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room orspace), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for identification.Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses. Provide in plastic sleeves locatedin 3-ring binder.

2.6 WARNING TAGS

A. Warning Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags; of plasticized cardstock with matte finish suitable for writing.1. Size: 3 by 5-1/4 inches minimum.2. Fasteners: Reinforced grommet and wire or string.

3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as DANGER, CAUTION, or DO NOT

OPERATE.

4. Color: Yellow background with black lettering.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATIONS, GENERAL

A. Products specified are for applications referenced in other Division 22 Sections. If more thansingle-type material, device, or label is specified for listed applications, selection is Installer'soption.

3.2 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

A. Install and permanently fasten equipment nameplates on each major item of mechanicalequipment that does not have nameplate or has nameplate that is damaged or located wherenot easily visible. Locate nameplates where accessible and visible. Include nameplates for thefollowing general categories of equipment:


1. RTU’s and DOAS2. Heat exchangers, coils, and similar equipment.3. Fans.4. Pumps.5. Thermal Economizer

6. VAV boxes.7. Air Separators and Expansion Tanks.

B. Install equipment signs with screws or permanent adhesive on or near each major item ofmechanical equipment. Locate signs where accessible and visible.1. Letter Size: Minimum 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24

inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering

for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two- thirds to three-fourths the

size of principal lettering.

2. Data: Distinguish among multiple units, indicate operational requirements, indicate safety

and emergency precautions, warn of hazards and improper operations, and identify units.

C. Install access panel markers with screws on equipment access panels.

3.3 PIPING IDENTIFICATION

A. Install manufactured pipe markers indicating service on each piping system. Install with flowindication arrows showing direction of flow.1. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: Pretensioned pipe markers.

Use size to ensure a tight fit.

2. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: Self-adhesive pipe markers.Use color-coded, self-adhesive plastic tape, at least 3/4 inch wide, lapped at least 1-1/2inches at both ends of pipe marker, and covering full circumference of pipe.

3. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches and Larger: Shaped pipe markers.Use size to match pipe and secure with fasteners.

4. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches and Larger: Self-adhesive pipe markers.Use color-coded, self-adhesive plastic tape, at least 1-1/2 inches wide, lapped at least 3inches at both ends of pipe marker, and covering full circumference of pipe.

B. Locate pipe markers and color bands where piping is exposed in finished spaces; machinerooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exteriornonconcealed locations as follows:1. Near each valve and control device.

2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.

Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.

3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and nonaccessible enclosures.

4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed

piping.

5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.

6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in

areas of congested piping and equipment.

7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced markers.

3.4 DUCT IDENTIFICATION


A. Install duct markers with permanent adhesive on air ducts in the following color codes:1. Colors per PSU standards.2. Letter Size: Minimum 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24

inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger letteringfor greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths thesize of principal lettering.

B. Locate markers near points where ducts enter into concealed spaces and at maximum intervalsof 50 feet in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by removable ceiling system.

3.5 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves withinfactory-fabricated equipment units; plumbing fixture supply stops; shutoff valves; faucets;convenience and lawn-watering hose connections; and HVAC terminal devices and similarroughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.

B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color

scheme and with captions similar to those indicated in the following:

1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape:a. Gas: 1-1/2 inches.

2. Valve-Tag Color:

a. White or black.3. Letter Color:

a. White or black.

3.6 VALVE-SCHEDULE INSTALLATION

A. Mount valve schedule in plastic slip sheets located in the 3-ring binder.

3.7 WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where

required.

3.8 ADJUSTING

A. Relocate mechanical identification materials and devices that have become visually blocked byother work.

3.9 CLEANING

A. Clean faces of mechanical identification devices and glass frames of valve schedules.

END OF SECTION

Building Addition & Renovations for Testing, Adjusting, and BalancingThe Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 230593 - 1

SECTION 23 05 93TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes testing, adjusting, and balancing HVAC systems to produce design

objectives, including the following:

1. Balancing airflow and water flow within distribution systems, including submains,

branches, and terminals, to indicated quantities according to specified tolerances.

2. Adjusting total HVAC systems to provide indicated quantities.

3. Measuring electrical performance of HVAC equipment.4. Setting quantitative performance of HVAC equipment.5. Verifying that automatic control devices are functioning properly.

6. Reporting results of the activities and procedures specified in this Section.

B. The Testing, Adjusting and Balancing (TAB) contractor shall provide the scope of servicesoutlined within this specification. In addition to performing the scope of services outlined withinthis specification, the TAB contractor shall coordinate all work with the General Contractor andall sub-contractors to ensure complete system installation and operation within the timeframesubmitted by the General Contractor and approved by the Owner. The following shall be theresponsibility of the TAB contractor:1. All scope of work shall be coordinated with the General Contractor and all sub-

contractors at the start of construction. All parties shall meet to review the scope of work,responsibilities of each party, establish timelines and critical milestones and establish aprocess for distribution of documentation.

2. Submit all documentation including submittals and requests for information through theGeneral Contractor for review by other trades, the Engineer and the Architect.

3. Submit a proposed schedule for submittals, system coordination, and system testing to

the General Contractor for incorporation to the overall project schedule.

4. Coordinate all items required to be provided by the General Contractor and sub-

contractors. Submit an agreed upon list indicating each item and associated dates for

each item to be completed.

5. Attend all job conferences as outlined in item C below.

C. A Project Manager employed directly by the TAB contractor shall be on site for supervision ofall system testing. This Project Manager shall attend all job conferences and all regularcontractor coordination meetings during the period where any testing, adjusting and balancingis being performed. This shall include all preliminary coordination and final closeout meetings.

D. Preliminary and final TAB services shall be for each of the following systems:1. All air-based HVAC systems.


1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Adjust: To regulate air patterns at the terminal equipment, such as to reduce fan speed or

adjust a damper.

B. Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system, including submains, branches, and

terminals, according to design quantities.

C. Draft: A current of air, when referring to localized effect caused by one or more factors of highair velocity, low ambient temperature, or direction of airflow, whereby more heat is withdrawnfrom a person's skin than is normally dissipated.

D. Procedure: An approach to and execution of a sequence of work operations to yield repeatable

results.

E. Report Forms: Test data sheets for recording test data in logical order.

F. Terminal: A point where the controlled medium, such as fluid or energy, enters or leaves thedistribution system.

G. Test: A procedure to determine quantitative performance of a system or equipment.

H. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agent: The entity responsible for performing and reporting

the testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures.

I. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.

J. AMCA: Air Movement and Control Association.

K. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.

L. SMACNA: Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 45 days from the Contractor's Notice toProceed, submit 6 copies of the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3 of thisSection.

B. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 60 days from the Contractor's Notice to Proceed,submit 6 copies of the testing, adjusting, and balancing strategies and step- by-step proceduresas specified in Part 3 "Preparation" Article below. Include a complete set of report formsintended for use on this Project.

C. Certified Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Submit 1 electronic copy of reportsprepared, as specified in this Section, on approved forms certified by the testing, adjusting, andbalancing Agent.

D. System Observations and Corrections List: Submit 1 electronic copy of written report indicatingconditions which will prevent the system from being properly balanced or performing properly.The report shall identify all system issues observed during the system examination asspecified in Part 3 below.



A. Agent Qualifications: Engage a testing, adjusting, and balancing agent certified by NEBB or

AABC with a minimum of 10 years of balancing experience on the specified system types.

B. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Conference: Meet with the General Contractor’s and Sub-Contractor’s representatives on approval of the testing, adjusting, and balancing strategies andprocedures plan to develop a mutual understanding of the details. Ensure the participation oftesting, adjusting, and balancing team members, the building automation system installer, andthe HVAC contractor. Provide 7 days of advance notice of scheduled meeting time and location.1. Agenda Items: Include at least the following:

a. Submittal distribution requirements.b. Contract Documents examination report.c. Testing, adjusting, and balancing plan.d. Work schedule and Project site access requirements.

e. Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors.f. Coordination of documentation and communication flow.

C. Certification of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Certify the testing, adjusting, and

balancing field data reports. This certification includes the following:

1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified testing,

adjusting, and balancing reports.

2. Certify that the testing, adjusting, and balancing team complied with the approved

testing, adjusting, and balancing plan and the procedures specified and referenced in this

Specification.

D. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Use standard forms from NEBB's "ProceduralStandards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems."

E. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, and Accuracy: As described in NEBB's "Procedural Standardsfor Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems," Section II, "RequiredInstrumentation for NEBB Certification."

F. Instrumentation Calibration: Calibrate instruments at least every 6 months or more frequently ifrequired by the instrument manufacturer.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Partial Owner Occupancy: The Owner may occupy the site and portions of the building duringthe entire testing, adjusting, and balancing period. Cooperate with the Owner during testing,adjusting, and balancing operations to minimize conflicts with the Owner's operations.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for systems and equipment,

HVAC controls installers, and other mechanics to operate HVAC systems and equipment to

support and assist testing, adjusting, and balancing activities.

B. Notice: Provide 7 days of advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and times.


C. Perform testing, adjusting, and balancing after leakage and pressure tests on air distribution

systems have been satisfactorily completed by the HVAC contractor.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine Contract Documents to become familiar with project requirements and to discoverconditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper testing, adjusting, and balancing ofsystems and equipment.1. Contract Documents are defined in the General and Supplementary Conditions of the

Contract.2. Verify that balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-

control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are requiredby the Contract Documents. Verify that quantities and locations of these balancingdevices are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient systemand equipment operation.

B. Examine approved submittal data of HVAC systems and equipment.

C. Examine Architect's and Engineer's design data, including HVAC system descriptions,

statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and

design documents for HVAC system and equipment controls.

D. Examine equipment performance data, including fan and pump curves. Relate performancedata to project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesiredor unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system.

E. Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that testing,cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Specification Sections have beenperformed.

F. Examine HVAC system and equipment installations to verify that indicated balancing devices,such as test ports, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volumedampers, are properly installed, and their locations are accessible and appropriate for effectivebalancing and for efficient system and equipment operation.

G. Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting and

balancing.

H. Examine air-handling equipment to ensure clean filters have been installed.

I. Examine terminal units, such as dampers and mixing boxes, to verify that they are accessible

and their controls are connected and functioning.

J. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of testing, adjusting, and

balancing procedures.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare a testing, adjusting, and balancing plan that includes strategies and step-by- step

procedures.

B. Complete system readiness checks and prepare system readiness reports. Verify the following:

1. Permanent electrical power wiring is complete.2. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.3. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.

4. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open.5. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational.

6. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and

access to balancing devices is provided.

7. Windows and doors can be closed so design conditions for system operations can bemet.

3.3 GENERAL TESTING AND BALANCING PROCEDURES

A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedurescontained in NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing ofEnvironmental Systems" and this Section or equivalent AABC Standards.

B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to theminimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing andbalancing, close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to thoseremoved.

C. Mark equipment settings with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material, includingdamper-control positions, valve indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls anddevices, to show final settings.

3.4 FUNDAMENTAL AIR SYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES

A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors andrecommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes withrequired fan volumes.

B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.

C. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow measurements.

D. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.

E. Check for airflow blockages.

F. Check for proper sealing of air-handling unit components.

3.5 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME SYSTEMS


A. Compensating for Diversity: When the total airflow of all terminal units is more than theindicated airflow of the fan, place a selected number of terminal units at a maximum set-pointairflow condition until the total airflow of the terminal units equals the indicated airflow of the fan.Select the reduced airflow terminal units so they are distributed evenly among the branch ducts.

B. Pressure-Independent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems: After the fan systems have beenadjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:1. Set outside-air dampers at minimum, and return- and exhaust-air dampers at a position

that simulates full-cooling load.2. Select the terminal unit that is most critical to the supply-fan airflow and static pressure.

Measure static pressure. Adjust system static pressure so the entering static pressure forthe critical terminal unit is not less than the sum of terminal-unit manufacturer'srecommended minimum inlet static pressure plus the static pressure needed toovercome terminal-unit discharge system losses.

3. Measure total system airflow. Adjust to within indicated airflow.4. Set terminal units at maximum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the

designed maximum airflow. Use terminal-unit manufacturer's written instructions to makethis adjustment. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream fromterminal units as described for constant-volume air systems.

5. Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the

designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction in airflow as

described for constant-volume air systems.

a. If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, report the condition but leave

outlets balanced for maximum airflow.

6. Remeasure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and

minimum outside airflow. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets as

described for constant-volume air systems.

7. Measure static pressure at the most critical terminal unit and adjust the static- pressure

controller at the main supply-air sensing station to ensure that adequate

static pressure is maintained at the most critical unit.

8. Record the final fan performance data

3.6 MOTORS

A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:1. Manufacturer, model, and serial numbers.2. Motor horsepower rating.3. Motor rpm.

4. Efficiency rating if high-efficiency motor.5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.

B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds varyingfrom minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass for the controller to prove properoperation. Record observations, including controller manufacturer, model and serial numbers,and nameplate data.

3.7 TEMPERATURE TESTING

A. During testing, adjusting, and balancing, report need for adjustment in temperature regulation

within the automatic temperature-control system.


B. Measure indoor wet- and dry-bulb temperatures every other hour for a period of 2 successive 8-hour days, in each separately controlled zone, to prove correctness of final temperature settingsin 100% outside air systems.

3.8 TOLERANCES

A. Set HVAC system airflow and water flow rates within the following tolerances:1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans: Plus 5 to plus 10 percent.

2. Air Outlets and Inlets: 0 to minus 10 percent.

3.9 REPORTING

A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents asspecified in "Examination" Article above, prepare a report on the adequacy of design forsystems' balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devicesto facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additionsto HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring andbalancing devices.

B. Status Reports: As Work progresses, prepare reports to describe completed procedures,procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problemsfound in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system.

3.10 FINAL REPORT

A. General: Typewritten, or computer printout in letter-quality font, on standard bond paper, in 3-ring binder, tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced systems. Provide eight(8) copies of final report in addition to one (1) copy in final O & M Manual.

B. Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified testing and

balancing engineer.1. Include a list of the instruments used for procedures, along with proof of

calibration.

C. Final Report Contents: In addition to the certified field report data, include the following:1. Pump curves.2. Fan curves.3. Manufacturers' test data.

4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.

5. Other information relative to equipment performance, but do not include approved Shop

Drawings and Product Data.

D. General Report Data: In addition to the form titles and entries, include the following data in the

final report, as applicable:

1. Title page.

2. Name and address of testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent.3. Project name.4. Project location.

5. Architect's name and address.


6. Engineer's name and address.7. Contractor's name and address.8. Report date.9. Signature of testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent who certifies the report.10. Summary of contents, including the following:

a. Design versus final performance.

b. Notable characteristics of systems.

c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract

Documents.

11. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.

12. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer, type size, and fittings.

13. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from design values.14. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms, including the following:

a. Settings for outside-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers.b. Conditions of filters.

c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions.d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils.e. Fan drive settings, including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter.f. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller.

g. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.

E. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air distribution systems.Present with single-line diagrams and include the following:1. Quantities of outside, supply, return, and exhaust airflows.

F. Rooftop Unit Test Reports: For units with coils, include the following:1. Unit Data: Include the following:

a. Unit identification.b. Make and type.c. Model number and unit size.d. Discharge arrangement.e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.

f. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in inches.2. Motor Data: Include the following:

a. Make and frame type and size.b. Horsepower and rpm.c. Volts, phase, and hertz.

d. Full-load amperage and service factor.e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.f. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in inches.

3. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:a. Total airflow rate in cfm.b. Total system static pressure in inches wg.c. Fan rpm.d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg.e. Preheat coil static-pressure differential in inches wg.

f. Cooling coil static-pressure differential in inches wg.g. Heating coil static-pressure differential in inches wg.h. Outside airflow in cfm.i. Return airflow in cfm.j. Outside-air damper position.


k. Return-air damper position.

G. Apparatus-Coil Test Reports: For apparatus coils, include the following:1. Coil Data: Include the following:a. System identification.b. Location.c. Coil type.d. Number of rows.

e. Fin spacing in fins per inch.f. Make and model number.

2. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:a. Airflow rate in cfm.b. Average face velocity in fpm.

c. Air pressure drop in inches wg.d. Outside-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.e. Return-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.f. Entering-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.g. Leaving-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.

h. Water flow rate in gpm.i. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig.j. Entering-water temperature in deg F.k. Leaving-water temperature in deg F.

H. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:1. Fan Data: Include the following:

a. System identification.

b. Make and type.c. Model number and size.d. Manufacturer's serial number.e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.

2. Motor Data: Include the following:

a. Make and frame type and size.b. Horsepower and rpm.c. Volts, phase, and hertz.d. Full-load amperage and service factor.e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.

f. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in inches.3. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:

a. Total airflow rate in cfm.

b. Total system static pressure in inches wg.c. Fan rpm.d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg.e. Suction static pressure in inches wg.

I. Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid

representing the duct cross-section and record the following:1. Report Data: Include the following:

a. System and air-handling unit number.b. Location and zone.c. Traverse air temperature in deg F.d. Duct static pressure in inches wg.e. Duct size in inches.


f. Duct area in sq. ft..

g. Design airflow rate in cfm.h. Design velocity in fpm.i. Actual airflow rate in cfm.j. Actual average velocity in fpm.

J. Blower Coils / Fan Coil Units:1. Unit Data: Include the following:

a. Identification.b. Location.c. Manufacturer, Model & Serial Numbers.d. Nameplate data.

2. Test Data:a. Airflow rates.b. Static pressures.c. Intake and discharge temperatures in each mode.d. Water flows.

3. Pump Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:a. Make and model number.b. Manufacturer's serial number.c. Motor make and frame size.d. Motor horsepower and rpm.e. Voltage at each connection.f. Amperage for each phase.

g. Water flow rate in gpm.4. Water Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:

a. Entering-water temperature in deg F.b. Leaving-water temperature in deg F.c. Entering-water pressure in feet of head or psig.

d. Leaving-water pressure in feet of head or psig.e. Water flow rate in gpm.

K. Instrument Calibration Reports: For instrument calibration, include the following:

1. Report Data: Include the following:a. Instrument type and make.b. Serial number.c. Application.d. Dates of use.e. Dates of calibration.

3.11 ADDITIONAL TESTS

A. Within 90 days of completing testing, adjusting, and balancing, perform additional testing andbalancing to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correctunusual conditions.

B. Seasonal Periods: If initial testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures were not performedduring near-peak summer and winter conditions, perform additional inspections, testing, andadjusting during near-peak summer and winter conditions.

C. This Contractor shall include partial system and final system balancing of air based systemswhich cross phasing lines of this project. Each portion of building shall be balanced prior toowner occupancy.


D. Upon completion of testing and balancing services for building, the Contractor and Engineershall field check up to 10% of all air devices, 10% of all hydronic devices and 10% of allequipment for verification of the Test and Balance Report Information. The Engineer shallrandomly pick the items to be tested and the Contractor shall be responsible for testing theequipment in the presence of the Engineer and Owner. If 15% or more of each item type testeddoes not match the Test and Balance Report Information, the Contractor shall test an additional10% of the items listed for testing. If 15% or more of each item type tested does not match theTest and Balance Report, the Contractor shall rebalance all devices and equipment.

END OF SECTION

Building Addition & Renovations for Duct InsulationThe Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 230713 - 1

SECTION 23 07 13DUCT INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes semirigid and flexible duct, plenum, and breeching insulation;insulating cements; field-applied jackets; accessories and attachments; and sealingcompounds.


1. Division 07 Section "Firestopping" for firestopping materials and requirements

for penetrations through fire and smoke barriers.

2. Division 23 Section "HVAC Piping Insulation" for insulation for piping systems.

3. Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts" for duct liner.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory andfield applied, if any), for each type of product indicated.



A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed anapprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the U.S.Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing materials identical tothose specified in this Section according to ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspectingagency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacketmaterials and sealer and cement material containers with appropriate markings ofapplicable testing and inspecting agency.1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread rating of 25 or less, and smoke-



A. Packaging: Ship insulation materials in containers marked by manufacturer with

appropriate ASTM specification designation, type and grade, and maximum use


temperature.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate clearance requirements with duct Installer for insulation application.

1.7 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule insulation application after testing duct systems. Insulation application may

begin on segments of ducts that have satisfactory test results.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


the following:1. Mineral-Fiber Insulation:

a. CertainTeed Manson.b. Knauf FiberGlass GmbH.c. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp.d. Schuller International, Inc.


A. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting

resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II, without facing and with all-service jacket

manufactured from kraft paper, reinforcing scrim, aluminum foil, and vinyl film.

Thermalconductivity (k-value) shall not exceed 0.26 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F after

180 days of aging


A. Glass Cloth and Tape: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I for cloth and Type II fortape. Woven glass-fiber fabrics, plain weave, presized a minimum of 8 oz./sq. yd..1. Tape Width: 4 inches.

B. Bands: 3/4 inch wide, in one of the following materials compatible with jacket:1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304; 0.020 inch thick.2. Galvanized Steel: 0.005 inch thick.3. Aluminum: 0.007 inch thick.4. Brass: 0.010 inch thick.5. Nickel-Copper Alloy: 0.005 inch thick.

C. Weld-Attached Anchor Pins and Washers: Copper-coated steel pin for capacitor-discharge welding and galvanized speed washer. Pin length sufficient for insulationthickness indicated.

1. Welded Pin Holding Capacity: 100 lb for direct pull perpendicular to the

attached surface.


D. Adhesive-Attached Anchor Pins and Speed Washers: Galvanized steel plate, pin, andwasher manufactured for attachment to duct and plenum with adhesive. Pin lengthsufficient for insulation thickness indicated.1. Adhesive: Recommended by the anchor pin manufacturer as appropriate for

surface temperatures of ducts, plenums, and breechings; and to achievea holding capacity of 100 lb for direct pull perpendicular to the adhered surface.

E. Self-Adhesive Anchor Pins and Speed Washers: Galvanized steel plate, pin, andwasher manufactured for attachment to duct and plenum with adhesive. Pin lengthsufficient for insulation thickness indicated.

2.4 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Mastics: Materials recommended by insulation material manufacturer that are

compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation

and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materialsthat will adversely affect insulation application.


A. Apply insulation materials, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer's

written instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; and free of voids

throughout the length of ducts and fittings.

B. Refer to schedules at the end of this Section for materials, forms, jackets, and

thicknesses required for each duct system.

C. Use accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Useaccessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket ineither wet or dry state.

D. Seal joints and seams with vapor-retarder mastic on insulation indicated to receive a

vapor retarder.

E. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

F. Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and jointswith adhesive recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.


G. Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical.

H. Apply insulation over fittings and specialties, with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated.

I. Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor retarder is indicated, seal penetrations ininsulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-retardermastic. Apply insulation continuously through hangers and around anchorattachments.

J. Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated,seal ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer tomaintain vapor retarder.

K. Apply insulation with integral jackets as follows:1. Pull jacket tight and smooth.

2. Joints and Seams: Cover with tape and vapor retarder as recommended by

insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor seal.

3. Vapor-Retarder Mastics: Where vapor retarders are indicated, apply mastic on

seams and joints and at ends adjacent to duct flanges and fittings.

L. Cut insulation according to manufacturer's written instructions to prevent compressing

insulation to less than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.

M. Install vapor-retarder mastic on ducts and plenums scheduled to receive vapor

retarders.

1. Ducts with Vapor Retarders: Overlap insulation facing at seams and seal with

vapor-retarder mastic and pressure-sensitive tape having same facing as

insulation. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to

maintain vapor-retarder seal.

2. Ducts without Vapor Retarders: Overlap insulation facing at seams and secure

with outward clinching staples and pressure-sensitive tape having same facing

as insulation.

N. Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through walls

and partitions, except fire-rated walls and partitions.

O. Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Terminate insulation at fire/smoke damper

sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations.

P. Floor Penetrations: Terminate insulation at underside of floor assembly and at floorsupport at top of floor.1. For insulation indicated to have vapor retarders, taper termination and seal

insulation ends with vapor-retarder mastic.


A. Blanket Applications for Ducts and Plenums: Secure blanket insulation with adhesiveand anchor pins and speed washers.

1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates persquare foot, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.

2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings


and transitions.

3. Install anchor pins and speed washers on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts

and sides of vertical ducts as follows:

a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, along longitudinal

centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints,

and 16 inches o.c.

b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches. Space 16 inches

o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Apply

additional pins and clips to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross

bracing.

c. Anchor pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular

ducts and plenums.d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.

4. Impale insulation over anchors and attach speed washers.5. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel

with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matchinginsulation facing.

6. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by

removing 2 inches from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure

laps to adjacent insulation segment with 1/2-inch staples, 1 inch o.c., and cover

with pressure-sensitive tape having same facing as insulation.

7. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and endjoints. Secure with steel band at end joints and spaced a maximum of 18 incheso.c.

8. Apply insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulationsegment for each surface. Apply insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbowswith individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.

9. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond the insulationsurface with 6-inch wide strips of the same material used to insulateduct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with anchorpins spaced 6 inches o.c.

10. Apply vapor-retarder mastic to open joints, breaks, and punctures for insulation

indicated to receive vapor retarder.

3.5 DUCT SYSTEM APPLICATIONS

A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are specified in schedules at the end of thisSection.

B. Materials and thicknesses for systems listed below are specified in schedules at theend of this Section.

C. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not apply insulation to

the following systems, materials, and equipment:

1. Metal ducts with duct liner. (When located in a conditioned space)

2. Factory-insulated flexible ducts.

3. Factory-insulated plenums, casings, terminal boxes, and filter boxes and

sections.4. Flexible connectors.5. Vibration-control devices.6. Testing agency labels and stamps.7. Nameplates and data plates.8. Access panels and doors in air-distribution systems.


3.6 INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM APPLICATION SCHEDULE

A. Service: Round, supply-air ducts and return air ducts, concealed and exposed, located

in a heated space.

1. Material: Mineral-fiber blanket.

2. Thickness: 1 1/2 inches.3. Number of Layers: One.4. Factory-Applied Jacket: Foil and paper.

5. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes.

B. Service: Round, outside-air ducts, concealed and exposed, located in a heated space.1. Material: Mineral-fiber blanket.2. Thickness: 1 1/2 inches.3. Number of Layers: One.

4. Factory-Applied Jacket: Foil and paper.

5. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes.

C. Service: Rectangular, supply-air and return-air ducts, concealed and exposed, locatedin a heated space. (Insulation only applied when liner is not specified.)1. Material: Mineral-fiber blanket.2. Thickness: 1 1/2 inches.3. Number of Layers: One.

4. Factory-Applied Jacket: Foil and paper.5. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes.

D. Service: Rectangular, outside-air ducts, concealed and exposed, located in a heatedspace.1. Material: Mineral-fiber blanket.2. Thickness: 1 ½ inches.3. Number of Layers: One.

4. Factory-Applied Jacket: Foil and paper.5. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes.

E. Service: Exhaust plenums connected to vents and 24” of connecting ductwork.1. Material: Mineral-fiber blanket.2. Thickness: ½ inch.

3. Number of Layers: One.4. Factory-Applied Jacket: None.5. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes.

END OF SECTION

Building Addition & Renovations for HVAC Pipe InsulationThe Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 230719 - 1

SECTION 23 07 19

HVAC PIPE INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes preformed, rigid and flexible pipe insulation; insulating cements;

field-applied jackets; accessories and attachments; and sealing compounds.

B. Related Sections include the following:1. Division 07 Section "Firestopping" for firestopping materials and requirements

for penetrations through fire and smoke barriers.

2. Division 23 Section "Duct Insulation" for insulation for ducts and plenums.

3. Division 23 Section “Hangers and Supports” for pipe insulation shields and

protection saddles.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory andfield applied, if any), for each type of product indicated.



A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing materials identical tothose specified in this Section according to ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspectingagency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacketmaterials and sealer and cement material containers with appropriate markings ofapplicable testing and inspecting agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread rating of 25 or less, and smoke-


2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread rating of 75 or less, and smoke-



A. Packaging: Ship insulation materials in containers marked by manufacturer withappropriate ASTM specification designation, type and grade, and maximum usetemperature.


1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in

Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for insulation application.

1.7 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule insulation application after testing piping systems. Insulation application maybegin on segments of piping that have satisfactory test results.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


the following:

1. Mineral-FiberInsulation:a. CertainTeed Manson.b. Knauf FiberGlass GmbH.c. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp.

d. Schuller International, Inc.

2. Flexible Elastomeric ThermalInsulation:a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.b. Rubatex Corp.

3. Calcium Silicate Insulation:a. Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corp.b. Pabco.c. Schuller International, Inc.


A. All insulation shall have a maximum conductivity of 0.26 Btu per inch/h-sq ft-degree F.

B. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin complying withthe following:

1. Preformed Pipe Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 547, Type 1, with factory-applied, all-purpose, vapor-retarder jacket. U.L. 25/50 fire/smoke ratingcompliant.

2. Fire-Resistant Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C in the following classes and

grades:

a. Class 1, Grade A for bonding glass cloth and tape to unfaced glass-fiber


insulation, for sealing edges of glass-fiber insulation, and for bonding

lagging cloth to unfaced glass-fiber insulation.

b. Class 2, Grade A for bonding glass-fiber insulation to metal surfaces.

3. Vapor-Retarder Mastics: Fire- and water-resistant, vapor-retarder mastic for

indoor applications. Comply with MIL-C-19565C, Type II.

4. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cements: Comply with ASTM C 195.

C. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubbermaterials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheetmaterials, maximum ‘k’ value of 0.24 at 75 deg F.

1. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer.2. Ultraviolet-Protective Coating: As recommended by insulation manufacturer.

D. Prefabricated Thermal Insulating Fitting Covers: Comply with ASTM C 450 fordimensions used in preforming insulation to cover valves, elbows, tees, and flanges.

2.3 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS

A. General: ASTM C 921, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated.

B. PVC Jacket: High-impact, ultraviolet-resistant PVC; 20 mils thick; roll stock ready forshop or field cutting and forming.1. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

a. Low-Emitting Materials: For field applications that are inside the

weatherproofing system, use adhesives and sealants that comply with the

limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart

D as specified in Section 018113.

2. PVC Jacket Color: Color-code piping jackets based on materials contained

within the piping system.

C. Standard PVC Fitting Covers: Factory-fabricated fitting covers manufactured from 20-mil- thick, high-impact, ultraviolet-resistant PVC. U.L. 25/50 smoke/fire ratingcompliant.1. Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves,

flanges, reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P-trapand supply covers for lavatories for the disabled.

2. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

a. Low-Emitting Materials: For field applications that are inside theweatherproofing system, use adhesives and sealants that comply with thelimits for VOC content.

D. Aluminum Jacket: Aluminum roll stock, ready for shop or field cutting and forming to

indicated sizes. Comply with ASTM B 209, 3003 alloy, H-14 temper.

1. Finish and Thickness: Stucco-embossed finish, 0.016 inch thick.2. Moisture Barrier: 1-mil thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft paper.3. Elbows: Preformed, 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows; same

material, finish, and thickness as jacket.



A. Glass Cloth and Tape: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I for cloth and Type II fortape. Woven glass-fiber fabrics, plain weave, presized a minimum of 8 oz./sq. yd..1. Tape Width: 4 inches.

B. Bands: 3/4 inch wide, in one of the following materials compatible with jacket:1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304; 0.020 inch thick.

2. Galvanized Steel: 0.005 inch thick.3. Aluminum: 0.007 inch thick.4. Brass: 0.010 inch thick.5. Nickel-Copper Alloy: 0.005 inch thick.

2.5 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Mastics: Materials recommended by insulation material manufacturer that arecompatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installationand other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry pipe and fitting surfaces. Remove materials thatwill adversely affect insulation application.


A. Apply insulation materials, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer's

written instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout

the length of piping, including fittings, valves, and specialties.

B. Refer to schedules at the end of this Section for materials, forms, jackets, and

thicknesses required for each piping system.

C. Use accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Useaccessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket ineither wet or dry state.

D. Apply insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal pipe runs.

E. Apply multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and

specialties.


G. Seal joints and seams with vapor-retarder mastic on insulation indicated to receive a

vapor retarder.

H. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

I. Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints

with adhesive recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.

J. Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical.

K. Apply insulation over fittings, valves, and specialties, with continuous thermal andvapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated. Refer to special instructions forapplying insulation over fittings, valves, and specialties.

L. Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor retarder is indicated, seal penetrations ininsulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-retardermastic.1. Apply insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.2. For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, extend insulation

on anchor legs at least 12 inches from point of attachment to pipe and taperinsulation ends. Seal tapered ends with a compound recommended by theinsulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder.

3. Install insert materials and apply insulation to tightly join the insert. Sealinsulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compoundrecommended by the insulation material manufacturer.

4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Installshields over jacket, arranged to protect the jacket from tear or puncture by thehanger, support, and shield.

M. Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated,taper insulation ends. Seal tapered ends with a compound recommended by theinsulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder.

N. Apply adhesives and mastics at the manufacturer's recommended coverage rate.

O. Low-Emitting Materials: For field applications that are inside the weatherproofingsystem, use adhesives that comply with the limits for VOC content.

P. Apply insulation with integral jackets as follows:1. Pull jacket tight and smooth.2. Circumferential Joints: Cover with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as

insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staplesalong both edges of strip and spaced 4 inches o.c.

3. Longitudinal Seams: Overlap jacket seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Applyinsulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface toreceive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edgeat 4 inches o.c.

a. Exception: Do not staple longitudinal laps on insulation having a vapor

retarder.

4. Vapor-Retarder Mastics: Where vapor retarders are indicated, apply mastic on

seams and joints and at ends adjacent to flanges, unions, valves, and fittings.

5. At penetrations in jackets for thermometers and pressure gages, fill and seal

voids with vapor-retarder mastic.

Q. Exterior Wall Penetrations: For penetrations of below-grade exterior walls, terminate


insulation flush with mechanical sleeve seal. Seal terminations with vapor-retardermastic.

R. Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through walls

and floors.

S. Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through

penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.1. Firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers are specified in Division 07 Section

"Firestopping".

T. Floor Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through floor assembly.

1. For insulation with vapor retarders, seal insulation with vapor-retarder mastic

where floor supports penetrate vapor retarder.


A. Apply insulation to straight pipes and tubes as follows:1. Where vapor retarders are indicated, seal longitudinal seams and end joints with

vapor-retarder mastic. Apply vapor retarder to ends of insulation at intervals of15 to 20 feet to form a vapor retarder between pipe insulation segments.

2. For insulation with factory-applied jackets, secure laps with outward clinched

staples at 6 inches o.c.

3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets with vapor retarders, do not staple

longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by

the insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-retarder mastic.

B. Apply insulation to flanges as follows:1. Apply preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.2. Make width of insulation segment the same as overall width of the flange and

bolts, plus twice the thickness of the pipe insulation.

3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer

circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket

insulation.

4. Apply canvas jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive,

overlapping seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints with vapor-retarder mastic.

C. Apply insulation to fittings and elbows as follows:1. Apply premolded insulation sections of the same material as straight segments

of pipe insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer’s writteninstructions.

2. When premolded insulation elbows and fittings are not available, apply miteredsections of pipe insulation, or glass-fiber blanket insulation, to a thickness equalto adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire, tape, orbands.

3. Cover fittings with standard PVC fitting covers.4. Cover fittings with heavy PVC fitting covers. Overlap PVC covers on pipe

insulation jackets at least 1 inch at each end. Secure fitting covers withmanufacturer's attachments and accessories. Seal seams with tape and vapor-retarder mastic.

D. Apply insulation to valves and specialties as follows:

1. Apply premolded insulation sections of the same material as straight segments


of pipe insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer’s written

instructions.

2. When premolded insulation sections are not available, apply glass-fiber blanket

insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to

allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. For check valves, arrange

insulation for access to strainer basket without disturbing insulation.3. Apply insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.

4. Use preformed standard PVC fitting covers for valve sizes where available.

Secure fitting covers with manufacturer's attachments and accessories. Seal

seams with tape and vapor-retarder mastic.5. Use preformed heavy PVC fitting covers for valve sizes where available. Secure

fitting covers with manufacturer's attachments and accessories. Seal seams withtape and vapor-retarder mastic.

6. For larger sizes where PVC fitting covers are not available, seal insulation withcanvas jacket and sealing compound recommended by the insulation materialmanufacturer.

3.5 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC THERMAL INSULATION APPLICATION

A. Apply insulation to straight pipes and tubes as follows:

1. Follow manufacturer's written instructions for applying insulation.2. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended

adhesive. Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air tothe pipe surface.

B. Apply insulation to flanges as follows:

1. Apply pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.

2. Make width of insulation segment the same as overall width of the flange and

bolts, plus twice the thickness of the pipe insulation.

3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer

circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet

insulation of the same thickness as pipe insulation.

4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended

adhesive. Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air

to the pipe surface.

C. Apply insulation to fittings and elbows as follows:

1. Apply mitered sections of pipe insulation.2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended

adhesive. Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air tothe pipe surface.

3.6 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET APPLICATION

A. Apply glass-cloth jacket, where indicated, directly over bare insulation or insulation withfactory-applied jackets.

1. Apply jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch overlap at seams and joints.

2. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch- thick coats of jacket manufacturer's


recommended adhesive.

3. Completely encapsulate insulation with jacket, leaving no exposed raw insulation.

B. Apply PVC jacket where indicated, with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end

joints. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.

C. Apply metal jacket where indicated, with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and endjoints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints withweatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket withstainless-steel bands 12 inches o.c. and at end joints.

3.7 PIPING SYSTEM APPLICATIONS

A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are specified in schedules at the end of this

Section.

B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not apply insulation to the

following systems, materials, and equipment:

1. Flexible connectors.

2. Vibration-control devices.3. Fire-suppression piping.4. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces, unless otherwise indicated.

5. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings, unless potential for personnel injury.6. Air chambers, unions, strainers, check valves, plug valves, and flow regulators.


A. Inspection: Perform the following field quality-control inspections, after installing

insulation materials, jackets, and finishes, to determine compliance with requirements:

1. Inspect fittings and valves randomly selected by PSU OPP Services.

2. Remove fitting covers from 20 elbows or 1 percent of elbows, whichever is less,

for various pipe sizes.

3. Remove fitting covers from 20 valves or 1 percent of valves, whichever is less,

for various pipe sizes.

B. Insulation applications will be considered defective if sample inspection revealsnoncompliance with requirements. Remove defective Work and replace with newmaterials according to these Specifications.

C. Reinstall insulation and covers on fittings and valves uncovered for inspection

according to these Specifications.

3.9 INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Refer to insulation application schedules for required insulation materials, vaporretarders, and field-applied jackets.

B. Application schedules identify piping system and indicate pipe size ranges andmaterial, thickness, and jacket requirements.

3.10 INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE

A. Insulate the following piping systems with material and thickness as scheduled below:


Insulation Thickness In Inches for Pipe Sizes In Inches

Interior Piping

ServiceMaterial

1”and

less

1¼” to

1.5”2” to 4” 5” to 6”

8” and

largerNotes

VaporBarrierYes/No

Exterior

Pipe

Jacket

Type

PVC/

ALUM

Refrigerant Piping

JacketedFiberglassor FlexibleElastomeric

1” 1” 1.5” N/A N/A 2, 3, NoPVCorAlum

CondensateDrains

JacketedFiberglass

½ ½ ½ ½ ½ 1, 2 Yes -

Notes:1. Where rigid insulation is required because the piping is expected to be exposed

to impact or abuse, use calcium silicate pipe insulation with thickness to

maintain the R-value of the specified thickness scheduled.

2. HVAC Insulation Omitted: Omit insulation on flexible connectors beyond control

valve, located within heated space; on unions, flanges strainers, flexible

connections, and expansion joints of hot systems.

3. All refrigerant piping shall be insulated.

B. Piping Exposed to Weather: Piping located outdoors and exposed to weather shall beinsulated as indicated above except the thickness shall be increased by 1”. Theinsulation shall then be protected with one of the following weatherproof finishes asindicated on contract drawings.

1. Metal jacketing shall be 0.016” (min.) aluminum or stainless steel with moisture

barrier, secured in accordance with the jacket manufacturer’s recommendations.

Longitudinal joints shall be applied so they will shed water and shall be closed

using pre-formed butt strips following manufacturer’s recommendations for

securement.

2. UV resistant PVC jacketing may be applied in lieu of metal jacketing provided

jacketing manufacturer’s limitations with regard to pipe size, surface

temperature and thermal expansion and contraction are followed.

3. Fittings shall be insulated as prescribed above, jacketed with pre-formed fitting

covers matching outer jacketing used on straight pipe sections, with all joints

weather sealed.

END OF SECTION

Building Addition & Renovations for Building Automation SystemsThe Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 230900 - 1

SECTION 23 09 00BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEMS

PART 1- GENERAL

1.0 PRODUCT SECTION INCLUDES1.1 Project Description1.2 Quality Assurance1.3 Acceptable Control System Manufacturers1.4 Warranty1.5 Submittals

1.1 PROJECT DESCRIPTION

A. ATC contractor shall provide and install a fully functioning, web-enabled, direct digitalTracer SC control system to control networked equipment for the Miller RecreationCenter. Building Automation System shall comply with BACnet Testing Lab CertifiedProducts with open protocol communication and fully programmable controllers.

B. The system controller shall communicate via BACnet/MSTP open protocol between theHVAC units and sensors facilitated by unit controllers to monitor and control operation ofthe processes for this facility.


A. System Installer Qualifications1. The Installer shall have an established working relationship with the Control

System Manufacturer of not less than three years.2. The Installer shall have successfully completed Control System Manufacturer's

classes on the control system. The Installer shall present for review thecertification of completed training, including the hours of instruction and courseoutlines upon request.

3. The installer shall have an office within 50 miles of the project site and provide24-hour response in the event of a customer call.

1.3 ACCEPTABLE CONTROL SYSTEM MANUFACTURERS

Trane Company, Corporate Office: 3909 Tecport Dr. Harrisburg PA

a. Approved Product Line – Tracer SC Building Automation Systemb. Contact: Turner Reshetar – 717-743-4107

1.4 WARRANTY

A. Warrant all work as follows:

1. Labor & materials for control system specified shall be warranted free fromdefects for a period of twelve (12) months after final completion acceptance bythe Owner. Control System failures during the warranty period shall be adjusted,repaired, or replaced at no charge or reduction in service to the Owner. TheContractor shall respond to the Owner's request for warranty service within 24hours during customary business hours.

2. At the end of the final start-up/testing, if equipment and systems are operatingsatisfactorily to the Owner and Engineer, the Owner shall sign certificatescertifying that the control system's operation has been tested and accepted in


accordance with the terms of this specification. The date of Owner's acceptanceshall be the start of warranty.

3. Operator workstation software, project specific software, graphics, database, andfirmware updates shall be provided to the Owner at no charge during thewarranty period. Written authorization by Owner must, however, be granted priorto the installation of such changes.

4. The system provider shall provide a web-accessible system and support on-lineresource that provides the Owner access to a question/answer forum, graphicslibrary, user tips, upgrades, and manufacturer training schedules.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Contractor shall provide shop drawings and manufacturers’ standard specification data sheets onall hardware and software to be provided. No work may begin on any segment of this project untilthe Engineer and Owner have reviewed submittals for conformity with the plan and specifications.One electronic copy is required. All shop drawings shall be provided to the Engineerelectronically as .dwg or .dxf file formats.

1. Quantities of items submitted shall be reviewed by the Engineer and Owner. Suchreview shall not relieve the contractor from furnishing quantities required for completion.

2. Provide the Engineer and Owner, any additional information or data which is deemednecessary to determine compliance with these specifications or which is deemedvaluable in documenting the system to be installed.

3. Submit the following within 60 days of contract award:

B. Project Record Documents. Upon completion of installation submit three (3) copies of record (as-built) documents. The documents shall be submitted for approval prior to final completion andinclude:

1. Project Record Drawings. These shall be as-built versions of the submittal shopdrawings. One set of electronic media including CAD .DWG or .DXF drawing files shallalso be provided.

2. Testing and Commissioning Reports and Checklists.3. Operating and Maintenance (O & M) Manual. These shall be as-built versions of the

submittal product data.

PART 2- PRODUCTS

2.0 PRODUCT SECTION INCLUDES2.1 General Description2.2 Equipment Controller Characteristics2.3 Operator Interface2.4 Controller Signals & Input/Output Modules2.5 Auxiliary Control Devices

2.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

A. Provide Programmable Controllers for field installation required to perform the sequence ofoperations specified. For Controller provided by mechanical equipment manufacturers,coordinate BAS integration utilizing BACnet open communication protocol. Provide allnecessary coordination and engineering assistance in both instances to ensure all requiredI/O is provided and terminations are performed correctly to enable controls to functionproperly. These mechanical equipment mounted Controllers are required to directlycommunicate with Building Controllers to provide the specified BAS performance. Field


mounted Controllers for applications where not specified to be installed and wired in themechanical equipment manufacturer’s factory are required to provide the sequence ofoperations specified. Each of these Custom Application Controllers shall meet the followingrequirements:1. The BAS shall be composed of one or more independent, stand-alone, microprocessor

based Programmable Controller for mechanical equipment that require this level ofcontrol based upon the sequence of operations specified.

2. The Programmable Controller shall have sufficient memory to support its operatingsystem, point database, and programming requirements based upon design informationprovided herein.

3. The Programmable Controllers shall be provided with a communications port forconnection of the specified Portable Operators Terminal in addition to direct connectionto a Building Controller specified above.

4. The local application software within the Programmable Controller shall manage thephysical I/O points, calculate virtual points, and provide central communications forremote monitoring, manual overrides, and alarming.

5. The Controller shall continually check the status of its processor and memory circuits. Ifan abnormal operation is detected or communication is disrupted to the BuildingController the following shall occur:a) Controller will assume a predetermined failure mode.b) BAS will generate an alarm notification at the Building Controller and/or Operator

Workstation.

2.2 EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER CHARACTERISTICS

A. Environment. Controller hardware shall be suitable for the anticipated ambient conditions.1. Controller used in conditioned ambient shall be mounted in NEMA 1 type enclosures, and

shall be rated for operation at 0 C to 50 C [32 F to 120 F]

2. Controllers used outdoors and/or in wet ambient shall be mounted within NEMA 4 typewaterproof enclosures, and shall be rated for operation at -40 C to 70 C [-40 F to 158 F].

B. Serviceability. Custom Application Controller shall possess diagnostic LED’s indicatingpower, communications, and processor functions. All wiring connections shall be terminatedat field removable, modular terminal strips, or at communication board.

C. Memory. The Controller shall maintain all BIOS and programming information in the event ofa power loss for minimum of (72) continuous hours.

D. Immunity to power and noise. Controller shall be able to operate at 90% to 110% of nominalvoltage rating and shall perform an orderly shutdown below 80% nominal voltage.

2.3 OPERATOR INTERFACE

1. Owner shall provide their own PC-based or web-accessible operator interface. Each of theseoperator interfaces shall be able to access all information in the system.

a. System Diagnostics1) The system shall automatically monitor the operation of all network connections,

building management panels, and controllers.2) The failure of any device shall be annunciated to the operators.

b. Equipment & Application Pages1) The operator interface shall include standard pages for all equipment and

applications. These pages shall allow an operator to obtain information relevant tothe operation of the equipment and/or application, including:a) Animated Equipment Graphics for each major piece of equipment in the System.

This includes:


(1) Each Rooftop Unit, VAV Terminal, DOAS. These graphics shall show allpoints dynamically as specified in the points list.

(2) Animation capabilities shall include the ability to show a sequence of imagesreflecting the position of analog outputs, such as valve or damper positions.Graphics shall be capable of launching other web pages.

2) Alarms relevant to the equipment or application without requiring a user to navigateto an alarm page and perform a filter.

3) Historical Data (As defined in Automatic Trend Log section below) for the equipmentor application without requiring a user to navigate to a data log page and perform afilter.

c. Manual Control and Override.1) Point Control. Provide a method for a user to view, override, and edit if applicable,

the status of any object and property in the system. The point status shall beavailable by menu, on graphics or through custom programs.

2) Temporary Overrides. The user shall be able to perform a temporary overridewherever an override is allowed, automatically removing the override after a specifiedperiod of time.

3) Override Owners. The system shall convey to the user the owner of each overridefor all priorities that an override exists.

4) Provide a specific icon to show timed override or operator override, when a point, unitcontroller or application has been overridden manually.

d. Engineering Units1) Allow for selection of the desired engineering units (i.e. Inch pound or SI) in the

system.2) Unit selection shall be able to be customized by locality to select the desired units for

each measurement.3) Engineering units on this project shall be [IP].

2. Scheduling. A user shall be able to perform the following tasks utilizing the operatorinterface:a. Create a new schedule, defining the default values, events and membership.b. Create exceptions to a schedule for any given day.c. Apply an exception that spans a single day or multiple days.d. View a schedule by day, week and month.e. Exception schedules and holidays shall be shown clearly on the calendar.f. Modify the schedule events, members and exceptions.

3. Trend Logsa. Trend Logs Definition.

1) The operator interface shall allow a user with the appropriate security permissions todefine a trend log for any data in the system.

2) The operator interface shall allow a user to define any trend log options as describedin the Application and Control Software section.

b. Trend Log Viewer.1) The operator interface shall allow Trend Log data to be viewed and printed.2) The operator interface shall allow a user to view trend log data in text-based (time –

stamp/value).3) The operator shall be able to view the data collected by a trend log in a graphical

chart in the operator interface.4) Trend log viewing capabilities shall include the ability to show a minimum of 5 points

on a chart.5) Each data point trend line shall be displayed as a unique color.6) The operator shall be able to specify the duration of historical data to view by

scrolling and zooming.7) The system shall provide a graphical trace display of the associated time stamp and

value for any selected point along the x-axis.c. Export Trend Logs.


1) The operator interface shall allow a user to export trend log data in CSV or PDFformat for use by other industry standard word processing and spreadsheetpackages.

4. Alarm/Event Notificationa. An operator shall be notified of new alarms/events as they occur while navigating through

any part of the system via an alarm icon.b. Alarm/Event Log. The operator shall be able to view all logged system alarms/events

from any operator interface.The operator shall be able to sort and filter alarms from events. Alarms shall be sorted in

a minimum of 4 categories based on severity.Alarm/event messages shall use full language, easily recognized descriptors.An operator with the proper security level may acknowledge and clear alarms/events.All alarms/events that have not been cleared by the operator shall be stored by the

building controller.The alarm/event log shall include a comment field for each alarm/event that allows a user

to add specific comments associated with any alarm.c. Alarm Processing.

The operator shall be able to configure any object in the system to generate an alarmwhen transitioning in and out of a normal state.

The operator shall be able to configure the alarm limits, warning limits, states, andreactions for each object in the system.

5. Reports and Logs.a. The operator interface shall provide a reporting package that allows the operator to select

reports.b. The operator interface shall provide the ability to schedule reports to run at specified

intervals of time.c. The operator interface shall allow a user to export reports and logs from the building

controller in a format that is readily accessible by other standard software applicationsincluding spreadsheets and word processing. Acceptable formats include:1) CSV, HTML, XML, PDF

d. Reports and logs shall be readily printed to the system printer.e. Provide a means to list and access the last 10 reports viewed by the user.f. The following standard reports shall be available without requiring a user to manually

configure the report:1) All Points in Alarm Report: Provide an on demand report showing all current alarms.2) All Points in Override Report: Provide an on demand report showing all overrides in

effect.3) Commissioning Report: Provide a one-time report that lists all equipment with the unit

configuration and present operation.Points report: Provide a report that lists the current value of all points

2.4 CONTROLLER SIGNALS & INPUT/OUTPUT MODULESa. For flexibility in selection and replacement of valves, the controllers shall be capable of

supporting all of the following valve control types 0-10VDC, 0-5VDC, 4-20mA, 24VACfloating point, 24VAC - 2 position (Normally Open or Normally Closed).

b. For flexibility in selection and replacement of sensors, the controllers shall be capable ofreading sensor input ranges of 0 to10V, 0 to 20mA, pulse counts, and 200 to 20Kohm.

c. For flexibility in selection and replacement of binary sensors, the controller shall supportdry and wetted (24VAC) binary inputs.

d. For flexibility in selection and replacement devices, the controller’s shall have binaryoutput which are able to drive at least 12VA each.

e. For flexibility in selection and replacement of motors, the controller shall be capable ofoutputting 24VAC (binary output), DC voltage (0 to 10VDC minimum range) and PWM (inthe 80 to 100 Hz range).


f. For future needs, any I/O that is unused by functionality of equipment control shall beavailable to be used by custom program on the controller and by another controller on thenetwork.

g. For future expansion and flexibility, the controller shall have either on board or throughexpansion, 20 hardware input/output points. Expansion points must communicate withthe controller via an internal communications bus. Expansion points must be capable ofbeing mounted up to 200 meters from the controller. Expansion points that require theBACnet network for communication with the controller are not allowed.

2.5 AUXILIARY CONTROL DEVICES

A. Motorized dampers, unless otherwise specified elsewhere, shall be as follows:1. Damper frames shall be 16 gauge galvanized sheet metal or 1/8" extruded aluminum with

reinforced corner bracing.2. Damper blades shall not exceed 8" in width or 48" in length. Blades are to be suitable for

medium velocity performance (2,000 fpm). Blades shall be not less than 16 gauge.3. Damper shaft bearings shall be as recommended by manufacturer for application.4. All blade edges and top and bottom of the frame shall be provided with compressible seals.

Side seals shall be compressible stainless steel. The blade seals shall provide for amaximum leakage rate of 10 CFM per square foot at 2.5" w.c. differential pressure.

5. All leakage testing and pressure ratings will be based on AMCA Publication 500.6. Individual damper sections shall not be larger than 48" x 60". Provide a minimum of one

damper actuator per section.B. Control dampers shall be parallel or opposed blade types as scheduled on drawings.C. Electric damper/valve actuators.

1. The actuator shall have electronic overload or digital rotation sensing circuitry to preventdamage to the actuator throughout the rotation of the actuator.

2. Where shown, for power-failure/safety applications, an internal mechanical, spring returnmechanism shall be built into the actuator housing.

3. All rotary spring return actuators shall be capable of both clock-wise or counter clockwisespring return operation. Linear actuators shall spring return to the retracted position.

4. Proportional actuators shall accept a 0-10 VDC or 0-20 ma control signal and provide a 2-10VDC or 4-20 ma operating range.

5. All non-spring return actuators shall have an external manual gear release to allow manualpositioning of the damper when the actuator is not powered. Spring return actuators withmore than 60 in-lb. torque capacity shall have a manual crank for this purpose.

6. Actuators shall be provided with a conduit fitting and a minimum 1m electrical cable and shallbe pre-wired to eliminate the necessity of opening the actuator housing to make electricalconnections.

7. Actuators shall be Underwriters Laboratories Standard 873 listed.8. Actuators shall be designed for a minimum of 60,000 full stroke cycles at the actuator's rated

torque.D. Control Valves

1. Control valves shall be two-way or three-way type for two-position or modulating service asscheduled or shown.

2. Close-off (differential) Pressure Rating: Valve actuator and trim shall be furnished to providethe following minimum close-off pressure ratings:a. Water Valves:

1) Two-way: 150% of total system (pump) head.2) Three-way: 300% of pressure differential between ports A and B at design flow or

100% of total system (pump) head.b. Steam Valves: 150% of operating (inlet) pressure.

E. Water Valves:1. Body and trim style and materials shall be per manufacturer's recommendations for design

conditions and service shown, with equal percentage ports for modulating service.2. Sizing Criteria:


a. Two-position service: Line size.b. Two-way modulating service: Pressure drop shall be equal to twice the pressure drop

through heat exchanger (load), 50% of the pressure difference between supply andreturn mains, or [5] psi, whichever is greater.

c. Three-way Modulating Service: Pressure drop equal to twice the pressure drop throughthe coil exchanger (load), [5] psi maximum.

d. Valves 1/2" through 2" shall be bronze body or cast brass ANSI Class 250, spring loaded,Teflon packing, quick opening for two-position service. Two-way valves to havereplaceable composition disc, or stainless steel ball.

e. 2-1/2" valves and larger shall be cast iron ANSI Class 125 with guided plug and Teflonpacking.

3. Water valves shall fail normally open or closed as scheduled on plans or as follows:a. Heating coils in air handlers - normally open.b. Chilled water control valves - normally closed.c. Other applications - as scheduled or as required by sequence of operation.

4. Zone valves shall be sized to meet the control application and they shall maintain their lastposition in the event of a power failure.

F. Binary Temperature Devices1. Low-Voltage Space Thermostats shall be 24 V, bimetal-operated, mercury-switch type, with

either adjustable or fixed anticipation heater, concealed setpoint adjustment, 13°C-30°C(55°F-85°F) setpoint range, 1°C (2°F) maximum differential, and vented cover.

2. Line-Voltage Space Thermostats shall be bimetal-actuated, open-contact type or bellows-actuated, enclosed, snap-switch type or equivalent solid-state type, with heat anticipator, ULlisting for electrical rating, concealed setpoint adjustment, 13°C-30°C (55°F-85°F) setpointrange, 1°C (2°F) maximum differential, and vented cover.

3. Low-Limit airstream thermostats shall be UL listed, vapor pressure type. Element shall be atleast 6 m (20 ft) long. Element shall sense temperature in each 30 cm (1 ft) section and shallrespond to lowest sensed temperature. Low-limit thermostat shall be manual reset only.

G. Temperature Sensors1. Temperature sensors shall be Resistance Temperature Device (RTD) or Thermistor.2. Duct sensors shall be rigid or averaging as shown. Averaging sensors shall be a minimum of

1.5m [5 feet] in length.3. Immersion sensors shall be provided with a separable stainless steel well. Pressure rating of

well is to be consistent with the system pressure in which it is to be installed.4. Wireless Zone Sensors

a. Space sensors shall be equipped with set-point adjustment, override switch, display,and/or communication port as shown on the drawings.

b. To check for proper operation, wireless zone temperature sensors shall include a signalstrength and battery condition indicators on the zone sensor display or using LED’s onnon-display models

c. The wireless zone sensor shall include a readily visual indication of battery condition.The battery indication lights shall flash periodically for a minimum of 5 days to indicatethe need for battery replacement prior to failure.

d. Zone sensor shall utilize AA batteries and have published battery life of a minimum 5years. If OEM zone sensor batteries are only available from vendor then vendor mustsupply spare set of batteries. In addition, if minimum published battery life is less than 5years then vendor must supply replacement batteries to achieve 5 years of batteryreplacement cost avoidance.

e. LCD Digital Display (Optional)1) To allow local troubleshooting without specialized tools, error codes shall be

displayed on the digital display through a blinking pattern on the non-display models.Error codes shall include: not associated, address to 000, improper softwareconfiguration, input voltage too high, or general sensor failure. Codes shall beindicated on inside of sensor back cover.


2) To support use by the physically impaired, the wireless zone sensor shall be aminimum font size of 12 points, and the LCD model shall be readable in low lightconditions.

3) Visual battery life indication on LCD display required5. Provide matched temperature sensors for differential temperature measurement. Differential

accuracy shall be within 0.1 C [0.2 F].H. Humidity Sensors

1. Duct and room sensors shall have a sensing range of 20% to 80% with accuracy of ±5% R.H.2. Duct sensors shall be provided with a sampling chamber.3. Outdoor air humidity sensors shall have a sensing range of 20% to 95% R.H. It shall be

suitable for ambient conditions of -40 C to 75 C [-40 F to 170 F].4. Humidity sensor's drift shall not exceed 1% of full scale per year.

I. Static Pressure Sensors1. Sensor shall have linear output signal. Zero and span shall be field-adjustable.2. Sensor sensing elements shall withstand continuous operating conditions plus or minus 50%

greater than calibrated span without damage.3. Water pressure sensor shall have stainless steel diaphragm construction, proof pressure of

150 psi minimum. Sensor shall be complete with 4-20 ma output, required mountingbrackets, and block and bleed valves. Mount in location accessible for service.

4. Water differential pressure sensor shall have stainless steel diaphragm construction, proofpressure of 150 psi minimum. Over-range limit (DP) and maximum static pressure shall be3,000 psi. Transmitter shall be complete with 4-20 ma output, required mounting brackets,and five-valve manifold. Mount in a location accessible for service.

J. Low Limit Thermostats1. Safety low limit thermostats shall be vapor pressure type with an element 6m [20 ft] minimum

length. Element shall respond to the lowest temperature sensed by any one foot section.2. Low limit shall be manual reset only.

K. Carbon Dioxide (CO2) Sensors1. Carbon Dioxide sensors shall measure CO2 in PPM in a range of 0-2000 ppm. Accuracy

shall be +/- 3% of reading with stability within 5% over 5 years. Sensors shall be duct orspace mounted as indicated in the sequence of operation.

L. Flow Switches1. Flow-proving switches shall be either paddle or differential pressure type, as shown.2. Paddle type switches (water service only) shall be UL listed, SPDT snap-acting with pilot duty

rating (125 VA minimum). Adjustable sensitivity with NEMA 1 Type enclosure unlessotherwise specified:

3. Differential pressure type switches (air or water service) shall be UL listed, SPDT snap-acting, pilot duty rated (125 VA minimum), NEMA 1 Type enclosure, with scale range anddifferential suitable for intended application, or as specified.

4. Current sensing relays may be used for flow sensing or terminal devices.M. Relays

1. Control relays shall be UL listed plug-in type with dust cover. Contact rating, configuration,and coil voltage suitable for application.

2. Time delay relays shall be UL listed solid-state plug-in type with adjustable time delay. Delayshall be adjustable plus or minus 200% (minimum) from set-point shown on plans. Contactrating, configuration, and coil voltage suitable for application. Provide NEMA 1 Typeenclosure when not installed in local control panel.

N. Transformers and Power Supplies1. Control transformers shall be UL listed, Class 2 current-limiting type, or shall be furnished

with over-current protection in both primary and secondary circuits for Class 2 service.2. Unit output shall match the required output current and voltage requirements. Current output

shall allow for a 50% safety factor. Output ripple shall be 3.0 mV maximum Peak-to-Peak.Regulation shall be 0.10% line and load combined, with 50 microsecond response time for50% load changes. Unit shall have built-in over-voltage protection.

3. Unit shall operate between 0 C and 50 C.4. Unit shall be UL recognized.


O. Current Switches1. Current-operated switches shall be self-powered, solid state with adjustable trip current. The

switches shall be selected to match the current of the application and output requirements ofthe DDC system.

P. Pressure Transducers1. Transducer shall have linear output signal. Zero and span shall be field adjustable.2. Transducer sensing elements shall withstand continuous operating conditions of positive or

negative pressure 50% greater than calibrated span without damage.3. Water pressure transducer shall have stainless steel diaphragm construction, proof pressure

of 150 psi minimum. Transducer shall be complete with 4 to 20 mA output, required mountingbrackets, and block and bleed valves.

4. Water differential pressure transducer shall have stainless steel diaphragm construction,proof pressure of 150 psi minimum. Over-range limit (differential pressure) and maximumstatic pressure shall be 300 psi. Transducer shall be complete with 4 to 20 mA output,required mounting brackets, and five-valve manifold.

Q. Local Control Panels1. All indoor control cabinets shall be fully enclosed NEMA 1 Type construction with hinged

door, and removable sub-panels or electrical sub-assemblies.2. Interconnections between internal and face-mounted devices shall be pre-wired with color-

coded stranded conductors neatly installed in plastic troughs and/or tie-wrapped. Terminalsfor field connections shall be UL listed for 600-volt service, individually identified percontrol/interlock drawings, with adequate clearance for field wiring. Control terminations forfield connection shall be individually identified per control drawings.

3. Provide on/off power switch with over-current protection for control power sources to eachlocal panel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.0 EXECUTION SECTION INCLUDES3.1 Examination3.2 General Workmanship3.3 Wiring3.4 Fiber Optic Cable3.5 Installation of Sensors3.6 Flow Switch Installation3.7 Actuators3.8 Identification of Hardware and Wiring3.9 Controllers3.10 Programming3.11 Cleaning3.12 Protection3.13 Training3.14 Field Quality Control3.15 Acceptance

3.1 EXAMINATIONA. The Contract Documents shall be thoroughly examined for coordination of control devices their

installation, wiring, and commissioning. Coordinate and review mechanical equipmentspecifications, locations, and identify any discrepancies, conflicts, or omissions that shall bereported to the Architect/Engineer for resolution before rough-in work is started.

B. The BAS manufacturer shall inspect the jobsite in order to verify that control equipment can beinstalled as required, and any discrepancies, conflicts, or omissions shall be reported to theArchitect/Engineer for resolution before rough-in work is started.


3.2 GENERAL WORKMANSHIPA. Install equipment, piping, wiring/conduit, parallel to building lines (i.e. horizontal, vertical, and

parallel to walls) wherever possible.B. Provide sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for vibration of piping and equipment.C. Install all equipment in readily accessible location as defined by National Electric Code (NEC).

Control panels shall be attached to structural walls or properly supported in a free-standingconfiguration, unless mounted in equipment enclosure specifically designed for that purpose.Panels shall be mounted to allow for unobstructed access for service.

D. Verify integrity of all control wiring to ensure continuity and freedom from shorts and grounds priorto commencing the startup and commissioning procedures.

E. All control device installation, and wiring shall comply with Contract Documents, acceptableindustry specifications, and industry standards for performance, reliability, and compatibility.Installation and wiring shall be executed in strict adherence to local codes and standard practicesreferenced in Contract Documents.

3.3 WIRINGA. All control and interlock wiring shall comply with the National, Local Electrical Codes, and Section

16000 of these Contract Document specifications. Where the requirements of this section differwith those in Section 16000, the requirements of this section shall take precedence.

B. Where Class 2 wires are in concealed and accessible locations; including ceiling return airplenums, approved cables outside of electrical raceway can be used provided that the followingconditions are met:1. Circuits meet NEC Class 2 (current-limited) requirements. (Low-voltage power circuits shall

be sub-fused when required to meet Class 2 current-limit.)2. All cables shall be UL listed for application (i.e., cables used in ceiling plenums shall be UL

listed specifically for that purpose).C. Do not install Class 2 wiring in conduits containing Class 1 wiring. Boxes and panels containing

high voltage may not be used for low voltage wiring except for the purpose of interfacing the twovia control relays and transformers.

D. Where Class 2 wiring is run exposed, wiring shall be run parallel along a surface or perpendicularto it, and bundled, using approved wire ties at no greater than 3 m [10 ft] intervals. Such bundledcable shall be fastened to the structure, using industry approved fasteners, at 1.5 m [5 ft] intervalsor more often to achieve a neat and workmanlike result.

E. All wire-to-device connections shall be made at a terminal blocks or terminal strip. All wire-towire connections shall be at a terminal block, or with a crimped connector. All wiring withinenclosures shall be neatly bundled and anchored to permit access and prevent restriction todevices and terminals.

F. Maximum allowable voltage for control wiring shall be 120Vac. If only higher voltages areavailable for use, the BAS manufacturer shall provide step-down transformers to achieve thedesired control voltages.

G. All control wiring shall be installed as continuous lengths, where possible. Any required splicesshall be made only within an approved junction box or other approved protective device.

H. Install plenum wiring in sleeves where it passes through walls and floors. Maintain fire rating atall penetrations in accordance with Contract Documents and National and/or Local Codes.

I. Conduit and wire sizing shall be determined by the BAS manufacturer in order to maintainmanufacturer’s recommendation and must meet National and Local Codes.

J. Control and status relays are to be located in pre-fabricated enclosures that meet the application.These relays may also be located within packaged equipment control panel enclosures ascoordinated. These relays shall not be located within Class 1 starter enclosures.

K. Follow manufacturer's installation recommendations for all communication and network buscabling. Network or communication cabling shall be run separately from all control power wiring.

L. Adhere to Section 16000 requirements for installation of electrical raceways.M. BAS manufacturer shall terminate all control and/or interlock wiring and shall maintain updated

(as-built) wiring diagrams with terminations identified at the job site.


N. Flexible metal conduits and liquid-tight flexible metal conduits shall not exceed 3' in length andshall be supported at each end. Flexible metal conduit less than 1/2" electrical trade size shallnot be used. In areas exposed to moisture, including chiller and boiler rooms, liquid-tight, flexiblemetal conduits shall be used.

3.4 FIBER OPTIC CABLE SYSTEM (WHERE APPLICABLE)A. All cabling shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner. Minimum cable and unjacketed

fibber bend radii as specified by cable manufacturer shall be maintained.B. Maximum pulling tensions as specified by the cable manufacturer shall not be exceeded during

installation. Post installation residual cable tension shall be within cable manufacturer'sspecifications.

C. Fiber optic cabinets, hardware, and cable entering the cabinet shall be installed in accordancewith manufacturers' instructions. Minimum cable and unjacketed fiber bend radii as specified bycable manufacturer shall be maintained.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF SENSORSA. Sensors required for mechanical equipment operation shall be factory installed and wired as

specified in mechanical equipment specifications. BAS manufacturer shall be responsible forcoordinating these control devices and ensuring the sequence of operations will be met.Installation and wiring shall be in accordance with the BAS manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Sensors that require field mounting shall meet the BAS manufacturer’s recommendations and becoordinated with the mechanical equipment they will be associated.

C. Mount sensors rigidly and adequately for the environment the sensor will operate.D. Room temperature sensors shall be installed on concealed junction boxes properly supported by

the block wall framing. For installation in dry wall ceilings, the low voltage sensor wiring can beinstalled exposed in the wall and must meet applicable National and Local Electrical Codes.

E. All wires attached to wall mounted sensors shall be sealed off to prevent air from transmitting inthe associated conduit and affecting the room sensor readings.

F. Install duct static pressure tap with tube end facing directly down-stream of air flow.G. Install space static pressure sensor with static sensing probe applicable for space installation

where applicable.H. Sensors used in mixing plenums, and hot and cold decks shall be of the averaging type.

Averaging sensors shall be installed in a serpentine manner horizontally across duct. Each bendshall be supported with a capillary clip.

I. All pipe mounted temperature sensors shall be installed in matched thermowells. Install all liquidtemperature sensors with heat conducting fluid in thermal wells for adequate thermalconductance.

J. Wiring for space sensors shall be concealed in building drywall. EMT conduit is acceptable withinmechanical equipment and service rooms.

K. Install outdoor air temperature sensors on north wall complete with sun shield at manufacturer’srecommended location and coordinated with Engineer.

3.6 FLOW SWITCH INSTALLATIONA. Coordinate installation of flow switch with Mechanical Contractor who will be responsible for

installing a thread-o-let in steel piping applications. Copper pipe applications will require the useCxCxF Tee, and no pipe extensions or substitutions will be allowed.

B. Mount a minimum of 5 pipe diameters upstream and 5 pipe diameters downstream, or two feet,whichever is greater, from pipe fittings and other inline potential obstructions.

C. Install in accordance with manufacturers' instructions, which will require proper flow direction,horizontal alignment with flow switch mounting on the top of pipe.

3.7 VALVE & DAMPER ACTUATOR INSTALLATIONA. Mount and link multiple control damper actuators where required, per manufacturer's instructions.B. To compress seals when spring-return actuators are used on normally closed dampers, power

the actuator to approximately 5° open position, manually close the damper, and then tighten thelinkage.


C. Check operation of damper/actuator combination to confirm that actuator modulates dampersmoothly throughout stroke to both open and closed positions. Coordinate any installationproblems with Sheet metal Contractor.

D. Valves - Actuators shall be mounted on valves with adapters approved by both the actuator andvalve manufacturer. Actuators and adapters shall be mounted in the factory as an approveddesign arrangement and shall not be field modified.

3.8 IDENTIFICATION OF HARDWARE AND WIRINGA. All field wiring and cabling, including that within factory mounted, and wired control panels and

devices for mechanical equipment, shall be labeled at each end within 2" of termination with acable identifier and other descriptive information for troubleshooting, maintenance, and servicepurposes. BAS manufacturer to coordinate this labeling requirement with mechanical equipmentmanufacturer as it relates to controls.

B. Permanently label or code each point of field terminal strips to show the instrument or item servedand correlate them to the BAS design drawings.

C. Identify control panels with minimum 1-cm letters on laminated plastic nameplates.D. Identifiers shall match record documents. All plug-in components shall be labeled such that

removal of the component does not remove the label.

3.9 BAS DDC CONTROLLERSA. Provide a separate DDC Controller for individual HVAC mechanical equipment. DDC Controllers

shall be factory mounted, installed, and wired by mechanical equipment manufacturer asspecified. BAS manufacturer to furnish and coordinate DDC controllers and control devices andensure that installation and wiring adhere to BAS manufacturer’s design recommendations. Forthose mechanical equipment units that do not have factory installed controls specified, the BASmanufacturer shall field mount controls and coordinate all installation and termination informationto ensure the specified sequence of operations are met.

B. Building Controllers and Custom Application Controllers shall be selected to provide a minimumof 15% spare I/O point capacity for each point type (analog or digital) found at each location. Ifinput points are not universal, 15% of each type is required. If outputs are not universal, 15% ofeach type is required. A minimum of one spare is required for each type of point used in eachcontroller.

C. Future use of spare I/O point capacity shall require providing the field instrument and controldevice, field wiring, engineering, programming, and commissioning. No additional Controllerboards or point modules shall be required to implement use of these spare points.

3.10 PROGRAMMINGA. Provide sufficient internal memory for all controllers to ensure specified sequence of operations,

alarming, trending, and reporting requirements are achieved. BAS manufacturer shall provide aminimum of 25% spare memory capacity for future use.

B. Point Naming: System point names shall be modular in design, allowing easy operator interfacewithout the use of a written point index.

C. Software Programming1. Provide programming for individual mechanical systems to achieve all aspects of the

sequence of operation specified. It is the BAS manufacturer’s responsibility to ensure allmechanical equipment functions and operates as specified in sequence of operations.Provide sufficient programming comments in controller application software to clearlydescribe each section of the program. The comment statements shall reflect the languageused in the sequence of operations.

D. BAS Operator’s Interface1. When Operator Workstation is specified, provide color graphics for each piece of mechanical

equipment depicting sufficient I/O to monitor and troubleshoot operation. Additionally,provide individual floor plans of the building allowing an operator to quickly view the overallfloor plan area for any out of tolerance conditions that may need addressing. Operator colorgraphics shall include Rooftop Units, VAV Terminal Boxes, Fan Coil Units, Exhaust Fans, etc.These standard graphics shall depict all points dynamically as specified in the points listand/or indicated in sequence of operation.


2. The BAS manufacturer shall provide all the labor necessary to install, initialize, start-up, andtrouble-shoot all operator interface software and their functions as described in this section.This includes any operating system software, the operator interface data base, and any thirdparty software installation and integration required for successful operation of the operatorinterface.

3.11 CLEANINGA. The BAS manufacturer’s installing contractor(s) shall clean up all debris resulting from their

installation activities on a daily basis. The installation contractors shall remove all cartons,containers, crates, etc. under his control as soon as their contents have been removed. Wasteshall be collected and placed in a location designated by the Owner, Construction Manager,General Contractor, and/or Mechanical Contractor.

B. At the completion of work in any area, the installation contractor shall clean all of their work,equipment, etc., making it free from dust, dirt and debris.

C. At the completion of work, all equipment furnished under this Section shall be checked for paintdamage. Any factory finished paint that has been damaged shall be repaired to match theadjacent areas. Any metal cabinet or enclosure that has been deformed shall be replaced withnew material and repainted to match the adjacent areas.

3.12 PROTECTIONA. The BAS installation contractor shall protect all work and material from damage by their work or

personnel, and shall be liable for all damage.B. The BAS manufacturer shall be responsible for their work and equipment until final inspection,

testing, and acceptance. The BAS installing contractor shall protect their work against theft ordamage, and shall carefully store material and equipment received on site that is not immediatelyinstalled. The Contractor shall close all open ends of work with temporary covers or plugs duringstorage and construction to prevent entry of foreign objects.

3.13 TRAININGA. Provide minimum of (2) onsite training sessions, and (4) hours for each session, throughout the

contract period. The training will be provided for personnel designated by the Owner.B. The Owner training shall enable personnel to proficiently operate the BAS by being able to

create, modify and delete programming; add, remove and modify physical points for individualcontrollers; and add additional controllers when required.

C. These objectives will be divided into three logical groupings; participants may attend one or moreof these, depending on level of knowledge required:1. Day-to-day BAS Operators2. BAS Troubleshooting & Maintenance3. Maintenance Manager: Parts Inventory

D. Provide course outline and materials prior to schedule training session. The instructor(s) shallprovide one copy of training material per student.

E. The instructor(s) shall be factory-trained and experienced in teaching this technical material.

3.14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. All work, materials and equipment shall comply with the rules and regulations of applicable local,

state, and federal codes and ordinances as identified in Contract Documents.B. BAS manufacturer shall continually monitor the field installation for building code compliance and

quality of workmanship. All visible piping and or wiring runs shall be installed parallel to buildinglines and properly supported.

C. BAS installing Contractor(s) shall arrange for field inspections by local and/or state authoritieshaving jurisdiction over the work.

3.15 ACCEPTANCEA. The BAS will not be accepted as meeting the requirements of Completion until all tests described

in this specification have been performed to the satisfaction of both the Engineer and Owner.Any tests that cannot be performed due to circumstances beyond the control of the Contractormay be exempt from the Completion requirements if stated as such in writing by the Owner'srepresentative. Such tests shall then be performed as part of the warranty.


PART 4 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION


Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 1Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

4.2 SUMMARYA. This Section includes control sequences for HVAC systems, subsystems, and equipment. Also

refer to the HVAC drawings for additional sequence information. Sequence of operation ishereby defined as the manner and method by which controls and systems function.Requirements for each type of control system operation are specified in this section and/or on thecontract drawings.

B. All listed set point shall be fully adjustable of the operator work station.C. Refer to Section 23 09 00 for definitionsD. The control system supplier/installer shall review all HVAC equipment shop drawings prior to their

drawing submission. The supplier shall note in the submission that all relative shop have beenreviewed prior to submission to the engineer.

E. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for each system automatically controlled, containing thefollowing information:Schematic flow diagram of system shop wing fans, pumps, coils, dampers, valves, and control

devices.Label each control device with setting or adjustable range of control.Indicate difference between factory field wiring.Indicate each control panel required, with internal and external piping and wiring clearly indicated.

Provide detail of panel face, including controls, instruments, and labeling.Include verbal description of sequence of operation.Maintenance Data. Include copy of shop drawings in each maintenance manual; in accordance

with requirements of Division-1When preparing submittals and programming, use a room number schedule generated by the

architect and/or owner, which indicates the actuall room numbers that will be used when thebuilding is occupied. If the schedule is not available, revise the initial submittal, when aschedule is available, to reflect the proper room numbers.

BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

The BMS shall include all hardware, software, and programming required to fully execute all controlsequences and monitor all control points described in this specification through a local areanetwork as described in Division 23 specification “DDC Control Systems for.” In addition to theabove the BMS shall have the capabilities to perform all the following control strategies, energymanagement functions, and building management functions. All BMS software shall reside onthe Operator Workstation to be located within the building at a location to be determined.

Building Addition & Renovations for Refrigerant PipingThe Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 232300 - 1

SECTION 23 23 00REFRIGERANT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes refrigerant piping used for air-conditioning applications.


A. Line Test Pressure for Refrigerant R-407C:

1. Suction Lines for Air-Conditioning Applications: 230 psig2. Suction Lines for Heat-Pump Applications: 380 psig

3. Hot-Gas and Liquid Lines: 380 psig

B. Line Test Pressure for Refrigerant R-410A:

1. Suction Lines for Air-Conditioning Applications: 300 psig2. Suction Lines for Heat-Pump Applications: 535 psig3. Liquid Lines: 535 psig

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of valve and refrigerant piping specialty indicated.Include pressure drop, based on manufacturer's test data, for the following:

1. Thermostatic expansion valves2. Solenoid valves

3. Filter dryers

4. Strainers5. Pressure-regulating valves

B. Shop Drawings: Show layout of refrigerant piping and specialties, including pipe, tube,

and fitting sizes, flow capacities, valve arrangements and locations, slopes of

horizontal runs, oil traps, double risers, wall and floor penetrations, and equipment

connection details. Show interface and spatial relationships between piping and

equipment.

1. Refrigerant piping indicated on Drawings is schematic only. Size piping and

design actual piping layout, including oil traps, double risers, specialties, and

pipe and tube sizes to accommodate, as a minimum, equipment provided,

elevation difference between compressor and evaporator, and length of piping

to ensure proper operation and compliance with warranties of connected

equipment.


1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Welding certificates.

B. Field quality-control test reports.

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For refrigerant valves and piping specialties to

include in maintenance manuals.


A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to ASME Boiler and Pressure

Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

B. Comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Refrigeration Systems."

C. Comply with ASME B31.5, "Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components."

1.8 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store piping in a clean and protected area with end caps in place to ensure that piping

interior and exterior are clean when installed.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.These items are specified in Section 077200 "Roof Accessories."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Copper Tube:

1. ASTM B 88, Type K or L2. ASTM B 280, Type ACR

B. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22.

C. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.

D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32. Use 95-5 tin antimony or alloy HB solder to joincopper socket fittings on copper pipe.

E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8.F. Flexible Connectors:

1. Body: Tin-bronze bellows with woven, flexible, tinned-bronze-wire-reinforced

protective jacket.

2. End Connections: Socket ends.

3. Offset Performance: Capable of minimum 3/4-inch misalignment in minimum 7-

inch- long assembly.4. Pressure Rating: Factory test at minimum 500 psig.


5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.

2.2 VALVES AND SPECIALTIES

A. Diaphragm Packless Valves:

1. Body and Bonnet: Forged brass or cast bronze; globe design with straight-

through or angle pattern.2. Diaphragm: Phosphor bronze and stainless steel with stainless-steel spring.3. Operator: Rising stem and hand wheel.4. Seat: Nylon.5. End Connections: Socket, union, or flanged.6. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.


B. Packed-Angle Valves:

1. Body and Bonnet: Forged brass or cast bronze.2. Packing: Molded stem, back seating, and replaceable under pressure.3. Operator: Rising stem.

4. Seat: Nonrotating, self-aligning polytetrafluoroethylene.5. Seal Cap: Forged-brass or valox hex cap.6. End Connections: Socket, union, threaded, or flanged.7. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.8. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F.

C. Check Valves:

1. Body: Ductile iron, forged brass, or cast bronze; globe pattern.

2. Bonnet: Bolted ductile iron, forged brass, or cast bronze; or brass hex plug.3. Piston: Removable polytetrafluoroethylene seat.

4. Closing Spring: Stainless steel.5. Manual Opening Stem: Seal cap, plated-steel stem, and graphite seal.6. End Connections: Socket, union, threaded, or flanged.7. Maximum Opening Pressure: 0.50 psig.8. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.


D. Service Valves:

1. Body: Forged brass with brass cap including key end to remove core.2. Core: Removable ball-type check valve with stainless-steel spring.3. Seat: Polytetrafluoroethylene.4. End Connections: Copper spring.5. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.

E. Solenoid Valves: Comply with ARI 760 and UL 429; listed and labeled by an NRTL.

1. Body and Bonnet: Plated steel.2. Solenoid Tube, Plunger, Closing Spring, and Seat Orifice: Stainless steel.3. Seat: Polytetrafluoroethylene.4. End Connections: Threaded.

5. Electrical: Molded, watertight coil in NEMA 250 enclosure of type required by

location with 1/2-inch conduit adapter, and 24 Vac coil.


6. Working Pressure Rating: 400 psig.7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F.8. Manual operator.

F. Safety Relief Valves: Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code; listed andlabeled by an NRTL.

1. Body and Bonnet: Ductile iron and steel, with neoprene O-ring seal.2. Piston, Closing Spring, and Seat Insert: Stainless steel.3. Seat Disc: Polytetrafluoroethylene.

4. End Connections: Threaded.5. Working Pressure Rating: 400 psig.6. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F.

G. Thermostatic Expansion Valves: Comply with ARI 750.

1. Body, Bonnet, and Seal Cap: Forged brass or steel.2. Diaphragm, Piston, Closing Spring, and Seat Insert: Stainless steel.3. Packing and Gaskets: Non-asbestos.4. Capillary and Bulb: Copper tubing filled with refrigerant charge.

5. Suction Temperature: 40 deg F.

6. Superheat: Adjustable.

7. End Connections: Socket, flare, or threaded union.

8. Working Pressure Rating: 700 psig

H. Straight-Type Strainers:

1. Body: Welded steel with corrosion-resistant coating.2. Screen: 100-mesh stainless steel.3. End Connections: Socket or flare.4. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.


I. Angle-Type Strainers:

1. Body: Forged brass or cast bronze.2. Drain Plug: Brass hex plug.3. Screen: 100-mesh monel.

4. End Connections: Socket or flare.5. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.6. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F.

J. Moisture/Liquid Indicators:

1. Body: Forged brass.2. Window: Replaceable, clear, fused glass window with indicating element

protected by filter screen.3. Indicator: Color coded to show moisture content in ppm.4. Minimum Moisture Indicator Sensitivity: Indicate moisture above 60 ppm.5. End Connections: Socket or flare.

6. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F.

K. Replaceable-Core Filter Dryers: Comply with ARI 730.


1. Body and Cover: Painted-steel shell with ductile-iron cover, stainless-steel

screws, and neoprene gaskets.

2. Filter Media: 10 micron, pleated with integral end rings; stainless-steel support.

3. Desiccant Media: Activated alumina or charcoal.

4. Designed for reverse flow (for heat-pump applications).5. End Connections: Socket.

6. Access Ports: NPS 1/4 connections at entering and leaving sides for pressure

differential measurement.7. Maximum Pressure Loss: 2 psig.8. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.9. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F.

L.Permanent Filter Dryers: Comply with ARI 730.

1. Body and Cover: Painted-steel shell.2. Filter Media: 10 micron, pleated with integral end rings; stainless-steel support.3. Desiccant Media: Activated alumina or charcoal.4. Designed for reverse flow (for heat-pump applications).5. End Connections: Socket.6. Access Ports: NPS 1/4 connections at entering and leaving sides for pressure

differential measurement.

7. Maximum Pressure Loss: 2 psig.

8. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.9. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F.

M. Mufflers:

1. Body: Welded steel with corrosion-resistant coating.2. End Connections: Socket or flare.3. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.4. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F.

N. Receivers: Comply with ARI 495.

1. Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code; listed and labeled by anNRTL.

2. Comply with UL 207; listed and labeled by an NRTL.3. Body: Welded steel with corrosion-resistant coating.4. Tappings: Inlet, outlet, liquid level indicator, and safety relief valve.

5. End Connections: Socket or threaded.6. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F.

O. Liquid Accumulators: Comply with ARI 495.

1. Body: Welded steel with corrosion-resistant coating.2. End Connections: Socket or threaded.3. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.4. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F.

2.3 REFRIGERANTSA. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following:


B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one ofthe following:

1. Atofina Chemicals, Inc.2. DuPont Company; Fluorochemicals Div.3. Honeywell, Inc.; Genetron Refrigerants.4. INEOS Fluor Americas LLC.5. Engineer Approved Equal

C. ASHRAE 34, R-407C: Difluoromethane/Pentafluoroethane/1,1,1,2-Tetrafluoroethane.

D. ASHRAE 34, R-410A: Pentafluoroethane/Difluoromethane.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS FOR REFRIGERANT R-410A / R-407C

A. Hot-Gas and Liquid Lines, and Suction Lines for Heat-Pump Applications:

1. NPS 5/8 and Smaller Copper, Type ACR annealed- or drawn-temper tubing andwrought-copper fittings with brazed soldered joints.

2. NPS 3/4 to NPS 2”: Copper, Type K, annealed- or drawn-temper tubing and

wrought-copper fittings with brazed or soldered joints.

B. Safety-Relief-Valve Discharge Piping: Copper, Type L, annealed- or drawn-temper

tubing and wrought-copper fittings with brazed or soldered joints.

3.2 VALVE AND SPECIALTY APPLICATIONS

A. Install diaphragm packless or packed-angle valves in suction and discharge lines of

compressor.

B. Install service valves for gage taps at inlet and outlet of hot-gas bypass valves and

strainers if they are not an integral part of valves and strainers.

C. Install a check valve at the compressor discharge and a liquid accumulator at the

compressor suction connection.

D. Except as otherwise indicated, install diaphragm packless or packed-angle valves oninlet and outlet side of filter dryers.

E. Install a full-sized, three-valve bypass around filter dryers.

F. Install solenoid valves upstream from each expansion valve and hot-gas bypass valve.Install solenoid valves in horizontal lines with coil at top.

G. Install thermostatic expansion valves as close as possible to distributors on

evaporators.

1. Install valve so diaphragm case is warmer than bulb.2. Secure bulb to clean, straight, horizontal section of suction line using two bulb

straps. Do not mount bulb in a trap or at bottom of the line.

3. If external equalizer lines are required, make connection where it will reflect


suction-line pressure at bulb location.

H. Install safety relief valves where required by ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.Pipe safety-relief-valve discharge line to outside according to ASHRAE 15.

I. Install moisture/liquid indicators in liquid line at the inlet of the thermostatic expansion

valve or at the inlet of the evaporator coil capillary tube.

J. Install strainers upstream from and adjacent to the following unless they are furnishedas an integral assembly for device being protected:

1. Solenoid valves.2. Thermostatic expansion valves.3. Hot-gas bypass valves.

4. Compressor.

K. Install filter dryers in liquid line between compressor and thermostatic expansion valve

where required my manufacturer.

L. Install receivers sized to accommodate pump-down charge.

M. Install flexible connectors at compressors.


A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangementof piping systems; indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe andcalculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Installpiping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings.

B. Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15.

C. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in

equipment rooms and service areas.

D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service

areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless

specifically indicated otherwise.

E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel

removal.

F. Install piping adjacent to machines to allow service and maintenance.

G. Install piping free of sags and bends.

H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

I. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system

operating pressure.

J. Refer to Section 230900 "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC" and Section 230993"Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls" for solenoid valve controllers, controlwiring, and sequence of operation.


K. Install piping as short and direct as possible, with a minimum number of joints, elbows,

and fittings.

L. Arrange piping to allow inspection and service of refrigeration equipment. Install valvesand specialties in accessible locations to allow for service and inspection. Installaccess doors or panels as specified in Section 083113 "Access Doors and Frames" ifvalves or equipment requiring maintenance is concealed behind finished surfaces.

M. Install refrigerant piping in protective conduit where installed belowground.

N. Install refrigerant piping in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where exposed to

mechanical injury.

O. Slope refrigerant piping as follows:

1. Install horizontal hot-gas discharge piping with a uniform slope downward away

from compressor.

2. Install horizontal suction lines with a uniform slope downward to compressor.

3. Install traps and double risers to entrain oil in vertical runs.4. Liquid lines may be installed level.

P. When brazing or soldering, remove solenoid-valve coils and sight glasses; alsoremove valve stems, seats, and packing, and accessible internal parts of refrigerantspecialties. Do not apply heat near expansion-valve bulb.

Q. Before installation of steel refrigerant piping, clean pipe and fittings using the followingprocedures:

1. Shot blast the interior of piping.

2. Remove coarse particles of dirt and dust by drawing a clean, lintless

cloth through tubing by means of a wire or electrician's tape.3. Draw a clean, lintless cloth saturated with trichloroethylene through the tube or

pipe. Continue this procedure until cloth is not discolored by dirt.4. Draw a clean, lintless cloth, saturated with compressor oil, squeezed dry,

through the tube or pipe to remove remaining lint. Inspect tube or pipe visuallyfor remaining dirt and lint.

5. Finally, draw a clean, dry, lintless cloth through the tube or pipe.

6. Safety-relief-valve discharge piping is not required to be cleaned but is required

to be open to allow unrestricted flow.

R. Install piping with adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hangers or

between pipes for insulation installation.

S. Identify refrigerant piping and valves according to Section 230553 "Identification for

HVAC Piping and Equipment."

T. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply withrequirements for sleeves specified in Section 230517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals forHVAC Piping."

U. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with

requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 230517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals

for HVAC Piping."


V. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply withrequirements for escutcheons specified in Section 230518 "Escutcheons for HVACPiping."

3.4 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before

assembly.

C. Fill pipe and fittings with an inert gas (nitrogen or carbon dioxide), during brazing or

welding, to prevent scale formation.

D. Soldered Joints: Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper TubeHandbook."

E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," Chapter "Pipeand Tube."

1. Use Type BcuP, copper-phosphorus alloy for joining copper socket fittings with

copper pipe.

2. Use Type BAg, cadmium-free silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel.

F. Threaded Joints: Thread steel pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME

B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to

remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless

dryseal threading is specified.

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are

corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open

welds.

G. Steel pipe can be threaded, but threaded joints must be seal brazed or seal welded.

H. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M.

I. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness forservice application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricantson bolt threads.

3.5 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hanger, support, and anchor products are specified in Division 22 Section "Hangersand Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Install the following pipe attachments:

1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal runs less than 20 feet

long.2. Roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal runs 20 feet or longer.

3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet or


longer, supported on a trapeze.

4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.

5. Copper-clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct contact

with copper pipe.

C. Pipe hanger and support spacing schedule:

Material Installation Pipe Size Max. HangerSpacing

Min. RodDiameter

Copper Horizontal

1/2” to 3/4” 5 feet 1/4”

1” 6 feet 1/4”

1-1/4” to 2” 8 feet 3/8”

Copper Vertical All Sizes 10 feet or everyfloor

N/A


A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.


1. Comply with ASME B31.5, Chapter VI.2. Test refrigerant piping, specialties, and receivers. Isolate compressor,

condenser, evaporator, and safety devices from test pressure if they are notrated above the test pressure.

3. Test high- and low-pressure side piping of each system separately at not less

than the pressures indicated in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article.

a. Fill system with nitrogen to the required test pressure.

b. System shall maintain test pressure at the manifold gage throughout

duration of test.

c. Test joints and fittings with electronic leak detector or by brushing a

small amount of soap and glycerin solution over joints.d. Remake leaking joints using new materials and retest until satisfactory

results are achieved.

3.7 SYSTEM CHARGING

A. Charge system using the following procedures:

1. Install core in filter dryers after leak test but before evacuation.

2. Evacuate entire refrigerant system with a vacuum pump to 500 micrometers. If

vacuum holds for 12 hours, system is ready for charging.3. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas, allowing pressure to build up to 2 psig.4. Charge system with a new filter-dryer core in charging line.


3.8 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust thermostatic expansion valve to obtain proper evaporator superheat.

B. Adjust high- and low-pressure switch settings to avoid short cycling in response to

fluctuating suction pressure.

C. Adjust set-point temperature of air-conditioning or chilled-water controllers to the

system design temperature.

D. Perform the following adjustments before operating the refrigeration system,according to manufacturer's written instructions:

1. Open shutoff valves in condenser water circuit.2. Verify that compressor oil level is correct.3. Open compressor suction and discharge valves.

4. Open refrigerant valves except bypass valves that are used for other purposes.

5. Check open compressor-motor alignment and verify lubrication for motors and

bearings.

E. Replace core of replaceable filter dryer after system has been adjusted and afterdesign flow rates and pressures are established.

END OF SECTION

Building Addition & Renovations for Metal DuctsThe Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 233113 - 1

SECTION 23 31 13METAL DUCTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes metal ducts for supply, return, outside, and exhaust air-distribution systems in pressure classes from minus 2 to plus 10-inch wg. Metal ductsinclude the following:1. Rectangular ducts and fittings.

2. Single-wall, round, and flat-oval ducts and formed fittings.3. Double-wall round ducts and fittings.

B. Related Sections include the following:1. Division 23 Section "Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, duct-

mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. NUSIG: National Uniform Seismic Installation Guidelines.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Duct system design, as indicated, has been used to select size and type of air-movingand -distribution equipment and other air system components. Changes to layout orconfiguration of duct system must be specifically approved in writing by Architect.Accompany requests for layout modifications with calculations showing that proposedlayout will provide original design results without increasing system total pressure.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Coordination Drawings: Refer to Section 230500 requirements.


C. Field quality-control test reports.


A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural

Welding Code--Steel," for hangers and supports, AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding

Code-Aluminum," for aluminum supporting members and AWS D9.1, "Sheet Metal

Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding.


B. NFPA Compliance:1. NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."2. NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."

C. Comply with NFPA 96, "Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking

Operations," Ch. 3, "Duct System," for range hood ducts, unless otherwise indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" foracceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unlessotherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, rollermarks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.

B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653Mand having G60 coating designation; ducts shall have mill-phosphatized finish forsurfaces exposed to view.

C. Carbon-Steel Sheets: ASTM A 366/A 366M, cold-rolled sheets; commercial quality;

with oiled, matte finish for exposed ducts.

D. Aluminum Sheets: ASTM B 209, alloy 3003, temper H14; with mill finish for concealed

ducts and standard, 1-side bright finish for exposed ducts.

2.2 DUCT LINER

A. Fibrous-Glass Liner: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with NAIMA AH124.

1. Manufacturers:

a. CertainTeed Corp.; Insulation Group.b. Johns Manville International, Inc.c. Knauf Fiber Glass GmbH.d. Owens Corning.

2. Fibrous glass duct liners shall resist fungal and bacterial growth as defined andin accordance with ASTM C 1338, required for airstream surfaces per ASHRAE62.1-2001; and additionally, ASTM G 21-96 (fungus test) required by ASTM C1071.

3. Materials: ASTM C 1071; surfaces exposed to airstream shall be coated to

prevent erosion of glass fibers.

a. Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.26 at 75 deg F mean temperature.b. Fire-Hazard Classification: Maximum flame-spread index of 25 and

smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to ASTM E 84.

c. Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with ASTM C916.

d. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel suitable for adhesive

attachment, mechanical attachment, or welding attachment to duct


without damaging liner when applied as recommended by manufacturer

and without causing leakage in duct.

1) Tensile Strength: Indefinitely sustain a 50-lb- tensile, dead-load

test perpendicular to duct wall.

2) Fastener Pin Length: As required for thickness of insulation and

without projecting more than 1/8 inch into airstream.

3) Adhesive for Attaching Mechanical Fasteners: Comply with fire-

hazard classification of duct liner system.

2.3 SEALANT MATERIALS

A. Joint and Seam Sealants, General: The term "sealant" is not limited to materials of

adhesive or mastic nature but includes tapes and combinations of open-weave fabric

strips and mastics.

B. Tape Sealing System: Woven-fiber tape impregnated with gypsum mineral compoundand modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard,durable, airtight seal.

C. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: Flexible, adhesive sealant, resistant to UV lightwhen cured, UL 723 listed, and complying with NFPA requirements for Class 1 ducts.

D. Solvent-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: One-part, nonsag, solvent-release-curing,

polymerized butyl sealant formulated with a minimum of 75 percent solids.

E. Flanged Joint Mastic: One-part, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric joint sealant

complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O.

F. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.

G. VOC content for all duct sealants must be less than 250 g/L when calculated accordingto 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steelfasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.1. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate

concretes or for slabs more than 4 inches thick.

2. Exception: Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-

aggregate concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.

B. Hanger Materials: Galvanized sheet steel or threaded steel rod.1. Hangers Installed in Corrosive Atmospheres: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods

or galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer afterinstallation.

2. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct ConstructionStandards--Metal and Flexible" for steel sheet width and thickness and for steelrod diameters.

3. Galvanized-steel straps attached to aluminum ducts shall have contact surfaces

painted with zinc-chromate primer.


C. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws;compatible with duct materials.

D. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M.

1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates.2. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel support materials.

3. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum support materials unless materials are

electrolytically separated from ducts.

2.5 RECTANGULAR DUCT FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate ducts, elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and otherconstruction with galvanized, sheet steel, according to SMACHNA’s “HVAC DuctConstruction Standards-Metal and Flexible.” Comply with requirements for metalthickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie-rod applications, and joint types andintervals.1. Lengths: Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to reinforcement

and rigidity class required for pressure class.

2. Materials: Free from visual imperfections such as pitting, seam marks, roller

marks, stains, and discolorations.

3. Elbows: Radius elbows shall be used whenever possible. Use double-

thickness turning vanes in all rectangular elbows.

B. Static-Pressure Classifications and Construction Schedule:

Duct System Material Pressure

Class (WC)

Seal Class Liner

Exhaust Air GalvanizedSteel

-1.0” B NONE

Transfer Air GalvanizedSteel

-0.5” C NONE

Outside AirSupply

GalvanizedSteel

+2.0” B NONE

Outside AirIntake

GalvanizedSteel

-2.0” B NONE

C. Cross Breaking or Cross Beading: Cross break or cross bead duct sides 19 inchesand larger and 0.0359 inch thick or less, with more than 10 sq. ft. of unbraced panelarea, unless ducts are lined.

D. Transverse Joints: Prefabricated slide-on joints and components constructed using

manufacturer’s guidelines for material thickness, reinforcement size and spacing, and

joint reinforcement.


2.6 APPLICATION OF LINER IN RECTANGULAR DUCTS

A. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with at least 90 percentadhesive coverage at liner contact surface area. Attaining indicated thickness withmultiple layers of duct liner is prohibited.

B. Apply adhesive to transverse edges of liner facing upstream that do not receive metal

nosing.

C. Butt transverse joints without gaps and coat joint with adhesive.

D. Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure butted-edge overlapping.

E. Do not apply liner in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners ofducts, unless duct size and standard liner product dimensions make longitudinal jointsnecessary.

F. Apply adhesive coating on longitudinal seams in ducts with air velocity of 2500 fpm.

G. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches from corners and at intervals notexceeding 12 inches transversely; at 3 inches from transverse joints and at intervalsnot exceeding 18 inches longitudinally.

H. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings thathave either channel or "Z" profiles or are integrally formed from duct wall. Fabricateedge facings at the following locations:

1. Fan discharges.2. Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct.3. Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts where air velocities are greater

than 2500 fpm (12.7 m/s) or where indicated.

I. Terminate inner ducts with buildouts attached to fire-damper sleeves, dampers, turningvane assemblies, or other devices. Fabricated buildouts (metal hat sections) or otherbuildout means are optional; when used, secure buildouts to duct walls with bolts,screws, rivets, or welds.

2.7 ROUND AND FLAT-OVAL DUCT AND FITTING FABRICATION

A. Diameter as applied to flat-oval ducts in this Article is the diameter of a round duct with

a circumference equal to the perimeter of a given size of flat-oval duct.

B. Round Ducts: Fabricate supply ducts of galvanized steel according to SMACNA's

"HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."C. Flat-Oval Ducts: Fabricate supply ducts according to SMACNA’s “HVAC Duct

Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible.

1. Manufacturers:a. ACME.b. McGill AirFlow Corporation.c. SEMCO Incorporated.

D. Duct Joints:

1. Ducts up to 20 Inches in Diameter: Interior, center-beaded slip coupling, sealed

before and after fastening, attached with sheet metal screws.


E. 90-Degree Tees and Laterals and Conical Tees: Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's"HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible," with metal thicknessesspecified for longitudinal-seam straight ducts.

F. Diverging-Flow Fittings: Fabricate with reduced entrance to branch taps and with noexcess material projecting from fitting onto branch tap entrance.

G. Fabricate elbows using die-formed, gored, pleated, or mitered construction. Bendradius of die-formed, gored, and pleated elbows shall be 1-1/2 times duct diameter.Unless elbow construction type is indicated, fabricate elbows as follows:1. Mitered-Elbow Radius and Number of Pieces: Welded construction complying

with SMACNA’s “HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible,"unless otherwise indicated.

2. Round Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with the following metal thickness

for pressure classes from minus 2- to plus 2-inch wg:a. Ducts 3 to 36 Inches in Diameter: 0.034 inch.

3. Round Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with the following metal thickness

for pressure classes from 2- to 10-inch wg:

a. Ducts 3 to 26 Inches in Diameter: 0.034 inch.

4. Flat-Oval Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with same metal thickness as

longitudinal-seam flat-oval duct.

5. 90-Degree, 2-Piece, Mitered Elbows: Use only for supply systems or for

material-handling Class A or B exhaust systems and only where space

restrictions do not permit using radius elbows. Fabricate with single-thickness

turning vanes.6. Round Elbows 8 Inches and Less in Diameter: Fabricate die-formed elbows for

45- and 90-degree elbows and pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90 degreesonly. Fabricate nonstandard bend-angle configurations or nonstandard diameterelbows with gored construction.

7. Round Elbows 9 through 14 Inches in Diameter: Fabricate gored or pleated

elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees unless space restrictions require mitered

elbows. Fabricate nonstandard bend-angle configurations or nonstandard

diameter elbows with gored construction.

8. Round Elbows Larger than 14 Inches in Diameter and All Flat-Oval Elbows:

Fabricate gored elbows unless space restrictions require mitered elbows.

9. Die-Formed Elbows for Sizes through 8 Inches in Diameter and All Pressures

0.040 inch thick with 2-piece welded construction.

10. Round Gored-Elbow Metal Thickness: Same as non-elbow fittings specified

above.11. Flat-Oval Elbow Metal Thickness: Same as longitudinal-seam flat-oval duct

specified above.

2.8 DOUBLE-WALL ROUND DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. Manufacturers:1. Lindab Inc.2. McGill AirFlow LLC.3. SEMCO Incorporated.4. Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc.

B. Outer Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal andFlexible," Chapter 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on static-pressure class


unless otherwise indicated.

1. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's

"HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Round

Duct Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing

requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in

SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."2. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's

"HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "RoundDuct Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealingrequirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions inSMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

3. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVACDuct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Teesand Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees," for static-pressure class,applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, andother provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal andFlexible."

C. Inner Duct: Minimum 0.028-inch perforated, material to match outer duct, having 3/32-

inch- diameter perforations, with overall open area of 23 percent.

D. Interstitial Insulation: 1 inch fibrous-glass liner complying with ASTM C 1071, NFPA

90A, or NFPA 90B; and with NAIMA AH124, "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard."

1. Maximum Thermal Conductivity: 0.27 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F at 75 deg F

mean temperature.

2. Install spacers that position the inner duct at uniform distance from outer duct

without compressing insulation.3. Coat insulation with antimicrobial coating.4. Cover insulation with polyester film complying with UL 181, Class 1.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION

A. Construct and install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct ConstructionStandards--Metal and Flexible," unless otherwise indicated.

B. Construction IAQ Management Plan, During Construction: Develop and implementConstruction IAQ Management Plan (CIAQMP) to prevent indoor air quality problemsresulting from construction activities in accordance with Section 018113, including, atminimum the following:

1. Construction activities must meet or exceed the minimum requirements of the

SMACNA IAQ Guideline for Occupied Buildings under Construction, 2nd Edition

2007, ANSI/SMACNA 008-2008 (Chapter 3).

C. Install round and flat-oval ducts in lengths not less than 12 feet unless interrupted by

fittings.

D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.

E. Install fabricated fittings for changes in directions, size, and shape and for connections.

F. Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with a minimum of projections into duct.


Secure couplings with sheet metal screws. Install screws at intervals of 12 inches,

with a minimum of 3 screws in each coupling.

G. Install ducts, unless otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally and parallel and

perpendicular to building lines; avoid diagonal runs.

H. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and

permanent enclosure elements of building.

I. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness.

J. Conceal ducts from view in finished spaces. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid

partitions unless specifically indicated.

K. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling, fire- and smoke-control dampers, lighting

layouts, and similar finished work.

L. Seal all joints and seams. Apply sealant to male end connectors before insertion, and

afterward to cover entire joint and sheet metal screws.

M. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaultsand electrical equipment spaces and enclosures.

N. Non-Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitionsand exterior walls and are exposed to view, conceal spaces between constructionopenings and ducts or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metalthickness as ducts. Overlap openings on 4 sides by at least 1-1/2 inches.

O. Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions andexterior walls, install appropriately rated fire dampers, sleeves, and firestoppingsealant. Fire and smoke dampers are specified in Division 23 Section "DuctAccessories." Firestopping materials and installation methods are specified in Division07 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."

P. Protect duct interiors from the elements and foreign materials until building is enclosed.Follow SMACNA's "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction."

Q. With the exception of within double-wall ducts, the use of duct liner is prohibited.

R. Provide double-wall duct in all occupied locations where duct is exposed to view.

3.2 SEAM AND JOINT SEALING

A. Seal duct seams and joints according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct ConstructionStandards--Metal and Flexible" for duct pressure class indicated.1. For pressure classes lower than 2-inch wg, seal transverse joints.

B. Seal ducts before external insulation is applied.

3.3 HANGING AND SUPPORTING

A. Support horizontal ducts within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of eachbranch intersection.


B. Support vertical ducts at maximum intervals of 16 feet and at each floor.

C. Install upper attachments to structures with an allowable load not exceeding one-fourth

of failure (proof-test) load.

D. Install concrete inserts before placing concrete.

E. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely

cured.

1. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate

concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors according to Division 23

Section "Duct Accessories."

B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for

branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.


A. Perform the following field tests and inspections according to SMACNA's "HVAC AirDuct Leakage Test Manual" and prepare test reports. Notify the Owner one (1) week inadvance of test.

1. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems to accommodate

leakage testing and for compliance with test requirements.

2. Conduct tests at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of system

or section being tested. If pressure classes are not indicated, test entire system

at maximum system design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above

maximum design operating pressure. Give seven days’ advance notice for

testing.

3. Maximum Allowable Leakage: Comply with requirements for Leakage Class 3

for round and flat-oval ducts, Leakage Class 12 for rectangular ducts in pressure

classes lower than and equal to 2-inch wg (both positive and negative

pressures), and Leakage Class 6 for pressure classes from 2- to 10-inch wg.

4. Remake leaking joints and retest until leakage is equal to or less than maximum

allowable.

3.6 CLEANING NEW SYSTEMS

A. All building duct systems shall be protected during construction using industry definedmethods for protecting openings during construction and storing materials in clean, dryenvironments.

B. Perform cleaning before air balancing and with the Owner present. Provide Owner withone (1) week notification prior to cleaning.

C. Use service openings, as required, for physical and mechanical entry and forinspection.1. Create other openings to comply with duct standards.


2. Disconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection.3. Remove and reinstall ceiling sections to gain access during the cleaning process.

D. Vent vacuuming system to the outside. Include filtration to contain debris removedfrom HVAC systems, and locate exhaust down wind and away from air intakes andother points of entry into building.

E. Clean the following metal duct systems by removing surface contaminants anddeposits:1. Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers).

2. Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling

supply and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers,

and drive assemblies.

3. Air-handling equipment internal surfaces and components including mixing box,

coil section, air wash systems, spray eliminators, condensate drain pans, filters

and filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains.

4. Return-air ducts, dampers, and actuators except in ceiling plenums and

mechanical equipment rooms.

5. Supply-air ducts and accessories.

F. Cleanliness Verification:1. Visually inspect metal ducts for contaminants.2. Where contaminants are discovered, re-clean and re-inspect ducts.

3. Inspection and re-cleaning shall be performed as needed until the system is

cleaned in accordance with this Specification.

END OF SECTION

Building Addition & Renovations for Duct AccessoriesThe Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 233300 - 1

SECTION 23 33 00DUCT ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:1. Backdraft dampers.2. Volume dampers.3. Motorized control dampers.

4. Turning vanes.

5. Duct-mounting access doors.6. Flexible connectors.7. Flexible ducts.8. Duct accessory hardware.

B. Related Sections include the following:1. Division 26 Section "Fire Alarm" for duct-mounting fire and smoke detectors.

2. Division 23 Section “Building Automation System” for electric and pneumatic

damper actuators.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


1. Backdraft dampers.2. Volume dampers.3. Motorized control dampers.4. Flexible ducts.5. Flexible connectors.


A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," andNFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements

apply to product selection:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by


one of the manufacturers specified.

2.2 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" foracceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unlessotherwise indicated.

B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653Mand having G coating designation; ducts shall have mill-phosphatized finish forsurfaces exposed to view.

C. Aluminum Sheets: ASTM B 209, alloy 3003, temper H14; with mill finish for concealedducts and standard, 1-side bright finish for exposed ducts.

D. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221, alloy 6063, temper T6.

E. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed ongalvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steelducts.

F. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less;

3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.

2.3 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Air Balance, Inc.2. American Warming and Ventilating.3. CESCO Products.4. Duro Dyne Corp.

5. Greenheck.6. Penn Ventilation Company, Inc.7. Pottorff.8. Ruskin Company.

B. Description: Multiple-blade, parallel action gravity balanced, with center-pivoted bladesof maximum 6-inch width, with sealed edges, assembled in rattle-free manner with 90-degree stop, steel ball bearings, and axles; adjustment device to permit setting forvarying differential static pressure.

C. Frame: 0.063-inch- thick extruded aluminum, with welded corners and

mounting flange.

D. Blades: 0.050-inch- thick aluminum sheet.

E. Blade Seals: Vinyl or Neoprene.

F. Blade Axles: Nonferrous.

G. Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum.

H. Return Spring: Adjustable tension.


2.4 VOLUME DAMPERS

A. Manufacturers:1. Air Balance, Inc.2. American Warming and Ventilating.3. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.4. McGill AirFlow Corporation.5. METALAIRE, Inc.

6. Nailor Industries Inc.7. Penn Ventilation Company, Inc.8. Ruskin Company.

B. General Description: Factory fabricated, with required hardware and accessories.

Stiffen damper blades for stability. Include locking device to hold single-blade

dampers in a fixed position without vibration. Close duct penetrations for damper

components toseal duct consistent with pressure class.

1. Pressure Classes of 3-Inch wg or Higher: End bearings or other seals for ductswith axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operatingshaft.

C. Standard Volume Dampers: Multiple- or single-blade, parallel or opposed-blade designas indicated, standard leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream, and suitable forhorizontal or vertical applications.1. Steel Frames: Hat-shaped, galvanized sheet steel channels, minimum of 0.064

inch thick, with mitered and welded corners; frames with flanges where indicatedfor attaching to walls and flangeless frames where indicated for installing inducts.

2. Roll-Formed Steel Blades: 0.064-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel.

3. Aluminum Frames: Hat-shaped, 0.10-inch- thick, aluminum sheet channels;

frames with flanges where indicated for attaching to walls; and flangeless

frames where indicated for installing in ducts.

4. Roll-Formed Aluminum Blades: 0.10-inch thick aluminum sheet.

5. Extruded-Aluminum Blades: 0.050-inch thick extruded aluminum.6. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.7. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.

D. Low-Leakage Volume Dampers: Multiple- or single-blade, parallel or opposed-bladedesign as indicated, low-leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream, and suitable forhorizontal or vertical applications.1. Steel Frames: Hat-shaped, galvanized sheet steel channels, minimum of 0.064

inch thick, with mitered and welded corners; frames with flanges where indicatedfor attaching to walls and flangeless frames where indicated for installing inducts.

2. Roll-Formed Steel Blades: 0.064-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel.3. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.4. Bearings: Oil-impregnated bronze thrust or ball.

5. Blade Seals: Neoprene.6. Jamb Seals: Cambered aluminum.7. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.

E. Jackshaft: 1-inch- diameter, galvanized-steel pipe rotating within pipe-bearingassembly mounted on supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple-damper


assemblies.1. Length and Number of Mountings: Appropriate to connect linkage of

each damper in multiple-damper assembly.

F. Damper Hardware: Zinc-plated, die-cast core with quadrant dial and handle withposition indicator made of 3/32-inch- thick zinc-plated steel, and a 3/4-inch hexagonlocking nut. Include center hole to suit damper operating-rod size. Include elevatedplatform for insulated duct mounting.

G. Provide remote cable system adjustors where indicated on the drawing. Adjustors shallhave concealed drive nut behind a 3” white coverplate assembly.

2.5 TURNING VANES

A. Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal andFlexible" for vanes and vane runners. Vane runners shall automatically align vanes.

B. Manufactured Turning Vanes: Fabricate 1-1/2-inch- wide, double-vane, curved bladesof galvanized sheet steel set 3/4 inch o.c.; support with bars perpendicular to bladesset 2 inches o.c.; and set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.

C. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with perforatedfaces and fibrous-glass fill.

2.6 DUCT-MOUNTING ACCESS DOORS

A. General Description: Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.

B. Door: Double wall, duct mounting, and round; fabricated of galvanized sheet metal with

insulation fill and 1-inch thickness. Include cam latches.

2.7 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

A. General Description: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics, coatings, andadhesives complying with UL 181, Class 1.

B. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3-1/2 inches wideattached to two strips of 2-3/4-inch- wide, 0.028-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel or0.032-inch- thick aluminum sheets. Select metal compatible with ducts.

2.8 FLEXIBLE DUCTS

A. General: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.

B. Flexible Ducts, Insulated: Factory-fabricated, insulated, round duct, with an outerjacket enclosing 1-1/2-inch thick, glass-fiber insulation around a continuous inner liner.1. Reinforcement: Steel-wire helix encapsulated in inner liner.

2. Outer Jacket: Glass-reinforced, silver Mylar with a continuous hanging tab,

integral fibrous-glass tape, and nylon hanging cord.3. Inner Liner: Polyethylene film.

C. Pressure Rating: 6-inch wg positive, ½-inch wg negative.


2.9 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE

A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, includingscrew cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pilot tube and other testinginstruments and of length to suit duct insulation thickness.

B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to

gasoline and grease.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC DuctConstruction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts.

B. Construction IAQ Management Plan, During Construction: Develop and implementConstruction IAQ Management Plan (CIAQMP) to prevent indoor air quality problemsresulting from construction activities in accordance with Section 018113, including, atminimum the following:

1. Construction activities must meet or exceed the minimum requirements of theSMACNA IAQ Guideline for Occupied Buildings under Construction, 2nd Edition2007, ANSI/SMACNA 008-2008 (Chapter 3).

C. Provide duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steelaccessories in galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories instainless-steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.

D. Provide balancing dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems wherebranches lead from larger ducts as required for air balancing. Install at a minimum oftwo duct widths from branch takeoff.

E. Provide test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated.

F. Install fire and smoke dampers, with fusible links, according to manufacturer's UL-approved written instructions.

G. Install duct access doors to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining

accessories and terminal units as follows:

1. On both sides of duct coils.

2. Adjacent to fire or smoke dampers, providing access to reset or reinstall fusible

links.

3. On sides of ducts where adequate clearance is available.

H. Install the following minimum sizes for duct-mounting, rectangular access doors andaccess panels:1. Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches.2. Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches.3. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches.

4. Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches.5. Body Access: 25 by 14 inches.


6. Body Plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches.

I. Label access doors according to Division 23 Section “Identification for HVAC Piping

and Equipment."

J. Install flexible connectors immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated withfans and motorized equipment supported by vibration isolators.

K. Connect terminal units to supply ducts with maximum 12-inch lengths of flexible duct.Do not use flexible connector to change directions.

L. Connect diffusers to low pressure ducts with maximum 72-inch lengths of flexible ductclamped or strapped in place.

M. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with draw bands and adhesive.

N. Install duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes.

3.2 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust duct accessories for proper settings.

B. Adjust fire and smoke dampers for proper action.

C. Final positioning of manual-volume dampers is specified in Division 23 Section

"Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing."

END OF SECTION

Building Addition & Renovations for Power VentilatorsThe Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 233423 - 1

SECTION 23 34 23

POWER VENTILATORS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:1. Roof exhauster.


A. Project Altitude: Base air ratings on actual site elevations sea-level conditions.

B. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each

type of product indicated and include the following:1. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.2. Certified fan sound-power ratings.3. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories.4. Material gages and finishes, including color charts.5. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.

B. Maintenance Data: For power ventilators to include in maintenance manuals specified

in Division 01.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined inNFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,and marked for intended use.

B. AMCA Compliance: Products shall comply with performance requirements and shall

be licensed to use the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.

C. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMAstandards.

D. UL Standard: Power ventilators shall comply with UL 705.


A. Deliver fans as factory-assembled unit, to the extent allowable by shipping limitations,

with protective crating and covering.


B. Disassemble and reassemble units, as required for moving to final location, according

to manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Lift and support units with manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of structural-steel support members.

B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These

items are specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories."

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that arepackaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describingcontents.

1. Belts: One set for each belt-driven unit. Replace multiple V-belts with Band

belts where applicable.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


the following:

1. Roof Exhauster:

a. Greenheck Fan Corp.b. Cook, Loren Company.c. Penn Ventilator.

d. Aerovent; a Twin City Fan Company.

2.2 UPBLAST ROOF EXHAUSTER

A. Model: G090HPVG/6/G-X and G095HPVG/6/G-X

B. Description: Spun aluminum down blast exhaust fan shall be direct drive type. Fanshall bear the AMCA Sound and Air Performance seal.

C. Housing: The fan housing shall consist of motor cover, shroud, curb cap and lowerwind-band and shall be constructed of heavy-gauge aluminum. The housing shall havea rigid internal support structure and leak-proof design. The fan shroud shall be onepiece with a rolled bead for extra strength which directs exhaust air downward. Thelower wind-band shall be one piece with formed edges for added strength and the curbcap shall include pre-punched mounting holes to ensure correct attachment.

D. Fan Wheels: The fan wheel shall be centrifugal non-overloading backward-inclined,

constructed of aluminum and shall include a wheel cone carefully matched to the inlet

cone for precise running tolerances. Wheels shall be statically and dynamically

balanced in accordance to AMCA Standard 204-05.

E. Vari-Green Motor: Motor to be an electronic commutation (EC) motor specifically

designed for fan applications. AC induction type motors are not acceptable. Motors

shall be permanently lubricated with heavy-duty ball bearings to match the fan load

and prewired to the specific voltage and phase. Internal motor circuitry shall convert


AC power supplied to the main fan to DC power to operate the motor. Motor shall be

speed controllable down to 20% of full speed (80% turndown). Speed shall be

controlled by either a potentiometer dial mounted on the motor or by a 0-10 VDC

signal. Motor shall be a minimum of 85% efficient at all speeds.

F. Control: Control package shall be Vari-Green Constant Pressure Control designed to

regulate fan speed based on demand. Control shall include Proportional Integral

Derivative (PID) feedback loop and shall have all components prewired to labeled

terminal strips for easy wiring. System shall include the appropriate pressure tap and

preset pressure transducer and control box. Control box shall be prewired and in a

NEMA-3R weather tight enclosure for mounting outdoors near the fan location.

G. Accessories: As scheduled on drawings and as follows:1. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal-overload protection mounted

inside fan housing, factory wired through an internal aluminum conduit.

2. Bird Screens: Removable, 1/2-inch mesh, aluminum or brass wire.

3. Motorized Dampers: parallel- or opposed-blade, motorized backdraft dampers

mounted in curb base; factory set to close when fan stops.

4. Motor Starter

5. Permatector Coating

H. Roof Curbs: Galvanized steel; mitered and welded corners; 1-1/2-inch-thick, rigid,fiberglass insulation adhered to inside walls; and 1-1/2-inch wood nailer. Size asrequired to suit roof opening and fan base.1. Configuration: Built-in raised cant and mounting flange.2. Overall Height: 12 inches.3. Pitch Mounting: Manufacture curb for roof slope, where necessitated by project

conditions

2.5 MOTORS

A. Refer to Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment" forgeneral requirements for factory-installed motors.

B. Motor Construction: NEMA MG 1, general purpose, continuous duty, Design B.

C. Enclosure Type: Open dripproof, or totally enclosed, fan cooled as required for fanstyle.


A. Sound-Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating FanSound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Factory test fans according to AMCA 300,"Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.

B. Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed ofrotation, and efficiency by factory tests and ratings according to AMCA 210,"Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


A. Install power ventilators level and plumb.

B. Reference Division 23 Section “Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and

Equipment” for vibration isolation and seismic restraint requirements.

C. Secure roof-mounting fans to roof curbs with cadmium-plated hardware. Refer to

Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories" for installation of roof curbs.

D. Support suspended units from structure using threaded steel rods and spring hangers.

Vibration-control devices are specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic

Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

E. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.

F. Label units according to requirements specified in Division 23 Section "Identification for

HVAC Piping and Equipment."

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 23Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Makefinal duct connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified inDivision 23 Section "Duct Accessories."

B. Install ducts adjacent to power ventilators to allow service and maintenance.

C. Ground equipment.

D. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's publishedtorque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use thosespecified in UL 486A and UL 486B.


A. Equipment Startup Checks:1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that

connections to ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper

thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect

switches.

3. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete.

4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and

verify fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan

drive system, align and adjust belts, and install belt guards.

5. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts.

6. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in

connected ductwork systems are in fully open position.

B. Starting Procedures:1. Energize motor and adjust fan to indicated rpm.2. Measure and record motor voltage and amperage.

C. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm

proper motor rotation and unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with

new units, and retest.


D. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls

and equipment.

E. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature-control operators.

F. Refer to Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for testing, adjusting,

and balancing procedures.

G. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design airflow.

H. Repair or replace malfunctioning units. Retest as specified above after repairs or

replacements are made.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.

B. Adjust belt tension.

C. Lubricate bearings.

3.5 CLEANING

A. On completion of installation, internally clean fans according to manufacturer's writteninstructions. Remove foreign material and construction debris. Vacuum fan wheel andcabinet.

B. After completing system installation, including outlet fitting and devices, inspectexposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damagedfinishes.

END OF SECTION

Building Addition & Renovations for Air Terminal Units – Variable VolumeThe Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 233616 - 1

SECTION 23 36 16AIR TERMINAL UNITS - VARIABLE VOLUME

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Single duct terminal units.

1.Variable volume

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 230593 – Testing, Adjusting and Balancing

B. Section 230900 – Building Automation Systems

C. Section 233113 – Metal Ducts

D. Section 233300 - Duct Accessories.

E. Section 233713 – Diffusers, Registers and Grilles

F. Section 260501 - Equipment Connections and Coordination

1.03 REFERENCES

A. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems.

B. UL 181 - Factory-Made Air Ducts and Connectors.

C. UL 1995, Heating and Cooling Equipment.

D. CUL C22.2 No. 236, Heating and Cooling Equipment.

E. ASTM A 527 (Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated Galvanized).

F. A-A-1419 or F-F-310 Federal specification (filter element, Air conditioning, Viscous-impingement or Dry type, replaceable), Tested per UL 900.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings and product data sheets indicating configuration, generalassembly, and materials used in fabrication.

B. Submit product performance data indicating design air flow, minimum static pressuredrop, fan operating condition.

C. Submit sound power and noise criteria (NC) values for radiated and discharge paths.

1.Single and duct terminal units - correction to octave band sound power value.


OCTAVE BAND 2 3 4 5 6 7

Env. Adj. -3 -2 -1 -1 -1 -1

Mineral Fiber CeilingTile

-9 -10 -12 -14 -15 -15

Space Effect Factor -10 -11 -12 -13 -13 -14

D. Submit installation, operation and maintenance documentation.

1.05 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: The company manufacturing the products specified in this section shallhave a minimum of ten years experience producing products of this type.

1.06 SYSTEM RESPONSIBILITY

A. The contractor shall be responsible for any and all costs associated with any and allchanges resulting from the use of a supplier other than the one used as "basis ofdesign".

1.07 WARRANTY

A. Provide manufacturer's parts warranty for one year from unit start-up or eighteenmonths from unit shipment, whichever is shorter.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. General

1. Manufacturer shall participate in the AHRI Certification program. Unitperformance data shall be rated in accordance with AHRI Standard 880. Themanufacturer shall display the AHRI Symbol on all units.

2. Single duct terminal units shall be listed as an assembly.

B. Specified Manufacturers

1. Trane Model VCEF. No Substitutions.


A. Single duct terminal units.

1. Ceiling mounted primary air control terminal units for connection to a singlepressure duct of a central air distribution system. Terminals units shall beprovided with UC210 DDC-Basic controls and integral electric heating coils.


2.03 FABRICATION

A. Casings: Units shall be completely factory-assembled, manufactured of corrosionprotected steel, and fabricated with a minimum of 18-gauge metal on the highpressure (inlet) side of the terminal unit damper and 22-gauge metal on the lowpressure (outlet) side and unit casing.

B. Plenum air filters shall be provided on all fan powered units.

C. Assembly: Primary air control damper, airflow sensor, fans, controls and optionalheating coil in single cabinet.

D. Rectangular Supply Air Outlet Connections: Rectangular outlet connections for unitswith electric heating coils on the outlet of the terminal unit shall be flange type.

2.04 PRIMARY AIR CONTROL DAMPER ASSEMBLY

A. Locate primary air control damper assembly inside unit casing. Construct the damperassembly from extruded aluminum and/or a minimum 22 gauge galvanized steelcomponents. Maximum damper leak rate shall not exceed 1% of damper nominalCFM at 4 inch wg. differential.

B. Provide damper assembly with integral flow sensor. Flow sensor shall be providedregardless of control type. Flow sensor shall be a multi-point, averaging, ring or crosstype. Bar or single point sensing type is not acceptable.

C. Terminal unit manufacturer shall provide and factory install damper actuator.

2.05 HEATING COILS

A. Electric Resistance Heating Coil: Coil shall be factory installed and wired and shall beconstructed of open-wire type resistance heat elements. Coils shall be provided withprimary and secondary over-temperature protection. Coils shall be constructed forsingle point power connection. Controls shall consist of an integral control box whichincludes a 24 VAC transformer and electric heat contactors. Electric heat coil shall beinstalled at the terminal unit supply air outlet connection.

1. Single duct terminal unit electric heat coil shall be furnished with an airflowswitch to disable the coil upon a low flow condition.

B. Capacity: Provide coils in capacities as scheduled on the drawings.

2.06 FAN ASSEMBLY

A. Fan assembly shall be forward curved centrifugal fan with direct drive permanentlylubricated, permanent split-capacitor type, thermally protected, three speed motor.Motor must be capable of continuous operation under maximum fan load with noexternal static pressure.

B. Fan motor horsepower shall not exceed the horsepower scheduled for each unit. Fanmotors shall be high efficiency and shall not exceed those shown in the table below foreach motor size.


115 Volt 277 Volt 347 Volt

FAN HP AMPS AMPS AMPS

1/15 1.5 1.3 0.4

1/8 2.7 1.3 1.1

1/3 7.4 2.9 3.6

1/2 11.4 4.4 4.3

C. Internally suspend and isolate fan motor assembly from unit casing by using rubberisolators or torsion flex mounting legs.

D. Unit shall be equipped with a fan motor disconnect switch which breaks both legs ofpower entering the control box.

E. Provide unit with electric heater and unit control area.

2.07 WIRING

A. Factory install and wire power line fusing, a disconnect switch and a 24 VACtransformer for control voltage on fan powered direct digital or electronic control units.Provide terminal strip in control box for field wiring of thermostat and power source.

B. Factory wire fan to terminal strip.

C. Factory install and wire terminal unit. Install electrical components in control box withremovable cover. Incorporate single point electrical connection to power source.

2.08 DIRECT DIGITAL VAV CONTROLS

A. VARIABLE AIR VOLUME (VAV) TERMINAL UNIT CONTROL

1. The VAV terminal units shall be individually controlled by a DDC VAV controllerper VAV terminal unit. The DDC VAV controller, damper motor, transducer andtransformer shall be supplied by the BAS contractor and furnished to theterminal unit supplier. The cost to factory mount, calibrate and test thecontroller, transducer, transformer and actuator shall be coordinated prior to bidday and included in the BAS price.

a. To assure proper operation and control, the BAS contractor as part ofthis bid shall recalibrate the transducers six (6) months after acceptanceof the BAS system to correct any deviations as a result of transducerdrift.

2. Submit a copy of the calibration report to the Engineer, Mechanical Contractor,Test, Adjust and Balance Contractor and Owner.


a. Refer to Section 15930 Terminal Units for requirements.

3. The BAS shall perform the following VAV Terminal unit control strategies andprovide the points as listed on the DDC/VAV point list and the specifiedmonitoring and diagnostics.

a. Grouping - The BAS shall be able to group VAV boxes via keyboardcommands. These groups shall make it possible for the operator to senda common command to all boxes in a group to operate in the samemode. A sample of this group report must be provided in the submittalpackage for approval by engineer and owner. BAS shall also compile ona group basis, the following:

1. Minimum group temperature

2. Maximum group temperature

3. Average group temperature

4. Group boxes total airflow

b. Setpoint Control - The BAS shall edit the zone space temperaturesetpoint of each VAV box. The zone temperature setpoint shall beoperator adjustable. Individual zone setpoint and control logic shallreside at the zone level, and not be dependent upon the BAS for control.In the event of communication loss, the box will continue to control tocurrent setpoints.

c. Cooling Valve Control - The BAS shall control the cooling air valve to afully open, fully closed, maximum CFM, or minimum CFM position basedon operator commands. The operator shall also have the capability toadjust the maximum & minimum airflow limits of the air valve through theBAS.

d. Operating Mode - The BAS shall place the box in either the occupied orunoccupied mode based on an operator adjustable time schedule.Separate heating & cooling setpoints shall be editable for each modethrough the BAS. Other modes available for special applications shallinclude full open, full closed, maximum flow, and minimum flow.

e. Control Offset - The BAS shall be capable of offsetting the cooling orheating setpoints of one or more groups of boxes by an operatoradjustable amount. This capability will allow for automatic zone setpointchanges based on system requirements, such as demand limiting.

f. Automatic Calibration - The system shall automatically calibrate its airflow sensing & air valve position measurement system at system startupand on a scheduled basis.

g. Override Button - The VAV box shall be capable of being placed in the"occupied" mode by pressing an override button mounted on the zonetemperature sensor.

h. Portable interface terminal - The VAV box shall have a communicationsport on the space sensor for use with a hand held portable operator'sterminal. This portable terminal shall give the operator the capability tointerrogate & edit DDC/VAV box parameters. Portable interface terminalshall also have the capability to interrogate and edit DDC/VAV box


parameters from a central controller.i. Terminal unit status reports - For each terminal unit, the BAS shall

provide an operating status summary of all unit sensed values (zonetemperature, CFM, etc.), setpoints, and modes.

j. Terminal unit group report - For each group of VAV terminal units, theBAS shall report the group mode, heating and cooling airflow, averagezone temperature, minimum zone temperature, and maximum zonetemperature. The report shall also display for each terminal unit in thegroup the present temperature control setpoints and the current zonetemperature.

4. Terminal box diagnostics.

a. If zone temperature sensor input fails above its high range, unit shallcontrol at its maximum CFM setpoint. If sensor input fails below its lowrange, unit shall control to its minimum CFM setpoint.

b. In both cases, all heat outputs shall be disabled. a diagnostic messageshall be displayed upon operator inquiry.

c. If flow measuring system fails, unit shall automatically convert to apressure dependent, damper position based algorithm. Diagnosticmessage shall be displayed upon operator inquiry.

d. If zone temperature setpoint potentiometer on zone sensor fails, unitshall automatically control to programmed occupied setpoints.Diagnostic message shall be displayed upon operator inquiry.

e. If communications are lost, controller shall continue to operate in thecurrent mode of operation. All setpoints shall be retained in nonvolatilememory. If communications are not restored within 15 minutes, unit shallautomatically initiate a reset and then calibrate the flow sensor anddamper position.

2.09 TESTING / VERIFICATION

A. Factory run test all fan-powered units.

B. Factory set and check all analog electronic and pneumatic controllers to within 5% ofscheduled maximum and minimum settings. Base performance on tests conducted inaccordance with AHRI 880.

C. Maximum Casing Leakage: 1 percent of nominal air flow at 0.5 in wg inlet staticpressure.

D. Maximum Damper Leakage: 1 percent of design air flow at 4 in wg inlet staticpressure.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.02 ADJUSTING

A. Reset volume with damper operator attached to assembly allowing flow rangemodulation from 100 percent of design air flow to 25 percent nominal air flow for


cooling only units and 30 percent for units with heating coils.

PART 4 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS

4.01 DDC VARIABLE AIR VOLUME SYSTEM SEQUENCE OF OPERATION

A. General. DDC Controls, actuator and factory costs to mount, calibrate and test thesystem shall be the responsibility of Section 159xx ATC/Building Management SystemContractor.

B. Terminal unit manufacturer shall provide price for factory mounting and continuitycheck of direct digital controls to the ATC contractor. Field mounted DDC controls arenot acceptable.

C. Multi-point, multi-axis flow ring or cross sensor to be furnished and mounted byterminal unit manufacturer. Single point or flow bar sensors are not acceptable. Shallbe capable of maintaining airflow to within +/- 5 percent of rated unit airflow setpointwith 1.5 duct diameters straight duct upstream from the unit.

4.02 VAV TERMINAL UNIT CONTROL

A. The VAV terminal units shall be individually controlled by a DDC VAV controller perVAV terminal unit. The DDC VAV controller, damper motor, transducer andtransformer shall be supplied by the BAS contractor and furnished to the terminal unitsupplier. The cost to factory mount, calibrate and test the controller, transducer,transformer and actuator shall be coordinated prior to bid day and included in the BASprice.

1.To assure proper operation and control, the BAS contractor as part of this bid shallcalibrate the transducers six (6) months after acceptance of the BAS system tocorrect any deviations as a result of transducer drift.

B. Submit a copy of the calibration report to the Engineer, Mechanical Contractor, Test,Adjust and Balance Contractor and Owner.

C. The BAS shall perform the following VAV Terminal unit control strategies and providethe points as listed on the DDC/VAV point list and the specified monitoring anddiagnostics.

1.Grouping - The BAS shall be able to group VAV boxes via keyboard commands.These groups shall make it possible for the operator to send a commoncommand to all boxes in a group to operate in the same mode. A sample of thisgroup report must be provided in the submittal package for approval byengineer and owner. BAS shall also compile on a group basis, the following:

a. Minimum group temperatureb. Maximum group temperaturec. Average group temperatured. Current airflow through boxes in group (total)

D. Setpoint Control - The BAS shall edit the zone space temperature setpoint of eachVAV box. The zone temperature setpoint shall be operator adjustable. Individual zonesetpoint and control logic shall reside at the zone level, and not be dependent uponthe BAS for control. In the event of communication loss, the box will continue to


control to current setpoints.

E. Cooling Valve Control - The BAS shall control the cooling air valve to a fully open, fullyclosed, maximum CFM, or minimum CFM position based on operator commands.The operator shall also have the capability to adjust the maximum & minimum airflowlimits of the air valve through the BAS.

F. Operating Mode - The BAS shall place the box in either the occupied or unoccupiedmode based on an operator adjustable time schedule. Separate heating & coolingsetpoints shall be editable for each mode through the BAS. Other modes available forspecial applications shall include full open, full closed, maximum flow, and minimumflow.

G. Control Offset - The BAS shall be capable of offsetting the cooling or heating setpointsof one or more groups of boxes by an operator adjustable amount. This capability willallow for automatic zone setpoint changes based on system requirements, such asdemand limiting.

H. Automatic Calibration - The system shall automatically calibrate its air flow sensing &air valve position measurement system at system startup and on a scheduled basis.

I. Override Button - The VAV box shall be capable of being placed in the "occupied"mode by pressing an override button mounted on the zone temperature sensor.

J. Terminal unit status reports - For each terminal unit, the BAS shall provide anoperating status summary of all unit sensed values (zone temperature, CFM, etc.),setpoints, and modes.

K. Terminal unit group report - For each group of VAV terminal units, the BAS shall reportthe group mode, heating and cooling airflow, average zone temperature, minimumzone temperature, and maximum zone temperature. The report shall also display foreach terminal unit in the group the present temperature control setpoints and thecurrent zone temperature.

L. Zone sensor shall be accurate to within 0.5 F. The sensor shall be a product of theVAV box controls manufacturer and designed specifically for the installed controller.

M. Zone sensors

1. The VAV controller system shall support averaging of up to four zone sensorsto one VAV box. The averaging scheme shall provide the average of thetemperatures sensed by the zone sensors. The setpoints of each of thesensors shall be averaged using a scheme that weights each sensor's setting.Each sensor shall be able to have a number of votes assigned to it to give itmore priority in the final calculation of the setpoint required.

2. This allows the mounting of sensor in the are served by many VAV boxes.

3. Zone sensor relocations are at the owner/engineer's discretion and can occurat anytime throughout the length of the project warranty period.

4. The zone sensor shall have the following features:

a. Zone setpoint adjustment.b. Night setback temperature override button to provide occupied


conditions during unoccupied times.c. Night setback override cancel button to end the override condition.d. The sensor shall have a Backup sensor assigned to it in case of a failure.e. The sensor shall be capable of being relocated with no changes to the

wiring.f. The sensor battery life shall be a minimum of two years. The sensor

shall send an indication of low battery condition approximately onemonth prior to failure.

N. Terminal box diagnostics.

1. If zone temperature sensor input fails above its high range, unit shall control atits maximum CFM setpoint. If sensor input fails below its low range, unit shallcontrol to its minimum CFM setpoint.

2. In both cases, all heat outputs shall be disabled. a diagnostic message shall bedisplayed upon operator inquiry.

3. If flow measuring system fails, unit shall automatically convert to a pressuredependent, damper position based algorithm. Diagnostic message shall bedisplayed upon operator inquiry.

4. If zone temperature setpoint potentiometer on zone sensor fails, unit shallautomatically control to programmed occupied setpoints. Diagnostic messageshall be displayed upon operator inquiry.

5. If a wireless zone temperature sensor fails, the UCM shall remove it from theaveraging calculation and use the remaining sensors if applicable. If averagingis not implemented the UCM shall switch to the backup zone sensor. VAVcontroller shall send an alarm message to the building automation system. Areport shall be printable that shows sensor assignments by serial number, timesince the last transmission was received and the signal strength of thetransmission.

6. If communications are lost, controller shall continue to operate in the currentmode of operation. All setpoints shall be retained in nonvolatile memory. Ifcommunications are not restored within 15 minutes, unit shall automaticallyinitiate a reset and then calibrate the flow sensor and damper position.

4.03 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION, SINGLE DUCT VAV TERMINAL UNITS WITH DDCCONTROLS

A. Single Duct VAV Terminals With Reheat - On a rise in temperature above the coolingsetpoint, the VAV terminal unit shall modulate to its maximum CFM. As the spacetemperature drops below the cooling setpoint, the terminal unit shall modulate to itsminimum CFM. As the space temperature continues to fall to the heating setpoint, theterminal shall modulate to its heating minimum CFM. At this point, the heat will bestaged on as follows:

1. Staged Electric - Stage on electric heat with a 1 degree interval per stage.

END OF SECTION

Building Addition & Renovations for Diffusers, Registers, and GrillesThe Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 233713 - 1

SECTION 23 37 13

DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes ceiling- and wall-mounted diffusers, registers, and grilles.

B. Related Sections include the following:1. Division 10 Section "Louvers and Vents" for fixed and adjustable louvers and wall vents,

whether or not they are connected to ducts.

2. Division 23 Section "Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers and volume- control

dampers not integral to diffusers, registers, and grilles.

3. Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for balancing diffusers, registers,

and grilles.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Diffuser: Circular, square, or rectangular air distribution outlet, generally located in the ceilingand comprised of deflecting members discharging supply air in various directions and planesand arranged to promote mixing of primary air with secondary room air.

B. Grille: A louvered or perforated covering for an opening in an air passage, which can be located

in a sidewall, ceiling, or floor.

C. Register: A combination grille and damper assembly over an air opening.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each model indicated, include the following:

1. Data Sheet: For each type of air outlet and inlet, and accessory furnished; indicate

construction, finish, and mounting details.

2. Performance Data: Include throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings for

each type of air outlet and inlet.

3. Schedule of diffusers, registers, and grilles indicating drawing designation, room location,

quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished.


A. Product Options: Drawings and schedules indicate specific requirements of diffusers, registers,and grilles and are based on the specific requirements of the systems indicated. Othermanufacturers' products with equal performance characteristics materials, size and aestheticsmay be considered. Refer to Division 01 Section "Substitutions." NC levels must be equal to orless than those produced by the scheduled air device at the same design conditions.

B. NFPA Compliance: Install diffusers, registers, and grilles according to NFPA 90A, "Standard for


the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."

C. Source Quality Limitations: Obtain all diffusers, registers and grilles from single manufacturer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Diffusers, registers, and grilles are scheduled on Drawings.

B. Manufacturers:1. Hart & Cooley

2. Titus

3. Tuttle & Bailey4. Price.


A. Testing: Test performance according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing for Rating the

Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for compliance withrequirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance ofequipment. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written

instructions, Coordination Drawings, original design, and referenced standards.

B. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings,and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve designrequirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make finallocations where indicated, as much as practicable. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels,locate units in the center of the panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict withinstallation, notify Architect for a determination of final location.

C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connection to ducts and to allow service and

maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.

D. Paint interior of air device and connecting duct with black paint where the interior of the air

device and connecting components is visible from the occupied space.

E. Construction IAQ Management Plan: During Construction develop and implement ConstructionIAQ Management Plan (CIAQMP) to prevent indoor air quality problems resulting fromconstruction activities including, at minimum the following:


1. Construction activities must meet or exceed the minimum requirements of the SMACNAIAQ Guideline for Occupied Buildings under Construction, 2nd Edition 2007,ANSI/SMACNA 008-2008 (Chapter 3).

2. If permanently installed RTUs are operated during construction, filtration media with aMinimum Efficiency reporting Value (MERV) of 8 shall be installed at each return airgrille, as determined by ASHRAE 52.2-1999. Replace all filtration media immediatelyprior to occupancy.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed,before starting air balancing.

B. Straighten all vanes and blades.

3.4 CLEANING

A. After installation of diffusers, registers, and grilles, inspect exposed finish. Clean exposedsurfaces to remove burrs, dirt, and smudges. Replace diffusers, registers, and grilles that havedamaged finishes.

END OF SECTION

Building Addition & Renovations for Air Cooled Refrigerant Condensers

The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 236313 - 1

SECTION 236313AIR COOLED REFRIGERANT CONDENSERS

PART 1- GENERAL


A. Condensing unit package.

B. Charge of refrigerant and oil.

C. Controls and control connections.

D. Refrigerant piping connections.

E. Motor starters.

F. Electrical power connections.


A. Section 230548 – Vibration and Seismic Controls

B. Section 230719 – HVAC Pipe Insulation

C. Section 230900 – Building Automation Systems

D. Section 232300 – Refrigerant Piping

E. Section 260501 – Equipment Connections and Coordination

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ANSI/ASHRAE 15 - Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration.

B. ANSI/ASHRAE 90A - Energy Conservation in new Building Design.

C. AHRI 370 - Sound Rating of Large Refrigeration and Air-conditioning Equipment.

D. AHRI 360 - Unitary Air-Conditioning Equipment.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings indicating components, dimensions, weights and loadings,

required clearances, and location and size of field connections. Include schematic layouts

showing condensing units, cooling coils, refrigerant piping, and accessories required for

complete system.

B. Submit product data indicating rated capacities, weights, specialties and accessories,

electrical nameplate data, and wiring diagrams.

C. Submit design data indicating refrigeration and chilled water pipe sizing.

D. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.

1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A. Submit operation and maintenance data.

B. Include manufacturer's descriptive literature, start-up instructions, installation instructions,

and maintenance procedures.

1.06 HANDLING



A. Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions for rigging, unloading, and

transporting units.

B. Protect units on site from physical damage.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. Provide a full parts warranty for one year from start-up or 18 months from shipment,

whichever occurs first.

B. Provide Five Year extended warranty for compressors.

1.08 MAINTENANCE

A. Furnish complete service and maintenance of air cooled condensing units for One Year

from Date of Substantial Completion.

B. Provide maintenance service with a two month maximum time interval between calls.

Provide 24-hour emergency service on breakdowns and malfunctions.

1.09 ACOUSTICS

A. Manufacturer of condensing unit shall provide outdoor sound power level data across all

major octave band center frequencies for cataloged operating range of unit at gross

cooling capacity range. Data shall be obtained in conformance with ANSI S1.32-1980,

American National Standard Methods for the Determination of Sound Power Levels of

Discrete Frequency and Narrow Band Noise Sources in Reverberation Rooms and per

AMCA Standard 300-85 test code "Sound Rating Air Moving Devices".

1.10 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Unit shall conform to UL 1995 CAN/CSA C22.2 NO. 236-95 for construction of

condensing units and shall have cULus label affixed to unit.

1. In the event the unit is not UL/CSA approved, the manufacturer shall, at his

expense, provide for a field inspection by a UL representative to verify

conformance to cULus standards. If necessary, contractor shall perform required

modifications to the unit to comply with UL, as directed by the UL representative,

at no additional expense to the Owner.

1.11 SUMMARY

A. The contractor shall furnish and install air-cooled condensing unit(s) as shown as

scheduled on the contract documents. The unit(s) shall be installed in accordance with

this specification and perform at the specified conditions as scheduled.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS



A. 100 Ton Air Cooled Condensing Unit Model No. RAUJD1 as manufactured by Trane. No

Substitutions.

2.02 GENERAL UNIT DESCRIPTION

A. Provide self-contained, packaged, factory-assembled and pre-wired units suitable for

outdoor use consisting of cabinet, compressors, condensing coil and fans, sub-cooling

circuits, and controls.

B. Performance: Performance shall be as indicated on Drawing Schedule.

2.03 CASING

A. Cabinet: Galvanized steel, phosphatized, and finished with an air-dry paint coating

durable enough to withstand 672 consecutive-hour salt spray application in accordance

with standard ASTM B 117. Structural members shall be 14 gauge with access doors and

removable panels of minimum 18 gauge steel.

B. Provide custom exterior paint colors to meet Architect/Owners specification.

C. Control Panel: The unit control panel section shall be compartmented to separate high

and low voltage components. The control panels shall also be fully gasketed, hinged and

provided with quick release latches for easy access.

1. The high voltage control panel shall be provided with a door handle disconnect

switch to facilitate convenient, safe disconnection of main three phase power.

2.04 CONDENSER SECTION

A. Condenser coils shall have all Aluminum Microchannel coils. All coils shall be leak tested

at the factory to ensure pressure integrity. The condenser coil is pressure tested to 650

psig.

B. Corrosion Protected Condenser Coil Option - All aluminum microchannel condenser coil

protection shall consist of a corrosion resistant coating that shall withstand ASTM B117

Salt Spray test for 6,000 hours and ASTM G85 A2 Cyclic Acidified Salt Fog test for 2,400

hours. This coating shall be added after coil construction covering all tubes, headers and

fin edges, therefore providing optimum protection in more corrosive environments.

2.05 REFRIGERANT CIRCUIT(S)

A. Provide single circuit on 20 to 30 tons units and two circuits on 40 to 120 ton units.

B. Provide pressure gauges for suction and discharge for each circuit. Mount gauges

adjacent to compressors.

2.06 FANS AND MOTORS

A. Vertical discharge direct driven propeller type condenser fans with fan guard on

discharge. Fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced.

B. Provide motors suitable for outdoor use, three phase with permanently lubricated ball

bearings and built in current and thermal overload protection.



2.07 COMPRESSORS

A. Compressors shall be industrial grade, energy-efficient direct-drive 3600 RPM maximum

speed reciprocating, scroll type. The motor shall be of a suction gas cooled hermetic

design. Compressor shall have centrifugal oil pump with dirt separator, oil sight glass,

and oil charging valve. A solid state temperature sensor shall be embedded in the motor

windings to protect against excessive winding temperatures.

1. If semi-hermetic reciprocating industrial grade compressors are utilized provide

single piece crankshafts, connecting rods, aluminum pistons, rings to prevent gas

leakage, high strength non-flexing ring type suction and discharge valves, spring

loaded heads, replaceable cylinder liners, and sealing surface immersed in oil.

Provide removable discharge heads and hand hole covers, and discharge

service valves.

2. Provide compressor with automatic capacity reduction equipment consisting of

suction valve unloaders. Use electric solenoid actuated lifting mechanism

operated by <<LIFTING_MECHANISM_TYPE2>>. Provide for unloaded

compressor start.

B. Motor shall be designed for across-the-line starting and suitable for a voltage utilization

range of +/- 10 percent from nameplate voltage.

2.08 SYSTEM CONTROLS

A. Variable Air Volume Control: Provide Honeywell W7100A discharge air controller with

factory supplied, field installed discharge air sensor. Provide preventative coil frost

protection for compressor unloading based on refrigerant circuit suction temperature to

prevent coil frosting with minimum energy usage. The controller shall provide a voltage

output signal for interface with field supplied components for simultaneous economizer

operation.

2.09 LOW AMBIENT CONTROLS

A. Provide low ambient electronic damper assemblies to allow the unit to start and operate

down to 0oF (10o F with hot gas bypass) outdoor ambient conditions. Low ambient

damper operation shall be modulated based upon refrigerant head pressure.

2.10 MISCELLANEOUS FEATURES

A. Unit Disconnect: Provide door handle disconnect switch for disconnection of main power.

Lugs shall be suitable for copper wiring only.

B. Spring Isolators: Provide field installed vibration isolators.

C. Neoprene Isolators: Provide field installed rubber- in-shear isolators.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.



B. Provide for connection to electrical service.

C. Install units on vibration isolation.

D. Install units on concrete base as indicated.

E. Provide connection to refrigeration piping system and evaporators.

3.02 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES

A. Supply initial charge of refrigerant and oil for each refrigerant circuit.

3.03 SCHEDULES AND SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS

A. See Drawings.

END OF SECTION

Building Addition & Renovations for Thermal Economizer UnitsThe Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 237339 - 1

SECTION 237339THERMAL ECONOMIZER UNITS

Part 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

This section includes unit and accessories listed below, complete with controls.

A. Gas-Fired / DX Cooling Thermal Economizer Unit Type Heaters.B. Controls.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Control Wiring: Wire, conduit and miscellaneous materials for mountingand connecting electric control devices.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contractand Division 1 Specification Sections.

1. Product data, including weights and dimensions, and data on featuresand components. Include plan and elevation views of units, minimumclearances, and data on ratings and capacities.

2. Maintenance data for products for inclusion in “Operatingand Maintenance Manual” specified in Division 1.

3. Wiring diagrams from manufacturers detailing electric requirements forpower and control wiring for furnaces. Include ladder-type wiringdiagrams for interlock and control wiring required for field installation.Differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory installed andportions that are to be field installed.


A. Comply with NFPA 70, “National Electrical Code.”B. UL or ETL Listing: Provide electrical components specified in this Section that

are listed and labeled.

Terms “Listed” and “Labeled”: As defined in the “National ElectricalCode”, Article 100.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. In addition to normal system warranties, the manufacturer shall provide a five (5 ) year warranty on fan motors, thirty ( 30 ) year non-prorated warranty onfurnace heat exchanger and two ( 2 ) year warranty on all electricalcomponents.

1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. General: Furnish extra materials matching products installed, as described below:1. Fan belts: One set of required fan belts.2. Fuses: One extra control fuse.


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements; provide products bythe following:

Gas Thermal Economizer Heating/Cooling System Model No. TE-41HC as manufacturedby Powrmatic, Inc. (No Substitutions) Contact Joe Ciurca: 410-812-2378 [email protected]

2.2 UNITS, GENERAL

A. Type: Gas-fired, medium efficiency.B. Configuration: Upflow.C. Gas-Fired Heaters and Accessory Items: NFPA 54, “National Fuel Gas Code”.

1. Approval: Complete heater shall be approved and listed by AGA, ETLor UL

2. Type of Gas: Heater shall be listed for use with Natural Gas.D. Provide furnaces that are factory assembled, piped, wired and tested.E. Cabinet: Fully insulated heavy gauge steel, 16 ga. Lift-out panels to expose

burners, and all other items requiring access for maintenance. Panels are tobe cross broke for added strength. 14 ga. Formex frame with all weldedsections, complete and ready for field connections.

F. All sections must be factory assembled – no field fabrication of sections permitted.G. Main Fans: Propeller-type, factory-balanced, resilient-mounted steel.H. Motors: Two main fan motors shall be energy-efficient type as specified in

Section 15170. Totally enclosed, fuse protection and permanent lubrication.I. Manufacturer shall determine the final size of the units based upon criteria

and information shown on the drawings.

2.3 GAS-FIRED HEAT EXCHANGER

A. General: Primary stainless steel, 4-pass construction, secondary headersand collector boxes shall be Series 400 stainless steel.

B. The heat exchanger is to be completely welded. Swedging of the secondarytubes in the collection box is unacceptable.

C. Efficiency: AFUE 78 percent minimum.D. Burner: Full Modulation.E. Automatic Gas Control: 24 VAC valve.F. Ignition: Electric spark or hot surface ceramic igniter with flame sensor.G. Gas Train Piping: FM approved gas train with gas pressure regulator sized

for incoming gas pressure.H. Venting: Power venting, using integral centrifugal fan.

2.4 COOLING COIL

A. See coil specification for coil requirements and drawings for circuits, etc.B. See “Air cooled condensing unit” spec for other requirements.C. All stainless steel drain pans.D. Blow through design only. Draw through will not be accepted.

2.5 CONTROLS

A. General: Include control components required for satisfactory operation of unitsand auxiliary equipment in all seasons, including:


1. Control Transformer: 24 VAC output, factory-installed and wired infurnace.

2. Relays: As required to achieve specified operation.3. Disconnect Switch.

2.6 FINISHES

A. External Casings and Cabinets: Enamel painted frame work with galvanizedpanels.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION

A. Installation and connection of gas-fired Thermal Economizer Unit and associatedfuel and vent features and systems shall be in accordance with manufacturer’spublished instructions.

1. Connect gas piping in accordance with Division 15 Section “Natural GasSystems”.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify furnaces and connections in accordance with Division 15 Section“Mechanical Identification”.

3.3 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING

A. Cleaning: Upon completion of installation, inspect units and associatedcomponents. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt and debris. Tough upscratches and mars to the finish to match original finish. Clean unit internally,using methods and materials recommended by manufacturer.

B. Adjusting: Make control, burner and other adjustments for optimum heatingperformance and efficiency. Adjust heat distribution features, including shutters,dampers and relays to provide optimum heating performance and systemsefficiency.

3.4 START-UP AND TRAINING

Start-up of units shall be under the supervision of direct factory personnel. The factoryserviceman shall also provide training to designated owner personnel at start-up.

END OF SECTION

Building Addition & Renovations for Packaged Small Capacity Rooftop UnitsThe Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 237416.11 - 1

SECTION 23 74 16.11PACKAGED SMALL CAPACITY ROOFTOP UNITS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Package roof top unit.

B. Heat exchanger.

C. Refrigeration components.

D. Unit operating controls.

E. Roof curb.


G. Operation and maintenance service.


A. Section 230513 – Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment

B. Section 230548 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping & Equipment

C. Section 230593 – Testing, Adjusting and Balancing

D. Section 230713 - Duct Insulation

E. Section 230900 – Building Automation Systems

F. Section 233113 – Metal Ducts

G. Section 233300 – Duct Accessories

H. Section 260501 - Equipment Connections and Coordination

1.03 REFERENCES

A. NFPA 90 A & B - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems andInstallation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems.

B. ANSI/ASHRAE 15 - Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration.

C. AHRI 360 - Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air Conditioning Equipment testing andrating standard.

D. ANSI/ASHRAE 37 - Testing Unitary Air Conditioning Equipment.


E. ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-1999 - Energy Standard for New Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings.

F. ANSI Z21.47/UL1995 - Unitary Air Conditioning Standard for safety requirements.

G. California Energy Commission Administrative Code - Title 20/24 - Establishes theminimum efficiency requirements for HVAC equipment installed in new buildings in theState of California.

H. AHRI 210/240 - Unitary Air-Conditioning Equipment.

I. AHRI 270 - Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment.

J. AHRI 370 - Sound Rating of Large Outdoor Refrigerating and Air ConditioningEquipment.

K. ANSI/NFPA 70-1995 - National Electric Code.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit unit performance data including: capacity, nominal and operating performance.

B. Submit Mechanical Specifications for unit and accessories describing construction,components and options.

C. Submit shop drawings indicating overall dimensions as well as installation, operationand services clearances. Indicate lift points and recommendations and center ofgravity. Indicate unit shipping, installation and operating weights includingdimensions.

D. Submit data on electrical requirements and connection points. Include recommendedwire and fuse sizes or MCA, sequence of operation, safety and start-up instructions.

E. Shop drawings submitted for approval shall be accompanied by a copy of thepurchase agreement between the Contractor and an authorized service representativeof the manufacturer for check, test and start up and first year service.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE and HANDLING

A. Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions for rigging, unloading, andtransporting units.

B. Protect units from physical damage. Leave factory-shipping covers in place untilinstallation.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. Provide parts warranty (excluding refrigerant) for one year from start-up or 18 monthsfrom shipment, whichever occurs first.

B. Provide five-year extended warranty for compressors.

C. Provide five-year heat exchanger limited warranty.


1.07 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Furnish complete parts and labor service and maintenance of packaged roof top unitsfor One Year from Date of Substantial Completion.

B. Provide maintenance service with a two-month interval as maximum time periodbetween calls. Provide 24 hour emergency service on breakdowns and malfunctions.

C. Include maintenance items as outlined in manufacturer's operating and maintenancedata.

D. Submit copies of service call work order or report and include description of workperformed.


A. Unit shall conform to ANSI Z21.47/UL1995 for construction of packaged airconditioner ANSI Z21.47/UL 1995 REQUIREMENTS

1. In the event the unit is not UL approved, the manufacturer must, at hisexpense, provide for a field inspection by a UL representative to verifyconformance to UL standards. If necessary, contractor shall performmodifications to the unit to comply with UL, as directed by the ULrepresentative, at no additional expense to the Owner.

B. Conform to Canadian Standards Association (CAN/CSA-2.3/CAN/CSA C22.2 #236)for construction of packaged air conditioner CAN/CSA-2.3/CAN/CSA C22.2#236REQUIREMENTS

1. In the event the unit is not CSA approved, the manufacturer must, at hisexpense, provide for a field inspection by a CSA representative to verifyconformance to CSA standards. If necessary, contractor shall performmodifications to the unit to comply with CSA, as directed by the CSArepresentative, at no additional expense to the Owner.

1.09 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Provide one set of filters.

B. Furnish a complete set of fan motor drive belts.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 SUMMARY

A. The contractor shall furnish and install package rooftop units as shown and scheduledon the contract documents. The units shall be installed in accordance with thisspecification and perform at the specified conditions as scheduled.

B. MANUFACTURERS- All products shall be as manufactured by Trane (NoSubstitutions)



A. Units furnished and installed shall be Precedent 3-10 Ton R410A Packaged UnitaryGas/Electric Rooftop Unit as scheduled on contract documents and thesespecifications. Cooling capacity ratings shall be based on AHRI Standard. Units shallconsist of insulated weather-tight casing with compressor(s), air-cooled condensercoil, condenser fans, evaporator coil, return-air filters, supply motors and unit controls.

B. Units shall be 100% factory run tested and fully charged with R-410A

C. Units shall have labels, decals, and/or tags to aid in the service of the unit and indicatecaution areas.

D. Units shall be convertible airflow design as manufactured.

E. Wiring internal to the unit shall be colored and numbered for identification.

2.03 UNIT CASING

A. Cabinet: Galvanized steel, phosphatized, and finished with an air-dry paint coatingwith removable access panels. Structural members shall be 18 gauge with accessdoors and removable panels of minimum 20 gauge.

B. Unit cabinet surface shall be tested 1000 hours in salt spray test in compliance withASTM B117.

C. Cabinet construction shall allow for all service/ maintenance from one side of the unit.

D. Cabinet top cover shall be one piece construction or where seams exist, it shall bedouble-hemmed and gasket-sealed.

E. Access Panels: Water- and air-tight panels with handles shall provide access to filters,heating section, return air fan section, supply air fan section, evaporator coil section,and unit control section.

F. Units base pan shall have a raised 1 1/8 inch high lip around the supply and returnopenings for water integrity.

G. Insulation: Provide 1/2 inch thick fiberglass insulation with foil face on all exteriorpanels in contact with the return and conditioned air stream. All edges must becaptured so that there is no insulation exposed in the air stream.

H. Provide openings either on side of unit or through the base for power, control,condensate, and gas connections.

I. The base of the unit shall have 3 sides for forklift provisions. The base of the unitsshall have rigging/lifting holes for crane maneuvering.

2.04 AIR FILTERS

A. Air Filters: Factory installed filters shall mount integral within the unit and shall beaccessible through access panels. One-inch thick glass fiber disposable media filtersshall be provided with the provisions within the unit for 2 inch thick filters to be field-provided and installed.



A. Provide evaporator fan section with forward curved, double width, double inlet,centrifugal type fan.

B. Provide self-aligning, grease lubricated, ball or sleeve bearings with permanentlubrication fittings.

C. Provide units 5 tons and below with direct drive, multiple speed, dynamically balancedsupply fans.

D. Provide units 6 tons and above with belt driven, supply fans with adjustable motorsheaves.

E. Units 7.5 to 10 Ton High Efficiency products utilize direct drive plenum fan design. Fanis backward incline design.

F. Outdoor and Indoor Fan Motors shall be permanently lubricated and have internalthermal overload protection.

G. Outdoor fans shall be direct drive, statically and dynamically balanced, draw throughin the vertical discharge position.

H. Provide shafts constructed of solid hot rolled steel, ground and polished, with key-way,and protectively coated with lubricating oil.

2.06 GAS FIRED HEATING SECTION

A. Completely assembled and factory installed heating system shall be integral to unit,UL or CSA approved specifically for outdoor applications for use downstream fromrefrigerant cooling coils. Threaded connection with plug or cap provided.

B. Heating section shall be factory run tested prior to shipment.

C. Induced draft combustion type with direct spark ignition system, redundant main gasvalve, and 2-staged heat.

D. Gas Burner Safety Controls: Provide safety controls for the proving of combustion airprior to ignition, and continuous flame supervision. Provide flame rollout switches.

E. Induced draft blower shall have combustion air proving switches and built-in thermaloverload protection on fan motor.

F. Heat Exchanger: Provide tubular section type constructed from 18-gauge aluminizedsteel.

G. Burners: Burners shall be of the in-shot type constructed of stainless steel.

H. Limit controls: High temperature limit controls will shut off gas flow in the event ofexcessive temperatures resulting from restricted indoor airflow or loss of indoorairflow.

2.07 EVAPORATOR COIL


A. Provide configured aluminum fin surface mechanically bonded to copper tubing coil.

B. Provide an independent expansion device for each refrigeration circuit. Factorypressure tested at 450 psig and leak tested at 200 psig.

C. Provide a removable, reversible, cleanable double sloped drain pan for base ofevaporator coil constructed of PVC.


A. Provide vertical discharge, direct drive fans with aluminum blades. Fans shall bestatically balanced. Motors shall be permanently lubricated, with integral thermaloverload protection in a weather tight casing.

2.09 REFRIGERATION SYSTEM

A. Compressor(s): Provide scroll compressor with direct drive operating at 3600 rpm.Integral centrifugal oil pump. Provide suction gas cooled motor with windingtemperature limits and compressor overloads.

B. Units shall have cooling capabilities down to 0 degree F as standard. For field-installed low ambient accessory, the manufacturer shall provide a factory-authorizedservice technician that will assure proper installation and operation.

C. Provide each unit with refrigerant circuit(s) factory-supplied completely piped withliquid line filter-drier, suction and liquid line pressure ports.

2.10 EXHAUST/RETURN SECTION

A. Provide on down-flow units above 6 tons, a factory supplied field installed powerexhaust assembly that shall assist the barometric relief damper in the economizer inrelieving building pressurization.

2.11 OUTDOOR AIR SECTION

A. Provide 100% return air.

B. Provide economizer with Econ-Dry Bulb 0-100% with barometric relief.

C. Provide adjustable minimum position control located in the economizer section of theunit.

D. Provide spring return motor for outside air damper closure during unit shutdown orpower interruption.

2.12 OPERATING CONTROLS

A. Provide microprocessor unit-mounted DDC control which when used with anelectronic zone sensor provides proportional integral room control. This UCM shallperform all unit functions by making all heating, cooling, and ventilating decisionsthrough resident software logic.

B. Provide factory-installed indoor evaporator defrost control to prevent compressor


slugging by interrupting compressor operation.

C. Provide an anti-cycle timing and minimum on/off between stages timing in themicroprocessor.

D. Economizer Preferred Cooling (if supplied with economizer) - Compressor operation isintegrated with economizer cycle to allow mechanical cooling when economizer is notadequate to satisfy zone requirements. Compressors are enabled if spacetemperature is recovering to cooling setpoint at a rate of less than 0.2 degrees perminute. Compressor low ambient lockout overrides this function.

2.13 STAGING CONTROLS

A. Provide NEC Class II, electronic, adjustable zone control to maintain zonetemperature setting.

B. Provide programmable electronic microcomputer based zone control.

1. Zone control shall incorporate:

a. Automatic changeover from heating to cooling.b. Set-up for at least 2 - sets of separate heating and cooling temperatures

per day.c. Instant override of setpoint for continuous or timed period from one hour

to 31 days.d. Switch selection features including Fahrenheit display, 12 or 24-hour

clock, keyboard disable, remote sensor, fan on-auto.e. Smart Fan Operation: Allows the unit fan operation to default to the Auto

Mode during unoccupied periods, regardless of the Fan switch position.f. Economizer Minimum Position Override: Allows the unit controller to

override and close the minimum position setting on the economizerdamper during unoccupied time periods.

2. Zone sensor display shall be capable of:

a. Time of day.b. Actual room temperature.c. Programmed temperature.d. Programmed time.e. Duration of timed override.f. Day of week.g. System mode indication: heating, cooling, low battery, and fan on.

C. Provide remote temperature sensor capability.

D. Provide mixed air sensor in supply air to close outside air damper.

2.14 BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

A. Interface control module to Energy Management System to be furnished and mountedby rooftop unit manufacturer. Through this interface module, all Energy Managementfunctions (specified in Energy Management Section) shall be performed. See BuildingAutomation and Automatic Temperature Control System Specifications. The interfacemodule with necessary controls and sensors shall all be factory mounted (not field


mounted). The only field connection to Energy Management System shall be a singlecommunication link.

B. Control Functions: Include unit scheduling, occupied/unoccupied mode, start-up andcoast-down modes, nighttime free-cool purge mode, demand limiting, night setback,discharge air set point adjustment, timed override and alarm shutdown.

C. Diagnostic Functions: Include supply fan status.

D. Provide capabilities for Boolean Processing and trend logs as well as "templated"reports and logs.

2.15 UNIT PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Heating requirements as indicated on Drawing Schedules.

B. Cooling requirements are as indicated on Drawing Schedules.

C. Supply air fan performance data as submitted shall include the effect of a wet coil andthe return air filter static loss.

D. Scheduled performance shall be based on AHRI 210/240/340/360 and ANSI Z21.47test conditions.

E. The unit electrical service is Three phase, 208 volts.

2.16 Unit Sound Rating Number shall be maximum 86-90db based on AHRI 270 and AHRI370.

2.17 ROOF CURB

A. Contractor shall provide factory supplied roof curb, 16 gauge perimeter made of zinccoated steel with supply and return air gasketing and wood nailing strips. Shipknocked down and provided with instructions for easy assembly.

B. Curb shall be manufactured in accordance with the National Roofing ContractorsAssociation guidelines.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Contractor shall verify that roof is ready to receive work and opening dimensions arecoordinated with the G.C.

B. Contractor shall verify that proper power supply is coordinated with the E.C.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Contractor shall install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Mount units on factory built roof mounting frame providing watertight enclosure to


protect ductwork and utility services. Install roof mounting curb level.


A. The contractor shall furnish manufacturer complete submittal wiring diagrams of thepackage unit as applicable for field maintenance and service.

3.04 SCHEDULE AND SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS- See Drawings.

END OF SECTION

Building Addition & Renovations for Packaged Large Capacity Rooftop UnitsThe Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 237416.13 - 1

SECTION 23 74 16.13PACKAGED LARGE CAPACITY ROOFTOP UNITS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Package roof top unit.

B. Heat exchanger.

C. Refrigeration components.

D. Unit operating controls.

E. Roof curb.


G. Operation and maintenance service.


A. Section 230513 – Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment


C. Section 230593 – Testing, Adjusting and Balancing

D. Section 230713 - Duct Insulation

E. Section 230900 – Building Automation Systems

F. Section 233113 – Metal Ducts

G. Section 233300 – Duct Accessories

H. Section 260501 - Equipment Connections and Coordination

1.03 REFERENCES

A. NFPA 90 A & B - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems andInstallation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems.

B. ANSI/ASHRAE 15 - Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration.

C. AHRI 360 - Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air Conditioning Equipment testing andrating standard.

D. AHRI 340 - Commercial and Industrial Unitary Equipment.


E. ANSI/ASHRAE 37 - Testing Unitary Air Conditioning Equipment.

F. ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-1999 - Energy Standard for New Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings.

G. ANSI Z21.47/UL1995 - Unitary Air Conditioning Standard for safety requirements.

H. California Energy Commission Administrative Code - Title 20/24 - Establishes theminimum efficiency requirements for HVAC equipment installed in new buildings in theState of California.

I. AHRI 370 - Sound Rating of Large Outdoor Refrigerating and Air ConditioningEquipment.

J. ANSI/NFPA 70-1995 - National Electric Code.

1.04 SUBMITTALS



C. Submit shop drawings indicating overall dimensions as well as installation, operationand services clearances. Indicate lift points and recommendations and center ofgravity. Indicate unit shipping, installation and operating weights includingdimensions.

D. Submit data on electrical requirements and connection points. Include recommededwire and fuse sizes or MCA, sequence of operation, safety and start-up instructions.

E. Shop drawings submitted for approval shall be accompanied by a copy of thepurchase agreement between the Contractor and an authorized service representativeof the manufacturer for check, test and start up and first year service.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE and HANDLING


B. Protect units from physical damage. Leave factory shipping covers in place untilinstallation.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. Provide parts warranty for one year from start-up or 18 months from shipment,whichever occurs first.

B. Provide five year extended warranty for compressors.

C. Provide five year heat exchanger limited warranty.


1.07 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Furnish complete parts and labor service and maintenance of packaged roof top unitsfor One Year from Date of Substantial Completion.

B. Provide maintenance service with a two month interval as maximum time periodbetween calls. Provide 24 hour emergency service on breakdowns and malfunctions.

C. Include maintenance items as outlined in manufacturer's operating and maintenancedata.

D. Submit copy of service call work order or report and include description of workperformed.


A. Unit shall conform to ANSI Z21.47/UL1995 for construction of packaged airconditioner ANSI Z21.47/UL 1995 REQUIREMENTS.

1. In the event the unit is not UL approved, the manufacturer must, at hisexpense, provide for a field inspection by a UL representative to verifyconformance to UL standards. If necessary, contractor shall performmodifications to the unit to comply with UL, as directed by the ULrepresentative, at no additional expense to the Owner.

B. Conform to Canadian Standards Association (CAN/CSA-2.3/CAN/CSA C22.2 #236)for construction of packaged air conditioner<<CAN/CSA-2.3/CAN/CSA C22.2#236REQUIREMENTS.

1. In the event the unit is not CSA approved, the manufacturer must, at hisexpense, provide for a field inspection by a CSA representative to verifyconformance to CSA standards. If necessary, contractor shall performmodifications to the unit to comply with CSA, as directed by the CSArepresentative, at no additional expense to the Owner.

1.09 EXTRA MATERIALS


B. Furnish a complete set of fan motor drive belts.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 SUMMARY

A. The contractor shall furnish and install package rooftop units as shown and scheduledon the contract documents. The units shall be installed in accordance with thisspecification and perform at the specified conditions as scheduled.

B. MANUFACTURERS- All products shall be as manufactured by Trane (NoSubstitutions)



A. Units furnished and installed shall be Voyager 12-1/2 -20 Ton R410A PackagedUnitary Gas/Electric Rooftop Unit as scheduled on contract documents and thesespecifications. Cooling capacity ratings shall be based on AHRI Standard. Units shallconsist of insulated weather-tight casing with compressor(s), air-cooled condensercoil, condenser fans, evaporator coil, return-air filters, supply motors and unit controls.

B. Units shall be 100% factory run tested and fully charged with R-410A.

C. Units shall have labels, decals, and/or tags to aid in the service of the unit and indicatecaution areas.

D. Units shall be dedicated down-flow as manufactured.

E. Wiring internal to the unit shall be colored and numbered for identification.

2.03 UNIT CASING

A. Cabinet: Galvanized steel, phosphatized, and finished with an air-dry paint coatingwith removable access panels. Structural members shall be 16 gauge with accessdoors and removable panels of minimum 20 gauge.

B. Unit cabinet surface shall be tested 1000 hours in salt spray test in compliance withASTM B117.

C. Cabinet construction shall allow for all service/ maintenance from one side of the unit.

D. Cabinet top cover shall be one piece construction or where seams exits, it shall bedouble-hemmed and gasket-sealed.

E. Access Panels: Water- and air-tight panels with handles shall provide access to filters,heating section, return air fan section, supply air fan section, evaporator coil section,and unit control section.

F. Down-flow units base pans shall have a raised 1 1/8 inch high lip around the supplyand return openings for water integrity.

G. Insulation: Provide 1/2 inch thick coated fiberglass insulation on all exterior panels incontact with the return and conditioned air stream.

H. Provide openings either on side of unit or thru the base for power, control and gasconnections.

I. The base of the unit shall have provisions for forklift and crane lifting


A. Provide evaporator fan section with forward curved, double width, double inlet,centrifugal type fan.


B. Provide self-aligning, grease lubricated, ball or sleeve bearings with permanentlubrication fittings.

C. Provide units 12 1/2 tons and above with belt driven, supply fans with adjustable motorsheaves.

D. Outdoor and Indoor Fan Motor shall be permanently lubricated and have internalthermal overload protection.

E. Outdoor fans shall be direct drive, statically and dynamically balanced, draw throughin the vertical discharge position.

F. Provide shafts constructed of solid hot rolled steel, ground and polished, with key-way,and protectively coated with lubricating oil.

2.05 GAS FIRED HEATING SECTION

A. Completely assembled and factory installed heating system shall be integral to unit,UL or CSA approved specifically for outdoor applications for use downstream fromrefrigerant cooling coils. Threaded connection with plug or cap provided. Providecapability for gas piping <<CONNECTION2>>.

B. Heating section shall be factory run tested prior to shipment.

C. Gas Burner shall be forced combustion type power burner, negative pressure gasvalve, manual shut-off, hot surface ignition, and flame sensing safety control.

D. Gas Burner Safety Controls: Provide safety controls for the proving of combustion airprior to ignition, and continuous flame supervision. Upon a failure to ignite, twoattempts of ignition will occur before lockout of the ignition system.

E. Combustion blower shall be centrifugal type fan with built- in thermal overloadprotection on fan motor.

F. Heat Exchanger: Provide drum and tube heat exchanger of free floating designmanufactured from 18-gauge aluminized steel, factory pressure and leak tested.

G. Limit controls: High temperature limit controls will shut off gas flow in the event ofexcessive temperatures resulting from restricted indoor airflow or loss of indoorairflow.

2.06 EVAPORATOR COIL

A. Provide configured aluminum fin surface mechanically bonded to copper tubing coil.

B. Provide an independent expansion device for each refrigeration circuit. Factorypressure test at 450 psig and leak test at 200 psig.

C. Provide drain pan for base of evaporator coil constructed of PVC or galvanized steelwith external connections.



A. Provide vertical discharge, direct drive fans with aluminum blades. Fans shall bestatically balanced. Motors shall be permanently lubricated, with integral thermaloverload protection in a weather tight casing.

2.08 REFRIGERATION SYSTEM

A. Compressor(s): Provide scroll compressor with direct drive operating at 3600 rpm.Integral centrifugal oil pump. Provide suction gas cooled motor with windingtemperature limits and compressor overloads.

B. Units shall have cooling capabilities down to 0 degree F as standard. For field-installed low ambient accessory, the manufacturer shall provide a factory-authorizedservice technician that will assure proper installation and operation.

C. Provide each unit with refrigerant circuit(s) factory-supplied completely piped withliquid line filter-drier, suction and liquid line pressure ports.

2.09 EXHAUST/RETURN SECTION

A. Provide a factory supplied field installed power exhaust assembly that shall assist thebarometric relief damper in the economizer in relieving building pressurization.

2.10 OUTDOOR AIR SECTION

A. Provide 100% return air.

B. Provide economizer with Econ-Dry Bulb 0-100% with barometric relief.

C. Provide adjustable minimum position control located in the economizer section of theunit.

D. Provide spring return motor for outside air damper closure during unit shutdown orpower interruption.

2.11 OPERATING CONTROLS

A. Provide factory-wired roof top units with 24 volt control circuit with controltransformers, contactor pressure lugs or terminal block for power wiring. Contractor toprovide starter/disconnect device. Units shall have single point power connections.Field wiring of zone controls to be NEC Class II.

B. Provide microprocessor unit-mounted DDC control which when used with anelectronic zone sensor provides proportional integral room control. This UCM shallperform all unit functions by making all heating, cooling and ventilating decisionsthrough resident software logic.

C. Provide factory-installed indoor evaporator defrost control to prevent compressorslugging by interrupting compressor operation.


D. Provide a anti-cycle timing and minimum on/off between stages timing in themicroprocessor.

E. Economizer Preferred Cooling (if supplied with economizer) - Compressor operation isintegrated with economizer cycle to allow mechanical cooling when economizer is notadequate to satisfy zone requirements. Compressors are enabled if spacetemperature is recovering to cooling setpoint at a rate of less than 0.2 degrees perminute. Compressor low ambient lockout overrides this function.

2.12 STAGING CONTROLS

A. Provide NEC Class II, electronic, adjustable zone control to maintain zonetemperature setting.

B. Provide programmable electronic microcomputer based zone control.

1. Zone control shall incorporate:

a. Automatic changeover from heating to cooling.b. Set-up for at least 2 - sets of separate heating and cooling temperatures

per day.c. Instant override of setpoint for continuous or timed period from one hour

to 31 days.d. Switch selection features including Fahrenheit display, 12 or 24 hour

clock, keyboard disable, remote sensor, fan on-auto.

2. Zone sensor display shall be capable of:

a. Time of day.b. Actual room temperature.c. Programmed temperature.d. Programmed time.e. Duration of timed override.f. Day of week.g. System mode indication: heating, cooling, low battery fan on.

C. Provide remote temperature sensor capability.

D. Provide mixed air sensor in supply air to close outside air damper.

2.13 BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

A. Interface control module to Energy Management System to be furnished and mountedby rooftop unit manufacturer. Through this interface module, all Energy Managementfunctions (specified in Energy Management Section) shall be performed. See BuildingAutomation and Automatic Temperature Control System Specifications. The interfacemodule with necessary controls and sensors shall all be factory mounted (not fieldmounted). If not furnished by rooftop unit manufacturer, this shall be furnished byEnergy Management System Contractor for factory mounting by rooftop unitmanufacturer in rooftop unit and rated for service up to 140 F. The only fieldconnection to Energy Management System shall be a single communication link.


B. Control Functions: Include unit scheduling, occupied/unoccupied mode, start-up andcoast-down modes, nighttime free-cool purge mode, demand limiting, night setback,discharge air set point adjustment, timed override and alarm shutdown.

C. Diagnostic Functions: Include supply fan status.

D. Provide capabilities for Boolean Processing and trend logs as well as "templated"reports and logs.

2.14 UNIT PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Heating requirements as indicated on Drawing Schedules.

B. Cooling requirements are as indicated on Drawing Schedules

C. Supply air fan performance data as submitted shall include the effect of a wet coil andthe return air filter static loss.

D. Scheduled performance shall be based on AHRI 210/240/340/360 and ANSI Z21.47test conditions.

E. The unit electrical service is Three phase, 208 volts.

2.15 Unit Sound Rating Number shall be maximum 9.2-9.4 BELS based on AHRI 270 andAHRI 370.

2.16 ROOF CURB

A. Contractor shall provide factory supplied roof curb, 16 gauge perimeter made of zinccoated steel with supply and return air gasketing and wood nailing strips. Shipknocked down and provided with instructions for easy assembly.

B. Curb shall be manufactured in accordance with the National Roofing ContractorsAssociation guidelines.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Contractor shall verify that roof is ready to receive work and opening dimensions arecoordinated with the G.C.

B. Contractor shall verify that proper power supply is coordinated with the E.C.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Contractor shall install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Mount units on factory built roof mounting frame providing watertight enclosure toprotect ductwork and utility services. Install roof mounting curb level.



A. The contractor shall furnish manufacturer complete submittal wiring diagrams of thepackage unit as applicable for field maintenance and service.

3.04 SCHEDULE AND SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS- See Drawings.

END OF SECTION

Building Addition & Renovations for Dedicated Outdoor Air Units (Packaged)The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 237433 - 1

SECTION 237433DEDICATED OUTDOOR AIR UNITS (PACKAGED)

PART 1 - GENERAL

1. SECTION INCLUDES

A. Packaged outdoor air unit.

B. Dehumidification/Cooling.

C. Heating.

D. Electrical Ratings and Connections

E. Unit Controls

F. Powered Exhaust

G. Energy Recovery

H. Roof curb

I. Execution

2. RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 230513 - Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment


C. Section 230713 – Duct Insulation

D. Section 230900 – Building Automation Systems

E. Section 233113 – Metal Ducts

F. Section 233300 – Duct Accessories

G. Section 260501 - Equipment Connections and Coordination

3. REFERENCES

(AHRI has introduced Standard 920 “Performance Rating of DX Dedicated Outdoor Air SystemUnits”. Testing for rating is next step in implementation of this rating standard.)

A. ANSI/ASHRAE 15 - Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration.

B. ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2013 - Energy Standard for New Buildings Except Low-RiseResidential Buildings.

C. ANSI Z21.47/UL1995 - Unitary Air Conditioning Standard for safety requirements.


D. ANSI/NFPA 70-1995 - National Electric Code.

E. International Fuel Gas Code

F. NFPA 90 A & B - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems and Installationof Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems.

4. SUBMITTALS



C. Submit drawings indicating overall dimensions as well as installation, operation andservices clearances. Indicate lift points and recommendations and center of gravity.Indicate unit shipping, installation and operating weights including dimensions.

D. Submit data on electrical requirements and connection points. Include recommendedwire and fuse sizes or MCA, sequence of operation, safety and start-up instructions.

E. Drawings submitted for approval shall be accompanied by a copy of the purchaseagreement between the Contractor and an authorized service representative of themanufacturer for check, test and start up and first year service.

5. DELIVERY, STORAGE and HANDLING


B. Protect units from physical damage. Leave factory shipping covers in place untilinstallation.

C. Units to be secured via base rail tie-down locations.

6. WARRANTY

A. Provide parts warranty extending either 12-months from date of unit start-up or amaximum of 18-months from unit ship date.

B. Provide twenty-five year heat exchanger limited warranty from unit ship date.

C. Provide Five Year extended compressor warranty.

7. MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Furnish complete parts and labor service and maintenance of packaged outdoor air unitsfor One Year from Date of Substantial Completion.

B. Provide maintenance service with a two month interval as maximum time period betweencalls. Provide 24 hour emergency service on breakdowns and malfunctions.

C. Include maintenance items as outlined in manufacturer's operating and maintenance


data.

D. Submit copy of service call work order or report and include description of workperformed.

E. Must have twenty factory-certified and factory-trained technicians within a four-hourradius of the jobsite.

8. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Unit shall conform to the appropriate standards listed in Section 103 as well as be listedand labeled by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) for compliance withthe following applicable standards.

1. Standard for Safety Heating and Cooling Equipment-Fourth Edition, UL 1995/CSAC22.2#236 Issue: 2011/10/14

2. Standard for Gas Unit Heaters And Gas-Fired Duct Furnaces ANSI Z83.8-2013, CSA2.6-2013, Third Edition – 2006 (indirect gas-fired/e)

3. Standard for Non-Recirculating Direct Gas-Fired Industrial Air Heaters, ANSI Z83.4 /CSA 3.7 - Issued: 2013/03/01 Ed: 3

4. In the event the unit is not approved by an NRTL for compliance with the appropriatestandards, the manufacturer shall, at manufacturer’s expense, provide for a fieldcertification and labeling of unit by an NRTL to the appropriate standards.Manufacturer shall, at manufacturer’s cost, complete any and all modificationsrequired by NRTL prior to certification and field labeling. Manufacturer shall includecoverage of all modifications in unit warranty.

9. EXTRA MATERIALS


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

1. SUMMARY

A. The contractor shall furnish and install packaged outdoor air unit as shown andscheduled on the contract documents. The unit shall be installed in accordance with thisspecification and perform at the specified conditions as scheduled.

B. MANUFACTURERS (No Substitutions)

1. Trane: Horizon™ Model OAGD120 (Dedicated Outdoor Air System) (DOAS)

2. GENERAL UNIT DESCRIPTION

A. Unit(s) furnished and installed shall be packaged outdoor air unit(s) as scheduled oncontract documents and described in these specifications. Unit(s) shall be designed fordehumidification, cooling and/or heating of 100% Outdoor Air. For dehumidification andcooling modes the evaporator temperature shall be monitored, reported at unit controller.Compressor controls shall modulate capacity to maintain evaporator leaving set point.Hot Gas Bypass shall not be used to control compressor capacity. Compressor Hot Gas


Reheat (HGRH) shall be factory installed. To prevent rehydration of evaporatorcondensate the reheat coil face shall be located a minimum of 6” downstream from theleaving face of the evaporator coil. Heating system shall include modulating controls.Compressor on-off only or primary heating on-off only controls shall not be acceptablecontrol strategies.

B. Unit) shall have labels, decals, and/or tags to aid in the service of the unit and indicatecaution areas.

C. Unit discharge airflow configuration shall be:

1. Vertical Discharge thru unit base.

2. Vertical Return thru unit base.

3. CABINET

A. Cabinet panels: 2” double-wall foamed panel construction throughout the indoor sectionof unit to provide nonporous, cleanable interior surfaces. All interior seams exposed toairflow shall be sealed.

B. Insulation: 2” polyisocyanurate foam metal encapsulated with no exposed edges. Initial Rvalue of 6.6 per inch of thickness.

C. Cabinet base shall be double wall construction designed to prevent trapping or pondingof water within the unit base. Cabinet base pan shall be insulated with 2” thickpolyisocyanurate foam. Foam insulation shall be fully enclosed with galvanized steelinsulation cover. Insulation shall not be applied to underside of unit base.

D. Cabinet Base Rails: Side and end base rails shall include openings for forklift and tie-down access. To protect unit base from fork damage side rails shall include removableheavy gauge fork pockets.

E. Shipping anchors attach to and/or through unit base rails. Straps over unit shall not beused to secure unit for shipping.

F. Cabinet material interior and base rails: shall be G-90 zinc-coated galvanized steel.Material gauge shall be a minimum of 14-gauge for base rails, 16-gauge for structuralmembers and 20-gauge for access doors and cabinet panels.

G. Exterior Corrosion Protection: Exterior cabinet panels shall be a base coat of G-90galvanized steel with both exterior and interior surfaces cleaned, phosphatized andfinished with a weather-resistant baked enamel finish. Unit’s surface shall be incompliance with ASTM B45 salt spray testing at a minimum of 672 hour duration.

H. Cabinet construction shall provide hinged panels providing easy access for all partsrequiring routine service.

I. Cabinet top cover shall be one piece construction or where seams exist, it shall bedouble-hemmed and gasket-sealed.

J. Hinged Access Panels: Water- and air-tight hinged access panels shall provide access toall areas requiring routine service including air filters, heating section, electrical andcontrol cabinet sections, optional ERV and power exhaust fan section, supply air fan


section, evaporator and reheat coil sections. Insulated doors shall be constructed toallow the hinges to be reversed in the field.

1. Hold-open devices shall be factory installed on all hinged access doors. Chains shallnot be used as hold-open devices.

2. Latches with locking hasp or tool operated closure devices shall be factory installedon all hinged access panels.

K. Drain Pan material shall be Type 430 Stainless steel drain and constructed to sloped intwo directions to ensure positive drainage with corners exposed to standing water anddrain fittings welded liquid tight to prevent leaks. Pan shall have a minimum depth of 2”.Base of drain pan shall be insulated with 1” thick foam insulation.

L. Provide openings either on side of unit or thru the base for power, control and gasconnections.

M. Cabinet shall include optional interior liner constructed of Type 304 stainless steel withsealed seams.

N. Unit shall be equipped with a 6” filter rack upstream of the evaporator. Frame shall befield-adjustable to match any filter combination specified in the following section.

4. FANS AND MOTORS

A. Indoor fans shall be high efficiency backward curved impeller.

B. The indoor fan motor shall be an electronic commutated motor with integrated powerelectronics for variable motor speed.

C. Outdoor fans shall be direct drive with premium efficiency motors, statically anddynamically balanced, draw through in the vertical discharge position.

D. Provide shafts constructed of solid hot rolled steel, ground and polished, with key-way,and protectively coated with lubricating oil.

5. AIR FILTERS

A. Evaporator Inlet shall include a full compliment of pleated media air filters. Filters shallbe:

a. 2” deep MERV 8b. 2” deep MERV 13c. 4” deep MERV 14d. 6” deep (combinations of MERV 8, 13, and 14 rated filters above)

6. DAMPERS

A. Unit shall include a motor operated outdoor air damper constructed of galvanized steel.

B. Damper blades shall be air foil design with rubber edge seals designed not to exceed a 4CFM/SQ FT leakage rate exceeding ASHRAE 90.1 damper leakage requirements.

C. Damper actuator shall be factory mounted and wired sealed spring return and either two-


position or fully modulating.

D. Dampers air velocity shall not exceed 2000 fpm.

E. OPTIONAL Return Air damper shall be of same material, construction and leakage rateas outdoor air damper. Return air damper actuator shall be factory mounted and wiredsealed spring fully modulating and operate based on outdoor air damper feedback signalto properly regulate RA airflow.

7. DEHUMIDIFICATION/COOLING

A. Compressors

1. All units shall have digital scroll type compressors.

2. Digital Scroll Compressor

a. Circuit One

b. Circuit One and Circuit Two

3. Motor shall be suction gas-cooled and shall have a voltage utilization range of plus orminus 10 percent of unit nameplate voltage.

4. Internal overloads shall be provided with the scroll compressors.

5. Each compressor shall have a crankcase heater to minimize the amount of liquidrefrigerant present in the oil sump during off cycles.

6. Each compressor shall be mounted on rubber vibration isolators, to reduce thetransmission of noise.

7. Provide each unit with <<CIRCUIT_AMOUNT>> hermetically sealed refrigerantcircuit(s) factory-supplied completely piped with liquid line filter-drier, liquid linecharging port, suction and liquid line pressure ports, sight glass, and thermalexpansion valve.

8. Provide each circuit with automatic reset high and low pressure and high temperatureswitches for safety control.

B. Coils

1. Evaporator, Condenser and Hot Gas Reheat coils shall be constructed with coppertubes mechanically bonded to configured aluminum plate fins.

2. Coils shall be factory leak tested in accordance ANSI/ASHRAE 15-1992 at a minimumpressure of 500 PSIG.

3. The condenser coil shall have a fin designed for ease of cleaning.

4. Evaporator coil shall include (six / four) rows of cooling interlaced for superior sensibleand latent cooling with a maximum of 12 FPI for ease of cleaning.

5. Reheat coil shall be fully integrated into the supply airstream and be capable of


delivering design supply air temperature.

6. To prevent re-hydration of condensate from evaporator coil, the evaporator coil faceand the hot gas reheat coil face shall be separated by a minimum of six inches.

7. Coil Coating: Coil will have a flexible epoxy polymer e-coat uniformly applied to all coilsurface areas with no material bridging between fins. The coating process will ensurecomplete coil encapsulation and a uniform dry film thickness from 0.6 – 1.2 mills on allsurface areas including fin edges and meet 5b rating cross hatched adhesion perASTM B3359- 93.Corrosion durability will be confirmed through testing with no lessthan 5,000 hours salt spray resistance per ASTM B117-90 using scribed aluminumtest school coupons. The coil coating will meet the following test standards:

a. MIL-C-46168 Chemical Agent Resistance – DS2, HCL Gas

b. CIDA-A-52474-A (GSA)

c. MIL-STD810F, Method 509.4 (Sand and Dust)

d. MIL-P-53084 (ME)-TACOM Approval

e. MIL-DTL-12468 Decontamination Agent (STB)

f. DPG (Dugway Proving Grounds) Soil & Water Exposure Tests

g. GM9540P-97 Accelerated Corrosion Test (120 cycles)

h. ASTMB117-G85 Modified Salt Spray (Fog) Testing-2,000 hours (testedby ARL for Lockheed Martin)

8. The unit(s) must comply per above - spray coatings not acceptable

9. Condenser coil hail guards shall be factory installed.

10. UVC Emitters/Lamps: Ultraviolet light (C band) emitters/lamps shall be incorporateddownstream of evaporator coils, upstream of hot gas reheat coils, and above all drainpans to control airborne and surface microbial growth and transfer. Applied fixturesmust be specifically manufactured for this purpose. Safety interlocks/features shall beprovided to limit hazard to operating staff.

C. Condenser Section

1. Outdoor Fans: Shall be direct drive vertical discharge design with low-noise corrosionresistant glass reinforced polypropylene props, powder coated wire discharge guardsand electro-plated motor mounting brackets.

2. Fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced.

D. Compressor Capacity Control1. (Mechanical Control: shall be equipped with Refrigerant Capacity Control (RCC) on

the lead circuit to modulate compressor capacity during Dehumidification or Coolingmodes to maintain evaporator Dehumidification or Cooling setpoint and preventevaporator frosting or freezing. RCC shall be (standard mechanical / optionalelectrical). Hot gas by pass shall not be an acceptable compressor capacity controlstrategy. The RCC setpoint is factory set, and field adjustable, to maintain desired


suction pressure and compressor discharge pressure.

Electronic Control: (Requires Digital Scroll Compressor be selected in compressorsection of this specification.) Compressor output capacity shall be controlled by theMain Control Module. (refer to unit control and sequence sections of this specification)

8. HEATING

A. Modulating Indirect Gas Fired Heating System

1. Completely assembled and factory installed heating system shall be located in theprimary heating position located downstream of the indoor fan assembly and be integralto unit and approved for use downstream from refrigerant cooling coils in units mountedoutdoors. Threaded gas connection shall terminate at manual shut-off valve. Providecapability for sidewall or thru-base gas piping.

2. Heaters shall include high turn-down burners firing into individual stainless steel tubularheat exchangers. Heat exchangers shall be constructed of type 439 stainless steel andbe a high efficiency dimpled tubular design capable of draining internal condensate.Units with multiple heaters shall include one fully modulating high turndown heater withadditional on-off heater sections. Total heater turndown shall be based on heater gasinput capacity 5:1 when ≤150 MBH or a minimum of 10:1 when >150 MBH.

3. Heater outdoor air inlet shall be hooded and include internal baffle system to preventrain blow thru. To prevent recirculation of flue gas and to prevent flue gas condensatefrom draining onto and obstructing the heater air inlet the inlet shall be hooded andshall be located a minimum of 11” beneath the flue outlet. Inlet hood shall include birdscreen.

4. Heater flue outlet(s) shall include hooded outlet with wire cloth all constructed of Type430 stainless steel. Hooded outlet shall be sealed to prevent flue gas recirculation.

5. Gas Burner Safety Controls: Provide safety controls for the proving of combustion airprior to ignition, continuous air proving monitoring following ignition and continuouselectronic flame supervision.

6. Unit controls shall monitor heat output and shall discontinue all heating attempts and orunit operation in the event the heating section fails to ignite or fails to maintainprogrammed supply air temperature/time.

7. Inducer fan shall be direct drive high pressure centrifugal type with two speeds andshall include built- in thermal overload protection.

8. Limit controls: High temperature automatic reset limits shall be located on blower walland in indoor fan chamber to shut off gas flow in the event of excessive temperaturesresulting from restricted indoor airflow, or loss of indoor airflow.

9. Flame roll-out safeties shall provide continuous monitoring of proper burner operation.

9. ELECTRICAL RATINGS AND CONNECTIONS

A. All high voltage power components such as fuses, switches and contactors shall includea service personnel protection barrier or shall be a listed as touch-safe design.


B. Field wiring access to be provided thru unit base into isolated enclosure with removablecover.

C. Power wiring to be single point connection.

D. Wiring internal to the unit shall be colored and numbered for identification.

E. Unit shall be factory wired to field wiring terminal block mounted in isolated enclosure.

F. Factory wired main power disconnect and overcurrent device shall be rated for total unitconnected power

G. Unit SCCR rating shall be a minimum of 5kA

H. Optional unit SCCR rating shall be a minimum of 65kA

I. Factory wired Voltage/Phase monitor shall be included as standard. In the event of any ofthe following, the units will be shut down and a fault code will be stored in the monitor forthe most recent 25 faults. Upon correction of the fault condition the unit will reset andrestart automatically.

1. Phase Unbalance Protection: Factory set 2%

2. Over/Under/Brown Out Voltage Protection: +/-10% of nameplate voltage

3. Phase Loss/Reversal

J. Factory to mount and wire optional120 volt convenience outlet. Field wiring ofconvenience outlet not acceptable.

K. All low voltage field wiring connections shall be made at factory installed low voltageterminal strip.

10. UNIT CONTROLS

A. Main Unit Controller (MCM) shall be a microprocessor based controller with residentcontrol logic. Controller program logic shall include

1. Include single program with field selectableA. Discharge Air control with unit conditioning modes enabled based on outdoor air

conditions and controlled to maintain discharge air setpoints.B. Space control with unit conditioning modes enabled and controlled to maintain

space setpoints.2. Multi-Zone Variable Air Volume Control (MZVAV) with unit conditioning modes

enabled based on discharge air temperature setpoint and supply fan controlled withindesign minimum and maximum performance ratings to maintain a duct pressuresetpoint monitored by the factory furnished, field installed duct pressure sensor.

3. Single Zone Variable Air Volume (SZVAV) with unit conditioning modes enabledbased on space temperature cooling setpoint and modulate supply fan to maintainsetpoint. Cooling will be staged to maintain discharge air cooling setpoint. Heat willmodulate to maintain space temperature with indoor fan held at maximum designairflow.

B. MCM shall:


1. Prevent simultaneous operation of any conditioning modes.

2. Accept separate setpoints for Occupied and Unoccupied states.

3. Call for Dehumidification based on dew point setpoints. When no call forDehumidification is present MCM shall control calls for Cooling, Heating andEconomizer modes based on sensible or enthalpy temperature setpoints. MCM shallhave onboard clock and scheduling function for occupancy.

4. Include non-volatile memory to retain all programmed values without the use of abattery, in the event of a power failure.

5. Enable HGRH dehumidification and cooling modes and control modulation tomaintain (discharge air temperature / space temperature).

6. Unit shall include minimum discharge air control.

C. Optional MCM Touch Screen shall include full color display and shall be (factory installedin unit control compartment / field mounted remote from unit and field wired up to amaximum of 300 ft.) and provide a full list of points included in the MCM. The displayshall provide a list and history of all unit alarms.

D. System Sensors shall include: Factory installed and wired Outdoor Air Temperature,Outdoor Air Humidity and Evaporator Leaving Air Temperature and factory furnished,field installed Discharge Air Temperature.

1. Space Control or Single Zone VAV: Factory shall furnish Space Temperature andSpace Humidity sensor for field installation and connection to the unit

2. Economizer Option includes Return Air Temperature and Humidity sensor3. ERV Option includes exhaust air leaving temperature sensor4. Powered Exhaust with Economizer includes duct pressure sensor to be field

installed.

E. System controls shall include:

1. Anti-cycle timing.2. Minimum compressor run/off-times.

F. Optional Smoke Detectors to sense (Return Air / Discharge Air / Return and DischargeAir) stream(s) shall be factory installed and wired.

11. POWER EXHAUST – BAROMETRIC RELIEF

A. Provide a factory installed power exhaust assembly that shall be designed to ventilatereturn air to atmosphere.

B. Plenum mounted direct drive airfoil design exhaust wheel material shall be heavy gaugealuminum, welded construction and rated for up to Class III speed/pressure performance.Belt-drive and/or forward curve plenums fans shall not be used.

C. Exhaust to discharge through gravity dampers located on each side of unit cabinet.


12. OUTDOOR AIR SECTION ENERGY RECOVERY (ERV)

A. The rotor media shall be made of aluminum, formed into a honeycomb structure to minimizepressure loss and avoid plugging. Paper, plastic or fibrous media are not acceptable. The rotormedia must be coated to resist corrosion. All surfaces must be coated with a non-migratingdesiccant layer to insure that adequate latent capacity is provided. The desiccant coatingmust be firmly bonded to the aluminum surface and will not be dislodged when challengedwith high velocity air up to 5000 feet per minute. Products that lose desiccant when servedwith high velocity air are not acceptable. The cassette must be a slide out design forserviceability. The media shall be cleanable with low temperature steam, hot water or lightdetergent without degrading the latent recovery.

B. Sensible and latent recovery efficiencies must be clearly documented through a testingprogram conducted in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 84 and AHRI 1060. The testingmust have been conducted by a qualified independent organization. The performance testreports must be provided for engineering review as part of the submittals for this project.

C. The rotor design shall ensure laminar airflow to minimize parasitic pressure loss and tooptimize the operating efficiency of the system fans. The pressure loss across the media shallbe no greater than the scheduled pressure loss values. The energy wheel shall operateeffectively up to 180 degrees F.

D. The rotor media shall be permanent, with an anticipated life of 20 years. It must be tested inaccordance with ASTM Standard E-84 and provide smoke and flame spread ratings of lessthan 25 and 50 as required by NFPA 90A and UL 1995. A copy of the ASTM E-84 test reportconfirming the method of test and results shall be provided with the submittal. Heat recoverywheels incorporating “throw-away” media and tested to UL900 for Class 2 filters are notacceptable.

E. The wheel manufacturer must have been producing energy recovery wheels for a minimum often years.

F. The rotor shall be supplied with perimeter brush seals and face contact seals to minimize airleakage and wheel bypass.

G. The rotor media shall be supported by a structural aluminum hub and aluminum reinforcingspoke system. The rotor bearings must be greaseable and provide L10 life in excess of 20years.

H. The cassette framework shall be made of galvanized steel to prevent corrosion.

I. The rotor must be driven by long-life polyurethane/polyester composite link belt system. Therotor/cassette shall be designed so that belt can be removed or serviced without the removalof the bearing. A 3 phase A/C gear motor shall be utilized to accommodate variable speedapplications.

13. ROOF CURB

A. Contractor shall provide factory supplied 14” tall roof curb, 18 gauge perimeter made of zinccoated steel with supply and return air gasketing and wood nailer strips. Ship knocked downand provided with instructions for easy assembly.

B. Curb shall be manufactured in accordance with the National Roofing Contractors Associationguidelines.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

1. EXAMINATION

1. Contractor shall verify that roof is ready to receive work and opening dimensions arecoordinated with the G.C.

2. Contractor shall verify that proper power supply is coordinated with the E.C.

2. INSTALLATION

1. Contractor shall install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

2. Mount units on factory built roof mounting frame providing watertight enclosure toprotect ductwork and utility services. Install roof mounting curb level.

3. MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES

A. Unit start-up and commissioning shall be completed by a Factory-trained and factory-certifiedtechnician.

1. Manufacturer must have twenty factory-authorized and factory-trained technicianswithin a 50 mile radius of job site.

B. The contractor shall furnish manufacturer complete submittal wiring diagrams of the packageunit as applicable for field maintenance and service.

END OF SECTION

Building Addition & Renovations for Hydronic Air CoilsThe Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 238216 - 1

SECTION 23 82 16HYDRONIC AIR COILS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes cooling coils for thermal economizer unit.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual

components and profiles, and finishes for each air coil.2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and pressure drops for each

air coil.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air coils to include in operation and maintenancemanuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DESCRIPTION

A. ASHRAE Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section

5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."

2.2 COILS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by thefollowing:1. Powrmatic (No Substitutions)

B. Performance Ratings: Tested and rated according to AHRI 410 and ASHRAE 33.

C. Minimum Working-Pressure/Temperature Ratings: 200 psig, 325 deg F.

D. Source Quality Control: Factory tested to 300 psig.

E. Tubes: ASTM B 743 copper, minimum 0.025 thick.

F. Fins: Aluminum, minimum 0.010 inch thick.

Building Addition & Renovations for Hydronic Air CoilsThe Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 238216 - 2

G. Frames: Galvanized-steel channel frame,16 gauge.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine ducts, plenums, and casings to receive air coils for compliance with

requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting coil performance.

B. Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections

before coil installation.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install coils level and plumb.

B. Install galvanized steel drain pan under coil section complying with ASHRAE 62. Size

to extend beyond coil length and width. Connect to condensate trap and drain.

C. Straighten bent fins on air coils.

D. Clean coils using materials and methods recommended in writing by manufacturers,

and clean inside of casings and enclosures to remove dust and debris.

E. Furnish refrigerant distributor and thermostatic expansion valve.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate

general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to coils to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect water piping with unions and shutoff valves to allow coils to be disconnectedwithout draining piping. Control valves are specified in Section 230900 "BuildingAutomation Systems" and other piping specialties are specified in Section 232300"Refrigerant Piping".

END OF SECTION

Building Addition & Renovations for Common Work Results for ElectricalThe Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 260500 - 1

SECTION 26 05 00COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including: General and Supplementary Conditionsand Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Supporting devices for electrical components.2. Cutting and patching for electrical construction.

3. Touchup painting.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance

requirements.



B. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate chases, slots, inserts, sleeves, and openings with general construction work andarrange in building structure during progress of construction to facilitate the electrical installationsthat follow.

1. Set inserts and sleeves in poured-in-place concrete, masonry work, and other structural

components as they are constructed.

B. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installing electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow

of the Work.

C. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are concealed by finished

surfaces. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and

Frames."

D. If the equipment, other than that which the Drawings were designed around, does not properlyadapt itself to the space allotted or lend itself accessible for repair and maintenance, thecontractor shall be responsible to provide additional access panels, pipe, fittings, materials, andlabor, to achieve the same end results.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUPPORTING DEVICES

A. Material: Cold-formed steel, with corrosion-resistant coating acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction.

B. Metal Items for Use Outdoors or in Damp Locations: Hot-dip galvanized steel.

C. Slotted-Steel Channel Supports: Flange edges turned toward web, and 9/16-inch- diameter

slotted holes at a maximum of 2 inches o.c., in webs.

1. Channel Thickness: Selected to suit structural loading.2. Fittings and Accessories: Products of the same manufacturer as channel supports.

D. Raceway and Cable Supports: Manufactured clevis hangers, riser clamps, straps, threaded C-clamps with retainers, ceiling trapeze hangers, wall brackets, and spring- steel clamps or click-type hangers.

E. Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.

F. Cable Supports for Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body andinsulating wedging plug for non-armored electrical cables in riser conduits. Plugs have numberand size of conductor gripping holes as required to suit individual risers. Body constructed ofmalleable-iron casting with hot-dip galvanized finish.

G. Expansion Anchors: Carbon-steel wedge or sleeve type.

H. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.

2.2 TOUCHUP PAINT

A. For Equipment: Equipment manufacturer's paint selected to match installed equipment finish.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Zinc-rich paint recommended by item manufacturer. Zinc-rich paint must

have a VOC not more than 340g/L.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrangeand install components and equipment to provide the maximum possible headroom.

B. Materials and Components: Install level, plumb, and parallel and perpendicular to other buildingsystems and components, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components.Connect for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference with other installations.

D. Right of Way: Give to raceways and piping systems installed at a required slope.

E. Materials installed under this Division of Work shall be supported from the building structure,


independent of other pipe, duct, and equipment, except recessed “lay-in” fixtures not larger than 2feet by 4 feet may be supported as stipulated in other Divisions and Sections of Division 26.

3.2 ELECTRICAL SUPPORTING DEVICE APPLICATION

A. Damp Locations and Outdoors: Hot-dip galvanized materials or nonmetallic, U- channel systemcomponents.

B. Dry Locations: Steel materials.

C. Support Clamps for PVC Raceways: Click-type clamp system.

D. Selection of Supports: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Strength of Supports: Adequate to carry present and future loads, times a safety factor of at leastfour; minimum of 200-lb design load.

3.3 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Install support devices to securely and permanently fasten and support electrical components.

B. Install individual and multiple raceway hangers and riser clamps to support raceways.

Provide U-bolts, clamps, attachments, and other hardware necessary for hanger assemblies and

for securing hanger rods and conduits.

C. Support parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze- or bracket-type hangers.

D. Size supports for multiple raceway installations so capacity can be increased by a 25 percentminimum in the future.

E. Support individual horizontal raceways with separate, malleable-iron pipe hangers or clamps.

F. Install 1/4-inch- diameter or larger threaded steel hanger rods, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Spring-steel fasteners specifically designed for supporting single conduits or tubing may be usedinstead of malleable-iron hangers for 1-1/2-inch and smaller raceways serving lighting andreceptacle branch circuits above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to slottedchannel and angle supports.

H. Arrange supports in vertical runs so the weight of raceways and enclosed conductors is carriedentirely by raceway supports, with no weight load on raceway terminals.

I. Simultaneously install vertical conductor supports with conductors.

J. Support sheet-metal boxes directly from the building structure or by bar hangers. If bar hangersare used, attach bar to raceways on opposite sides of the box and support the raceway with anapproved fastener not more than 24 inches from the box.

K. Install metal channel racks for mounting cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, controlenclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices unless components aremounted directly to structural elements of adequate strength.

L. Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of concrete slabs and walls unless core-drilled


holes are used. Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of masonry and fire-ratedgypsum walls and of all other fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Install sleeves during erectionof concrete and masonry walls.

M. Securely fasten electrical items and their supports to the building structure, unless otherwiseindicated. Perform fastening according to the following unless other fastening methods areindicated:

1. Wood: Fasten with wood screws or screw-type nails.

2. Masonry: Toggle bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion bolts on solid masonry

units.3. New Concrete: Concrete inserts with machine screws and bolts.

4. Steel: Welded threaded studs or spring-tension clamps on steel.a. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.

5. Welding to steel structure may be used only for threaded studs, not for conduits, pipe

straps, or other items.6. Light Steel: Sheet-metal screws.

7. Fasteners: Select so the load applied to each fastener does not exceed 25 percent of its

proof-test load.

3.4 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to cable and raceway penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies toachieve fire-resistance rating of the assembly. Firestopping materials and installationrequirements are specified in Division 07 Section "Firestopping."

3.5 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Where it is necessary, cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and othersurfaces required to permit electrical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of tradesinvolved.

B. Repair and refinish disturbed finish materials and other surfaces to match adjacent undisturbedsurfaces. Install new fireproofing where existing firestopping has been disturbed. Repair andrefinish materials and other surfaces by skilled mechanics of trades involved. All patches andrepairs are subject to the review and approval of the Architect. Patches demonstrating poorworkmanship or other problems shall be repaired as directed.

C. Where electrical devices and components are removed from existing walls to remain in finishedareas, the holes left behind shall be patched. Blank faceplates are not acceptable in finishedareas. Blank faceplates are allowed in “back-of-house” areas (storage rooms, mechanical andelectrical spaces, etc.)


A. Inspect installed components for damage and faulty work, including the following:

1. Supporting devices for electrical components.2. Cutting and patching for electrical construction.3. Touchup painting.

3.7 REFINISHING AND TOUCHUP PAINTING


A. Refinish and touch up the paint on all electrical equipment. Paint materials and applicationrequirements are specified in Division 09 Section "Painting."

3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Upon completion of installation inspect the exposed finish of all equipment, including outlets,fittings, and devices. Remove burrs, dirt, paint spots, and construction debris.

B. Protect equipment and installations and maintain conditions to ensure that coatings, finishes, andcabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

Building Addition & Renovations for Equipment Connections and CoordinationThe Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 260501 - 1

SECTION 26 05 01EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS AND COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. General: Provide final connections to equipment and coordinate same in accordance with theContract documents.

B. Equipment to receive final connections shall include but not be limited to the following:

1. Motors and Equipment

C. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and SupplementaryConditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this section.

D. Related Work Specified in Division 26

1. Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables - Section 260519.2. Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems - Section 260533.3. Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems - Section 260526.

4. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers - Section 262816.

E. Related Work Specified in Other Divisions of these Specifications:

1. Motors


A. Prior to the submitting of bids, the Contractor shall familiarize himself with all conditions affectingthe proposed installation of equipment requiring electrical connections and shall make provisionsas to the cost thereof. Failure to comply with the intent of this paragraph shall in no way relieve

the Contractor of performing all necessary work required for final electrical connections andequipment and the coordination thereof.

B. Connections and overcurrent protection devices shall be in accordance with the manufacturer'srecommendations and approved shop drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Only those products listed in Division 26 shall be employed.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EQUIPMENT

A. Connections for, and coordination of, motors and equipment requiring electrical connections shall

include but not be limited to the following:

1. Provide and install a disconnect switch for each motor and each piece of equipment, except

where combination starter/disconnects or disconnects integral to equipment are providedby mechanical or plumbing contractor. Provide disconnects where required by Code.


2. Verify that the motor rotation is correct and reconnect if necessary.

3. Provide separate ground wires with all feeders and branch circuits so as to provide an

electrically continuous ground path. Ground all equipment.4. Provide motor branch circuit conductors and connections to each individual motor controller

and from each controller to the motor through an approved disconnect switch. Make finalconnection per Division 26 Section “Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables”.

5. Where equipment is fed from branch circuit routed in or under the slab, terminate branch

circuit at junction box on a rigid conduit stub-up and make final connection to equipmentper Division 26 Section “Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems”. Provide suitableknee brace on conduit stub-up.

6. Where equipment is fed from overhead, support conduit feeder descending from ceiling onflanged floor fitting with conduit type fitting connecting to motor. Make connection perDivision 26 Section “Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems”.

7. Where nameplate on equipment indicates fuse protection the disconnecting means shall beequipped with the appropriate size and class of dual element fuses.

3.2 ELECTRICAL/MECHANICAL COORDINATION

A. Furnish electrical services to Divisions 21, 22, and 23 equipment as outlined below.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, all mechanical equipment motors and controls shall be furnished, set

in place, and wired By the Divisions 21, 22, or 23 Contractor. Contractor should note that theintent of this wiring schedule is to have the Divisions 21, 22, and 23 Contractor responsible forcoordinating all control wiring as outlined, whether or not specifically called for by the mechanical,

plumbing, or electrical drawings and specifications. Comply with the applicable requirements ofDivisions 21, 22, and 23 for electrical work which is not otherwise specified. No extras will beallowed for Contractor's failure to provide for these required items. The Division 26 Contractor

shall refer to the Division 21, 22, and 23 specifications and plans for power wiring requirementsand shall advise the Architect of any discrepancies prior to bidding.

Item Furnished By Set By

PowerWiring

ControlWiring

Equipment Motors MC MC EC MC

Motor Starters and OverloadHeaters (See Note 1)

MC/PC EC EC MC/PC

Fused & Unfused Disconnect

Switches, Thermal OverloadHeaters(if not integral to equipment) (See

Note 5)

EC EC EC ---

Manual Operating & Speed

Switches Carrying Load Currents(See Notes 3 & 4)

MC MC EC MC

Control Relays & Transformers (SeeNote 2)

MC/PC MC/PC MC/PC MC/PC

Thermostats (Line Voltage) including

AquastatsMC/PC MC/PC MC/PC MC/PC

Temperature Control Panels

(See Note7 )MC MC MC or EC MC


Motor & Solenoid Valves, Damper

Motors, PE & EP Switches, ControlValves, Fan Interlocking Wiring,Low Voltage Thermostats

MC MC --- MC

Freeze Protection Heat Trace onPiping

MC/PC MC/PC EC MC/PC

Fire alarm duct detectors (see Note 6) EC MC --- EC

Fire Sprinkler System Alarms,Tamper Switches, Flow Switchesand Fire Alarm Systems Tie-ins to

provide a complete Fire ProtectionSystem

FPC FPC --- EC

Temporary Heating Connections MC MC MC MC

FPC = Fire Protection Contractor under Division 21 of the WorkPC = Plumbing Contractor under Division 22 of the Work

MC = Mechanical Contractor Under Division 23 of the WorkEC = Electrical Contractor Under Division 26 of the Work

Notes for the Electrical/Mechanical Coordination Schedule

1. All starters, other than those noted on the Drawings shall be furnished under Divisions 22and 23. All starters furnished under Division 22 or 23 shall be complete with three

overload heaters and shall conform to NEC and NEMA requirements. All starters shallhave 65,000 AIC rating.

2. Control relays and control transformers shall be furnished under Divisions 22 or 23

except where furnishing such items are specifically required under Division 26specifications and/or drawings.

3. Switches carrying full load current are to be wired under Division 26 of the work.

4. Exhaust Fans: The Electrical Contractor under Division 26 of the work shall furnish and

install circuits, feeders and disconnect switches, and make all connections to motors andcontrols unless they are interlocked with other mechanical equipment. Where exhaust

fans are switched with lights, a two-pole toggle switch shall be provided under Division26. Where exhaust fans are interlocked with other mechanical equipment, the interlockwiring will be furnished by the Mechanical Contractor under Division 23.

5. In addition to disconnect switches required elsewhere in the documents, the ElectricalContractor shall provide disconnects at all equipment that is not in a line of sight from thestarter disconnect.

6. Electrical Contractor provides control wiring from the detector to fire alarm control paneland from fire alarm control panel to mechanical unit.

7. Electrical Contractor shall provide power to the main control panel (see the drawings).

Mechanical Contractor shall provide power to all remote panels from spare circuitbreakers in electrical panels.

C. All temperature control/building automation system conduit and wiring and all motorized damper

equipment, including all line and low voltage power wiring and connections, shall be furnishedand installed under Division 23.

END OF SECTION

Building Addition & Renovations for Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and CablesThe Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 260519 - 1

SECTION 26 05 19LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less.2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.

1.2 SUBMITTALS






PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70.

B. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for Types THHN-THWN.

C. Multiconductor Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for metal-clad cable, Type MC with ground wire.

2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering productsthat may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.2. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc.3. O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC.4. 3M; Electrical Products Division.5. Tyco Electronics Corp.

B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, andclass for application and service indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS

A. Feeders: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.


3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRINGMETHODS

A. Service Entrance: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

B. Feeders: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

C. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors inraceway.

D. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Metal-clad cable, Type MC shall onlybe used where indicated on the drawings.

E. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

F. Class 1 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.

G. Class 2 Control Circuits: Power-limited cable, concealed in building finishes.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used mustnot deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximumpulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

C. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will notdamage cables or raceway.

D. Install cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of structural members, and follow surfacecontours where possible.

E. Support cables according to Division 26 Sections "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

F. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 26 Section "Identification forElectrical Systems."

G. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tighteningvalues. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL486B.

H. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent orbetter mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.

I. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches of slack.

3.4 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restoreoriginal fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Division 07 Section "PenetrationFirestopping."





1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, testservice entrance and feeder conductors for compliance with requirements.

2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETAAcceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

C. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:

1. Test procedures used.2. Test results that comply with requirements.3. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve

compliance with requirements.

D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

END OF SECTION

Building Addition & Renovations for Grounding & Bonding for Electrical SystemsThe Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 260526 - 1

SECTION 26 05 26GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Grounding systems and equipment.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Field quality-control reports.



B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS

A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required byapplicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Bare Copper Conductors:

1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3.2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33.4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter.5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor.6. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8

inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.7. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper

ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.

2.2 CONNECTORS

A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications inwhich used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other itemsconnected.

B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, pressure type with at leasttwo bolts.

1. Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe.

C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer formaterials being joined and installation conditions.

2.3 GROUNDING ELECTRODES


A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel; 3/4 inch by 10 feet in diameter.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATIONS

A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 6AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated.

B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare copper conductor, No. 2/0 AWG minimum. Buryat least 24 inches below grade.

C. Conductor Terminations and Connections:

1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors.2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors and as otherwise indicated.3. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.

3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to thoserequired by NFPA 70:

1. Feeders and branch circuits.2. Lighting circuits.3. Receptacle circuits.4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.5. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.6. Flexible raceway runs.7. Metal-clad cable runs.8. Busway Supply Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor from grounding bus

in the switchgear, switchboard, or distribution panel to equipment grounding bar terminal onbusway.

9. Computer and Rack-Mounted Electronic Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipmentgrounding conductor in branch-circuit runs from equipment-area power panels and power-distribution units.

B. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct-mountedelectrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, dampers,humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct andconnected metallic piping.

C. Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install a separate insulated equipmentgrounding conductor to each electric water heater and heat-tracing cable. Bond conductor to heaterunits, piping, connected equipment, and components.

D. Signal and Communication Equipment: In addition to grounding and bonding required by NFPA 70,provide a separate grounding system complying with requirements in TIA/ATIS J-STD607-A.

1. For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other communication equipment, provide No. 4AWG minimum insulated grounding conductor in raceway from grounding electrode systemto each service location, terminal cabinet, wiring closet, and central equipment location.

2. Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets: Terminate groundingconductor on a grounding bus.

3. Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding terminal.

3.3 INSTALLATION


A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwiseindicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may besubjected to strain, impact, or damage.

B. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches below finished floor or final grade unless otherwiseindicated.

1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as otherwiseindicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating if any.

2. For grounding electrode system, install at least three rods spaced at least one-rod lengthfrom each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes, andconnect to the service grounding electrode conductor.

C. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance exceptwhere routed through short lengths of conduit.

1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate anyadjacent parts.

2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install bondingso vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.

3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect-type connection isrequired, use a bolted clamp.

D. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:

1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, frombuilding's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrancesto building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes; use a boltedclamp connector or bolt a lug-type connector to a pipe flange using one of the lug bolts of theflange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor onstreet side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at eachend.

2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters.Connect to pipe with a bolted connector.

3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoffvalve.

E. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors ofassociated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install bonding jumper to bond acrossflexible duct connections to achieve continuity.

3.4 LABELING

A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems" Article forinstruction signs. The label or its text shall be green.

B. Install labels at the telecommunications bonding conductor and grounding equalizer and at thegrounding electrode conductor where exposed.

1. Label Text: "If this connector or cable is loose or if it must be removed for any reason, notifythe facility manager."


A. Perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been


energized, test for compliance with requirements.2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted, electrical

connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written instructions.3. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance

level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, and at ground testwells. Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are connected.

B. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values:

1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 kVA and Less: 10 ohms.2. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 to 1000 kVA: 5 ohms.3. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity More Than 1000 kVA: 3 ohms.4. Power Distribution Units or Panelboards Serving Electronic Equipment: 1 ohm(s).

C. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architectpromptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.

END OF SECTION

Building Addition & Renovations for Hangers & Supports for Electrical SystemsThe Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 260529 - 1

SECTION 26 05 29HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.


A. Delegated Design: Design supports for multiple raceways, including comprehensive engineeringanalysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteriaindicated.

B. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supportedsystems and its contents.

C. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supportedequipment and connected systems and components.

D. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads calculatedor imposed for this Project.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For steel slotted support systems.

B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Show fabrication andinstallation details and include calculations for the following:

1. Trapeze hangers. Include Product Data for components.2. Steel slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components.3. Equipment supports.

C. Welding certificates.


A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural WeldingCode - Steel."


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for fieldassembly.

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offeringproducts that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:a. Allied Tube & Conduit.b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.


c. ERICO International Corporation.d. GS Metals Corp.e. Thomas & Betts Corporation.f. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd.g. Wesanco, Inc.

2. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4.3. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.

B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.

C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed fortypes and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.

D. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threadedbody and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in riserconduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suitindividual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.

E. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes,and bars; black and galvanized.

F. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or theirsupports to building surfaces include the following:

1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cementconcrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate forsupported loads and building materials where used.

a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturersoffering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limitedto, the following:1) Hilti Inc.2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc.3) MKT Fastening, LLC.4) Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit.

2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in hardenedportland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate forsupported loads and building materials in which used.

a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturersoffering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limitedto, the following:1) Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc.3) Hilti Inc.4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc.5) MKT Fastening, LLC.

3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSSType 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.

4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attachedstructural element.

5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325.6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.

2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES

A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions ofsupported equipment.


B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel shapesand plates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electricalequipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.

B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT,IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter.

C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted supportsystem, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceedingspecified design load limits.

1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with single-bolt conduit clamps using springfriction action for retention in support channel.

3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article.

B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and RMCmay be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70.

C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength willbe adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum staticdesign load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb.

D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fastenelectrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unlessotherwise indicated by code:

1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor

fasteners on solid masonry units.4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock

washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches thick orgreater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4inches thick.

6. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69.7. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,

panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers,and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate by means that meetseismic-restraint strength and anchorage requirements.

E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS

A. Comply with installation requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for site-fabricated


metal supports.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation tosupport and anchor electrical materials and equipment.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

3.4 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for cleaning and touchuppainting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneousmetal.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

END OF SECTION

Building Addition & Renovations for Raceway and Boxes for Electrical SystemsThe Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 260533 - 1

SECTION 26 05 33RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures,and cabinets.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING

A. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.

B. IMC: ANSI C80.6.

C. EMT: ANSI C80.3.

D. FMC: Zinc-coated steel.

E. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket.

F. Fittings for Conduit (Including all Types and Flexible and Liquidtight), EMT, and Cable: NEMA FB1; listed for type and size raceway with which used, and for application and environment in whichinstalled.

1. Fittings for EMT: Steel, compression type.

2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING

A. ENT: NEMA TC 13.

B. RNC: NEMA TC 2, Type EPC-40-PVC, unless otherwise indicated.

C. LFNC: UL 1660.

D. Fittings for ENT and RNC: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.

E. Fittings for LFNC: UL 514B.

2.3 METAL WIREWAYS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering


products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Cooper B-Line, Inc.2. Hoffman.3. Square D; Schneider Electric.

B. Description: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA 250, Type 1, unless otherwiseindicated.

C. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-downstraps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for completesystem.

D. Wireway Covers: Screw-cover type.

E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.

2.4 SURFACE RACEWAYS

A. Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers. Manufacturer's standard enamelfinish in color selected by Architect.

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offeringproducts that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:a. Thomas & Betts Corporation.b. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The).c. Wiremold Company (The); Electrical Sales Division.

B. Surface Nonmetallic Raceways: Two-piece construction, manufactured of rigid PVC with textureand color selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offeringproducts that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:a. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems Division.b. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.c. Panduit Corp.d. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The).e. Wiremold Company (The); Electrical Sales Division.

2.5 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS

A. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

B. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with gasketed cover.

C. Metal Floor Boxes: 10” by 12” by 6” deep floor boxes. Each floor box shall be provided with acover and the number and type of device panels needed to install the indicated devices. Cover forfloor boxes shall be provided with flooring insert area for carpet or tile cutouts to match the finishedfloor, unless noted otherwise. Material and finish of cover shall be selected by Architect. Floor boxesshall meet or exceed UL water exclusion test. Number and type of devices are as indicated asfollows:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide FSR MetalProducts Group Part # FL-500P-6 or comparable product by one of the following:a. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems Division.b. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The).c. Wiremold Company (The); Electrical Sales Division

2. Number and type of devices for each type floor box are as follows:


a. Type 1: Two duplex receptacles and two data outlets.b. Type 2: One duplex receptacle, two voice outlets and two data outlets.c. Type 3: Three duplex receptacles and three data outlets.

D. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

E. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, cast aluminum with gasketed cover.

F. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch, unlessotherwise indicated.

1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

G. Cabinets:

1. NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable front,finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge.3. Key latch to match panelboards.4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage.5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.

2.6 FITNESS AREA METAL WIREWAYS (CARDIO CURB)

A. Manufacturers:

1. J.W. Hodson Co., Inc.2. Penn Panel & Box

B. Material and Construction: 0.080 aluminum sized and shaped as necessary. See details on

drawings for additional information.

C. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, custom elbows, expansion joints, adapters,

welded end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete

system.

D. Openings/grommets: As indicated on drawings. Provide openings with protective

bushings/padding to prevent damage to wires and cords.

E. Wireway Covers: Hinged type – heavy-duty hinges. Secure latching on vertically mounted

wireway – see drawings.

F. Finish: Brushed finish.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed Conduit: Rigid steel conduit.2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: Rigid steel conduit.3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, direct buried.4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC.5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R.


B. Comply with the following indoor applications, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT.2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT.3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: IMC. Includes raceways in the following

locations:a. Mechanical rooms.

4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT.5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wetlocations.

6. Damp or Wet Locations: IMC.7. Raceways for Optical Fiber or Communications Cable: EMT.8. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4, stainless steel

in damp or wet locations.

C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size.

D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.

1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unlessotherwise indicated.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements applicable to products specified in Part 2 exceptwhere requirements on Drawings or in this Article are stricter.

B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes.Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.

D. Support raceways as specified in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for ElectricalSystems."

E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab.

F. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except forcommunications conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed.

G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.

H. Raceways shall not be embedded in slabs.

I. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings toprotect conductors, including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.

J. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not lessthan 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire.

K. Raceways for Optical Fiber and Communications Cable: Install as follows:

1. 3/4-Inch Trade Size and Smaller: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 50 feet.2. 1-Inch Trade Size and Larger: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 75 feet.3. Install with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent for each length of raceway

unless Drawings show stricter requirements. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes orterminations at distribution frames or cabinets where necessary to comply with these


requirements.

L. Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill them withlisted sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with ablank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install racewaysealing fittings where required by NFPA 70.

M. Expansion-Joint Fittings for RNC: Install in each run of aboveground conduit that is located whereenvironmental temperature change may exceed 30 deg F, and that has straight-run length thatexceeds 25 feet.

1. Install expansion-joint fittings for each of the following locations, and provide type andquantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for location:a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F temperature change.b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F temperature change.c. Indoor Spaces: Connected with the Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F

temperature change.2. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of

length of straight run per deg F of temperature change.3. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected

according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at the timeof installation.

N. Flexible Conduit Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for equipment subjectto vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors.

1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations.

O. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block,and install box flush with surface of wall.

P. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT

A. Direct-Buried Conduit:

1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trenchbottom as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for pipe less than 6 inches innominal diameter.

2. Install backfill as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end of

conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction astemperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit toprovide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches offinished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling withnormal compaction as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."

4. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and atbuilding entrances through the floor.a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase

coupling with 3 inches of concrete.b. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases, extend steel conduit

horizontally a minimum of 60 inches from edge of equipment pad or foundation. Installinsulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.

3.4 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original


fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements arespecified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets arewithout damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.2. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by

manufacturer.

3.6 CLEANING

A. After completing installation of exposed, factory-finished raceways and boxes, inspect exposed

finishes and repair damaged finishes.

END OF SECTION

Building Addition & Renovations for Cable Trays for Electrical SystemsThe Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 260536 - 1

SECTION 26 05 36CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes aluminum cable trays and accessories.

B. See Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for firestopping materials andinstallation at penetrations through walls, ceilings, and other fire-rated elements.

C. See Division 26 Section "Basic Electrical Requirements" for cable tray supports not specified inthis Section.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include data indicating dimensions and finishes for each type of cable tray indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: For each type of cable tray. Show fabrication and installation details of cable tray,including plans, elevations, and sections of components and attachments to other constructionelements. Designate components and accessories, including clamps, brackets, hanger rods,splice-plate connectors, expansion-joint assemblies, straight lengths, and fittings.

C. Field quality-control test reports.

D. Operation and maintenance data.



B. Comply with NEMA VE 1, "Metal Cable Tray Systems," if cable tray types specified are defined inthe standard.

C. Comply with NFPA 70.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. B-Line Systems, Inc.2. GS Metals Corp.3. Mono-Systems, Inc.4. MPHusky.5. TJ Cope.

2.2 MATERIALS AND FINISHES

A. Fabricate cable tray products with rounded edges and smooth surfaces.

2.3 CABLE TRAY ACCESSORIES


A. Fittings: Tees, crosses, risers, elbows, and other fittings as indicated, of same materials andfinishes as cable tray.

B. Barrier Strips: Same materials and finishes as cable tray.

C. Cable tray supports and connectors, including bonding jumpers, as recommended by cable traymanufacturer.

D. Warning Sign Lettering: 1-1/2-inch- (40-mm-) high, black letters on yellow background with legend"WARNING! NOT TO BE USED AS WALKWAY, LADDER, OR SUPPORT FOR LADDERS ORPERSONNEL."

1. Materials and fastening are specified in Division 26 Section "Basic Electrical Materials andMethods."


A. Perform design and production tests according to NEMA VE 1.

2.5 CABLE TRAY SCHEDULE

A. Run Designation

1. Type: Ladder2. Material and Finish: Aluminum3. Width: 12”4. Cross Rung Spacing: 6”5. Minimum Fitting Radius: 12”6. Load Depth 3”7. Cover Type: None8. NEMA Load/Span Class 8B

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 CABLE TRAY INSTALLATION

A. Remove burrs and sharp edges from cable trays.

B. Fasten cable tray supports securely to building structure as specified in Division 26 Section "BasicElectrical Materials and Methods," unless otherwise indicated.

1. Locate and install supports according to NEMA VE 1.

C. Make changes in direction and elevation using standard fittings.

D. Make cable tray connections using standard fittings.

E. Locate cable tray above piping unless accessibility to cable tray is required or unless otherwiseindicated.

F. Seal penetrations through fire and smoke barriers according to Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."

G. Workspace: Install cable trays with sufficient space to permit access for installing cables.

H. After installation of cable trays is completed, install warning signs in visible locations on or near bletrays.


I. Ground cable trays according to manufacturer's written instructions.


A. Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing:

1. After installing cable trays and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test forcompliance with requirements.

2. Perform the following electrical test and visual and mechanical inspections:a. Visually inspect each cable tray joint and each ground connection for mechanical

continuity.b. Measure ground resistance of each system of cable tray from the most remote

element to the point where connection is made to service disconnect enclosure groun-ding terminal. Record resistance in ohms.

3. Report results in writing.

3.3 CABLE INSTALLATION

A. Install cables only when cable tray installation has been completed and inspected.

B. Fasten cables on horizontal runs with cable clamps or cable ties as recommended by NEMA VE2. Tighten clamps only enough to secure the cable, without indenting the cable jacket. Installcable ties with a tool that includes an automatic pressure-limiting device.

C. On vertical runs, fasten cables to tray every 18 inches. Install intermediate supports when cable

weight exceeds the load-carrying capacity of the tray rungs.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground cable trays according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Install an insulated equipment grounding conductor with cable tray, in addition to those required

by NFPA 70.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed cable trays.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by cable traymanufacturer.

2. Install temporary protection for cables in open trays to protect exposed cables from falling

objects or debris during construction. Temporary protection for cables and cable tray can

be constructed of wood or metal materials until the risk of damage is over.

END OF SECTION

Building Addition & Renovations for Identification for Electrical SystemsThe Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 260553 - 1

SECTION 26 05 53IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Identification for raceways.2. Identification of power and control cables.3. Identification for conductors.4. Underground-line warning tape.5. Warning labels and signs.6. Instruction signs.7. Equipment identification labels.8. Miscellaneous identification products.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.


A. Comply with ANSI A13.1.


C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.

E. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks usedby label printers, shall comply with UL 969.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 POWER RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of colorfield for each raceway size.

B. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at More Than 600 V:

1. Black letters on an orange field.2. Legend: “DANGER CONCEALED HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING” with 3-inch high letters on 20-

inch centers.

C. Tape and Stencil for Raceways Carrying Circuits More Than 600V: 4-inch wide black stripes on10-inch centers diagonally over orange background that extends full length of raceway or duct andis 12-inches wide. Stop stripes at legends.

2.2 POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of colorfield for each raceway and cable size.

B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and


chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legendlabel.

2.3 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1 to 2inches wide.

B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- andchemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legendlabel.

C. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification legendmachine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.

2.4 FLOOR MARKING TAPE

A. 2-inch-wide, 5-mil pressure-sensitive vinyl tape, with black and white stripes and clear vinyl overlay.

2.5 UNDERGROUND-LINE WARNING TAPE

A. Tape:

1. Recommended by manufacturer for the method of installation and suitable to identify andlocate underground electrical and communications utility lines.

2. Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by burial operations.3. Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert, and not subject to degrading when exposed

to acids, alkalis, and other destructive substances commonly found in soils.

B. Color and Printing:

1. Comply with ANSI Z535.1 through ANSI Z535.5.2. Inscriptions for Red-Colored Tapes: ELECTRIC LINE, HIGH VOLTAGE.3. Inscriptions for Orange-Colored Tapes: TELEPHONE CABLE, CATV CABLE,

COMMUNICATIONS CABLE, OPTICAL FIBER CABLE.

C. Type:

1. Detectable three-layer laminate, consisting of a printed pigmented polyolefin film, a solidaluminum-foil core, and a clear protective film that allows inspection of the continuity of theconductive core, bright-colored, continuous-printed on one side with the inscription of theutility, compounded for direct-burial service.

2. Overall Thickness: 5 mils.3. Foil Core Thickness: 0.35 mil.4. Weight: 28 lb/1000 sq. ft.5. 3-Inch Tensile According to ASTM D 882: 70 lbf, and 4600 psi.

2.6 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS

A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory-printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels,configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment unless otherwiseindicated.

C. Metal-Backed, Butyrate Warning Signs:

1. Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate signs with 0.0396-inchgalvanized-steel backing; and with colors, legend, and size required for application.


2. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting.3. Nominal size, 10 by 14 inches.

D. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:

1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD -EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."

2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OFELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES."

2.7 INSTRUCTION SIGNS

A. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch thick for signs up to 20 sq.inches and 1/8 inch thick for larger sizes.

1. Engraved legend with black letters on white face.2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners.3. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable equipment.

B. Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process.Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.

C. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transferor equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. Overlay shall provide aweatherproof and UV-resistant seal for label.

2.8 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS

A. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer orequivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. Overlay shall provide a weatherproofand UV-resistant seal for label.

B. Self-Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed, with white letterson a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.

2.9 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Paint: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for paint materials and applicationrequirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or interior).

B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machinescrews with nuts and flat and lock washers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing withoutinterference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

B. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.

C. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials andmethods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.

D. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fastenersappropriate to the location and substrate.


E. Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous underground-linewarning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. Use multiple tapes wherewidth of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope exceeds 16 inchesoverall.

F. Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for surfacepreparation and paint application.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE

A. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and junctionboxes, manholes, and handholes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase.

1. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listedbelow for ungrounded service, feeder and branch-circuit conductors.

a. Color shall be factory applied or field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG, ifauthorities having jurisdiction permit.

b. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:

1) Phase A: Black.2) Phase B: Red.3) Phase C: Blue.

c. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for aminimum distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or tapsare made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding.Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.

B. Install instructional sign including the color-code for grounded and ungrounded conductors usingadhesive-film-type labels.

C. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach marker tape to conductors and list source.

D. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, andsignal connections.

1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pullpoints. Identify by system and circuit designation.

2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used bymanufacturer for factory-installed connections.

3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and theOperation and Maintenance Manual.

E. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for power, lighting,communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable.

1. Install underground-line warning tape for both direct-buried cables and cables in raceway.

F. Workspace Indication: Install floor marking tape to show working clearances in the direction ofaccess to live parts. Workspace shall be as required by NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1926.403 unlessotherwise indicated. Do not install at flush-mounted panelboards and similar equipment in finishedspaces.

G. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Self-adhesivewarning labels.

1. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145.2. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background.


3. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access.4. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of equipment

including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Power transfer switches.b. Controls with external control power connections.

H. Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenanceof electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with approved legendwhere instructions are needed for system or equipment operation.

I. Emergency Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs with white legend on a redbackground with minimum 3/8-inch- high letters for emergency instructions at equipment used forpower transfer.

J. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that isconsistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Applylabels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels,control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting,control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided withits own identification.

1. Labeling Instructions:

a. Indoor Equipment: Self-adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label.Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- high letters on1-1/2-inch-high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high.

b. Outdoor Equipment: Adhesive film label with clear protective overlay.c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for

viewing from the floor.d. Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with

appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of theenclosure.

END OF SECTION

Building Addition & Renovations for Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination StudyThe Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 260573 - 1

SECTION 26 05 73OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes computer-based, fault-current and overcurrent protective device coordinationstudies, and the setting of these devices. Protective devices shall be field set based on the resultsof this study.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For computer software program to be used for studies.

B. Product Certificates: For coordination-study and fault-current-study computer software programs,certifying compliance with IEEE 399.

C. Qualification Data: For coordination-study specialist.

D. Other Action Submittals:

1. Coordination-study input data, including completed computer program input data sheets.2. Coordination-study report.3. Equipment evaluation report.4. Setting report.


A. Studies shall use computer programs that are distributed nationally and are in wide use. Softwarealgorithms shall comply with requirements of standards and guides specified in this Section.Manual calculations are not acceptable.

B. Coordination-Study Specialist Qualifications: An organization experienced in the application ofcomputer software used for studies, having performed successful studies of similar magnitude onelectrical distribution systems using similar devices.

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of the InterNational Electrical TestingAssociation.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational ElectricalTesting Association to supervise testing specified in Part 3.

D. Comply with IEEE 399 for general study procedures.

E. Comply with IEEE 242 for short-circuit currents and coordination time intervals.

F. Comply with IEEE 1585 Guide for performing Arc-Flash Hazard Calculations.

G. Study shall be performed/reviewed and stamped by a professional engineer registered in the Stateof Pennsylvania. All elements of the study shall be performed under the direct supervision ofcontrol of the professional engineer.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COMPUTER SOFTWARE DEVELOPERS

A. Available Computer Software Developers: Subject to compliance with requirements, companiesoffering computer software programs that may be used in the Work include, but are not limited to,the following:

1. CYME International, Inc.2. EDSA Micro Corporation.3. Electrical Systems Analysis, Inc.4. SKM Systems Analysis, Inc.

2.2 COMPUTER SOFTWARE PROGRAM REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with IEEE 399.

B. Analytical features of fault-current-study computer software program shall include "mandatory,""very desirable," and "desirable" features as listed in IEEE 399, Table 7-4.

C. Computer software program shall be capable of plotting and diagramming time-current-characteristic curves as part of its output. Computer software program shall report device settingsand ratings of all overcurrent protective devices and shall demonstrate selective coordination bycomputer generated, time-current coordination plots.

D. Additional Features:

1. Include Arc Flash Analysis in study.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine Project overcurrent protective device submittals for compliance with electrical distributionsystem coordination requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Devices to becoordinated are indicated on Drawings.

B. Proceed with coordination study only after relevant equipment submittals have been assembled.Overcurrent protective devices not submitted for approval with coordination study may not be usedin study.

3.2 FAULT-CURRENT STUDY

A. Source Impedance: Utility company's fault-current contribution as indicated.

B. Study electrical distribution system from normal and alternate power sources throughout electricaldistribution system for Project and use approved computer software program to calculate values.Include studies of system-switching configurations and alternate operations that could result inmaximum fault conditions.

C. Calculate momentary and interrupting duties on the basis of maximum available fault current.

D. Calculations to verify interrupting ratings of overcurrent protective devices shall comply with thefollowing:

1. Low-Voltage Circuit Breakers: IEEE 1015 and IEEE C37.50.2. Low-Voltage Fuses: IEEE C37.46.

3. Circuit Breakers: IEEE C37.13.


E. Study Report: Enter calculated X/R ratios and interrupting (5-cycle) fault currents on electricaldistribution system diagram of the report. List other output values from computer analysis, includingmomentary (1/2-cycle), interrupting (5-cycle), and 30-cycle fault-current values for 3- phase, 2-phase, and phase-to-ground faults.

F. Equipment Evaluation Report: Prepare a report on the adequacy of overcurrent protective devicesand conductors by comparing fault-current ratings of these devices with calculated fault-currentmomentary and interrupting duties.

3.3 COORDINATION STUDY

A. Gather and tabulate the following input data to support coordination study:

1. Product Data for overcurrent protective devices specified in other Division 26 Sections andinvolved in overcurrent protective device coordination studies. Use equipment designationtags that are consistent with electrical distribution system diagrams, overcurrent protectivedevice submittals, input and output data, and recommended device settings.

2. Impedance of utility service entrance.3. Electrical distribution system diagram showing the following:

a. Load current that is the basis for sizing continuous ratings of circuits for cables andequipment.

b. Circuit-breaker and fuse-current ratings and types.c. Relays and associated power and current transformer ratings and ratios.d. Transformer kilovolt amperes, primary and secondary voltages, connection type,

impedance, and X/R ratios.e. Generator kilovolt amperes, size, voltage, and source impedance.f. Cables. Indicate conduit material, sizes of conductors, conductor insulation, and

length.g. Motor horsepower and code letter designation according to NEMA MG 1.

4. Data sheets to supplement electrical distribution system diagram, cross-referenced with tagnumbers on diagram:a. Special load considerations, including starting inrush currents and frequent starting

and stopping.b. Magnetic inrush current overload capabilities of transformers.c. Motor full-load current, locked rotor current, service factor, starting time, type of start,

and thermal-damage curve.d. Ratings, types, and settings of utility company's overcurrent protective devices.e. Special overcurrent protective device settings or types stipulated by utility company.f. Time-current-characteristic curves of devices indicated to be coordinated.g. Manufacturer, frame size, interrupting rating in amperes rms symmetrical, ampere or

current sensor rating, long-time adjustment range, short-time adjustment range, andinstantaneous adjustment range for circuit breakers.

h. Manufacturer and type, ampere-tap adjustment range, time-delay adjustment range,instantaneous attachment adjustment range, and current transformer ratio forovercurrent relays.

i. Panelboards, switchboards, motor-control center ampacity, and interrupting rating inamperes rms symmetrical.

B. Perform coordination study and prepare a written report using the results of fault-currentstudy and approved computer software program. Comply with IEEE 399.

C. Comply with NFPA 70 for overcurrent protection of circuit elements and devices.

D. Comply with IEEE 141 recommendations for fault currents and time intervals.

E. Transformer Primary Overcurrent Protective Devices:

1. Device shall not operate in response to the following:a. Self-cooled, full-load current or forced-air-cooled, full-load current, whichever is


specified for that transformer.b. Permissible transformer overloads according to IEEE C57.96 if required by unusual

loading or emergency conditions.

2. Device shall protect transformer according to IEEE C57.12.00, for fault currents.

F. Motors served by voltages more than 600 V shall be protected according to IEEE 620.

G. Conductor Protection: Protect cables against damage from fault currents according to ICEA P-32-382, ICEA P-45-482, and conductor melting curves in IEEE 242. Verify adequacy of phaseconductors at maximum three-phase bolted fault currents, equipment grounding conductors, andgrounding electrode conductors at maximum ground-fault currents.

H. Coordination-Study Report: Prepare a written report indicating the following results of coordinationstudy:

1. Tabular Format of Settings Selected for Overcurrent Protective Devices:a. Device tag.b. Relay-current transformer ratios; and tap, time-dial, and instantaneous-pickup values.c. Circuit-breaker sensor rating; and long-time, short-time, and instantaneous settings.d. Fuse-current rating and type.e. Ground-fault relay-pickup and time-delay settings.

2. Coordination Curves: Prepared to determine settings of overcurrent protective devices toachieve selective coordination. Graphically illustrate that adequate time separation existsbetween series devices, including power utility company's upstream devices. Show thefollowing specific information:a. Device tag.b. Voltage and current ratio for curves.c. Three-phase and single-phase damage points for each transformer.d. No damage, melting, and clearing curves for fuses.e. Cable damage curves.f. Transformer inrush points.g. Maximum fault-current cutoff point.

3. Completed data sheets for setting of overcurrent protective devices.

3.4 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE SETTING

A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative, of electricaldistribution equipment being set and adjusted, to set overcurrent protective devices withinequipment.

3.5 ARC FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS

A. The arch flash hazard analysis shall be performed according to the IEEE 1584 equations that arepresented in NFPA70E-2004, Annex D.

B. The flash protection boundary and the incident energy shall be calculated at all significant locationsin the electrical distribution system (switchboards, switchgear, motor-control centers, panelboards,busway and splitters) where work could be performed on energized parts.

C. The Arc-Flash Hazard Analysis shall include all significant locations in 480 volt and 208 voltsystems fed from transformers equal to or greater than 124 kVA where work could be preformed onenergized parts.

D. Safe working distances shall be based upon the calculated arc flash boundary considering anincident energy of 1.2 cal/cm2.


E. When appropriate, the short circuit calculations and the clearing times of the phase overcurrentdevices will be retrieved from the short-circuit and coordination study model. Ground overcurrentrelays should not be taken into consideration when determining the clearing time when performingincident energy calculations.

F. The short-circuit calculations and the corresponding incident energy calculations for multiplesystem scenarios must be compared and the greatest incident energy must be uniquely reportedfor each equipment location. Calculations must be performed to represent the maximum andminimum contributions of fault current magnitude for all normal and emergency operatingconditions. The minimum calculation will assume that the utility contribution is at a minimum andwill assume a minimum motor contribution (all motors off). Conversely, the maximum calculationwill assume a maximum contribution from the utility and will assume the maximum amount ofmotors to be operating. Calculations shall take into consideration the parallel operation ofsynchronous generators with the electric utility, where applicable.

G. The incident energy calculations must consider the accumulation of energy over time whenperforming arc flash calculations on buses with multiple sources. Iterative calculations must takeinto account the changing current contributions, as the sources are interrupted or decremented withtime. Fault contribution from motors and generators should be decremented as follows:

1. Fault contribution from induction motors should not be considered beyond 3-5 cycles.2. Fault contribution from synchronous motors and generators should be decayed to match the

actual decrement of each as closely as possible (e. i. contributions from permanent magnetgenerators will typically decay from 10 per unit to 3 per unit after 10 cycles).

H. For each equipment location with a separately enclosed main device (where there is adequateseparation between the line side terminals of the main protective device and the work location),calculations for incident energy and flash protection boundary shall include both the line and loadside of the main breaker.

I. When performing incident energy calculations on the line side of a min breaker (as required perabove), the line side and load side contributions must be included in the fault calculation.

J. Mis-coordination should be checked amoungst all devices within the branch containing theimmediate protective device upstream of the calculation location and the calculation should utilizethe fastest device to compute the incident energy for the corresponding location.

K. Arc Flash calculations shall be based on actual overcurrent protective device clearing time.Maximum clearing time will be capped at 2 seconds based on IEEE 1584-2002 section B.1.2.Where it is not physically possible to move outside of the flash protection boundary in less than 2seconds during an arc flash event, a maximum clearing time based on the specific location shallbe utilized.

3.6 ARC FLASH WARNING LABELS

A. The contractor of the Arc Flash Hazard Analysis shall provide a 3.5 in. x 5 in. thermal transfer typelabel of high adhesion polyester for each work location analyzed.

B. All labels will be based on recommended overcurrent device settings and will be provided after theresults of the analysis have been presented to the owner and after any system changes, upgradesor modifications have been incorporated in the system.

C. The label shall include the following information, at a minimum:

1. Location designation2. Norminal voltage3. Flash protection boundary4. Hazard risk category5. Incident energy6. Working distance.


7. Engineering report number, revision number and issue date.

D. Labels shall be machine printed, with no field markings.

E. Arc flash labels shall be provided in the following manner and all labels shall be based onrecommended overcurrent device settings.

1. For each 208 volt panelboard, one arc flash label shall be provided.2. For each motor control center, one arc flash label shall be provided.3. For each low voltage switchboard, one arc flash label shall be provided.4. For each switchgear, one flash label shall be provided.5. For medium voltage switches one arc flash label shall be provided.

F. Labels shall be field installed by the electrical contractor.

END OF SECTION

Building Addition & Renovations for Low-Voltage SwitchgearThe Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 262300 - 1

SECTION 26 23 00

LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes metal-enclosed, low-voltage power circuit-breaker switchgear rated 1000 Vand less for use in AC systems.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ATS: Acceptance Testing Service.

B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of switchgear, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated.Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electricalcharacteristics, ratings, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each type of switchgear and related equipment.

1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including requiredclearances and service space around equipment. Include the following:

a. Tabulation of installed devices with features and ratings.b. Enclosure types and details.

c. Outline and general arrangement drawing showing dimensions, shipping sections,

and weights of each assembled section.d. Bus configuration with size and number of conductors in each bus run,

including phase, neutral, and ground conductors of main and branch buses.e. Current rating of buses.f. Short-time and short-circuit current rating of switchgear assembly.g. Nameplate legends.h. Mimic-bus diagram.i. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices and auxiliary components.

2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Samples: Representative portion of mimic bus with specified finish. Manufacturer's color charts


showing colors available for mimic bus.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For testing agency.


C. Updated mimic-bus diagram reflecting field changes after final switchgear load connections havebeen made, for record.

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For switchgear and components to include in emergency,

operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation

and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices.

2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective

device.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability toconduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical TestingAssociation or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational ElectricalTesting Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies tosupervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked forintended use.



A. Deliver switchgear in sections of lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery path.

B. Store switchgear indoors in clean dry space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation.Protect switchgear from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive substances, and physicaldamage.



A. Installation Pathway: Remove and replace building components and structures to provide pathwayfor moving switchgear into place.

B. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to the facility, except aspermitted under the following conditions:

1. Notify Construction Manager and the Owner no fewer than seven days in advance ofproposed interruption of electric service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Owner’s written permission.

1.10 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of switchgear and components with other construction thatpenetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacentsurfaces. Maintain required clearances for workspace and equipment access doors and panels.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Cutler-Hammer, Inc.; Eaton Corporation.2. General Electric Company.3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.4. Square D; Schneider Electric.

2.2 RATINGS

A. Nominal System Voltage: See one-line diagram

B. Main-Bus Continuous: See one-line diagram

C. Short-Time and Short-Circuit Current: As required to withstand the fault current determined by the

Power Study required be specification section 260505.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Factory assembled and tested and complying with IEEE C37.20.1.

B. Indoor Enclosure Material: Steel.

C. Finish: IEEE C37.20.1, manufacturer’s standard gray finish over a rust-inhibiting primer on

phosphatizing-treated metal surfaces.

D. Provide vertical barrier between adjacent upright sections to prevent arc event from traveling

through the rear of the lineup.


E. Bus isolation barriers shall be arranged to isolate line bus from load bus at main circuit breaker.

F. Where indicated, circuit-breaker compartments shall be equipped to house drawout- type circuit

breakers and shall be fitted with hinged outer doors.

G. Fabricate enclosure with removable, hinged, rear cover panels to allow access to rear interior ofswitchgear.

H. Auxiliary Compartments: Match and align with basic switchgear assembly. Include the following,as necessary:

1. Bus transition sections.2. Incoming-line pull sections.3. Hinged front panels for access to metering, accessory, and blank compartments.

I. Bus bars shall connect between vertical sections and between compartments. Cable connectionsare not permitted.

1. Main Phase Bus: Uniform capacity the entire length of assembly.

2. Neutral Bus: 100 percent of phase-bus ampacity. Equip bus with pressure- connector

terminations for outgoing circuit neutral conductors.

3. Vertical Section Bus Size: 100 percent of phase-bus ampacity. Comply with IEEE

C37.20.1, including allowance for spare circuit breakers and spaces for future circuit

breakers.4. Phase- and Neutral-Bus Material: Hard-drawn copper of 98 percent minimum conductivity,

with copper feeder circuit-breaker line connections.

5. Use copper for connecting circuit-breaker line to copper bus.6. Ground Bus: Hard-drawn copper of 98 percent minimum conductivity, with pressure

connector for feeder and branch-circuit ground conductors.7. Supports and Bracing for Buses: Adequate strength for indicated short-circuit currents.8. Neutral bus equipped with pressure-connector terminations for outgoing circuit neutral

conductors.9. Provide for future extensions from either end of main phase, neutral, and ground bus by

means of predrilled bolt-holes and connecting links.

10. Bus-Bar Insulation: Individual bus bars wrapped with factory-applied, flame- retardant tape

or spray-applied, flame-retardant insulation.

a. Sprayed Insulation Thickness: 3 mils minimum.

b. Bolted Bus Joints: Insulate with secure joint covers that can easily be removed and

reinstalled.

2.4 COMPONENTS

A. Owner Metering Equipment: Switchboard shall be equipped with all provisions for a digital meterwithin isolated compartment integral to the switchboard. Compartment shall include CT’s on ashorting block and voltage connection brought to a fuse block with disconnect (mount CT’s andvoltage connection ahead of the main). Utility company will install service metering. Compartmentshall accept a Square D circuit monitor style meter. Provide data connection, from the meterlocation to the main telecommunications room.


B. Provision for Future Devices: Equip compartments with rails, mounting brackets, supports,

necessary appurtenances, and bus connections.

C. Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for switchgear interior, including instruments andinstrument transformers.

2.5 CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. Description: Comply with IEEE C37.13.

B. Ratings: As required for continuous, interrupting, and short-time current ratings for each circuit

breaker.

C. Operating Mechanism: Mechanically and electrically trip-free, stored-energy operating mechanism

with the following features:

1. Normal Closing Speed: Independent of both control and operator.2. Slow Closing Speed: Optional with operator for inspection and adjustment.

3. Stored-Energy Mechanism: Manually charged.4. Operation counter.

D. Trip Devices: Solid-state, overcurrent trip-device system consisting of one or two currenttransformers or sensors per phase, a release mechanism, and the following features:

1. Functions: Long-time-delay, short-time-delay, and instantaneous-trip functions,independent of each other in both action and adjustment.

2. Temperature Compensation: Ensures accuracy and calibration stability from minus 5 to plus

40 deg C.3. Field-adjustable, time-current characteristics.

4. Current Adjustability: Dial settings and rating plugs on trip units or sensors on circuit

breakers, or a combination of these methods.

5. Three bands, minimum, for long-time- and short-time-delay functions; marked "minimum,"

"intermediate," and "maximum."6. Pickup Points: Five minimum, for long-time- and short-time-trip functions. Equip short-time-

trip function for switchable I2t operation.7. Pickup Points: Five minimum, for instantaneous-trip functions.8. Ground-fault protection with at least three short-time-delay settings and three trip-time-delay

bands; adjustable current pickup. Arrange to provide protection for the following:

a. Four-wire circuit or system.

9. Trip Indication: Labeled, battery-powered lights or mechanical targets on trip device toindicate type of fault.

E. Drawout Features: Circuit-breaker mounting assembly equipped with a racking mechanism toposition circuit breaker and hold it rigidly in connected, test, and disconnected positions. Includethe following features:

1. Interlocks: Prevent movement of circuit breaker to or from connected position when it isclosed, and prevent closure of circuit breaker unless it is in connected, test, or disconnected


position.2. Circuit-Breaker Positioning: An open circuit breaker may be racked to or from connected,

test, and disconnected positions only with the associated compartment door closed unlesslive parts are covered by a full dead-front shield. An open circuit breaker may be manuallywithdrawn to a position for removal from the structure with the door open. Status forconnection devices for different positions includes the following:

a. Test Position: Primary disconnect devices disengaged, and secondary disconnect

devices and ground contact engaged.

b. Disconnected Position: Primary and secondary devices and ground contact

disengaged.

3. Overhead-circuit-breaker lifting device, track mounted, at top front of the gear.

F. Arc Chutes: Readily removable from associated circuit breaker when it is in disconnected position,and arranged to permit inspection of contacts without removing circuit breaker from switchgear.

G. Padlocks - provide Best #11B772-L, in quantity as follows:

1. One (1) for each rear hinged section2. One (1) for each draw-out breaker cubicle and cubicle space3. Two (2) spare

H. Operating Handle: One for each circuit breaker capable of manual operation.

I. Undervoltage Trip Devices: Adjustable time-delay and pickup voltage.

J. Shunt-Trip Devices: Where indicated.

K. Indicating Lights: To indicate circuit breaker is open or closed.

2.6 ACCESSORIES

A. Accessory Set: Furnish tools and miscellaneous items required for circuit-breaker and switchgear

test, inspection, maintenance, and operation.

1. Racking handle to manually move circuit breaker between connected and disconnectedpositions.

2. Portable test set for testing all functions of circuit-breaker, solid-state trip devices without

removal from switchgear.

3. Relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing switchgear meters and switchgear class relays.

B. Storage for Manual: Include a rack or holder, near the operating instructions, for a copy of

maintenance manual.

2.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Mimic Bus: Continuous mimic bus, arranged in single-line diagram format, using symbols andlettered designations consistent with approved mimic-bus diagram.


1. Mimic-bus segments coordinated with devices in switchgear sections to which applied, toproduce a concise visual presentation of principal switchgear components and connections.

2. Medium: Painted graphics.

3. Color: Contrasting with factory-finish background.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine elements and surfaces where switchgear will be installed for compliance with installationtolerances, required clearances, and other conditions affecting performance.

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with applicable portions of NECA 400.

B. Anchor switchgear assembly to existing concrete floor and attach by bolting.

C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, brackets, and temporary

blocking of moving parts from switchgear units and components.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify switchgear, field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; providewarning signs as specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Diagram and Instructions:

1. Frame and mount under clear acrylic plastic on the front of switchgear.

a. Operating Instructions: Printed basic instructions for switchgear.

b. Provide 30”x42”, laminated copy of the electrical one-line diagram adjacent to the

switchgear. Mount in aluminum frame under plexiglass.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

B. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and

Cables."


A. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:


1. Test insulation resistance for each switchgear bus, component, connecting supply, feeder,and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.

B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform fieldtests and inspections and prepare test reports.

C. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA ATS.

Certify compliance with test parameters. Perform NETA tests and inspections for each of the

following NETA categories:

a. Switchgear.b. Circuit breakers.c. Protective relays.d. Metering and instrumentation.

e. Ground-fault systems.

2. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable, protective-relay trip characteristics according to results of the Power Study

required by Section 260505 “Power System Studies”.

B. Set field-adjustable, protective-relay trip characteristics.

3.7 CLEANING

A. On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of switchgear. Remove paint splattersand other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning. Repairexposed surfaces to match original finish.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel toadjust, operate, and maintain switchgear. Refer to Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training."

END OF SECTION 262300

Building Addition & Renovations for SwitchboardsThe Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 262413 - 1

SECTION 26 24 13SWITCHBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Service and distribution switchboards rated 600 V and less.2. Transient voltage suppression devices.3. Disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices.4. Instrumentation.5. Control power.6. Accessory components and features.7. Identification.


A. Seismic Performance: Switchboards shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determinedaccording to SEI/ASCE 7.

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any partsfrom the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: For each switchboard and related equipment.

1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required clearancesand service space around equipment. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipmentfeatures, and ratings.

2. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protectivedevice included in switchboards.

3. Include schematic and wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Seismic Qualification Certificates: Submit certification that switchboards, overcurrent protectivedevices, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section"Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

D. Field quality-control reports.

E. Operation and maintenance data.



B. Comply with NEMA PB 2.


D. Comply with UL 891.


1.5 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replacetransient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within specifiedwarranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Square D Co./GroupeSchneider NA or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.

B. Front-Connected, Front and Rear-Accessible Switchboards:

1. Main Devices: Fixed, individually mounted, electronic trip circuit breakers.2. Branch Devices: Panel mounted, thermal-magnetic circuit breakers.

C. Enclosure: Steel, NEMA 250, Type 1.

1. Enclosure Finish: Factory-applied finish in manufacturer's standard gray finish over a rust-inhibiting primer on treated metal surface.

D. Phase and Neutral Buses and Connections: Three phase, four wire unless otherwise indicated.Hard-drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity, with tin-plated aluminum or copper circuit-breakerline connections.

1. Ground Bus: 1/4-by-2-inch-minimum size, hard-drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity,equipped with pressure connectors for feeder and branch-circuit ground conductors.

2. Main Phase Buses and Equipment Ground Buses: Uniform capacity for entire length ofswitchboard's main and distribution sections. Provide for future extensions from both ends.

3. Neutral Buses: 100 percent of the ampacity of phase buses unless otherwise indicated,equipped with pressure connectors for outgoing circuit neutral cables.

E. Future Devices: Equip compartments with mounting brackets, supports, bus connections, andappurtenances at full rating of circuit-breaker compartment.

2.2 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION DEVICES

A. Surge Protection Device Description: IEEE C62.41-compliant, integrally mounted, solid-state,parallel-connected, with sine-wave tracking suppression and filtering modules, UL 1449, secondedition, short-circuit current rating matching or exceeding the switchboard short-circuit rating, andwith the following features and accessories:

1. Fuses, rated at 200-kA interrupting capacity.2. LED indicator lights for power and protection status.3. Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has failed.4. Form-C contacts rated at 5 A and 250-V ac, one normally open and one normally closed, for

remote monitoring of system operation. Contacts shall reverse position on failure of anysurge diversion module or on opening of any current-limiting device.

5. Transient-event counter set to totalize transient surges.


B. Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating: 160 kA per mode/320 kA per phase.

C. Withstand Capabilities: 5000 IEEE C62.41, Category C3 (10 kA), 8-by-20-mic.sec. surges withless than 5 percent change in clamping voltage.

D. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for grounded wye circuits with 208Y/120-V, three-phase, four-wire circuits shall be as follows:

1. Line to Neutral: 400 V for 208Y/120.2. Line to Ground: 400 V for 208Y/120.3. Neutral to Ground: 400 V for 208Y/120.

2.3 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

A. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meetavailable fault currents.

1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads,and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip settingfor circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

2. Electronic trip circuit breakers with rms sensing; field-replaceable rating plug or field-replicable electronic trip; and the following field-adjustable settings:

a. Instantaneous trip.b. Long- and short-time pickup levels.c. Long- and short-time time adjustments.d. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.

3. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories:

a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.b. Lugs: Compression style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor

material.c. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent

lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge (HID)lighting circuits.

2.4 INSTRUMENTATION

A. Instrument Transformers: IEEE C57.13, NEMA EI 21.1, and the following:

1. Current Transformers: IEEE C57.13; 5 A, 60 Hz, secondary and secondary shorting device.Burden and accuracy shall be consistent with connected metering and relay devices.

B. Multifunction Digital-Metering Monitor: Microprocessor-based unit suitable for three- or four-wiresystems. Metering monitor shall have all the features of the Square D Power Logic CM3350 as aminimum. Include all necessary boards/control cards and software necessary for remote monitoring.

1. Mounting: Display and control unit flush or semiflush mounted in instrument compartmentdoor.

2. Interface: MODBUS compatible.

2.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for switchboards with one ormore service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Receive, inspect, handle, store and install switchboards and accessories according toNEMA PB 2.1.

B. Equipment Mounting: Install switchboards on concrete base, 4-inch nominal thickness. Complywith requirements for concrete base specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated,install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base.

2. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concretebase and anchor into structural concrete floor.

3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to switchboards.

C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets andtemporary blocking of moving parts from switchboard units and components.

D. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration andSeismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

E. Install filler plates in unused spaces of panel-mounted sections.

F. Install overcurrent protective devices, transient voltage suppression devices, and instrumentation.

1. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges.

G. Comply with NECA 1.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signscomplying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification forElectrical Systems."

B. Switchboard Nameplates: Label each switchboard compartment with a nameplate complying withrequirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

C. Device Nameplates: Label each disconnecting and overcurrent protective device and each meterand control device mounted in compartment doors with a nameplate complying with requirementsfor identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."


A. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each switchboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder,and control circuit.





2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance;otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

3. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged andmalfunctioning controls and equipment.

4. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:

a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 daysafter Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each switchboard. Remove frontand rear panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.

b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of eachswitchboard 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

c. Instruments and Equipment:

1) Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detectsignificant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

C. Switchboard will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies switchboards includedand that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial actiontaken, and observations after remedial action.

END OF SECTION

Building Addition & Renovations for PanelboardsThe Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 262416 - 1

SECTION 26 24 16PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes distribution panelboards and lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.


A. Seismic Performance: Panelboards shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determinedaccording to SEI/ASCE 7.


1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.

1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installeddevices, equipment features, and ratings.

2. Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.4. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices.5. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective

devices and auxiliary components.6. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.7. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective

device included in panelboards.

C. Seismic Qualification Certificates: Submit certification that panelboards, overcurrent protectivedevices, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section"Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."


E. Panelboard schedules for installation in panelboards.

F. Operation and maintenance data.



B. Comply with NEMA PB 1.


1.5 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace


transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warrantyperiod.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS

A. Fabricate and test panelboards according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined inDivision 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

B. Enclosures: Flush- and surface-mounted cabinets.

1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.

a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.

2. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, match boxdimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box.

3. Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in transparent card holder.

C. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.

D. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.

1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Compression type.3. Ground Lugs and Bus Configured Terminators: Compression type.4. Feed-Through Lugs: Compression type, suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at

opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device.5. Subfeed (Double) Lugs: Compression type suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at

same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device.

E. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenancesrequired for future installation of devices.

F. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit currentavailable at terminals.

2.2 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS



B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type.

C. Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: For Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A:Bolt-on circuit breakers; plug-in circuit breakers where individual positive-locking device requiresmechanical release for removal.


2.3 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS



B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type.

C. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbingadjacent units.

D. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

2.4 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES



B. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meetavailable fault currents.

1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads, andinstantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting forcircuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

2. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories:

a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.b. Lugs: Compression style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor

materials.c. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent

lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge (HID)lighting circuits. Type HACR for heating, AC, & refrigeration equipment.

d. Handle Clamp: Loose attachment, for holding circuit-breaker handle in on position.e. All circuit breakers of frame sizes from 100 amperes up to 400 amperes shall

incorporate adjustable magnetic trip.f. Breakers 400 amperes and larger shall incorporate electronic trip units with functions

as determined by the coordination study and as required by NEC. Breaker shall havecause of trip indicator targets. Trip units that utilize battery backup, shall have fieldreplaceable batteries. Provide 20% spare batteries as well as full function secondaryinjection portable test set.

g. Lugs: Copper, mechanical lugs and power-distribution connectors for number, size,and material of conductors indicated.

2.5 SURGE PROTECTION

A. Surge Protection Device: IEEE C62.41-compliant, integrally mounted, wired-in, solid-state,parallel-connected, modular (with field-replaceable modules) type, with sine-wave trackingsuppression and filtering modules, UL 1449, second edition, short-circuit current rating matching orexceeding the panelboard short-circuit rating, and with the following features and accessories:


1. Accessories:a. Fabrication using bolted compression lugs for internal wiring.b. Redundant suppression circuits.c. Redundant replaceable modules.d. Arrangement with wire connections to phase buses, neutral bus, and ground bus.e. LED indicator lights for power and protection status.

f. Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has failed.g. Form-C contacts rated at 5 A and 250-V ac, one normally open and one normally

closed, for remote monitoring of system operation. Contacts shall reverse position onfailure of any surge diversion module or on opening of any current-limiting device.Coordinate with building power monitoring and control system.

h. Four-digit, transient-event counter set to totalize transient surges.

2. Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating: 80 kA per mode/160 kA per phase.3. Minimum single-impulse current ratings, using 8-by-20-mic.sec. waveform described in

IEEE C62.41.2.

a. Line to Neutral: 70,000 A.b. Line to Ground: 70,000 A.c. Neutral to Ground: 50,000 A.

4. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for grounded wye circuits with 208Y/120 -V, three-phase, four-wire circuits shall be as follows:

a. Line to Neutral: 400 V for 208Y/120.b. Line to Ground: 400 V for 208Y/120.c. Neutral to Ground: 400 V for 208Y/120.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Receive, inspect, handle, store and install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB1.1.

B. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration andSeismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

C. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboardswith fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box.

D. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed.

1. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges.

E. Install filler plates in unused spaces.

F. Stub four 1-inch empty conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling space or spacedesignated to be ceiling space in the future. Stub four 1-inch empty conduits into raised floor spaceor below slab not on grade.

G. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties.

H. Comply with NECA 1.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION


A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signscomplying with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads and incorporating Owner's final roomdesignations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory;handwritten directories are not acceptable.

C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements foridentification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

D. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a nameplatecomplying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification forElectrical Systems."



B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder,and control circuit.


C. Tests and Inspections:



3. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:

a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 daysafter Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each panelboard. Remove frontpanels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.

b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of eachpanelboard 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

c. Instruments and Equipment:

1) Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detectsignificant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

D. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards includedand that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial actiontaken, and observations after remedial action.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Install equipment grounding connections for panelboards with ground continuity to mainelectrical ground bus in main switchboard.

B. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL486A and UL 486B.


3.5 CLEANING

A. On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of panelboards. Remove paintsplatters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist incleaning. Repair exposed surfaces to match original finish.

END OF SECTION

Building Addition & Renovations for Wiring DevicesThe Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 262726 - 1

SECTION 26 27 26WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates.2. Wall-box motion sensors.3. Snap switches and wall-box dimmers.

B. See Division 27 Section "Communications Horizontal Cabling" for workstation outlets.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking wallplates.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing labelwarnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the followingmanufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles:

1. Cooper Wiring Devices; a division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper).2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell).3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton).4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices & Accessories (Pass & Seymour).

2.2 STRAIGHT BLADE RECEPTACLES

A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, and UL 498.

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may beincorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Cooper; 5351 (single), 5352 (duplex).b. Hubbell; HBL5351 (single), CR5352 (duplex).


c. Leviton; 5891 (single), 5352 (duplex).

d. Pass & Seymour; 5381 (single), 5352 (duplex).

2.3 GFCI RECEPTACLES

A. General Description: Straight blade, feed-through type. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6,UL 498, and UL 943, Class A, and include indicator light that is lighted when device is tripped.

B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:


a. Cooper; GF20.b. Pass & Seymour; 2084.

2.4 SNAP SWITCHES

A. Comply with NEMA WD 1 and UL 20.

B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:


a. Cooper; 2221 (single pole), 2222 (two pole), 2223 (three way), 2224 (four way).b. Hubbell; CS1221 (single pole), CS1222 (two pole), CS1223 (three way), CS1224 (four

way).c. Leviton; 1221-2 (single pole), 1222-2 (two pole), 1223-2 (three way), 1224-2 (four

way).d. Pass & Seymour; 20AC1 (single pole), 20AC2 (two pole), 20AC3 (three way), 20AC4

(four way).

C. Pilot Light Switches, 20 A:

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Cooper; 2221PL for 120 V and 277 V.b. Hubbell; HPL1221PL for 120 V and 277 V.c. Leviton; 1221-PLR for 120 V, 1221-7PLR for 277 V.d. Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1-PLR for 120 V.

2. Description: Single pole, with neon-lighted handle, illuminated when switch is "ON."

D. Key-Operated Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:


a. Cooper; 2221L.b. Hubbell; HBL1221L.c. Leviton; 1221-2L.d. Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1-L.

2. Description: Single pole, with factory-supplied key in lieu of switch handle.

E. Single-Pole, Double-Throw, Momentary Contact, Center-Off Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A; for use


with mechanically held lighting contactors.


a. Cooper; 1995.b. Hubbell; HBL1557.c. Leviton; 1257.d. Pass & Seymour; 1251.

F. Key-Operated, Single-Pole, Double-Throw, Momentary Contact, Center-Off Switches, 120/277 V,20 A; for use with mechanically held lighting contactors, with factory-supplied key in lieu of switchhandle.


a. Cooper; 1995L.b. Hubbell; HBL1557L.c. Leviton; 1257L.d. Pass & Seymour; 1251L.

2.5 WALL-BOX DIMMERS

A. Dimmer Switches: Modular, full-wave, solid-state units with integral, quiet on-off switches, withaudible frequency and EMI/RFI suppression filters.

B. Control: Continuously adjustable slider; with single-pole or three-way switching. Comply withUL 1472.

C. Incandescent Lamp Dimmers: 120 V; control shall follow square-law dimming curve. On-off switchpositions shall bypass dimmer module.

1. 600 W; dimmers shall require no derating when ganged with other devices.

D. Fluorescent Lamp Dimmer Switches: Modular; compatible with dimmer ballasts; trim potentiometerto adjust low-end dimming; dimmer-ballast combination capable of consistent dimming with low endnot greater than 20 percent of full brightness.

2.6 OCCUPANCY SENSORS

A. Wall-Switch Sensors:

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may beincorporated into the Work are as noted on drawings.

2. Description: Adaptive-technology type, 120/277 V, adjustable time delay up to 20 minutes,180-degree field of view, with a minimum coverage area of 900 sq. ft..

B. Long-Range Wall-Switch Sensors:

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may beincorporated into the Work are as noted on drawings.

2. Description: Dual technology, with both passive-infrared- and ultrasonic-type sensing,120/277 V, adjustable time delay up to 30 minutes, 110-degree field of view, and a minimumcoverage area of 1200 sq. ft..

C. Wide-Range Wall-Switch Sensors:


1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may beincorporated into the Work, are as noted on drawings.

2. Description: Passive-infrared type, 120/277 V, adjustable time delay up to 30 minutes, 150-degree field of view, with a minimum coverage area of 1200 sq. ft.

2.7 WALL PLATES

A. Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices.

1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish.2. Material for Finished Spaces: Smooth, stainless steel.3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel.

B. Damp or Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with type 3R weather-resistant, die-cast aluminum with lockable cover and clearly labeled “Suitable for Wet LocationsWhile in Use”.

2.8 FLOOR SERVICE FITTINGS

A. Type: Modular, flush-type, dual-service units suitable for wiring method used.

B. Compartments: Barrier separates power from voice and data communication cabling.

C. Service Plate: Rectangular, die-cast aluminum with satin finish.

D. Power Receptacle: NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, gray finish, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Voice and Data Communication Outlet: as shown on drawings.

2.9 FINISHES

A. Color: Wiring device catalog numbers in Section Text do not designate device color.

1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: White, unless otherwise indicated orrequired by NFPA 70 or device listing.

2. Wiring Devices Connected to Emergency Power System: Red.

2.10 OUTDOOR DEVICES

A. Weatherproof type devices located on the building exterior shall be equipped with“weatherproof when in use” covers. Provide Arlington Industries “In Box” or approved equal.Receptacles shall be mounted horizontally on the exterior wall of the building.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1, including the mounting heights listed in that standard, unlessotherwise noted.

B. Coordination with Other Trades:

1. Take steps to insure that devices and their boxes are protected. Do not place wall finishmaterials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided byriding against outside of the boxes.

2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust,


paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables.3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint

unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.

C. Conductors:

1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or terminated ondevices.

2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoidscoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.

3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article300, without pigtails.

D. Device Installation:

1. Replace all devices that have been in temporary use during construction or that show signsthat they were installed before building finishing operations were complete.

2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connectconductors.

3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the lastpossible moment.

4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length.5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid

conductor tightly clockwise, 2/3 to 3/4 of the way around terminal screw.6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by the manufacturer.7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice No. 12

AWG pigtails for device connections.8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device.9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device

mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.

E. Receptacle Orientation:

1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles up, and on horizontally mountedreceptacles to the right.

F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outletboxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.

G. Dimmers:

1. Install dimmers within terms of their listing.2. Verify that dimmers used for fan speed control are listed for that application.3. Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according to

manufacturers' device listing conditions in the written instructions.

H. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical andwith grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigangwall plates.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Receptacles: Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served. Use hot, stampedor engraved machine printing with black-filled lettering on back of plate, and durable wiremarkers or tags inside outlet boxes.




1. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436.2. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout or

illuminated LED indicators of measurement.

B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles:

1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V.2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is not acceptable.3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable.4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943.5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted.6. The tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit

breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similarproblems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new, andretest as specified above.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical

Systems."

B. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors

and Cables."

C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL486A and UL 486B.

END OF SECTION

Building Addition & Renovations for FusesThe Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 262813 - 1

SECTION 26 28 13FUSES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Cartridge fuses rated 600-V ac and less for use in enclosed switches andenclosed controllers.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Operation and maintenance data.



B. Comply with NEMA FU 1 for cartridge fuses.



A. Where ambient temperature to which fuses are directly exposed is less than 40 deg F or morethan 100 deg F, apply manufacturer's ambient temperature adjustment factors to fuse ratings.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate fuse ratings with HVAC and refrigeration equipment nameplate limitations ofmaximum fuse size.

1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that arepackaged in original cartons or containers and identified with labels describing contents.

B. Fuses: Quantity equal to 25% of each fuse type but no fewer than three of each type and size.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offeringproducts that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Cooper Bussmann, Inc.2. Edison Fuse, Inc.3. Ferraz Shawmut, Inc.4. Littelfuse, Inc.

2.2 CARTRIDGE FUSES

Building Addition & Renovations for FusesThe Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 262813 - 2

A. Characteristics: NEMA FU 1, nonrenewable cartridge fuses with voltage ratings consistent withcircuit voltages.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine utilization equipment nameplates and installation instructions. Install fuses of sizes and

with characteristics appropriate for each piece of equipment.

B. Evaluate ambient temperatures to determine if fuse rating adjustment factors must be applied to

fuse ratings.


3.2 FUSE APPLICATIONS

A. Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK1, time delay.

B. Other Branch Circuits: Class RK1, time delay.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install fuses in fusible devices. Arrange fuses so rating information is readable without removingfuse.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labels complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section"Identification for Electrical Systems" and indicating fuse replacement information on inside door ofeach fused switch and adjacent to each fuse block and holder.

END OF SECTION

Building Addition & Renovations for Enclosed Switches and Circuit BreakersThe Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 262816 - 1

SECTION 26 28 16ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Fusible switches.2. Nonfusible switches.3. Molded-case circuit breakers (MCCBs).4. Enclosures.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. NC: Normally closed.

B. NO: Normally open.

C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.


A. Seismic Performance: Enclosed switches and circuit breakers shall withstand the effects ofearthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.


1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and componentindicated.

B. Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers. Include plans, elevations, sections,details, and attachments to other work.


C. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers, accessories, andcomponents, from manufacturer.


E. Operation and maintenance data.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, bya qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.




A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the followingconditions, unless otherwise indicated:

B. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F.C. Altitude: Not exceeding 1500 feet.

1.7 COORDINATION

Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with otherconstruction, including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain requiredworkspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FUSIBLE SWITCHES



B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 240-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1,horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate specified fuses, lockable handle withcapability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

C. Accessories:

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum groundconductors.

2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeledfor copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

3. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are specified.4. Lugs: Suitable for number, size, and conductor material.

2.2 NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES



B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 240-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1,horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked withcover in closed position.

C. Accessories:

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum groundconductors.

2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled


for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.3. Lugs: Suitable for number, size, and conductor material.

2.3 SHUNT TRIP SWITCHES



B. General Requirements: Comply with ASME A17.1, UL 50, and UL 98, with 200-kA interrupting andshort-circuit current rating when fitted with Class J fuses.

C. Switches: Three-pole, horsepower rated, with integral shunt trip mechanism and Class J fuseblock; lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks; interlocked with cover in closedposition.

D. Control Circuit: 120-V ac; obtained from integral control power transformer, with primary andsecondary fuses, with a control power transformer of enough capacity to operate shunt trip,connected pilot, and indicating and control devices.

E. Accessories:

1. Three-pole, double-throw, fire-safety and alarm relay; 24-V dc coil voltage.2. Three-pole, double-throw, fire-alarm voltage monitoring relay complying with NFPA 72.

2.4 MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS



B. General Requirements: Comply with UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interruptingcapacity to comply with available fault currents.

C. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads andinstantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

D. Features and Accessories:

1. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.2. Lugs: Suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material.3. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting

loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge lighting circuits.

2.5 ENCLOSURES

A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, tocomply with environmental conditions at installed location.


1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.3. Other Wet or Damp, Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for

compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been

corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unlessotherwise indicated.

B. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration andSeismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

C. Install fuses in fusible devices.

D. Comply with NECA 1.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warningsigns.

2. Label each enclosure with engraved laminated-plastic nameplate.



B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit breaker, component,connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.


C. Tests and Inspections:



D. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests andinspections.


E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosed switchesand circuit breakers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected,remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.5 CONNECTIONS

A. Install equipment grounding connections for switches and circuit breakers with ground continuity

to main electrical ground bus.

B. Install power wiring. Install wiring to switches and circuit breakers and from switches and circuitbreakers to equipment they feed.

C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL486A and UL 486B.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges.

3.7 CLEANING

A. On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of enclosures. Remove paint splattersand other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning. Repairexposed surfaces to match original finish.

END OF SECTION

Building Addition & Renovations for Communications Equipment Room FittingsThe Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 271100 - 1

SECTION 27 11 00COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Telecommunications mounting elements.2. Backboards.3. Telecommunications service entrance pathways.4. Grounding.5. Telecommunications equipment racks and cabinets.


1. Division 27 Section "Communications Backbone Cabling" for voice and data cablingassociated with system panels and devices.

2. Division 27 Section "Communications Horizontal Cabling" for voice and data cablingassociated with system panels and devices.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: For communications equipment room fittings. Include plans, elevations, sections,details, and attachments to other work.

1. Detail equipment assemblies, and location and size of each field connection.2. Equipment racks and cabinets: Include workspace requirements and access for cable

connections.3. Grounding: Indicate location of grounding bus bar and its mounting detail.

C. Qualification Data: For Installer, qualified layout technician, installation supervisor, and fieldinspector.


A. Installer Qualifications: Cabling Installer must have personnel certified by BICSI on staff.

1. Layout Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings shall be under the direct supervision ofRCDD.

2. Installation Supervision: Installation shall be under the direct supervision of RegisteredTechnician, who shall be present at all times when Work of this Section is performed atProject site.

3. Field Inspector: Currently registered by BICSI as RCDD to perform the on-site inspection.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by aqualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces: Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A.

D. Grounding: Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A.



A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install equipment frames and cable trays until spacesare enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and work above ceilings iscomplete.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of communications equipment with Owner.

1. Owner to exchange information and agree on details of equipment arrangements andinstallation interfaces.

2. Record agreements reached in meetings and distribute them to other participants.3. Adjust arrangements and locations of distribution frames, cross-connects, and patch panels

in equipment rooms to accommodate and optimize arrangement and space requirements oftelephone switch and LAN equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PATHWAYS

A. Cable Support: NRTL labeled. Cable support brackets shall be designed to prevent degradation ofcable performance and pinch points that could damage cable. Cable tie slots fasten cable ties tobrackets.

1. Comply with NFPA 70 and UL 2043 for fire-resistant and low-smoke-producingcharacteristics.

2. Support brackets with cable tie slots for fastening cable ties to brackets.3. Lacing bars, spools, J-hooks, and D-rings.4. Straps and other devices.

B. Cable Trays:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offeringproducts that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Cable Management Solutions, Inc.b. Cablofil Inc.c. Cooper B-Line, Inc.d. Cope - Tyco/Allied Tube & Conduit.e. GS Metals Corp.

2. Cable Tray Materials: Metal, suitable for indoors and protected against corrosion byelectroplated zinc galvanizing, complying with ASTM B 633, Type 1, not less than 0.000472inch thick.

a. Ladder Cable Trays: Nominally 6 or 12 inches wide (as indicated on the Drawings),by 2 inches high and a rung spacing of 12 inches.

C. Conduit and Boxes: Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes forElectrical Systems." Flexible metal conduit shall not be used.

1. Outlet boxes shall be no smaller than 2 inches wide, 3 inches high, and 2-1/2 inches deep.

2.2 BACKBOARDS

A. Backboards: Plywood, fire-retardant treated, painted, 3/4 by 48 by 96 inches. Comply withrequirements for plywood backing panels specified in Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry."


2.3 EQUIPMENT FRAMES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offeringproducts that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. ADC.2. Aim Electronics; a brand of Emerson Electric Co.3. AMP; a Tyco International Ltd. company.4. Cooper B-Line, Inc.5. Hubbell Premise Wiring.6. KRONE Incorporated.7. Leviton Voice & Data Division.8. Middle Atlantic Products, Inc.9. Nordex/CDT; a subsidiary of Cable Design Technologies.10. Ortronics, Inc.11. Panduit Corp.12. Siemon Co. (The).

B. General Frame Requirements:

1. Distribution Frames: Freestanding, modular-steel units designed for telecommunicationsterminal support and coordinated with dimensions of units to be supported.

2. Module Dimension: Width compatible with EIA 310 standard, 19-inch panel mounting.3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard, baked-polyester powder coat.

C. Floor-Mounted Racks: Modular-type, steel or aluminum construction.

1. 45 unit, two-post rack with 7 feet high frame.2. Vertical and horizontal cable management channels, top and bottom cable troughs, and

grounding lug.3. Baked-polyester powder coat finish.

D. Modular Wall Cabinets:

1. Wall mounting.2. Steel construction.3. Treated to resist corrosion.4. Lockable front doors.5. Louvered side panels.6. Cable access provisions top and bottom.7. Grounding lug.8. Top-mounted, 250-cfm fan.9. Power strip.10. All cabinets keyed alike.

E. Cable Management for Equipment Frames:

1. Metal, with integral wire retaining fingers.2. Baked-polyester powder coat finish.3. Vertical cable management panels shall have front and rear channels, with covers.4. Provide horizontal crossover cable manager at the top of each relay rack, with a minimum

height of two rack units each.

2.4 GROUNDING

A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems"for grounding conductors and connectors.


B. Telecommunications Main Bus Bar: Provide and install in IT #1302.

C. Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A.

2.5 LABELING

A. Comply with TIA/EIA-606-A and UL 969 for a system of labeling materials, including label stocks,laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Comply with BICSI TDMM for layout and installation of communications equipment rooms.

C. Cable Trays: Comply with NEMA VE 2 and TIA/EIA-569-A-7. Allow a minimum clearance of 4-inches above the top of the cable tray.

D. Bundle, lace, and train conductors and cables to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer'slimitations on bending radii. Install lacing bars and distribution spools.

E. Provide J-hooks to support cables where space constraints limit the use of cable tray.

F. Secure equipment racks to floor or wall per manufacturer’s recommendations.

3.2 FIRESTOPPING

A. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A, Annex A, "Firestopping."

B. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping Systems" Article.

3.3 GROUNDING

A. Install grounding according to BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection"Chapter.

B. Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A.

C. Locate grounding bus bar to minimize the length of bonding conductors. Fasten to wall allowing atleast 2-inch clearance behind the grounding bus bar. Connect grounding bus bar with a minimumNo. 4 AWG grounding electrode conductor from grounding bus bar to suitable electrical buildingground.

D. Bond metallic equipment to the grounding bus bar, using not smaller than No. 6 AWG equipmentgrounding conductor.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA/EIA-606-A. Comply withrequirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." Comply withrequirements in Division 09 Section "Interior Painting" for painting backboards. For fire-resistantplywood, do not paint over manufacturer's label.


B. See Division 27 Section "Communications Horizontal Cabling" for additional identificationrequirements. See Evaluations for discussion of TIA/EIA standard as it applies to this Section.Paint and label colors for equipment identification shall comply with TIA/EIA-606-A for Class 2 levelof administration including optional identification requirements of this standard.

C. Labels shall be preprinted or computer-printed type.

END OF SECTION

Building Addition & Renovations for Communications Backbone CablingThe Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 271300 - 1

SECTION 27 13 00COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Pathways.2. UTP cable.3. Fiber optic cable.4. Cable connecting hardware, patch panels, and cross-connects.5. Cabling identification products.

1.2 BACKBONE CABLING DESCRIPTION

A. Backbone cabling system shall provide interconnections between communications equipmentrooms, main terminal space, and entrance facilities in the telecommunications cabling systemstructure. Cabling system consists of backbone cables, intermediate and main cross-connects,mechanical terminations, and patch cords or jumpers used for backbone-to-backbone cross-connection.

B. Backbone cabling cross-connects may be located in communications equipment rooms or atentrance facilities. Bridged taps and splitters shall not be used as part of backbone cabling.


A. General Performance: Backbone cabling system shall comply with transmission standards inTIA/EIA-568-B.1, when tested according to test procedures of this standard.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings:

1. System Labeling Schedules: Electronic copy of labeling schedules, in software and formatselected by Owner.

2. Cabling administration drawings and printouts.3. Wiring diagrams to show typical wiring schematics including the following:

a. Cross-connects.b. Patch panels.c. Patch cords.

4. Cross-connects and patch panels. Detail mounting assemblies, and show elevations andphysical relationship between the installed components.

5. Cable tray layout, showing cable tray route to scale, with relationship between the tray andadjacent structural, electrical, and mechanical elements.


D. Source quality-control reports.


F. Maintenance data.




1. Layout Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings, Cabling Administration Drawings, andfield testing program development by an RCDD.


B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according toASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicabletesting agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50or less.


D. Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces: Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A.

E. Grounding: Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A.


A. Test cables upon receipt at Project site. Test each pair of UTP cable for open and short circuits.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PATHWAYS

A. Cable Support: NRTL labeled for support of Category 6e cabling, designed to prevent degradationof cable performance and pinch points that could damage cable.


B. Cable Trays:


a. Cable Management Solutions, Inc.b. Cablofil Inc.c. Cooper B-Line, Inc.d. Cope - Tyco/Allied Tube & Conduit.e. GS Metals Corp.

2. Cable Tray Material: Metal, suitable for indoors, and protected against corrosion byelectroplated zinc galvanizing, complying with ASTM B 633, Type 1, not less than 0.000472inches thick.

a. Ladder Cable Trays: Nominally 6 or 12 inches wide (as indicated on the Drawings), 2inches high and a rung spacing of 12 inches.




2.2 BACKBOARDS

A. Backboards: Plywood, fire-retardant treated, painted, 3/4 by 48 by 96 inches. Comply withrequirements in Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for plywood backing panels.

2.3 UTP CABLE

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide General Cable orcomparable product by one of the following:

1. Belden CDT Inc.; Electronics Division.2. Berk-Tek; a Nexans company.3. CommScope, Inc.4. Draka USA.5. Genesis Cable Products; Honeywell International, Inc.6. KRONE Incorporated.7. Mohawk; a division of Belden CDT.8. Nordex/CDT; a subsidiary of Cable Design Technologies.9. Superior Essex Inc.10. SYSTIMAX Solutions; a CommScope Inc. brand.11. 3M.12. Tyco Electronics/AMP Netconnect; Tyco International Ltd.

B. Description: 100-ohm, 100-pair UTP, formed into 25-pair binder groups covered with a lightolive gray thermoplastic jacket.

1. Comply with ICEA S-90-661 for mechanical properties.2. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-A, Category 3.3. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying

with UL and NFPA for the following types:

a. Communications, General Purpose: Type CMR.b. Communications, Plenum Rated: Type CMP, complying with NFPA 262.c. Communications, Riser Rated: Type CMR, complying with UL 1666.

2.4 UTP CABLE HARDWARE

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide KRONE Incorporatedor comparable product by one of the following:

1. American Technology Systems Industries, Inc.2. Dynacom Corporation.3. Hubbell Premise Wiring.4. Leviton Voice & Data Division.5. Molex Premise Networks; a division of Molex, Inc.6. Nordex/CDT; a subsidiary of Cable Design Technologies.7. Panduit Corp.8. Siemon Co. (The).9. Tyco Electronics/AMP Netconnect; Tyco International Ltd.

B. General Requirements for Cable Connecting Hardware: Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2, IDC type,with modules designed for punch-down caps or tools. Cables shall be terminated with connectinghardware of same category or higher.

C. Connecting Blocks: 110-style IDC for Category 6e. Provide blocks for the number of cablesterminated on the block, plus 25 percent spare. Integral with connector bodies, including plugs andjacks where indicated.


D. Cross-Connect: Modular array of connecting blocks arranged to terminate building cables andpermit interconnection between cables.

1. Number of Terminals per Field: One for each conductor in assigned cables.

E. Patch Panel: Modular panels housing multiple-numbered jack units with IDC-type connectors ateach jack for permanent termination of pair groups of installed cables.

1. Number of Jacks per Field: One for each four-pair UTP cable indicated.

F. Jacks and Jack Assemblies: Modular, color-coded, eight-position modular receptacle units withintegral IDC-type terminals.

G. Patch Cords: Factory-made; terminated with 8-position modular plug at each end.

1. Patch cords shall have bend-relief-compliant boots and color-coded icons to ensureCategory 6e performance. Patch cords shall have latch guards to protect against snagging.

2. Provide two patch cords for each data jack. One patch cord shall be used for the networkconnection at the patch panel and the other patch cord will be used by the Owner forconnection from the jack to the equipment.

3. The breakdown for the length and quantity of patch cables to be provided is as follows:

a. 5’ Length: 50% of total.b. 7’ Length: 25% of total.c. 10’ Length: 25% of total.

2.5 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE


1. AMP Netconnect; a brand of Tyco Electronics Corporation.2. Belden CDT Networking Division/NORDX.3. Berk-Tek; a Nexans company.4. CommScope, Inc.5. Corning Incorporated; Corning Cable Systems.6. CSI Technologies Inc.7. Mohawk; a division of Belden.8. Superior Essex Inc.9. SYSTIMAX Solutions; a CommScope, Inc. brand.10. 3M; Communication Markets Division.

B. Single Mode Description: 8.3/125-micrometer, 24-fiber, tight buffer, optical fiber cable.

1. Comply with ICEA S-83-596 for mechanical properties.2. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.3 for performance specifications.3. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying


a. Plenum Rated, Nonconductive: Type OFNP, complying with NFPA 262.b. Riser Rated, Nonconductive: Type OFNR, complying with UL 1666.

4. Maximum Attenuation: 1.0 dB/km at 1310 nm; 1.0 dB/km at 1550 nm.

5. Jacket: Jacket Color: Yellow. Cable cordage jacket, fiber, unit, and group color shall beaccording to TIA-598-C. Imprinted with fiber count, fiber type, and aggregate length atregular intervals not to exceed 40 inches.

C. Multimode Description: 62.5/125-micrometer, 24-fiber, tight buffer, optical fiber cable.

1. Comply with ICEA S-83-596 for mechanical properties.


2. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.3 for performance specifications.3. Comply with TIA-492AAAA-A for detailed specifications.4. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying


a. General Purpose, Nonconductive: Type OFN or OFNG.b. Plenum Rated, Nonconductive: Type OFNP, complying with NFPA 262.c. Riser Rated, Nonconductive: Type OFNR, complying with UL 1666.

5. Maximum Attenuation: 3.50 dB/km at 850 nm; 1.5 dB/km at 1300 nm.6. Minimum Modal Bandwidth: 160 MHz-km at 850 nm; 500 MHz-km at 1300 nm.7. Jacket Color: Orange. Cable cordage jacket, fiber, unit, and group color shall be according

to TIA-598-C. Imprinted with fiber count, fiber type, and aggregate length at regular intervalsnot to exceed 40 inches.

2.6 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE HARDWARE


1. ADC.2. American Technology Systems Industries, Inc.3. Belden CDT Networking Division/NORDX.4. Berk-Tek; a Nexans company.5. Corning Incorporated; Corning Cable Systems.6. CSI Technologies Inc.7. Dynacom Corporation.8. Hubbell Incorporated; Hubbell Premise Wiring.9. Molex Premise Networks; a division of Molex, Inc.10. Siemon.

B. Cable Connecting Hardware: Meet the Optical Fiber Connector Intermateability Standards(FOCIS) specifications of TIA-604-2-B, TIA-604-3-B, and TIA/EIA-604-12. Comply with TIA/EIA568-B.3.

1. Quick-connect, simplex and duplex, Type SC connectors. Insertion loss not more than 0.75dB.

2.7 GROUNDING

A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."for grounding conductors and connectors.


2.8 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS



A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate cables.

B. Factory test cables on reels according to TIA/EIA-568-B.1.

C. Factory test UTP cables according to TIA/EIA-568-B.2.

D. Cable will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ENTRANCE FACILITIES

A. Coordinate backbone cabling with the demarcation point.

3.2 WIRING METHODS

A. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways and cable trays except within consoles, cabinets, desks,and counters. Conceal raceway and cables except in unfinished spaces.

1. Install plenum cable in environmental air spaces, including plenum ceilings.2. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Division 26 Section

"Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems."

B. Wiring Method: Conceal conductors and cables in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors wherepossible.

C. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train cables within enclosures. Connect to terminalpoints with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Provideand use lacing bars and distribution spools.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF PATHWAYS

A. Cable Trays: Comply with NEMA VE 2 and TIA/EIA-569-A. Allow a minimum clearance of 4-inchesabove the top of the cable tray.

B. Comply with requirements for demarcation point, pathways, cabinets, and racks specified inDivision 27 Section "Communications Equipment Room Fittings."

C. Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A for pull-box sizing and length of conduit and number of bends betweenpull points.

D. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems" forinstallation of conduits and wireways.

E. Install manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius elbows whenever possible.

F. Pathway Installation in Communications Equipment Rooms:

1. Position conduit ends adjacent to a corner on backboard where a single piece of plywood isinstalled, or in the corner of room where multiple sheets of plywood are installed aroundperimeter walls of room.

2. Install cable trays to route cables if conduits cannot be located in these positions.3. Secure conduits to backboard when entering room from overhead.

4. Extend conduits 3 inches above finished floor.5. Install metal conduits with grounding bushings and connect with grounding conductor to

grounding system.

G. Backboards: Install backboards with 96-inch dimension vertical. Butt adjacent sheets tightly, andform smooth gap-free corners and joints.

H. J-Hooks: Provide J-hooks for cable support only where space constraints limit the use of cable tray.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF CABLES



B. General Requirements for Cabling:

1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1.2. Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 6, "Cable Termination Practices."3. Install 110-style IDC termination hardware unless otherwise indicated.4. Terminate all conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make terminations

only at indicated outlets, terminals, cross-connects, and patch panels.5. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches

and not more than 6 inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, andterminals.

6. Install lacing bars to restrain cables, to prevent straining connections, and to preventbending cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturer.

7. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer'slimitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIM, "CablingTermination Practices" Chapter. Use lacing bars and distribution spools.

8. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cablebetween termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged duringinstallation and replace it with new cable.

9. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat lampsshall not be used for heating.

10. In the communications equipment room, install a 10-foot- long service loop on each end ofcable.

11. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 4, "Pulling Cable." Monitor cable pulltensions.

C. UTP Cable Installation:

1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2.2. Do not untwist UTP cables more than 1/2 inch from the point of termination to maintain cable

geometry.

D. Optical Fiber Cable Installation:

1. Comply with TIA/EIA 568-B.3.2. Cable shall be terminated on connecting hardware that is rack mounted.

E. Group connecting hardware for cables into separate logical fields.

F. Separation from EMI Sources:

1. Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA/EIA-569-A recommendations for separating unshieldedcopper voice and data communication cable from potential EMI sources, including electricalpower lines and equipment.

2. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways andunshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows:

a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 5 inches.b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches.c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 24 inches.

3. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and unshieldedpower lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows:

a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 2-1/2 inches.b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches.c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches.

4. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and power lines


and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall be asfollows:

a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement.b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 3 inches.c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches.

5. Separation between Communications Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5 kVAor HP and Larger: A minimum of 48 inches.

6. Separation between Communications Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 5inches.

3.5 FIRESTOPPING

A. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A, Annex A, "Firestopping."

B. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping Systems" Article.

3.6 GROUNDING





3.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA/EIA-606-A. Comply withrequirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Administration Class: 2.2. Color-code cross-connect fields and apply colors to voice and data service backboards,

connections, covers, and labels.

B. Comply with requirements in Division 09 Section "Interior Painting" for painting backboards. Forfire-resistant plywood, do not paint over manufacturer's label.

C. Cable Schedule: Install in a prominent location in each equipment room and wiring closet. Listincoming and outgoing cables and their designations, origins, and destinations. Protect with rigidframe and clear plastic cover. Furnish an electronic copy of final comprehensive schedules forProject.

D. Cabling Administration Drawings: Show building floor plans with cabling administration-pointlabeling. Identify labeling convention and show labels for telecommunications closets, backbonepathways and cables, entrance pathways and cables, terminal hardware and positions, horizontalcables, work areas and workstation terminal positions, grounding buses and pathways, andequipment grounding conductors.

E. Cable and Wire Identification:


1. Label each cable within 4 inches of each termination and tap, where it is accessible in acabinet or junction or outlet box, and elsewhere as indicated.

2. Each wire connected to building-mounted devices is not required to be numbered at device ifcolor of wire is consistent with associated wire connected and numbered within panel orcabinet.

3. Label each terminal strip and screw terminal in each cabinet, rack, or panel.

a. Individually number wiring conductors connected to terminal strips and identify eachcable or wiring group being extended from a panel or cabinet to a building-mounteddevice with name and number of particular device as shown.

b. Label each unit and field within distribution racks and frames.

4. Identification within Connector Fields in Equipment Rooms and Wiring Closets: Label eachconnector and each discrete unit of cable-terminating and connecting hardware. Wheresimilar jacks and plugs are used for both voice and data communication cabling, use adifferent color for jacks and plugs of each service.

F. Labels shall be preprinted or computer-printed type with printing area and font color that contrastswith cable jacket color but still complies with requirements in TIA/EIA 606-A, for the following:

1. Cables use flexible vinyl or polyester that flexes as cables are bent.


A. Tests and Inspections:

1. Visually inspect UTP jacket materials for NRTL certification markings. Inspect cablingterminations in communications equipment rooms for compliance with color-coding for pinassignments, and inspect cabling connections for compliance with TIA/EIA-568-B.1.

2. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment andpatch cords, and labeling of all components.

3. Test UTP copper cabling for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent faults, andpolarity between conductors. Test operation of shorting bars in connection blocks. Testcables after termination but not cross-connection.

a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA-568-B.2.Perform tests with a tester that complies with performance requirements in "TestInstruments (Normative)" Annex, complying with measurement accuracy specified in"Measurement Accuracy (Informative)" Annex. Use only test cords and adapters thatare qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration.

4. Optical Fiber Cable Tests:

a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA-568-B.1.Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer forchannel or link test configuration.

b. Link End-to-End Attenuation Tests:

1) Multimode Link Measurements: Test at 850 or 1300 nm in 1 directionaccording to TIA-526-14-A, Method B, One Reference Jumper.

2) Attenuation test results for links shall be less than 2.0 dB. Attenuation testresults shall be less than that calculated according to equation in TIA/EIA-568-B.1.

B. Data for each measurement shall be documented. Data for submittals shall be printed in asummary report that is formatted similar to Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM, or transferred from theinstrument to the computer, saved as text files, and printed and submitted.

C. Remove and replace cabling where test results indicate that they do not comply with specified


requirements.


END OF SECTION

Building Addition & Renovations for Communications Horizontal CablingThe Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 271500 - 1

SECTION 27 15 00COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Pathways.2. UTP cabling.3. Cable connecting hardware, patch panels, and cross-connects.4. Telecommunications outlet/connectors.5. Cabling identification products.6. Cabling administration system


1. Division 27 Section "Communications Backbone Cabling" for voice and data cablingassociated with system panels and devices.

1.2 HORIZONTAL CABLING DESCRIPTION

A. Horizontal cable and its connecting hardware provide the means of transporting signals betweenthe telecommunications outlet/connector and the horizontal cross-connect located in thecommunications equipment room. This cabling and its connecting hardware are called "permanentlink," a term that is used in the testing protocols.

1. TIA/EIA-568-B.1 requires that a minimum of two telecommunications outlet/connectors beinstalled for each work area.

2. Horizontal cabling shall contain no more that one transition point or consolidation pointbetween the horizontal cross-connect and the telecommunications outlet/connector.

3. Bridged taps and splices shall not be installed in the horizontal cabling.


A. General Performance: Horizontal cabling system shall comply with transmission standards inTIA/EIA-568-B.1, when tested according to test procedures of this standard.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings:

1. System Labeling Schedules: Electronic copy of labeling schedules, in software and formatselected by Owner.

2. Cabling administration drawings and printouts.3. Wiring diagrams to show typical wiring schematics, including the following:

a. Cross-connects.b. Patch panels.c. Patch cords.

4. Cross-connects and patch panels. Detail mounting assemblies, and show elevations andphysical relationship between the installed components.


5. Cable tray layout, showing cable tray route to scale, with relationship between the tray andadjacent structural, electrical, and mechanical elements.


D. Source quality-control reports.


F. Maintenance data.



1. Layout Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings, Cabling Administration Drawings, andfield testing program development by an RCDD.


B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according toASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicabletesting agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.


D. Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces: Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A.

E. Grounding: Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A.


A. Test cables upon receipt at Project site. Test each pair of UTP cable for open and short circuits.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PATHWAYS

A. Cable Support: NRTL labeled for support of Category 6e cabling, designed to prevent degradationof cable performance and pinch points that could damage cable.


B. Cable Trays:


a. Cable Management Solutions, Inc.


c. Cablofil Inc.d. Cooper B-Line, Inc.e. Cope - Tyco/Allied Tube & Conduit.f. GS Metals Corp.

2. Cable Tray Materials: Metal, suitable for indoors, and protected against corrosion byelectroplated zinc galvanizing, complying with ASTM B 633, Type 1, not less than 0.000472inch thick.

a. Ladder Cable Trays: Nominally 12 inches wide, 2 inches high and a rung spacing of12 inches.



2.2 BACKBOARDS

A. Backboards: Plywood, fire-retardant treated, painted, 3/4 by 48 by 96 inches. Comply withrequirements in Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for plywood backing panels.

2.3 UTP CABLE


1. Belden CDT Inc.; Electronics Division.2. Berk-Tek; a Nexans company.3. CommScope, Inc.4. Draka USA.5. Genesis Cable Products; Honeywell International, Inc.6. KRONE Incorporated.7. Mohawk; a division of Belden CDT.8. Nordex/CDT; a subsidiary of Cable Design Technologies.9. Superior Essex Inc.10. SYSTIMAX Solutions; a CommScope, Inc. brand.11. 3M.12. Tyco Electronics/AMP Netconnect; Tyco International Ltd.

B. Description: 100-ohm, 24 AWG, 4-pair UTP, covered with a blue thermoplastic jacket.1. Comply with ICEA S-90-661 for mechanical properties.2. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1, Category 6e.3. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying


a. Communications, General Purpose: Type CMR.b. Communications, Plenum Rated: Type CMP, complying with NFPA 262.

2.4 UTP CABLE HARDWARE


1. American Technology Systems Industries, Inc.2. Dynacom Corporation.3. Hubbell Premise Wiring.4. Leviton Voice & Data Division.5. Molex Premise Networks; a division of Molex, Inc.


6. Nordex/CDT; a subsidiary of Cable Design Technologies.7. Panduit Corp.8. Siemon Co. (The).

9. Tyco Electronics/AMP Netconnect; Tyco International Ltd.

B. General Requirements for Cable Connecting Hardware: Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2, IDC type,with modules designed for punch-down caps or tools. Cables shall be terminated with connectinghardware of same category or higher.

C. Connecting Blocks: 110-style IDC for Category 6e. Provide blocks for the number of cablesterminated on the block, plus 25 percent spare. Integral with connector bodies, including plugs andjacks where indicated.

D. Cross-Connect: Modular array of connecting blocks arranged to terminate building cables andpermit interconnection between cables.

1. Number of Terminals per Field: One for each conductor in assigned cables.

E. Patch Panel: Modular panels housing multiple-numbered jack units with IDC-type connectors ateach jack for permanent termination of pair groups of installed cables.

1. Number of Jacks per Field: One for each four-pair UTP cable indicated.

F. Jacks and Jack Assemblies: Modular, color-coded, eight-position modular receptacle units withintegral IDC-type terminals.

G. Patch Cords: Factory-made; terminated with 8-position modular plug at each end.

1. Patch cords shall have bend-relief-compliant boots and color-coded icons to ensureCategory 6e performance. Patch cords shall have latch guards to protect against snagging.

2. Provide two patch cords for each data jack. One patch cord shall be used for the networkconnection at the patch panel and the other patch cord will be used by the Owner forconnection from the jack to the equipment.

3. The breakdown for the length and quantity of patch cables to be provided is as follows:

a. 5’ Length: 50% of total.b. 7’ Length: 25% of total.c. 10’ Length: 25% of total.

2.5 TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET/CONNECTORS

A. Jacks: 100-ohm, balanced, twisted-pair connector; four-pair, eight-position modular. Comply withTIA/EIA-568-B.1.

B. Workstation Outlets: Four-port-connector assemblies mounted in single faceplate.

1. Plastic Faceplate: High-impact plastic. Coordinate color with Division 26 Section "WiringDevices."

2. For use with snap-in jacks accommodating any combination of UTP work area cords.

a. Flush mounting jacks, positioning the cord at a 45-degree angle.3. Legend: Snap-in, clear-label covers and machine-printed paper inserts.

2.6 GROUNDING

A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems"for grounding conductors and connectors.



2.7 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS


B. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate cables.

B. Factory test UTP cables on reels according to TIA/EIA-568-B.1.

C. Factory test UTP cables according to TIA/EIA-568-B.2.

D. Cable will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 WIRING METHODS

A. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways and cable trays except within consoles, cabinets, desks,and counters. Conceal raceway and cables except in unfinished spaces.

1. Install plenum cable in environmental air spaces, including plenum ceilings.2. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Division 26 Section

"Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems."

B. Wiring Method: Conceal conductors and cables in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors wherepossible.

C. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train cables to terminal points with no excess andwithout exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Provide and use lacing bars anddistribution spools.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF PATHWAYS

A. Cable Trays: Comply with NEMA VE 2 and TIA/EIA-569-A-7. Allow a minimum clearance of 4-inches above the top of the cable tray.

B. Comply with requirements for demarcation point, pathways, cabinets, and racks specified inDivision 27 Section "Communications Equipment Room Fittings."

C. Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A for pull-box sizing and length of conduit and number of bends betweenpull points.

D. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems" forinstallation of conduits and wireways.

E. Install manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius elbows whenever possible.

F. Pathway Installation in Communications Equipment Rooms:


1. Position conduit ends adjacent to a corner on backboard where a single piece of plywood isinstalled, or in the corner of room where multiple sheets of plywood are installed aroundperimeter walls of room.

2. Install cable trays to route cables if conduits cannot be located in these positions.3. Secure conduits to backboard when entering room from overhead.4. Extend conduits 3 inches above finished floor.5. Install metal conduits with grounding bushings and connect with grounding conductor to

grounding system.

G. Backboards: Install backboards with 96-inch dimension vertical. Butt adjacent sheets tightly, andform smooth gap-free corners and joints.

H. J-Hooks: Provide J-hooks for cable support where space constraints limit the use of cable tray andfrom outlet drops to cable tray.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CABLES


B. General Requirements for Cabling:

1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1.2. Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 6, "Cable Termination Practices."3. Install 110-style IDC termination hardware unless otherwise indicated.4. Terminate conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make terminations

only at indicated outlets, terminals, cross-connects, and patch panels.5. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches

and not more than 6 inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, andterminals.

6. Install lacing bars to restrain cables, to prevent straining connections, and to preventbending cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturer.

7. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer'slimitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIM, "CablingTermination Practices" Chapter. Install lacing bars and distribution spools.

8. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cablebetween termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged duringinstallation and replace it with new cable.

9. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat lampsshall not be used for heating.

10. In the communications equipment room, install a 10-foot- long service loop on each end ofcable.

11. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 4, "Pulling Cable." Monitor cable pulltensions.

C. UTP Cable Installation:

1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2.2. Do not untwist UTP cables more than 1/2 inch from the point of termination to maintain

cable geometry.

D. Open Cable Installation:

1. Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guided in telecommunications spaces withterminating hardware and interconnection equipment..

2. Suspend UTP cable not in a cable tray or conduit a minimum of 8 inches above ceilings byJ-hooks not more than 60 inches apart.

3. Cable shall not be run through structural members or in contact with pipes, ducts, or otherpotentially damaging items.


E. Group connecting hardware for cables into separate logical fields.

F. Separation from EMI Sources:

1. Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA/EIA-569-A for separating unshielded copper voice anddata communication cable from potential EMI sources, including electrical power lines andequipment.

2. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways andunshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows:

a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 5 inches.b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches.c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 24 inches.

3. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and unshieldedpower lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows:

a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 2-1/2 inches.b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches.c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches.

4. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and power linesand electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall be asfollows:

a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement.b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 3 inches.c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches.

5. Separation between Communications Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5 kVAor HP and Larger: A minimum of 48 inches.

6. Separation between Communications Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 5inches.

3.4 FIRESTOPPING

A. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

B. Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A, Annex A, "Firestopping."

C. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping Systems" Article.

3.5 GROUNDING






3.6 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA/EIA-606-A. Comply withrequirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Administration Class: 2.2. Color-code cross-connect fields. Apply colors to voice and data service backboards,

connections, covers, and labels.

B. Comply with requirements in Division 09 Section "Interior Painting" for painting backboards. Forfire-resistant plywood, do not paint over manufacturer's label.

C. Paint and label colors for equipment identification shall comply with TIA/EIA-606-A for Class 2 levelof administration, including optional identification requirements of this standard.

D. Cable Schedule: Post in prominent location in equipment room. List incoming and outgoing cablesand their designations, origins, and destinations. Protect with rigid frame and clear plastic cover.Furnish an electronic copy of final comprehensive schedules for Project.

E. Cabling Administration Drawings: Show building floor plans with cabling administration-pointlabeling. Identify labeling convention and show labels for telecommunications closets, backbonepathways and cables, entrance pathways and cables, terminal hardware and positions, horizontalcables, work areas and workstation terminal positions, grounding buses and pathways, andequipment grounding conductors. Follow convention of TIA/EIA-606-A. Furnish electronic record ofall drawings, in software and format selected by Owner.

F. Cable and Wire Identification:

1. Label each cable within 4 inches of each termination and tap, where it is accessible in acabinet or junction or outlet box, and elsewhere as indicated.

2. Each wire connected to building-mounted devices is not required to be numbered at device ifcolor of wire is consistent with associated wire connected and numbered within panel orcabinet.

3. Label each terminal strip and screw terminal in each cabinet, rack, or panel.

a. Individually number wiring conductors connected to terminal strips, and identify eachcable or wiring group being extended from a panel or cabinet to a building-mounteddevice shall be identified with name and number of particular device as shown.

b. Label each unit and field within distribution racks and frames.

4. Identification within Connector Fields in Equipment Rooms and Wiring Closets: Label eachconnector and each discrete unit of cable-terminating and connecting hardware. Wheresimilar jacks and plugs are used for both voice and data communication cabling, use adifferent color for jacks and plugs of each service.

G. Labels shall be preprinted or computer-printed type with printing area and font color that contrastswith cable jacket color but still complies with requirements in TIA/EIA-606-A.

1. Cables use flexible vinyl or polyester that flex as cables are bent.


A. Tests and Inspections:

1. Visually inspect UTP cable jacket materials for NRTL certification markings. Inspect cablingterminations in communications equipment rooms for compliance with color-coding for pinassignments, and inspect cabling connections for compliance with TIA/EIA-568-B.1.


2. Visually confirm Category 6e, marking of outlets, cover plates, outlet/connectors, and patchpanels.

3. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment andpatch cords, and labeling of all components.

4. Test UTP backbone copper cabling for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent faults,and polarity between conductors. Test operation of shorting bars in connection blocks. Testcables after termination but not cross-connection.

a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA-568-B.2.Perform tests with a tester that complies with performance requirements in "TestInstruments (Normative)" Annex, complying with measurement accuracy specified in"Measurement Accuracy (Informative)" Annex. Use only test cords and adapters thatare qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration.

5. UTP Performance Tests:

a. Test for each outlet. Perform the following tests according to TIA/EIA-568-B.1 andTIA/EIA-568-B.2:

1) Wire map.2) Length (physical vs. electrical, and length requirements).3) Insertion loss.4) Near-end crosstalk (NEXT) loss.5) Power sum near-end crosstalk (PSNEXT) loss.6) Equal-level far-end crosstalk (ELFEXT).7) Power sum equal-level far-end crosstalk (PSELFEXT).8) Return loss.9) Propagation delay.10) Delay skew.

6. Final Verification Tests: Perform verification tests for UTP systems after the completecommunications cabling and workstation outlet/connectors are installed.

a. Voice Tests: These tests assume that dial tone service has been installed. Connect tothe network interface device at the demarcation point. Go off-hook and listen andreceive a dial tone. If a test number is available, make and receive a local, longdistance, and digital subscription line telephone call.

b. Data Tests: These tests assume the Information Technology Staff has a networkinstalled and is available to assist with testing. Connect to the network interfacedevice at the demarcation point. Log onto the network to ensure proper connection tothe network.

B. Document data for each measurement. Data for submittals shall be printed in a summary reportthat is formatted similar to Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM, or transferred from the instrument to thecomputer, saved as text files, and printed and submitted.


3.8 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel in cable-plant management operations, including changingsignal pathways for different workstations, rerouting signals in failed cables, and keeping records ofcabling assignments and revisions when extending wiring to establish new workstation outlets.

END OF SECTION

Building Addition & Renovations for Access ControlThe Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 281300 - 1

SECTION 28 13 00ACCESS CONTROL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Security access central-control panel.2. Card readers.3. Door contacts.4. Request to exit motion detectors.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings:1. Wiring diagrams.

C. Field quality-control reports.

D. Operation and maintenance data include the following:

1. Programming documentation.2. Hard copies of manufacturer's specification sheets, operating specifications, design guides,

user's guides, and PDF files on CD-ROM of the hard-copy submittal.3. System installation and setup guides with data forms to plan and record options and setup

decisions.



B. Comply with NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products manufacturedby General Electric or a comparable product.

2.2 CABLES

A. General Cable Requirements: As recommended by system manufacturer for integrationrequirement.

2.3 DESCRIPTION

A. Refer to drawing details for additional information.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Obtain detailed Project planning forms from manufacturer of access-control system; developcustom forms to suit Project. Fill in all data available from Project plans and specifications andpublish as Project planning documents for review and approval.

B. In meetings with Architect and Owner, present Project planning documents and review, adjust, andprepare final setup documents. Use final documents to set up system software.

3.2 CABLING

A. Comply with NECA 1, "Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction."

B. Install cables and wiring according to requirements in Division 26 Sections.

C. Wiring Method: Install wiring in raceway and cable tray except within consoles, cabinets, desks,and counters. Conceal raceway and wiring except in unfinished spaces.

D. Boxes and enclosures containing security-system components or cabling, and which are easilyaccessible to employees or to the public, shall be provided with a lock. Boxes above ceiling level inoccupied areas of the building shall not be considered accessible. Junction boxes and small deviceenclosures below ceiling level and easily accessible to employees or the public shall be coveredwith a suitable cover plate and secured with tamperproof screws.

E. Install end-of-line resistors at the field device location and not at the controller or panel location.

3.3 CABLE APPLICATION

A. Comply with TIA 569-B, "Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways andSpaces."

B. Cable application requirements shall be as recommended or required by manufacturer of systemhardware.

3.4 GROUNDING

A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

B. Comply with IEEE 1100, "Recommended Practice for Power and Grounding Electronic Equipment."

3.5 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install all equipment as recommended or required by manufacturer of system hardware.

3.6 IDENTIFICATION

A. In addition to requirements in this article, comply with applicable requirements in Division 26Section "Identification for Electrical Systems" and with TIA/EIA 606-A.

B. Develop cable administration drawings for system identification, testing, and management. Useunique, alphanumeric designation for each cable, and label cable and jacks, connectors, andterminals to which it connects with the same designation. Use logical and systematic designationsfor facility's architectural arrangement.

C. Label each terminal strip and screw terminal in each cabinet, rack, or panel.


1. All wiring conductors connected to terminal strips shall be individually numbered, and eachcable or wiring group being extended from a panel or cabinet to a building-mounted deviceshall be identified with the name and number of the particular device as shown.

2. Each wire connected to building-mounted devices is not required to be numbered at thedevice if the color of the wire is consistent with the associated wire connected and numberedwithin the panel or cabinet.

D. At completion, cable and asset management shall reflect as-built conditions.

3.7 PROGRAMMING

A. Programming of the system shall be performed by a representative of the contracted securitymonitoring system.



1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspectcomponents, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist intesting.


1. Perform all tests recommended by the factory-authorized service representative.

C. Devices and circuits will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.


3.9 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to supervise and assist with startup service.

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to approved procedures recommendedby the factory-authorized service representative and with manufacturer's written instructions.

3.10 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel toadjust, operate, and maintain security access system. See Division 01 Section "Demonstration andTraining."

END OF SECTION

Building Addition & Renovations for Video SurveillanceThe Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 282300 - 1

SECTION 28 23 00VIDEO SURVEILLANCE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 STIPULATIONS

A. The specifications section “General Conditions”, “Special Requirements” and “ GeneralRequirements” form a part of this section by this reference thereto and shall have the sameforce and effect as if printed herewith in full.

1.2 WORK INCLUDED

A. The work of this section shall consist of the labor, equipment and materials required for theinstallation of the close circuit television system as indicated on the drawings and as specifiedherein. The complete installation shall conform to the applicable sections of the local coderequirements and National Electrical Code.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings of the following in accordance with the General Conditions.

1. Digital Storage Equipment2. Network Connection to view cameras3. Camera Power Supply4. Fixed Dome Cameras including All Accessories5. Camera Mounts6. Wire and Cable, All Types7. Wiring and Interconnection Diagrams of All Items of Equipment

B. Equipment submittals shall include the following:

1. Complete descriptive data indicating UL listing for all system components2. Complete sequence of operations of the systems

C. Complete system wiring diagrams for components capable of being connected to the systems andinterfaces to other associated equipment and systems. Drawings and wiring diagrams shall besubmitted in Autocad 2008 or greater format. At the completion of the project, a CD with theas built drawings shall be turned over to the Owner.


A. Each item of the CCTV system shall be listed under the appropriate category by Underwriters’Laboratories, Inc. and shall bear the UL label.

1.5 EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER

A. The equipment shall be obtained from an authorized engineering Distributor that has priorexperience with the equipment specified. When requested, distributor shall provide certification asa manufacturer authorized distributor.

B. When requested, the manufacturer and/or his authorized distributor shall provide satisfactoryevidence of a factory trained authorized service organization, stocking factory approvedreplacement parts and capable of furnishing adequate inspection and service to theequipment.

1.6 WARRANTY AND START-UP

A. Installation of the CCTV system shall be supervised by factory trained representatives,


shall accompany the Owner’s representative on an inspection of all systems, and shalldemonstrate that the systems are functioning properly.

B. Upon acceptance of the system by the Owner and Engineer, the manufacturers representativeshall train the Owner’s designated representatives in proper operation of the system. The securitycontractor shall provide a set of operating instructions, to the Owner, including circuit diagrams andother information necessary for proper installation, operation and maintenance of the system.

C. The supplier of this equipment shall bear complete responsibility for the equipment andservices supplied, and also for complete supervision of installation of the system and shallcorrect any malfunction. The supplier of the equipment shall be responsible for correct operationof the complete system.

D. The equipment supplier shall be prepared to enter into service agreements with the Owner toprovide all parts, labor and mileage after the one year warranty periods have expired.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MULTIPLEXER DIGITAL STORAGE UNIT

A. Furnish and install a 16 Channel Digital Storage Unit with 3 TB Storage Unit. The Unit shall beequipped with CD RW and switches for camera call up. The DVR shall be capable of the following:

1. Watermarking for Authenticity2. 4 Different Recording Modes

a. Time Schedulesb. Motion Detectionc. Alarm Inputsd. Continuous

3. Video Loss Alerts4. Storage capabilities of CIF, 2CIF and D15. Recording capabilities of 120 FPS NTSC at D1 setting

B. Furnish all interconnection cables and any other required equipment to support the digital storagerequirements for the cameras. All required programming to attain a complete and functional systemshall be furnished. The Digital Storage Unit shall be equipped with a Ethernet port. Furnish a UTCModel TVR-3016-3T with a Rack Mount Kit.

2.2 RACK MOUNT CAMERA POWER SUPPLY

A. Furnish and install 3 UL Listed 8 Channel Camera Power Supply in the rack in IT #1302. The powersupply shall be capable of power up to 8 Cameras each with independent resettable fuses. Furnishtwo UTC Model KTP-24-8 Rack Mount Power Supplies.

2.3 WALL MOUNT RACK

A. Furnish and install a Wall Mount Rack in IT #1302. The rack shall house the digitalrecording unit and 3 camera power supplies as described above. Furnish a Lowell Model LWR-1019 Rack with backbox, Model LFD-10 lockable door and Plug Strip to for powering the DVR andPower Supplies. The Rack shall be a minimum of 24” High by 19” Deep.

2.4 COLOR FIXED DOME CAMERA

A. Furnish and install where shown on drawing, fixed color cameras with the following features:

1. Equipped 1/3 format CCD high resolution imager2. Require .5 lux or less for usable video3. Ultra Wide Dynamic Range4. Shall include electronic shutter5. Line of resolution 540 or greater


6. Camera mount and domed housing7. Verifocal auto iris lens 2.8 to 10mm

B. Furnish a Dome Camera, Lens, Housing and Mount as shown on camera matrix. Camera shall beUTC Model UVD-XP3-DNR-VA2

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER OF CCTV SYSTEM

A. United Technologies Corp. Climate Controls & Security or approved equal.

B. Bosch Cameras meeting the above requirements

3.2 CABLING

A. Coax Cable shall be manufactured by West Penn or approved equal and must have a solid copper20 gage core with a 95% bare copper braided shield. All cabling must meet or exceed theequipment manufacturers recommendations.

3.3 SYSTEM CHECK-OUT

A. All equipment must be commissioned by a factory trained service technician from a factoryauthorized distributor.

3.4 TRAINING

A. Upon completion of project, a minimum of 2 hours of onsite training shall be given to institutionalpersonnel.

3.5 CAMERA MATRIX

LOCATION TYPE MOUNTFront and Rear Entry Fixed Dome CeilingRemaining Exterior Fixed Dome WallInterior Cameras Fixed Dome Wall/Ceiling

Note: The Lens Setting shall be field set and adjusted to meet the needs of the Owner. Anyadjustment shall be performed at the final walkthrough at no additional cost to the Owner.Provide pan-tilt-zoom cameras where required for proper coverage of the intended viewingareas.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 28 31 11 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. A Complete Fire Alarm and Detection System shall be provided with all the necessary addressable initiating device modules, signal modules, and power supplies required to interface to the new peripheral devices. The system shall be UL Listed for this service.

B. The Contractor will be required to coordinate with a Fire Alarm System Fire Safety Representative the required number of wires and fiber between all Fire Alarm Equipment.

C. The fire alarm system shall include new addressable smoke and heat detectors, addressable pull stations, addressable duct detectors, addressable interface and control modules, audio visual units, visual only units, annunciators, speaker system for occupant notification through live voice or recorded voice announcements, signal extender panels, fiber drivers, fiber, wiring and cable, and any other appurtenances necessary for a complete and operational system.

D. The complete installation is to conform to the applicable sections of NFPA-72, International Building Code, Local code requirements, National Electrical Code with particular attention to Article 760 and the American with Disabilities Act.

1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Noncoded, voice addressable system, with multiplexed signal transmission, dedicated to fire-alarm service only.


A. Seismic Performance: Fire-alarm control unit and raceways shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7.

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. General Submittal Requirements:

1. Submittals shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction prior to submitting them to Architect.

2. Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons with the following qualifications:

a. Trained and certified by manufacturer in fire-alarm system design. b. NICET-certified fire-alarm technician, Level III minimum.

B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

C. Shop Drawings: For fire-alarm system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Comply with recommendations in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter in NFPA 72.

2. Include voltage drop calculations for notification appliance circuits. 3. Include battery-size calculations. 4. Include performance parameters and installation details for each detector, verifying that each

Building Addition & Renovations for Digital, Addressable Fire-Alarm System The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 283111 - 1

detector is listed for complete range of air velocity, temperature, and humidity possible when air-handling system is operating.

5. Include floor plans to indicate final outlet locations showing address of each addressable device. Show size and route of cable and conduits.

D. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

E. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For fire-alarm control unit, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.

F. Field quality-control reports.

G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire-alarm systems and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Comply with the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72.

2. Provide "Record of Completion Documents" according to NFPA 72 article "Permanent Records" in the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter.

3. Record copy of site-specific software. 4. Provide "Maintenance, Inspection and Testing Records" according to NFPA 72 article of the

same name and include the following:

a. Frequency of testing of installed components. b. Frequency of inspection of installed components. c. Requirements and recommendations related to results of maintenance. d. Manufacturer's user training manuals.

5. Manufacturer's required maintenance related to system warranty requirements. 6. Abbreviated operating instructions for mounting at fire-alarm control unit. 7. Copy of NFPA 25.

H. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation:

1. Software operating and upgrade manuals. 2. Program Software Backup: On magnetic media or compact disk, complete with data files. 3. Device address list. 4. Printout of software application.


A. Installer Qualifications: Installation shall be by personnel certified by NICET as fire-alarm Level II technician.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Include services of certified technician to supervise installation, adjustments, final connections, and system testing. During the installation period, the equipment supplier shall have a representative visit the job site to review the wiring and installation with the installing contractor.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. The Contractor shall warrant the fire alarm equipment and wiring to be free from inherent mechanical and electrical defects for a period of one (1) year from the date of final installation and acceptance of the system by the Owner’s Representatives.

1.7 TESTING AND MAINTENANCE AGREEMENT


A. The Contractor shall provide to the Owner a testing and maintenance agreement to maintain the system in accordance with NFPA 72 for the first year of operation.

B. The vendor shall offer the owner a service contract to maintain and test the system according to NFPA requirements for a period of time after the first year of warranty. The owner has no obligation to accept.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Fire alarm shall be the system specified as manufactured by Siemens or approved equal.

B. Each and all items of the Fire Alarm System shall be listed as a product of a single fire alarm system manufacturer under the appropriate category by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL), and shall bear the “U.L.” label. All control equipment is to be listed under UL category UOJZ as a single control unit. Partial listing shall NOT be acceptable.

2.2 SYSTEMS OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION

A. Fire-alarm signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and systems:

1. Manual stations. 2. Smoke detectors. 3. Duct detectors. 4. Automatic sprinkler system water flow. 5. Fire standpipe system.

B. Fire-alarm signal shall initiate the following actions:

1. Continuously operate visual alarm-notification appliances and send voice message to speakers throughout the building.

2. Identify alarm at the fire-alarm control unit and remote annunciators. 3. Transmit an alarm signal to the Network Command Center at the 911 center and display the

exact device that went into alarm. 4. Switch heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning equipment controls to fire-alarm mode. 5. Record events in the system memory.

C. Supervisory signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions:

1. Valve supervisory switch.

D. System trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions:

1. Open circuits, shorts, and grounds in designated circuits. 2. Opening, tampering with, or removing alarm-initiating and supervisory signal-initiating

devices. 3. Loss of primary power at fire-alarm control unit. 4. Ground or a single break in fire-alarm control unit internal circuits. 5. Abnormal ac voltage at fire-alarm control unit. 6. Break in standby battery circuitry. 7. Failure of battery charging. 8. Abnormal position of any switch at fire-alarm control unit or annunciator. 9. Fire-pump power failure, including a dead-phase or phase-reversal condition.

E. System Trouble and Supervisory Signal Actions: Initiate notification appliance and annunciate at fire-alarm control unit and remote annunciators. Transmit the supervisory or trouble condition to the Network Command Center at the 911 center and display the exact device that caused the condition.


2.3 FIRE-ALARM CONTROL UNIT

A. General Requirements for Fire-Alarm Control Unit: Comply with UL 864, "Control Units for Fire- Protective Signaling Systems."

B. The following FACP hardware shall be provided:

1. Power Limited base panel with cabinet and door, 120 VAC input power.

a. 1080 point capacity where (1) point equals (1) monitor (input) or (1) control (output). The Panel shall be expandable to 3000 points.

b. Unlimited points of Network Annunciation at FACP Display when applied as a Network Node

2. Provide battery voltage and ammeter readouts from the LCD Display. 3. Twelve programmable function buttons, these buttons shall be custom programmed as

required by the Owner. A trouble or / and partial system disarmed LED shall light on the display when a button is activated.

4. Provide a multi-line display with a minimum of 8 lines of text and 40 characters per line. 5. Three Sets of Auxiliary Relay, SPDT 2A @32VDC, (1 Alarm, 1 Trouble and 1 Programmable

Relay). 6. Communication Card and Fiber Drivers to the Network Command Center. 7. The FACP shall be with the following.

a. The FACP shall support a fiber-optic network interface to communicate with the existing Network Command Center.

b. The panel shall be furnished with 10% spare cabinet space for future expansion. c. Cabinet: Lockable steel enclosure. Arrange unit so all operations required for testing

or for normal care and maintenance of the system can be performed from the front of the enclosure. If more than a single unit is required to form a complete control unit, provide exactly matching modular unit enclosures.

d. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Panel shall include an Multi-line LCD display to indicate alarm, supervisory, and component status messages and shall include a keypad for use in entering and executing control commands.

e. 800 event history logging buffer. 8. Built-in printer for logging all fire alarm system events.

9. Provide auxiliary power supply via system batteries to support the system for 24 hours in standby mode, 5 minutes of alarm plus 20 percent spare capacity.

C. Primary Power: 24-V dc obtained from 120-V ac service and a power-supply module. Initiating devices, notification appliances, signaling lines, trouble signals, supervisory signals and supervisory and digital alarm communicator transmitters shall be powered by 24-V dc source.

1. Alarm current draw of entire fire-alarm system shall not exceed 80 percent of the powersupply module rating.

D. Secondary Power: 24-V dc supply system with batteries, automatic battery charger, and automatic transfer switch.

E. Instructions: Computer printout or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a plastic or glass cover in a stainless-steel or aluminum frame. Include interpretation and describe appropriate response for displays and signals. Briefly describe the functional operation of the system under normal, alarm, and trouble conditions.

2.4 FIRE ALARM MASTER CONTROL PANEL – MXL

A. Control Panel construction shall modular with solid state, microprocessor based electronics. It shall display only those primary controls and displays essential to operation during a fire alarm condition. Keyboards or keypads shall not be required to operate during a fire alarm condition.


B. The following primary controls shall be visible through a front glass door:

1. Six inch Multi-Line liquid crystal display. 2. Individual red system alarm LED. 3. Individual yellow supervisory service LED. 4. Individual yellow trouble LED. 5. Green "power on" LED. 6. Fire Alarm Acknowledge Key. 7. Partial System Disarm LED 8. Supervisory Acknowledge Key. 9. Trouble Acknowledge Key. 10. Alarm Silence Key. 11. System Reset Key.

C. The following secondary control switches and LED's shall be available on the front control panel:

1. 12 Programmable Function Keys which shall be programmed by the Owner. 2. Scroll Up and Down Key. 3. Control Keypad.

D. The control panel shall provide the following:

1. Setting of time and date. 2. LED testing. 3. Alarm, trouble, and abnormal condition listing. 4. Enabling and disabling of each monitor point or detector separately. 5. Activation and deactivation of each control point separately. 6. Changing Device Sensitivity 7. Walk Test enable. 8. Running diagnostic functions. 9. Displaying software revision level. 10. Displaying historical logs. 11. Displaying card status.

E. For maintenance purposes the following lists shall be available from the control menu:

1. View and Change device sensitivity. 2. Turn on field detectors and modules LED. 3. Arm and Disarm Devices

F. Scrolling through menu options or lists shall be accomplished in a self-directing manner. These controls shall be located behind the panel door.

G. Primary Keys, LED's and LCD Display

1. The control panel shall have a 6 inch VGA liquid crystal display, which shall be backlit for enhanced readability. So as to conserve battery standby power, it shall not be lit during an AC power failure unless an alarm condition occurs or there is keypad activity.

2. The display shall support both upper and lower case letters. Lowercase letters shall be used for soft-key titles and prompting the user. Uppercase letters shall be used for system status information. A cursor shall be visible when entering information.

H. Provide additional power supplies and signal circuits as necessary to support the peripheral devices required for the system. Provide additional components in a system cabinet as required for the project. Furnish a Siemens Model PAD-3 with PS1270 Batteries and TRI-B6M Monitor Module.

I. Furnish 2 Multimode Fiber Optic Driver Modules. One shall be installed in Miller Center and the other to be installed at the 911 Center. All required Patch Cords, Power Supplies and Enclosures required to achieve a complete fiber optic communication path to the NCC shall be included. The


Fiber Optic Drivers shall be a Model M-0800-2W.

J. Furnish and install all equipment as required to provide the Owner with a complete functional system that meets all Codes, Standards and Guidelines.

2.5 REMOTE COMMAND CENTER/ANNUNCIATOR/ANNUNCIATOR

A. Remote Command Center/Annunciator(s): The Command Center at minimum shall include a muitiline display, Microphone, Fire Fighter Telephone, controls Switches to match existing, Power Supply, Batteries and Enclosure. Remote multiline display shall be a 640-character 6 inch alpha-numeric display with full function acknowledge silence and reset keys. Units shall also include a minimum of 12 function keys, which are field programmable for specific operations such as bypassing, shutdowns, remote alarm reporting, drill, etc. Siemens model MXLV with flush mounted MME Enclosure. Power the unit with a Model MPS power supply with backed up by battery power.

2.6 INITIATING DEVICES

A. Addressable Manual Pull Stations: Stations shall be Single Action type and mount semi-flush on a single-gang electrical box. Furnish a Siemens Model MSI-10B.

B. Addressable Photoelectric Smoke Sensors: Provide addressable smoke detectors that mount on standard bases common to all automatic detection devices. Detectors shall include microchips to provide the processing capability for application specific detection. Each smoke detector shall contain an LED that flashes green for normal condition, flashes amber to indicate a detector trouble condition and flashes red during an alarm condition of the unit. The microchips shall allow for calibration checks, sensitivity checks, sensitivity adjustments, monitoring of its sensing chamber for buildup of contamination, and constantly verify proper operation. The smoke detectors shall include a built-in thermistor heat element that allows for programming of smoke detection, heat detection or “neural network” detection using algorithms for determining an alarm threshold condition. The addressable smoke detector shall operate on 24VDC obtained from the Fire Alarm Addressable circuit. Each sensor shall be scanned by the fire alarm control panel for its type identification to prevent inadvertent substitution of another sensor type. The FACP shall provide default alarm operation with the installed device but shall initiate an "Incorrect Device ID" trouble condition until the proper type is installed or the programmed sensor type is changed.

Detectors shall be field tested and programmed by a portable programmer/tester unit before placement in its initiating circuit. Furnish Siemens Model FP-11 Application Specific Detectors. Devices shall mount on a common DB-11 base, ADBX-11 Audible Base or DB-11XRS Relay Base. Provide additional relays as required for HVAC and elevator control functions.

C. Addressable Photoelectric Duct Detector: Provide addressable duct-mounted ASD type smoke detectors that utilize sampling tubes for sensing smoke conditions in ducts of RTU’s and DOAS. Each duct assembly shall contain a programmable auxiliary control relay that allows for selective shutdown of air handling units if an alarm occurs on the duct detector. It shall be possible to manually control the shutdown of the air-handling unit through selector switches on the fire alarm control unit. Furnish a Siemens Model AD2-XHR duct housing with relay, FP-11 duct smoke detector, and ST series sampling tube. The sampling tube shall be sized as required to match the width of the air duct. Each detector housing shall include a Relay with dry contracts for connection by the Mechanical Contractor. Provide additional relays as required for HVAC control or signal functions.

D. Addressable Heat Sensors: Heat Sensors and Addressable Base shall operate on 24VDC obtained from the Fire Alarm Addressable circuit. The heat sensor shall be self-restoring and provide rate compensated, fixed temperature sensing, selectable with or without rate-of-rise temperature sensing. Fixed temperature settings are programmable to operate at 135 degree. The heat detector LED shall operate in the same manor as the smoke detector describe above. Mounting shall be on a 4” octagonal electrical box. Furnish Siemens Model FPT-11 Heat Detectors. Devices shall mount on a common DB-11 base, ADBX-11 Audible Base or DB-11XRS Relay Base. Provide additional relays as required for HVAC and elevator control functions.


E. Flow, Tamper and Pressure Switches: Shall be supplied by the Fire Protection System Contractor and wired into the Fire Alarm System by this contractor. Units shall be interfaced into a supervised individual or dual addressable interface module. Furnish Siemens Model TRI-S (Single) or TRI-D (Dual) Addressable Interface Modules.

F. Remote Control Relays: Shall be Siemens TRI-R. This type of module will provide single pole double throw relay switching for 2 A @ 28 VDC resistive, power limited and at 1/2 A @ 120 VAC resistive, non-power limited. This device shall be furnished for the Card Access Tie, etc.

G. Programmer/Tester Unit: Provide a programmer/Tester unit that allows for programming and testing of the new devices.

2.7 INDICATING DEVICES

A. Signal Extender Panels: Provide as required audible and visual notification appliances Signal Panels Cooper Model PS 8 Signal Extender Panel. The panel shall provide 6 amps of signal power, and shall be equipped with an internal battery charger. The Batteries shall be sized to support the signal extender and associated signal for 24-hour battery standby and 5 minutes in alarm. Furnished batteries shall be 7 Ampere Hour or larger. No circuits shall be loaded by more than 80% of capacity. A smoke detector shall be installed within 15' of this control unit.

B. Audio-Visual Units: Furnish and install flush wall mounted speaker and strobe unit as shown on drawings. The speaker strobe unit shall be an ET Series as manufacturered by Cooper. Where surface mounting is required and approved by Owner furnish a Model SBB-R Surface Backbox. Finish shall be white.

C. Visual Alarm Signals: Shall be wall-mounted strobe lamp and flasher. Strobe light shall be multi- candela type with field selectable candela settings at minimum candela capacities shown on the drawings. Strobe lights shall be provided with sync modules in accordance with ADA requirements. Finish shall be white. Mounting shall be semi-flush on a single gang, double gang or 4” square electrical box. Furnish Siemens Snap Mount Strobe Unit Model ZR-Series or Exceder Series.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NFPA 72 for installation of fire-alarm equipment.

B. Equipment Mounting: Install wall-mounted equipment, with tops of cabinets not more than 72 inches above the finished floor. 1. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Division 26 Section

"Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

C. Smoke- or Heat-Detector Spacing:

1. Comply with NFPA 72, "Smoke-Sensing Fire Detectors" Section in the "Initiating Devices" Chapter, for smoke-detector spacing.

2. Comply with NFPA 72, "Heat-Sensing Fire Detectors" Section in the "Initiating Devices" Chapter, for heat-detector spacing.

3. Smooth ceiling spacing shall not exceed 30 feet. 4. Spacing of detectors for irregular areas, for irregular ceiling construction, and for high ceiling

areas shall be determined according to Appendix A in NFPA 72. 5. HVAC: Locate detectors not closer than 5 feet from air-supply diffuser or return-air opening. 6. Lighting Fixtures: Locate detectors not closer than 12 inches from any part of a lighting

fixture.

D. Duct Smoke Detectors: Comply with NFPA 72 and NFPA 90A. Install sampling tubes so they extend the full width of duct.


E. Heat Detectors in Elevator Shafts: Coordinate temperature rating and location with sprinkler rating and location.

F. Remote Status and Alarm Indicators: Install near each smoke detector and each sprinkler water- flow switch and valve-tamper switch that is not readily visible from normal viewing position.

G. Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install horns on flush-mounted back boxes with the device-operating mechanism concealed behind a grille.

H. Visible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install adjacent to each alarm horn and at least 6 inches below the ceiling.

I. Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor.

J. Fire-Alarm Control Unit: Surface mounted, with tops of cabinets not more than 72 inches above the finished floor.

K. Fire Command Center: Install with top of panel not more than 72 inches above the finished floor.

L. After installation of smoke detectors, Electrical Contractor shall provide an airtight plastic cover over the units to keep contaminants from entering the unit in all areas, until time of acceptance. It is the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor to either clean or replace any devices that have become soiled or contaminated by construction dirt.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. For fire-protection systems related to doors in fire-rated walls and partitions and to doors in smoke partitions, comply with requirements in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware." Connect hardware and devices to fire-alarm system.

1. Verify that hardware and devices are NRTL listed for use with fire-alarm system in this Section before making connections.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Install framed instructions in a location visible from fire-alarm control unit.

C. All sequences of operation, device labels and information content reported to the Network Command Center shall be approved by the Owner.

D. All junction boxes shall be sprayed red and labeled “Fire Alarm”. Wiring color code shall be maintained throughout the installation.

E. Provide engraved plastic nameplates under the provisions of Section 260553, Identification for Electrical Systems. Nameplates shall indicate the source of power to the system including the appropriate circuit number.

3.4 GROUNDING

A. Ground fire-alarm control unit and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100. Install a ground wire from main service ground to fire-alarm control unit.


A. Field tests shall be witnessed by Owner’s representative and authorities having jurisdiction, if applicable.



1. Visual Inspection: Conduct visual inspection prior to testing.

a. Inspection shall be based on completed Record Drawings and system documentation that is required by NFPA 72 in its "Completion Documents, Preparation" Table in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter.

b. Comply with "Visual Inspection Frequencies" Table in the "Inspection" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72; retain the "Initial/Reacceptance" column and list only the installed components.

2. System Testing: Comply with "Test Methods" Table in the "Testing" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72.

3. Test audible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions. Perform the test using a portable sound-level meter complying with Type 2 requirements in ANSI S1.4.

4. Test audible appliances for the private operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions.

5. Test visible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions.

6. Factory-authorized service representative shall prepare the "Fire Alarm System Record of Completion" in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter in NFPA 72 and the "Inspection and Testing Form" in the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72.

C. Fire-alarm system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


3.6 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

A. A meeting shall be arranged by the Electrical Contractor for demonstration on the operation of the system to the Owner’s representative and local fire department. Notify in writing through the Electrical Contractor, the Professional and the Owner of this time and date the demonstration will take place. Training shall be a minimum of two hours.

END OF SECTION


APPENDIX ‘A’

GEOTECHNICAL REPORT

GEOTECHNICAL REPORT

Lewisburg Recreation Facility East Buffalo Township, Union County, Pennsylvania

CMT Laboratories File No. 1245300

Prepared for:

Playworld Systems, Inc. 1000 Buffalo Road

Lewisburg, PA 17837-9795

Prepared by:

CMT Laboratories, Inc. 2701 Carolean Industrial Drive

State College, PA 16801

January 4, 2013 Brian Tittmann, E.I.T. Shad Hoover, P.E. Project Engineer Principal

CMT Laboratories, Inc.

2701 Carolean Industrial Drive, State College, PA 16801 ■ Phone: 814-231-8845 ■ Fax: 814-231-8846

GEOTECHNICAL REPORT

Lewisburg Recreation Facility

East Buffalo Township, Union County, Pennsylvania

CMT Laboratories File No. 1245300

Prepared for:

Playworld Systems, Inc. 1000 Buffalo Road

Lewisburg, PA 17837-9795

Prepared by:

CMT Laboratories, Inc. 2701 Carolean Industrial Drive

State College, PA 16801

January 4, 2013

ii

INDEX Page

LIST OF TABLES............................................................................................................... iii 1.0 INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................................1 2.0 PROJECT AND SITE INFORMATION..................................................................1 3.0 GENERAL................................................................................................................2 4.0 GEOLOGIC INFORMATION .................................................................................2 5.0 FIELD INVESTIGATION .......................................................................................3

5.1 Groundwater Conditions............................................................................3 6.0 LABORATORY TESTING PROGRAM.................................................................4 7.0 SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS ...............................................................................5 8.0 RECOMMENDATIONS..........................................................................................6

8.1 Remediation Recommendations ................................................................6 8.1.1 Stone Pier Subsurface Improvement................................................7 8.1.2 Lightweight Fill Placement..............................................................8

9.0 EXCAVATIONS ......................................................................................................8 10.0 COMMENTS............................................................................................................9 APPENDIX:

A. Project Location Map B. USGS Geology Map C. Test Boring Location Plan D. General Geotechnical Notes E. Test Boring Logs F. Laboratory Testing Data G. Bibliography

iii

LIST OF TABLES Page

Table 5.1 Groundwater Table Data...............................................................................4 Table 6.1 Moisture Plasticity Characteristics and Particle-Size Test Results...............5 Table 7.1 Depth of Fill ..................................................................................................6

Geotechnical Report January 4, 2013 Lewisburg Recreation Facility CMT File No. 1245300

1

1.0 INTRODUCTION

This report presents the results of a subsurface exploration and foundation

analysis for the Lewisburg Recreation Facility project located in East Buffalo Township,

Union County, Pennsylvania. Our services for this project were performed in accordance

with CMT Proposal No. 1245300, dated December 18, 2012.

Authorization to perform the requested serviced was given in the form of a

Proposal Acceptance and Work Authorization Agreement signed by Mr. Mathew Miller

on December 19, 2012.

The purpose of the test boring program was to determine the pertinent subsurface

conditions and to obtain information on which to base recommendations regarding

remedial measures. The scope of services for this report does not include an

environmental assessment for the presence or absence of wetlands, hazardous, radioactive

or toxic materials in the soil, surface water, groundwater, or air on, below or around the

site. Any statements in this report or on the Test Boring Logs regarding odors, colors or

unusual or suspicious items are strictly for the information of the client.

2.0 PROJECT AND SITE INFORMATION

The existing building is located in East Buffalo Township, Union County,

Pennsylvania. Specifically, the building is located to the south of Saint Mary Street and

east of North 15th Street. The location of the facility is shown on the Project Location

Map presented in Appendix A.

The surface of the warehouse floor is concrete. Topographic information was not

provided within the building area.

General building information for this project was provided by Mid-Penn

Engineering. The existing building is a steel rigid frame construction with metal siding

and roofing with slab-on-grade concrete floors and no basement. The warehouse

building measures approximately 91,000 square feet in plan area while the area of

concrete settlement measures approximately 4,000 square feet in plan area. The floor

slab has settled between 2 and 3 inches. We have assumed a maximum floor live load of


2

150 psf. Future loading conditions are unknown; however, we understand that the

building may be used for indoor soccer.

The above information was utilized in our geotechnical analysis. Therefore, if

any of this information has changed, is incorrect or becomes available, please inform

CMT so that we may amend the recommendations presented in this report, if appropriate.

3.0 GENERAL

The following recommendations are based on general subsurface information

shown on the Test Boring Logs provided in Appendix E. The descriptions shown on

these logs represent the conditions only at the actual boring locations and variations may

occur and should be expected between the boring locations. Conditions encountered

during excavation procedures may not reflect the conditions presented on the boring logs.

Therefore, a representative of CMT should be present during excavation operations so

that any variations may be presented to the geotechnical engineer. The geotechnical

engineer may decide that the variations warrant a change to the recommendations

presented in this report.

4.0 GEOLOGIC INFORMATION

According to the Department of Environmental Resources, Office of Resources

Management, Bureau of Topographic and Geologic Survey(1982), rock formations at the

proposed area are undivided between the Keyser and Tonoloway formations, DSkm.

Both formations are comprised of primarily of limestone.

The Keyser formation is comprised of dark gray, highly fossiliferous, crystalline

to nodular limestone: shaly limestone near the top.

The Tonoloway formation is comprised of medium-gray laminated limestone

containing interbedded zones of medium and light gray shale and siltstone.

The rock formations are moderately resistant to weathering and the surface

drainage is typically good. Excavation in both formations is difficult when rock is


3

encountered. The bedrock provides good foundation stability when excavated to sound

material provided that a thorough investigation for solution openings is undertaken.

5.0 FIELD INVESTIGATION

We recommend that the contractors verify the locations of utilities prior to

commencement of construction activities.

A total of six (6) test borings were drilled for this project. Each of the borings

was extended to a depth of approximately 15 feet below the existing surface grades. The

test borings were located in the field by a representative of Mid-Penn Engineering

Corporation by referencing the site plans. A Professional Land Surveyor was not utilized

to locate or survey borings. The approximate locations of the test borings are shown on

the Test Boring Location Plan provided in Appendix C.

The soil sampling was performed in accordance with ASTM D1586. All

sampling intervals and Standard Penetration Test values were recorded and are shown on

the Test Boring Logs. The results of the Standard Penetration Tests indicate the relative

density and comparative consistency of the soils and thereby provide a basis for

estimating the relative strength and compressibility of the soil profile components.

The stratifications shown on the Test Boring Logs represent the conditions only at

the actual boring locations. Variations should be expected between the boring locations.

In addition, the Test Boring Logs show the approximate boundaries between subsurface

materials. Actual transitions between subsurface materials may be gradual or abrupt.

5.1 Groundwater Conditions

Groundwater was encountered in the test borings at the time of drilling activities

as shown on Table 5.1. Note that groundwater levels fluctuate seasonally as a function of

rainfall and the permeability of the soil/bedrock. Perched or entrapped water

immediately above the bedrock horizon is possible. The geotechnical engineer should be

notified immediately if groundwater is encountered at the time of construction.


4

Table 5.1 Groundwater Table Data

Encountered At Completion Boring Number Depth (ft) Depth (ft)

TB-1 5.6 5.9

TB-2 9.5 6.2

TB-3 NE 5.6

TB-4 9.5 6.3

TB-5 NE 5.8

TB-6 5.5 5.5

NE: Not Encountered or Insufficient Information

6.0 LABORATORY TESTING PROGRAM

The samples obtained during the drilling operation were sealed in labeled

containers and transported to our laboratory for inspection, testing and classification.

Remaining samples will be retained for a minimum of one (1) year for future reference.

In addition to the visual classification of the soil samples, moisture content

determination tests were performed on representative split-spoon samples. The moisture

content is the ratio of the weight of the water in the sample to the dry weight of the

sample. This test was performed in general compliance with ASTM D2216.

Several test procedures were performed on composite soil samples taken from the

site. A general description of each test is provided in the following paragraphs.

Moisture-plasticity characteristics of the composite soil sample (CMT ID No.

12248) were determined by means of the Atterberg Limit test. The test determines the

moisture content at which the soil begins to act as a viscous liquid (Liquid Limit – LL)

and the moisture content at which the soil changes from a plastic state to a semi-solid

state (Plastic Limit – PL). The difference between the Liquid Limit and the Plastic Limit

is the Plasticity Index (PI). The test procedures were performed in compliance with

ASTM D4318.


5

Particle-size analyses were performed on the same composite soil samples in

compliance with ASTM D422. The analysis includes a sieve analysis for particle sizes

greater than the #200 sieve and a hydrometer analysis for particle sizes finer than the

#200 sieve. Using this information, the samples were classified using the Unified Soil

Classification System (USCS), ASTM D2487.

A summary of the moisture-plasticity characteristics and particles-size test results

is shown in Table 6.1.

Table 6.1 Moisture-Plasticity Characteristics and Particle-Size Test Results

Detailed laboratory testing data is provided in Appendix F.

7.0 SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS

The test borings drilled for this project are described in general in this section.

More detailed descriptions are shown on the Test Boring Logs provided in Appendix E.

The surface of the site at all test boring locations was a layer of concrete

approximately 6 inches thick. The material beneath this consists of a layer of fill

materials measuring approximately 10 to 11 feet in thickness. The fill material tends to

consist of three layers. The top layer has larger amounts of silt and with lesser amount of

gravel and clay. The middle layer has greater amounts of ash and lesser amounts of silt

and gravel as well as wood. The bottom layer of fill has greater amounts of sand and silt

with lesser amounts of clay, gravel, and organics as well as metal scraps. This layer is

very soft to soft and wet. The fill materials have moisture contents ranging between 9

and 130 percent. The engineering characteristics of the fill materials, such as strength

and compressibility, are highly variable.

Beneath the fill material at all test boring locations is a layer of natural residual

soils consisting of brown clay with silt and lesser amounts of sand and gravel. The

CMT Sample Number

Test Boring Depth (ft)

Liquid Limit (LL)

Plasticity Index (PI)

USCS

12248 TB-5 5-10 -- NP ML


6

natural residual soils have moisture contents ranging between 18 and 26 percent and

exhibit a stiff to very stiff consistency based on the Standard Penetration Tests and hand

penetrometer values.

Table 7.1 Depth of Fill

Boring Number Depth of Fill (ft)

TB-1 10.5

TB-2 11.5

TB-3 10.5

TB-4 11.5

TB-5 10.5

TB-6 10.5

8.0 RECOMMENDATIONS

The conclusions and recommendations presented in this report are based on the

data obtained from the field exploration and laboratory testing programs, information

regarding the reported settlement and our knowledge of geomechanics. The subject site

is considered suitable for continued use, provided the geotechnical recommendations and

suggested guidelines presented in this report are utilized in both the design and

construction phases of this project.

Specific and detailed recommendations for the proposed construction are

provided in the following sections.

8.1 Remediation Recommendations

Our test boring investigation has revealed that the materials underlying the

distressed slab consist of a wide range of unsuitable fill materials. Although we have not

conducted a comprehensive subsurface survey of the entire building area, we suspect that


7

the majority of the building is bearing on these materials. The source of the settlement

appears to be the result of a water line break or other source of concentrated flow that has

eroded the fill and left enough void space within the material matrix to allow for

measurable consolidation. The material continues to be in a highly saturated and weak

condition. We have no knowledge that the water source was repaired. Additionally, a

rate of settlement has not been established.

Any superficial repair techniques, i.e. slab jacking or simply removing the

concrete and re-pouring the slab, will result in additional settlement. Complete

overexcavation and replacement of the fill materials will require an extensive and

aggressive dewatering program that could result in settlement of the surrounding

structure. Prior to permanent repair, we recommend that the slab be surveyed for

settlement on a weekly basis over a minimum period of 6 months. Depending on the rate

of settlement, we offer the following permanent repair options:

8.1.1 Stone Pier Subsurface Improvement

If further settlement surveying reveals that the slab has not stabilized, then we

recommend the use of stone pier subsurface improvement. The stone piers can be

installed in a variety of methods; however, we anticipate that a bottom-to-top stone

vibratory method will be most practical for this project. The following general

recommendations are offered:

1. Remove the slab a minimum of 30 feet beyond the perimeter of the distressed

area.

2. Install a grid of stone piers to a minimum depth of 20 feet below the subgrade

elevation. The stone pier subsurface improvement system should be installed and

designed by a specialty geotechnical contractor and reviewed and inspected by the

geotechnical engineering representative. A modulus of subgrade reaction of 10

psi/inch should be utilized to design the stone pier system.

3. Place 12” of PennDOT 2A subbase compacted to 100% of the maximum dry

density in accordance with the Standard Proctor method (ASTM D698).


8

4. Pour the new floor slab in accordance with the recommendations of the structural

engineer.

8.1.2 Lightweight Fill Placement

If further settlement surveying reveals that the slab has stabilized, then we recommend

the use of overexcavation and replacement with lightweight fill. The use of lightweight

fill will aid in limiting further settlement that would result with typical normal weight

structural fill. The following general recommendations are offered:

1. Remove the slab a minimum of 30 feet beyond the perimeter of the distressed

area.

2. Overexcavate to a minimum depth of 4 feet below the subgrade elevation, but not

closer than 1 foot to the water table elevation. The perimeter of the excavation

should be sloped no steeper than 3H:1V.

3. Backfill with a lightweight fill material (<80 pcf) in accordance with

manufacturer recommendations. Further evaluation by the geotechnical engineer

will be required after the lightweight fill materials have been located.

4. Place 6” of PennDOT 2A subbase compacted to 100% of the maximum dry

density in accordance with the Standard Proctor method (ASTM D698).

5. Pour the new floor slab in accordance with the recommendations of the structural

engineer.

Each of the above options is beyond the scope of typical repair techniques;

therefore, we recommend that the geotechnical engineer be engaged during the evaluation

and construction processes.

9.0 EXCAVATIONS

The contractor is responsible for designing and constructing stable, temporary

excavations and should shore, slope or bench the sides of the excavations as required to


9

maintain stability of both the excavation sides and bottom. The contractor is responsible

for following the guidelines presented in the current version of the United States

Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), Part

1926, Subpart P, titled “Excavations.” This information is presented solely for the

information of the client, and in no way is CMT Laboratories, Inc. responsible for the

construction site safety or the Contractor’s activities.

10.0 COMMENTS

This report has been prepared to assist in the design of remedial measures and to

aid in the general site preparation for the distress portion of the Lewisburg Recreation

Facility for Playworld, Inc. located in East Buffalo Township, Union County,

Pennsylvania. The recommendations presented in this report are based on the subsurface

information obtained by CMT and the general project information provided by others.

The importance of inspection, consultation and testing during construction cannot be

overemphasized.

We request that this office be consulted if, during design or construction,

conditions are encountered which differ from those contained herein, thereby warranting

a review of our recommendations. This report has been prepared for the exclusive use of

Playworld, Inc.

APPENDIX A

PROJECT LOCATION MAP

btittmann

Callout

Site Location

APPENDIX B

USGS GEOLOGY MAP

btittmann

Callout

Site Location

btittmann

Rectangle

APPENDIX C

TEST BORING LOCATION PLAN

btittmann

Oval

btittmann

Oval

btittmann

Oval

btittmann

Oval

btittmann

Oval

btittmann

Oval

btittmann

Text Box

TB-5

btittmann

Text Box

TB-3

btittmann

Text Box

TB-4

btittmann

Text Box

TB-2

btittmann

Text Box

TB-1

btittmann

Text Box

TB-6

APPENDIX D

GENERAL GEOTECHNICAL NOTES

CMT Laboratories, Inc. 2701 Carolean Industrial Drive, State College, PA 16801 Phone: 814-231-8845 / Fax: 814-231-8846

General Geotechnical NotesSOIL DESCRIPTION

The Unified Soil Classification System is used to identify the soil unless otherwise noted.

SAMPLE TYPESSS Split Spoon - 1 3/8" I.D., 2" O.D., unless otherwise noted. ST Shelby Tube - 3" O.D., unless otherwise noted. NQ Rock Core Sampled with Q Wireline Diamond Bit - 2" I.D.

SOIL PROPERTY SYMBOLSN Standard Penetration Resistance - Blows per foot of a 140 pound hammer falling 30 inches on a 2" O.D. split-spoon sampler. WOH Weight of Hammer and Rods WOR Weight of Rods qp Pocket Penetrometer measurement of unconfined compressive strength - tsf Mc Soil Moisture Content - %. GR Graphical Representation of the soil strata (see below). LL Liquid Limit - %. PI Plasticity Index - %. Rec Percent Core Recovery - Ratio of the length of rock core obtained, to the core interval. RQD Rock Quality Designation - Ratio of the sum of core segments greater than 4", to the core interval.

Apparent groundwater level.

CONSISTENCY AND RELATIVE DENSITY CLASSIFICATION RELATIVE PROPORTIONSCohesive Soils SPT "N" Value Granular Soils SPT "N" Value Descriptive Term Percent

Very Soft 0 – 3 Very Loose 0 – 4 Trace 1 – 10 Soft 4 – 5 Loose 5 – 10 Little 11 – 20 Firm (Medium) 6 – 9 Slightly Compact 11 – 20 Some 21 – 35 Stiff 10 – 15 Medium Dense 21 – 30 And 36 – 50 Very Stiff 16 – 30 Dense 31 – 50 Hard 31+ Very Dense 50+

SOIL/ROCK STRATA LEGEND ROCK QUALITY DESCRIPTION RQD Rock Quality

Clays Dolomite/Limestone 0 - 25% Very Poor

Silts Shale 25 - 50% Poor

Sands & Gravels Sandstone 50 - 75% Fair

Organic Materials Siltstone 75 - 90% Good

Fill Materials Cobbles/Boulders 90 - 100% Excellent

PARTICLE SIZEBoulders 12 in + Coarse Sand 5 mm - 0.6 mm Silt 0.074 mm - 0.002 mm Cobbles 12 in - 3 in Medium Sand 0.6 mm - 0.2 mm Clay 0.002 mm - Gravel 3 in - 5 mm Fine Sand 0.2 mm - 0.074 mm

APPENDIX E

TEST BORING LOGS

Test Boring Log Boring: TB-1

Project Name: Lewisburg Recreation Facility Date of Work: 12/20/2012Site: East Buffalo Township, Union County, Pennsylvania File No.: 1245300Driller/helper: M. Rager/T. Frymyer Drill Rig: B-45 Core Bit:Auger Type: 4-1/4" HSA Sampling Type: ASTM D-1586 Elevation: FFE

Depth Sample Blow "N" qp Mc GRDescription (ft) Type Counts Value (tsf) (%) Remarks

0.6' CONCRETEFILL: Brown silt, little gravel, trace clay; SS-1 4-6-10 16 -- 9.0damp SS-2 8-9-11 20 -- 12.1

FILL: Black ash, little silt, trace gravel; SS-3 4-7-10-14 17 -- 15.7dampFILL: Brown sandy silt, little clay, trace SS-4 3-3-1 4 -- 43.0organics, trace gravel, trace metal; wet SS-5 WOH-1-0 1 -- 127.8 Groundwater

measured at 5.9FILL: Gray sandy silt, little clay, trace SS-6 WOH-2-3-3 5 -- 37.3 feet upon boring gravel, trace organics; wet completion Brown CLAY, little silt, trace to little sand; SS-7 2-4-6 10 3.5 21.5damp to moist, stiff to very stiff SS-8 9-10-10 20 4.3 23.5

SS-9 9-11-11-12 22 3.5 18.1

End of Boring - 15.6'

40

CMT Laboratories, Inc. ■ 2701 Carolean Industrial Drive ■ State College, PA 16801 ■ Phone: (814) 231-8845

25

30

35

5

10

15

20




0.5' CONCRETEFILL: Brown silt, little gravel; dry to damp SS-1 4-7-6 13 -- 4.3 Groundwater

measured at 6.2SS-2 5-8-9 17 -- 15.6 feet upon boring

completion FILL: Black ash, trace gravel, trace to SS-3 4-8-9-11 17 -- 21.9little wood; dry to damp

SS-4 3-1-0 1 -- 56.2FILL: Gray sandy silt, little clay, little SS-5 1-1-1 2organics; wet

SS-6 WOH-1-4-5 5 -- 43.5

Brown CLAY, little silt, trace organics; SS-7 1-5-6 11 4.3 21.8damp


40

23.9SS-8 8-8-8-10 16 2.9

no recovery


25

30

35

5

10

15

20




0.6' CONCRETEFILL: Brown/black silt, little gravel; dry SS-1 2-5-9 14 -- 13.3

SS-2 6-5-10 15 -- 13.7

FILL: Black ash, little gravel, little wood; SS-3 7-10-9-11 19 -- 19.1damp

SS-4 1-5-10 15 GroundwaterFILL: Gray sandy silt, little clay; wet SS-5 3-1-2 3 measured at 5.6

feet upon boring SS-6 3-3-8-10 11 completion

Brown CLAY, little silt; damp to moist SS-7 3-4-6 10 2.3 25.3SS-8 9-11-11 22 2.5 21.3

SS-9 4-6-11-11 17 4.7 21.7


40

no recovery

no recovery


25

30

35

5

10

15

20

no recovery




0.5' CONCRETEFILL: Brown silt, little gravel; damp SS-1 3-4-8 12 -- 15.8 Groundwater

SS-2 7-10-10 20 -- 15.0 measured at 6.3feet upon boring

FILL: Gray silt, little gravel, black ash; dry SS-3 9-12-8-6 20 -- 3.7 completion FILL: Black ash, trace organics, trace brick; damp SS-4 1-6-9 15 -- 69.0FILL: Dark brown wood; moist SS-5 2-1-1 2 -- 130.2

FILL: Brown sandy silt, little clay, trace SS-6 2-4-4-6 8 -- 44.2organics; wetBrown CLAY, little silt, trace organics; SS-7 3-5-9 14 2.6 24.3moist


40

8-9-13-11 22 4.0 21.3


25

30

35

5

10

15

20

SS-8




0.4' CONCRETEFILL: Brown silt, little clay, trace gravel; SS-1 3-4-8 12 -- 14.6dry SS-2 7-7-8 15 -- 12.5

FILL: Black ash, trace wood, trace glass; SS-3 2-6-6-6 12 -- 21.8dry

SS-4 1-1-0 1FILL: Gray sandy silt, black ash; damp SS-5 WOH-1-1 2 -- 28.2 Groundwater

measured at 5.8FILL: Brown sandy silt, little clay, trace SS-6 3-6-7-9 13 -- 23.3 feet upon boring gravel; moist completion Brown CLAY, little silt, trace to little sand, SS-7 2-4-6 10 3.0 21.3trace to no organics; moist, stiff to very SS-8 5-8-8 16 2.9 21.8stiff

SS-9 7-8-10-13 18 3.6 20.0


40


25

30

35

5

10

15

20

no recovery




0.5' CONCRETEFILL: Brown silt, little clay, trace gravel; SS-1 3-8-12 20 -- 15.6dry SS-2 11-14-12 26 -- 10.5

FILL: Black ash, little clay, little silt, trace SS-3 4-6-4-5 10 -- 37.6gravel; dampFILL: Brown sandy silt, little clay, trace SS-4 WOH-3-3 6 -- 37.7 Groundwaterwood, trace metal; wet SS-5 1-1-3 4 -- 24.9 measured at 5.5

feet upon boring FILL: Black ash, little clay, trace wood, SS-6 4-6-7-8 13 -- 61.9 completion trace plastic; moist Brown CLAY, little silt, trace to no sand; SS-7 2-4-6 10 -- 25.6moist, stiff to very stiff SS-8 9-9-10 19 2.9 20.3

SS-9 7-9-10 19 3.5 23.0End of Boring - 15.0'

40


25

30

35

5

10

15

20

APPENDIX F

LABORATORY TESTING DATA

APPENDIX G

BIBLIOGRAPHY

BIBLIOGRAPHY American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). Annual Book of Standards – Soil

and Rock, Volume 04.08, ASTM, West Conshohocken, PA, 2000.

Berg, T. M., and Dodge, C. M., eds. Atlas of Preliminary Geologic Quadrangle Maps of

Pennsylvania, Pennsylvania Geological Survey, 1981.

Bowles, Joseph E. Foundation Analysis and Design, Fourth Edition, McGraw-Hill Book

Company, New York, 1988.

Das, Braja M. Principles of Geotechnical Engineering, Third Edition, PWS Publishing

Company, Boston, 1994.

Das, Braja M. Principles of Foundation Engineering, Third Edition, PWS Publishing

Company, Boston, 1995.

Geyer, Alan R. and Wilshusen, J. Peter. Engineering Characteristics of the Rock of

Pennsylvania. Department of Environmental Resources, Office of Resources

Management, Bureau of Topographic and Geologic Survey. Pennsylvania Geologic

Survey. Fourth Series. Harrisburg, PA. 1982 (2nd Ed.).

Mid-Penn Engineering, Co. Meridian Dev. Partners, Warehouse Facility, March 20,

2009.

Pennsylvania Department of Transportation. Specifications, PennDOT Pub. 408,

Commonwealth of Pennsylvania, Harrisburg, 2000.

Pennsylvania Department of Transportation. Publication 242, Pavement Policy Manual.

Commonwealth of Pennsylvania, Harrisburg. March 20, 1996.


Project Name: Lewisburg Recreation Facility Date of Work: 2/5/2013Site: East Buffalo Township, Union County, Pennsylvania File No.: 1245300Driller/helper: M. Rager/T. Frymyer Drill Rig: B-45 Core Bit:Auger Type: 6" Solids Sampling Type: ASTM D-1586 Elevation: FFE


0.5' CONCRETE GroundwaterFILL: Brown silt, little gravel, little clay; SS-1 4-7-4 13 -- 7.5 encountered at 10.0damp SS-2 5-6-9 15 -- 11.2 feet and measured

at 6.5 feet uponSS-3 8-7-11-10 18 -- 14.4 boring completion

SS-4 11-13-12 25 -- 8.2FILL: Gray silt, little gravel, trace clay, SS-5 12-8-14 22 -- 12.3trace bricks; moist

SS-6 11-50/0.4 50/0.4 -- 16.1Gray CLAY, some silt, trace organics; SS-7 1-2-3 5 1.6 19.8moist, softBrown silty SAND, trace clay; moist, loose SS-8 4-4-5 9 -- 20.8Gray clayey SAND, trace organics; moist,looseEnd of Boring - 15.0'

40


25

30

35

5

10

15

20

18.3SS-9 3-3-5-7 8 0.8






SS-3 4-2-4-12 6 -- 8.1 completion

SS-4 3-4-6 10 -- 12.7FILL: Gray silt, little gravel; damp SS-5 8-8-6 14 -- 13.7FILL: Black sand, some gravel, little silt,with ash; moist SS-6 4-3-3 6 -- 45.5Black CLAY, little silt, trace organics; SS-7 WOH-WOH-1 1 -- 63.2moist, very soft to firm

SS-8 2-2-4 6 -- 33.4Gray SILT, little clay; moist, loose

SS-10 3-4-4 8 -- 34.8

Brown SILT, little clay; moist, loose to SS-11 5-6-6 12 -- 23.5slightly compact


40

26.0SS-12 4-5-5-6 10 --

SS-9 3-4-4-5 8 --


25

30

35

5

10

15

20

25.1




0.5' CONCRETEFILL: Brown silt, little gravel, little to trace SS-1 3-12-6 18 -- 5.4sand; damp SS-2 5-4-4 8 -- 15.7

SS-3 4-4-4-3 8 -- 6.1

SS-4 4-8-9 17 -- 20.8SS-5 9-8-10 18 -- 11.7

Gray SILT, little clay, trace gravel, trace SS-6 3-2-2-3 4 -- 54.1organics; moist, very looseGray CLAY, little silt; damp, SS-7 3-4-5 9 2.3 28.9Brown SILT, little sand, trace clay; damp, SS-8 7-8-10 18 4.5 20.6slightly compact

SS-9 6-7-8 15 4.3 18.2End of Boring - 15.0' No Groundwater

Table Encountered

40


25

30

35

5

10

15

20




0.5' CONCRETEFILL: Brown silt, little clay, trace gravel; SS-1 4-5-6 11 -- 15.3 Groundwaterdamp SS-2 8-6-7 13 -- 12.8 measured at 6.1

feet upon boring SS-3 8-10-7-8 17 -- 15.9 completion

SS-4 7-30-32 62 -- 11.5FILL: Black silt, little gravel, trace clay; SS-5 11-6-4 10 -- 16.7moistFILL: Black sand, little silt, trace gravel, SS-6 7-4-4-5 8 -- 46.3trace clay; wet

SS-7 WOH-2-3 5 -- 52.8SS-8 3-5-6 11 -- 48.5

Gray CLAY, little silt; moist, very stiff SS-9 8-13-14 27 1.4 56.1End of Boring - 15.0'

40


25

30

35

5

10

15

20




0.5' CONCRETEFILL: Brown silt, little gravel, little to trace SS-1 4-5-6 11 -- 17.8 Groundwaterclay; damp SS-2 16-7-7 14 -- 15.2 measured at 6.3

feet upon boring SS-3 16-13-8-9 21 -- 11.3 completion

SS-4 7-7-11 18 -- 14.5FILL: Black silt, little sand, trace gravel, SS-5 12-8-7 15 -- 19.1trace ash and concrete; moistGray/Brown CLAY, little silt; moist, soft SS-6 4-3-2-2 5 -- 23.7

Brown silty SAND, trace clay; moist, SS-7 1-3-6 9 0.6 18.6loose to slightly compact SS-8 7-7-7 14 3.8 17.6

Brown SILT, little sand, little clay; moist, SS-9 5-3-4-5 7 -- 24.8looseBrown sandy SILT, little clay; moist, SS-10 9-8-9 17 -- 16.9slightly compact SS-11 8-8-7 15 -- 20.4Brown silty SAND, trace clay; moist, slightly compact SS-12 7-8-9 17 -- 20.2End of Boring - 20.0'

40


25

30

35

5

10

15

20




0.5' CONCRETEFILL: Brown silt, little gravel; damp SS-1 3-5-6 11 -- 22.6

SS-2 8-9-13 22 -- 14.5

FILL: Black silt, little gravel, ash, brick; SS-3 11-7-6-6 13 -- 8.4dampBrown CLAY, some silt, trace sand; SS-4 3-3-6 9 4.0 17.4damp, firm to very stiff SS-5 12-13-16 29 2.7 17.0Brown SILT, little sand, trace clay;damp, slightly compact SS-6 9-9-11 20 2.2 18.2End of Boring - 10.0' No Groundwater

Table Encountered

40


25

30

35

5

10

15

20




0.5' CONCRETEFILL: Brown silt, little to some gravel; SS-1 4-6-10 16 -- 12.6damp SS-2 6-9-9 18 -- 14.7

SS-3 5-6-4-5 10 -- 6.6

SS-4 3-3-4 7 -- 19FILL: Gray silt, some gravel, little clay; SS-5 5-8-14 22 -- 14.5moist

SS-6 8-8-6-7 14 -- 11.3

Gray SILT, little sand; moist, loose SS-7 3-5-5 10 4.0 19.5Brown SILT, little sand; damp, slightly SS-8 7-9-11 20 3.4 22.3compact

SS-9 6-5-9 14 3.9 21.1End of Boring - 15.0' No Groundwater

Table Encountered

40


25

30

35

5

10

15

20






FILL: Brown silt, little clay, trace black SS-3 10-7-8-10 15 -- 17.5 completion shale; dampFILL: Gray silt, some gravel, little clay, SS-4 3-3-6 9 -- 17.8black ash; damp SS-5 8-6-4 10 -- 18.4

Gray SILT, little clay, trace organics; SS-6 1-2-2-4 4 1.7 46.8damp, very looseGray/Brown CLAY, some silt; damp, firm SS-7 3-4-4 8 -- 20.5to very stiff SS-8 7-8-8 16 -- 18.1Brown silty SAND, trace clay; moist, slightly compact SS-9 5-7-8 15 -- 27.8End of Boring - 15.0'

40


25

30

35

5

10

15

20